Physics of the Impossible: A Scientific Exploration Into the World of Phasers, Force Fields, Teleportation, and Time Travel
Author: Michio Kaku
Date: 2008-03-11T04:00:00+00:00
Keywords: Science; Physics; General
Description: A fascinating exploration of the science of the impossible—from death rays and force fields to invisibility cloaks—revealing to what extent such technologies might be achievable decades or millennia into the future.One hundred years ago, scientists would have said that lasers, televisions, and the atomic bomb were beyond the realm of physical possibility. In Physics of the Impossible, the renowned physicist Michio Kaku explores to what extent the technologies and devices of science fiction that are deemed equally impossible today might well become commonplace in the future. From teleportation
Publisher: Random House Digital, Inc.

This book has been optimized for viewing
at a monitor setting of 1024 x 768 pixels.

Other books by Michio Kaku

P A R A L L E L W O R L D S

E I N S T E I N ' S C O S M O S

V I S I O N S

H Y P E R S P A C E

B E Y O N D E I N S T E I N

A S C I E N T I F I C E X P L O R A T I O N

I N T O T H E W O R L D O F P H A S E R S , F O R C E F I E L D S ,

T E L E P O R T A T I O N , A N D T I M E T R A V E L

Doubleday

N E W Y O R K L O N D O N T O R O N T O S Y D N E Y A U C K L A N D

P U B L I S H E D B Y D O U B L E D A Y

Copyright © 2008 by Michio Raku

All Rights Reserved

Published in the United States by Doubleday, an imprint of

The Doubleday Broadway Publishing Group, a division
of Random House, Inc., New York.

\ Y \ Y w. d o u b 1 eday. co m

D O U B L E D A Y and the portrayal of an anchor with a dolphin
are registered trademarks of Random House, Inc.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Kaku, Michio.

Physics of the impossible : a scientific exploration into the world of phasers, force
fields, teleportation, and time travel / Michio Raku. -1st ed.

p. cm.

Includes bibliographical references and index.

1. Physics-Miscellanea. 2. Science-Miscellanea. 3. Mathematical physics-

Miscellanea. 4. Physics in literature. 5. Human-machine systems. I. Title.

QC75.R18 2008

530-dc25

2007030290
e l S B N : 978-0-385-52544-2
vl.O

To my loving wife, Shizue,
and to

Michelle and Alyson

Preface i\
ichnou lodgments \ i x

Port I: Class I Impossibilities

1: Force Fields 3

2: Invisibility 16

3: Phasers and Death Stars 34

4: Teleportation 53

5: Telepathy 70

6: Psychokinesis 88

7: Robots 103

8: Extraterrestrials and UFOs 126

9: Starships 154

10: Antimatter and Anti-universes 179

Part II: Class II Impossibilities

11: Faster Than Light 197

12: Time Travel 216

13: Parallel Universes 229

Port III: Class III Impossibilities

14: Perpetual Motion Machines 257

15: Precognition 272

Epilogue: The Future of the Impossible 284

Notes 305

Bibliography 317

Index 319

If at first an idea does not sound absurd,
then there is no hope for it.

- A L B E R T EINSTEIN

One day, would it be possible to walk through walls? To build starships
that can travel faster than the speed of light? To read other people's
minds? To become invisible? To move objects with the power of our
minds? To transport our bodies instantly through outer space?

Since I was a child, I've always been fascinated by these questions.

Like many physicists, when I was growing up, I was mesmerized by
the possibility of time travel, ray guns, force fields, parallel universes,
and the like. Magic, fantasy, science fiction were all a gigantic play-
ground for my imagination. They began my lifelong love affair with the
impossible.

I remember watching the old Flash Gordon reruns on TV. Every

Saturday, I was glued to the TV set, marveling at the adventures of

Flash, Dr. Zarkov, and Dale Arden and their dazzling array of futuris-
tic technology: the rocket ships, invisibility shields, ray guns, and cities
in the sky. I never missed a week. The program opened up an entirely
new world for me. I was thrilled by the thought of one day rocketing to
an alien planet and exploring its strange terrain. Being pulled into the
orbit of these fantastic inventions I knew that my own destiny was
x P R E F A C E
somehow wrapped up with the marvels of the science that the show
promised.

As it turns out, I was not alone. Many highly accomplished scien-
tists originally became interested in science through exposure to sci-
ence fiction. The great astronomer Edwin Hubble was fascinated by
the works of Jules Verne. As a result of reading Verne's work, Hubble
abandoned a promising career in law, and, disobeying his father's
wishes, set off on a career in science. He eventually became the great-
est astronomer of the twentieth century. Carl Sagan, noted astronomer
and bestselling author, found his imagination set afire by reading

Edgar Rice Burroughs's John Carter of Mars novels. Like John Carter,
he dreamed of one day exploring the sands of Mars.

I was just a child the day when Albert Einstein died, but I remem-
ber people talking about his life, and death, in hushed tones. The next
day I saw in the newspapers a picture of his desk, with the unfinished
manuscript of his greatest, unfinished work. I asked myself, What
could be so important that the greatest scientist of our time could not
finish it? The article claimed that Einstein had an impossible dream, a
problem so difficult that it was not possible for a mortal to finish it. It
took me years to find out what that manuscript was about: a grand,
unifying "theory of everything." His dream-which consumed the last
three decades of his life-helped me to focus my own imagination. I
wanted, in some small way, to be part of the effort to complete Ein-
stein's work, to unify the laws of physics into a single theory.

As I grew older I began to realize that although Flash Gordon was
the hero and always got the girl, it was the scientist who actually made
the TV series work. Without Dr. Zarkov, there would be no rocket ship,
no trips to Mongo, no saving Earth. Heroics aside, without science
there is no science fiction.

I came to realize that these tales were simply impossible in terms
of the science involved, just flights of the imagination. Growing up
meant putting away such fantasy. In real life, I was told, one had to
abandon the impossible and embrace the practical.

However, I concluded that if I was to continue my fascination with
the impossible, the key was through the realm of physics. Without a

P R E F A C E x .

solid background in advanced physics, I would be forever speculating
about futuristic technologies without understanding whether or not
they were possible. I realized I needed to immerse myself in advanced
mathematics and learn theoretical physics. So that is what I did.

In high school for my science fair project I assembled an atom
smasher in my mom's garage. I went to the Westinghouse company
and gathered 400 pounds of scrap transformer steel. Over Christmas I
wound 22 miles of copper wire on the high school football field. Even-
tually I built a 2.3-million-electron-volt betatron particle accelerator,
which consumed 6 kilowatts of power (the entire output of my house)

and generated a magnetic field of 20,000 times the Earth's magnetic
field. The goal was to generate a beam of gamma rays powerful
enough to create antimatter.

My science fair project took me to the National Science Fair and
eventually fulfilled my dream, winning a scholarship to Harvard, where

I could finally pursue my goal of becoming a theoretical physicist and
follow in the footsteps of my role model, Albert Einstein.

Today I receive e-mails from science fiction writers and screen-
writers asking me to help them sharpen their own tales by exploring
the limits of the laws of physics.

T H E " I M P O S S I B L E " I S R E L A T I V E

As a physicist, I have learned that the "impossible" is often a relative
term. Growing up, I remember my teacher one day walking up to the
map of the Earth on the wall and pointing out the coastlines of South

America and Africa. Wasn't it an odd coincidence, she said, that the
two coastlines fit together, almost like a jigsaw puzzle? Some scientists,
she said, speculated that perhaps they were once part of the same, vast
continent. But that was silly. No force could possibly push two gigantic
continents apart. Such thinking was impossible, she concluded.

Later that year we studied the dinosaurs. Wasn't it strange, our
teacher told us, that the dinosaurs dominated the Earth for millions of
years, and then one day they all vanished? No one knew why they had
x.. P R E F A C E
all died off. Some paleontologists thought that maybe a meteor from
space had killed them, but that was impossible, more in the realm of
science fiction.

Today we now know that through plate tectonics the continents do
move, and that 65 million years ago a gigantic meteor measuring six
miles across most likely did obliterate the dinosaurs and much of life
on Earth. In my own short lifetime I have seen the seemingly impossi-
ble become established scientific fact over and over again. So is it im-
possible to think we might one day be able to teleport ourselves from
one place to another, or build a spaceship that will one day take us
light-years away to the stars?

Normally such feats would be considered impossible by today's
physicists. Might they become possible within a few centuries? Or in
ten thousand years, when our technology is more advanced? Or in a
million years? To put it another way, if we were to somehow encounter
a civilization a million years more advanced than ours, would their
everyday technology appear to be "magic" to us? That, at its heart, is
one of the central questions running through this book; just because
something is "impossible" today, will it remain impossible centuries or
millions of years into the future?

Given the remarkable advances in science in the past century, es-
pecially the creation of the quantum theory and general relativity, it is
now possible to give rough estimates of when, if ever, some of these
fantastic technologies may be realized. With the coming of even more
advanced theories, such as string theory, even concepts bordering on
science fiction, such as time travel and parallel universes, are now be-
ing re-evaluated by physicists. Think back 150 years to those techno-
logical advances that were declared "impossible" by scientists at the
time and that have now become part of our everyday lives. Jules Verne
wrote a novel in 1863, Paris in the Twentieth Century, which was
locked away and forgotten for over a century until it was accidentally
discovered by his great-grandson and published for the first time in

1994. In it Verne predicted what Paris might look like in the year 1960.

His novel was filled with technology that was clearly considered im-
possible in the nineteenth century, including fax machines, a world-

P R E F A C E x i i i
wide communications network, glass skyscrapers, gas-powered auto-
mobiles, and high-speed elevated trains.

Not surprisingly, Verne could make such stunningly accurate pre-
dictions because he was immersed in the world of science, picking the
brains of scientists around him. A deep appreciation for the fundamen-
tals of science allowed him to make such startling predictions.

Sadly, some of the greatest scientists of the nineteenth century took
the opposite position and declared any number of technologies to be
hopelessly impossible. Lord Kelvin, perhaps the most prominent
physicist of the Victorian era (he is buried next to Isaac Newton in

Westminster Abbey), declared that "heavier than air" devices such as
the airplane were impossible. He thought X-rays were a hoax and that
radio had no future. Lord Rutherford, who discovered the nucleus of
the atom, dismissed the possibility of building an atomic bomb, com-
paring it to "moonshine." Chemists of the nineteenth century declared
the search for the philosopher's stone, a fabled substance that can turn
lead into gold, a scientific dead end. Nineteenth-century chemistry was
based on the fundamental immutability of the elements, like lead. Yet
with today's atom smashers, we can, in principle, turn lead atoms into
gold. Think how fantastic today's televisions, computers, and Internet
would have seemed at the turn of the twentieth century.

More recently, black holes were once considered to be science fic-
tion. Einstein himself wrote a paper in 1939 that "proved" that black
holes could never form. Yet today the Hubble Space Telescope and the

Chandra X-ray telescope have revealed thousands of black holes in
space.

The reason that these technologies were deemed "impossibilities" is
that the basic laws of physics and science were not known in the nine-
teenth century and the early part of the twentieth. Given the huge gaps in
the understanding of science at the time, especially at the atomic level,
it's no wonder such advances were considered impossible.

x i v P R E F A C E

S T U D Y I N G T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Ironically, the serious study of the impossible has frequently opened
up rich and entirely unexpected domains of science. For example, over
the centuries the frustrating and futile search for a "perpetual motion
machine" led physicists to conclude that such a machine was impossi-
ble, forcing them to postulate the conservation of energy and the three
laws of thermodynamics. Thus the futile search to build perpetual mo-
tion machines helped to open up the entirely new field of thermody-
namics, which in part laid the foundation of the steam engine, the
machine age, and modern industrial society.

At the end of the nineteenth century, scientists decided that it was

"impossible" for the Earth to be billions of years old. Lord Kelvin de-
clared flatly that a molten Earth would cool down in 20 to 40 million
years, contradicting the geologists and Darwinian biologists who
claimed that the Earth might be billions of years old. The impossible
was finally proven to be possible with the discovery of the nuclear
force by Madame Curie and others, showing how the center of the

Earth, heated by radioactive decay, could indeed be kept molten for
billions of years.

We ignore the impossible at our peril. In the 1920s and 1930s

Robert Goddard, the founder of modern rocketry, was the subject of in-
tense criticism by those who thought that rockets could never travel in
outer space. They sarcastically called his pursuit Goddard's Folly. In

1921 the editors of the New York Times railed against Dr. Goddard's
work: "Professor Goddard does not know the relation between action
and reaction and the need to have something better than a vacuum
against which to react. He seems to lack the basic knowledge ladled
out daily in high schools." Rockets were impossible, the editors huffed,
because there was no air to push against in outer space. Sadly, one
head of state did understand the implications of Goddard's "impossi-
ble" rockets-Adolf Hitler. During World War II, Germany's barrage of
impossibly advanced V-2 rockets rained death and destruction on Lon-
don, almost bringing it to its knees.

Studying the impossible may have also changed the course of world

P R E F A C E x v
history. In the 1930s it was widely believed, even by Einstein, that an
atomic bomb was "impossible." Physicists knew that there was a
tremendous amount of energy locked deep inside the atom's nucleus,
according to Einstein's equation E = mc , but the energy released by a

2
single nucleus was too insignificant to consider. But atomic physicist

Leo Szilard remembered reading the 1914 H. G. Wells novel, The World

Set Free, in which Wells predicted the development of the atomic bomb.

In the book he stated that the secret of the atomic bomb would be solved
by a physicist in 1933. By chance Szilard stumbled upon this book in

1932. Spurred on by the novel, in 1933, precisely as predicted by Wells
some two decades earlier, he hit upon the idea of magnifying the power
of a single atom via a chain reaction, so that the energy of splitting a
single uranium nucleus could be magnified by many trillions. Szilard
then set into motion a series of key experiments and secret negotiations
between Einstein and President Franklin Roosevelt that would lead to
the Manhattan Project, which built the atomic bomb.

Time and again we see that the study of the impossible has opened
up entirely new vistas, pushing the boundaries of physics and chem-
istry and forcing scientists to redefine what they mean by "impossible."

As Sir William Osier once said, "The philosophies of one age have be-
come the absurdities of the next, and the foolishness of yesterday has
become the wisdom of tomorrow."

Many physicists subscribe to the famous dictum of T. H. White,
who wrote in The Once and Future King, "Anything that is not forbid-
den, is mandatory!" In physics we find evidence of this all the time. Un-
less there is a law of physics explicitly preventing a new phenomenon,
we eventually find that it exists. (This has happened several times in
the search for new subatomic particles. By probing the limits of what
is forbidden, physicists have often unexpectedly discovered new laws
of physics.) A corollary to T. H. White's statement might well be, "Any-
thing that is not impossible, is mandatory!"

For example, cosmologist Stephen Hawking tried to prove that
time travel was impossible by finding a new law of physics that would
forbid it, which he called the "chronology protection conjecture." Un-
fortunately, after many years of hard work he was unable to prove this
xv. P R E F A C E
principle. In fact, to the contrary, physicists have now demonstrated
that a law that prevents time travel is beyond our present-day mathe-
matics. Today, because there is no law of physics preventing the exis-
tence of time machines, physicists have had to take their possibility
very seriously.

The purpose of this book is to consider what technologies are con-
sidered "impossible" today that might well become commonplace
decades to centuries down the road.

Already one "impossible" technology is now proving to be possi-
ble: the notion of teleportation (at least at the level of atoms). Even a
few years ago physicists would have said that sending or beaming an
object from one point to another violated the laws of quantum physics.

The writers of the original Star Trek television series, in fact, were so
stung by the criticism from physicists that they added "Heisenberg
compensators" to explain their teleporters in order to address this flaw.

Today, because of a recent breakthrough, physicists can teleport atoms
across a room or photons under the Danube River.

P R E D I C T I N G T H E F U T U R E

It is always a bit dangerous to make predictions, especially ones set
centuries to thousands of years in the future. The physicist Niels Bohr
was fond of saying, "Prediction is very hard to do. Especially about the
future." But there is a fundamental difference between the time of Jules

Verne and the present Today the fundamental laws of physics are ba-
sically understood. Physicists today understand the basic laws extend-
ing over a staggering forty-three orders of magnitude, from the interior
of the proton out to the expanding universe. As a result, physicists can
state, with reasonable confidence, what the broad outlines of future
technology might look like, and better differentiate between those
technologies that are merely improbable and those that are truly im-
possible.

In this book, therefore, I divide the things that are "impossible"

into three categories.

P R E F A C E x v . .

The first are what I call Class I impossibilities. These are technolo-
gies that are impossible today but that do not violate the known laws
of physics. So they might be possible in this century, or perhaps the
next, in modified form. They include teleportation, antimatter engines,
certain forms of telepathy, psychokinesis, and invisibility.

The second category is what I term Class II impossibilities. These
are technologies that sit at the very edge of our understanding of the
physical world. If they are possible at all, they might be realized on a
scale of millennia to millions of years in the future. They include time
machines, the possibility of hyperspace travel, and travel through
wormholes.

The final category is what I call Class III impossibilities. These are
technologies that violate the known laws of physics. Surprisingly, there
are very few such impossible technologies. If they do turn out to be
possible, they would represent a fundamental shift in our understand-
ing of physics.

This classification is significant, I feel, because so many technolo-
gies in science fiction are dismissed by scientists as being totally impos-
sible, when what they actually mean is that they are impossible for a
primitive civilization like ours. Alien visitations, for example, are usu-
ally considered impossible because the distances between the stars are
so vast. While interstellar travel for our civilization is clearly impossi-
ble, it may be possible for a civilization centuries to thousands or
millions of years ahead of ours. So it is important to rank such "impos-
sibilities." Technologies that are impossible for our current civilization
are not necessarily impossible for other types of civilizations. State-
ments about what is possible and impossible have to take into account
technologies that are millennia to millions of years ahead of ours.

Carl Sagan once wrote, "What does it mean for a civilization to be
a million years old? We have had radio telescopes and spaceships for a
few decades; our technical civilization is a few hundred years o l d . . .

an advanced civilization millions of years old is as much beyond us as
we are beyond a bush baby or a macaque."

In my own research I focus professionally on trying to complete

Einstein's dream of a "theory of everything." Personally, I find it quite
x v . . 1 P R E F A C E
exhilarating to work on a "final theory" that may ultimately answer
some of the most difficult "impossible" questions in science today, such
as whether time travel is possible, what lies at the center of a black
hole, or what happened before the big bang. I still daydream about my
lifelong love affair with the impossible, and wonder when and if some
of these impossibilities might enter the ranks of the everyday.

The material in this book ranges over many fields and disciplines, as
well as the work of many outstanding scientists. I would like to thank
the following individuals, who have graciously given their time for
lengthy interviews, consultations, and interesting, stimulating conver-
sations:

Leon Lederman, Nobel laureate, Illinois Institute of Technology

Murray Gell-Mann, Nobel laureate, Santa Fe Institute and Cal Tech

The late Henry Kendall, Nobel laureate, MIT

Steven Weinberg, Nobel laureate, University of Texas at Austin

David Gross, Nobel laureate, Kavli Institute for Theoretical Physics

Frank Wilczek, Nobel laureate, MIT

Joseph Rotblat, Nobel laureate, St. Bartholomew's Hospital

Walter Gilbert, Nobel laureate, Harvard University

Gerald Edelman, Nobel laureate, Scripps Research Institute

Peter Doherty, Nobel laureate, St Jude Children's Research Hospital

Jared Diamond, Pulitzer Prize winner, UCLA

Stan Lee, creator of Marvel Comics and Spiderman

Brian Greene, Columbia University, author of The Elegant Universe

Lisa Randall, Harvard University, author of Warped Passages

Lawrence Krauss, Case Western University, author of The Physics of

Star Trek

J. Richard Gott III, Princeton University, author of Time Travel in

Einstein's Universe

Alan Guth, physicist, MIT, author of The Inflationary Universe
x x A C K N O W L E D G M E N T S

John Barrow, physicist, Cambridge University, author of Impossibility

Paul Davies, physicist, author of Superforce

Leonard Susskind, physicist, Stanford University

Joseph Lykken, physicist, Fermi National Laboratory

Marvin Minsky, MIT, author of The Society of Minds

Ray Rurzweil, inventor, author of The Age of Spiritual Machines

Rodney Brooks, director of MIT Artificial Intelligence Laboratory

Hans Moravec, author of Robot

Ren Croswell, astronomer, author of Magnificent Universe

Don Goldsmith, astronomer, author of Runaway Universe

Neil de Grasse Tyson, director of Hayden Planetarium, New York City

Robert Kirshner, astronomer, Harvard University

Fulvia Melia, astronomer, University of Arizona

Sir Martin Rees, Cambridge University, author of Before the

Beginning

Michael Brown, astronomer, Cal Tech

Paul Gilster, author of Centauri Dreams

Michael Lemonick, senior science editor of Time magazine

Timothy Ferris, University of California, author of Coming of Age in
the Milky Way

The late Ted Taylor, designer of U.S. nuclear warheads

Freeman Dyson, Institute for Advanced Study, Princeton

John Horgan, Stevens Institute of Technology, author of The End of

Science

The late Carl Sagan, Cornell University, author of Cosmos

Ann Druyan, widow of Carl Sagan, Cosmos Studios

Peter Schwarz, futurist, founder of Global Business Network

Alvin Toffler, futurist, author of The Third Wave

David Goodstein, assistant provost of Cal Tech

Seth Lloyd, MIT, author of Programming the Universe

Fred Watson, astronomer, author of Star Gazer

Simon Singh, author of The Big Bang

Seth Shostak, SETI Institute

George Johnson, New York Times science journalist

Jeffrey Hoffman, MIT, NASA astronaut

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS x x ,

Tom Jones, NASA astronaut

Alan Lightman, MIT, author of Einstein's Dreams

Robert Zubrin, founder of Mars Society

Donna Shirley, NASA Mars program

John Pike, GlobalSecurity.org

Paul Saffo, futurist, Institute of the Future

Louis Friedman, cofounder of the Planetary Society

Daniel Werthheimer, SETI@home, University of California at

Berkeley

Robert Zimmerman, author of Leaving Earth

Marcia Bartusiak, author of Einstein's Unfinished Symphony

Michael H. Salamon, NASA's Beyond Einstein program

Geoff Andersen, U.S. Air Force Academy, author of The Telescope

I would also like to thank my agent, Stuart Rrichevsky, who has been
at my side all these years, shepherding all my books, and also my edi-
tor, Roger Scholl, whose firm hand, sound judgment, and editorial ex-
perience have guided so many of my books. I would also like to thank
my collegues at the City College of New York and the Graduate Center
of the City University of New York, especially V. P. Nair and Dan Green-
berger, who generously donated their time for discussions.

I. When a distinguished but elderly scientist states that some-
thing is possible, he is almost certainly right When he states that
something is impossible, he is very probably wrong.

II. The only way of discovering the limits of the possible is to
venture a little way past them into the impossible.

III. Any sufficiently advanced technology is indistinguishable
from magic.

-ARTHUR C. CLARKE'S THREE LAWS

"Shields up!"

In countless Star Trek episodes this is the first order that Captain

Kirk barks out to the crew, raising the force fields to protect the star-
ship Enterprise against enemy fire.

So vital are force fields in Star Trek that the tide of the battle can
be measured by how the force field is holding up. Whenever power is
drained from the force fields, the Enterprise suffers more and more
damaging blows to its hull, until finally surrender is inevitable.

So what is a force field? In science fiction it's deceptively simple: a
thin, invisible yet impenetrable barrier able to deflect lasers and rock-
ets alike. At first glance a force field looks so easy that its creation as a
battlefield shield seems imminent. One expects that any day some en-
terprising inventor will announce the discovery of a defensive force
field. But the truth is far more complicated.

4 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

In the same way that Edison's lightbulb revolutionized modern
civilization, a force field could profoundly affect every aspect of our
lives. The military could use force fields to become invulnerable, cre-
ating an impenetrable shield against enemy missiles and bullets.

Bridges, superhighways, and roads could in theory be built by simply
pressing a button. Entire cities could sprout instantly in the desert,
with skyscrapers made entirely of force fields. Force fields erected over
cities could enable their inhabitants to modify the effects of their
weather-high winds, blizzards, tornados-at will. Cities could be built
under the oceans within the safe canopy of a force field. Glass, steel,
and mortar could be entirely replaced.

Yet oddly enough a force field is perhaps one of the most difficult
devices to create in the laboratory. In fact, some physicists believe it
might actually be impossible, without modifying its properties.

M I C H A E L F A R A D A Y

The concept of force fields originates from the work of the great nine-
teenth-century British scientist Michael Faraday.

Faraday was born to working-class parents (his father was a black-
smith) and eked out a meager existence as an apprentice bookbinder
in the early 1800s. The young Faraday was fascinated by the enormous
breakthroughs in uncovering the mysterious properties of two new
forces: electricity and magnetism. Faraday devoured all he could con-
cerning these topics and attended lectures by Professor Humphrey

Davy of the Royal Institution in London.

One day Professor Davy severely damaged his eyes in a chemical
accident and hired Faraday to be his secretary. Faraday slowly began
to win the confidence of the scientists at the Royal Institution and was
allowed to conduct important experiments of his own, although he was
often slighted. Over the years Professor Davy grew increasingly jealous
of the brilliance shown by his young assistant, who was a rising star in
experimental circles, eventually eclipsing Davy's own fame. After Davy

F O R C E F I E L D S 5
died in 1829 Faraday was free to make a series of stunning break-
throughs that led to the creation of generators that would energize en-
tire cities and change the course of world civilization.

The key to Faraday's greatest discoveries was his "force fields." If
one places iron filings over a magnet, one finds that the iron filings
create a spiderweb-like pattern that fills up all of space. These are

Faraday's lines of force, which graphically describe how the force
fields of electricity and magnetism permeate space. If one graphs the
magnetic fields of the Earth, for example, one finds that the lines em-
anate from the north polar region and then fall back to the Earth in the
south polar region. Similarly, if one were to graph the electric field
lines of a lightning rod in a thunderstorm, one would find that the lines
of force concentrate at the tip of the lightning rod. Empty space, to

Faraday, was not empty at all, but was filled with lines of force that
could make distant objects move. (Because of Faraday's poverty-
stricken youth, he was illiterate in mathematics, and as a consequence
his notebooks are full not of equations but of hand-drawn diagrams of
these lines of force. Ironically, his lack of mathematical training led
him to create the beautiful diagrams of lines of force that now can be
found in any physics textbook. In science a physical picture is often
more important than the mathematics used to describe it.)

Historians have speculated on how Faraday was led to his discov-
ery of force fields, one of the most important concepts in all of science.

In fact, the sum total of all modern physics is written in the language of

Faraday's fields. In 1831, he made the key breakthrough regarding
force fields that changed civilization forever. One day, he was moving
a child's magnet over a coil of wire and he noticed that he was able to
generate an electric current in the wire, without ever touching it. This
meant that a magnet's invisible field could push electrons in a wire
across empty space, creating a current.

Faraday's "force fields," which were previously thought to be use-
less, idle doodlings, were real, material forces that could move objects
and generate power. Today the light that you are using to read this page
is probably energized by Faraday's discovery about electromagnetism.

6 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

A spinning magnet creates a force field that pushes the electrons in a
wire, causing them to move in an electrical current This electricity in
the wire can then be used to light up a lightbulb. This same principle
is used to generate electricity to power the cities of the world. Water
flowing across a dam, for example, causes a huge magnet in a turbine
to spin, which then pushes the electrons in a wire, forming an electric
current that is sent across high-voltage wires into our homes.

In other words, the force fields of Michael Faraday are the forces
that drive modern civilization, from electric bulldozers to today's com-
puters, Internet, and iPods.

Faraday's force fields have been an inspiration for physicists for a
century and a half. Einstein was so inspired by them that he wrote his
theory of gravity in terms of force fields. I, too, was inspired by Fara-
day's work. Years ago I successfully wrote the theory of strings in terms
of the force fields of Faraday, thereby founding string field theory. In
physics when someone says, "He thinks like a line of force," it is meant
as a great compliment.

T H E F O U R F O R C E S

Over the last two thousand years one of the crowning achievements of
physics has been the isolation and identification of the four forces that
rule the universe. All of them can be described in the language of fields
introduced by Faraday. Unfortunately, however, none of them has
quite the properties of the force fields described in most science fiction.

These forces are

1. Gravity, the silent force that keeps our feet on the
ground, prevents the Earth and the stars from disintegrat-
ing, and holds the solar system and galaxy together. Without
gravity, we would be flung off the Earth into space at the rate
of 1,000 miles per hour by the spinning planet. The problem
is that gravity has precisely the opposite properties of a force
field found in science fiction. Gravity is attractive, not repul-

F O R C E F I E L D S i
sive; is extremely weak, relatively speaking; and works over
enormous, astronomical distances. In other words, it is al-
most the opposite of the flat, thin, impenetrable barrier that
one reads about in science fiction or one sees in science fic-
tion movies. For example, it takes the entire planet Earth to
attract a feather to the floor, but we can counteract Earth's
gravity by lifting the feather with a finger. The action of our
finger can counteract the gravity of an entire planet that
weighs over six trillion trillion kilograms.

2. Electromagnetism (EM), the force that lights up our
cities. Lasers, radio, TV, modern electronics, computers, the

Internet, electricity, magnetism-all are consequences of the
electromagnetic force. It is perhaps the most useful force
ever harnessed by humans. Unlike gravity, it can be both at-
tractive and repulsive. However, there are several reasons
that it is unsuitable as a force field. First, it can be easily
neutralized. Plastics and other insulators, for example, can
easily penetrate a powerful electric or magnetic field. A
piece of plastic thrown in a magnetic field would pass right
through. Second, electromagnetism acts over large dis-
tances and cannot easily be focused onto a plane. The laws
of the EM force are described by James Clerk Maxwell's
equations, and these equations do not seem to admit force
fields as solutions.

3 & 4. The weak and strong nuclear forces. The weak
force is the force of radioactive decay. It is the force that
heats up the center of the Earth, which is radioactive. It is
the force behind volcanoes, earthquakes, and continental
drift. The strong force holds the nucleus of the atom to-
gether. The energy of the sun and the stars originates from
the nuclear force, which is responsible for lighting up the
universe. The problem is that the nuclear force is a short-
range force, acting mainly over the distance of a nucleus.

Because it is so bound to the properties of nuclei, it is ex-
tremely hard to manipulate. At present the only ways we

8 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
have of manipulating this force are to blow subatomic par-
ticles apart in atom smashers or to detonate atomic bombs.

Although the force fields used in science fiction may not conform
to the known laws of physics, there are still loopholes that might make
the creation of such a force field possible. First, there may be a fifth
force, still unseen in the laboratory. Such a force might, for example,
work over a distance of only a few inches to feet, rather than over as-
tronomical distances. (Initial attempts to measure the presence of such
a fifth force, however, have yielded negative results.)

Second, it may be possible to use a plasma to mimic some of the
properties of a force field. A plasma is the "fourth state of matter."

Solids, liquids, and gases make up the three familiar states of matter,
but the most common form of matter in the universe is plasma, a gas
of ionized atoms. Because the atoms of a plasma are ripped apart, with
electrons torn off the atom, the atoms are electrically charged and can
be easily manipulated by electric and magnetic fields.

Plasmas are the most plentiful form of visible matter in the uni-
verse, making up the sun, the stars, and interstellar gas. Plasmas are
not familiar to us because they are only rarely found on the Earth, but
we can see them in the form of lightning bolts, the sun, and the inte-
rior of your plasma TV.

P L A S M A W I N D O W S

As noted above, if a gas is heated to a high enough temperature,
thereby creating a plasma, it can be molded and shaped by magnetic
and electrical fields. It can, for example, be shaped in the form of a
sheet or window. Moreover, this "plasma window" can be used to sep-
arate a vacuum from ordinary air. In principle, one might be able to
prevent the air within a spaceship from leaking out into space, thereby
creating a convenient, transparent interface between outer space and
the spaceship.

In the Star Trek TV series, such a force field is used to separate the

F O R C E F I E L D S 9
shuttle bay, containing small shuttle craft, from the vacuum of outer
space. Not only is it a clever way to save money on props, but it is a de-
vice that is possible.

The plasma window was invented by physicist Ady Herschcovitch
in 1995 at the Brookhaven National Laboratory in Long Island, New

York. He developed it to solve the problem of how to weld metals using
electron beams. A welder's acetylene torch uses a blast of hot gas to
melt and then weld metal pieces together. But a beam of electrons can
weld metals faster, cleaner, and more cheaply than ordinary methods.

The problem with electron beam welding, however, is that it needs to
be done in a vacuum. This requirement is quite inconvenient, because
it means creating a vacuum box that may be as big as an entire room.

Dr. Herschcovitch invented the plasma window to solve this prob-
lem. Only 3 feet high and less than 1 foot in diameter, the plasma win-
dow heats gas to 12,000°F, creating a plasma that is trapped by electric
and magnetic fields. These particles exert pressure, as in any gas,
which prevents air from rushing into the vacuum chamber, thus sep-
arating air from the vacuum. (When one uses argon gas in the plasma
window, it glows blue, like the force field in Star Trek.)

The plasma window has wide applications for space travel and in-
dustry. Many times, manufacturing processes need a vacuum to per-
form microfabrication and dry etching for industrial purposes, but
working in a vacuum can be expensive. But with the plasma window
one can cheaply contain a vacuum with the flick of a button.

But can the plasma window also be used as an impenetrable
shield? Can it withstand a blast from a cannon? In the future, one can
imagine a plasma window of much greater power and temperature,
sufficient to damage or vaporize incoming projectiles. But to create a
more realistic force field, like that found in science fiction, one would
need a combination of several technologies stacked in layers. Each
layer might not be strong enough alone to stop a cannon ball, but the
combination might suffice.

The outer layer could be a supercharged plasma window, heated
to temperatures high enough to vaporize metals. A second layer could
be a curtain of high-energy laser beams. This curtain, containing thou-
io P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
sands of crisscrossing laser beams, would create a lattice that would
heat up objects that passed through it, effectively vaporizing them. I
will discuss lasers further in the next chapter.

And behind this laser curtain one might envision a lattice made of

"carbon nanotubes," tiny tubes made of individual carbon atoms that
are one atom thick and that are many times stronger than steel. Al-
though the current world record for a carbon nanotube is only about

15 millimeters long, one can envision a day when we might be able to
create carbon nanotubes of arbitrary length. Assuming that carbon
nanotubes can be woven into a lattice, they could create a screen of
enormous strength, capable of repelling most objects. The screen
would be invisible, since each carbon nanotube is atomic in size, but
the carbon nanotube lattice would be stronger than any ordinary ma-
terial.

So, via a combination of plasma window, laser curtain, and carbon
nanotube screen, one might imagine creating an invisible wall that
would be nearly impenetrable by most means.

Yet even this multilayered shield would not completely fulfill all
the properties of a science fiction force field-because it would be
transparent and therefore incapable of stopping a laser beam. In a bat-
tle with laser cannons, the multilayered shield would be useless.

To stop a laser beam, the shield would also need to possess an ad-
vanced form of "photochromatics." This is the process used in sunglasses
that darken by themselves upon exposure to UV radiation. Photochro-
matics are based on molecules that can exist in at least two states. In one
state the molecule is transparent But when it is exposed to UV radiation
it instantly changes to the second form, which is opaque.

One day we might be able to use nanotechnology to produce a sub-
stance as tough as carbon nanotubes that can change its optical prop-
erties when exposed to laser light. In this way, a shield might be able
to stop a laser blast as well as a particle beam or cannon fire. At pres-
ent, however, photochromatics that can stop laser beams do not exist.

F O R C E F I E L D S u

M A G N E T I C L E V I T A T I O N

In science fiction, force fields have another purpose besides deflecting
ray-gun blasts, and that is to serve as a platform to defy gravity. In the
movie Back to the Future, Michael J. Fox rides a "hover board," which
resembles a skateboard except that it floats over the street Such an
antigravity device is impossible given the laws of physics as we know
them today (as we will see in Chapter 10). But magnetically enhanced
hover boards and hover cars could become a reality in the future, giv-
ing us the ability to levitate large objects at will. In the future, if "room-
temperature superconductors" become a reality, one might be able to
levitate objects using the power of magnetic force fields.

If we place two bar magnets next to each other with north poles
opposite each other, the two magnets repel each other. (If we rotate the
magnet, so that the north pole is close to the other south pole, then the
two magnets attract each other.) This same principle, that north poles
repel each other, can be used to lift enormous weights off the ground.

Already several nations are building advanced magnetic levitation
trains (maglev trains) that hover just above the railroad tracks using
ordinary magnets. Because they have zero friction, they can attain
record-breaking speeds, floating over a cushion of air.

In 1984 the world's first commercial automated maglev system be-
gan operation in the United Kingdom, running from Birmingham In-
ternational Airport to the nearby Birmingham International railway
station. Maglev trains have also been built in Germany, Japan, and Ko-
rea, although most of them have not been designed for high velocities.

The first commercial maglev train operating at high velocities is the
initial operating segment (IOS) demonstration line in Shanghai, which
travels at a top speed of 268 miles per hour. The Japanese maglev train
in Yamanashi prefecture attained a velocity of 361 miles per hour, even
faster than the usual wheeled trains.

But these maglev devices are extremely expensive. One way to in-
crease efficiency would be to use superconductors, which lose all elec-
trical resistance when they are cooled down to near absolute zero.

Superconductivity was discovered in 1911 by Heike Onnes. If certain

12 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
substances are cooled to below 20 R above absolute zero, all electrical
resistance is lost Usually when we cool down the temperature of a
metal, its resistance decreases gradually. (This is because random vi-
brations of the atom impede the flow of electrons in a wire. By reduc-
ing the temperature, these random motions are reduced, and hence
electricity flows with less resistance.) But much to Onnes's surprise, he
found that the resistance of certain materials fell abruptly to zero at a
critical temperature.

Physicists immediately recognized the importance of this result

Power lines lose a significant amount of energy by transporting elec-
tricity across long distances. But if all resistance could be eliminated,
electrical power could be transmitted almost for free. In fact, if elec-
tricity were made to circulate in a coil of wire, the electricity would
circulate for millions of years, without any reduction in energy. Fur-
thermore, magnets of incredible power could be made with little effort
from these enormous electric currents. With these magnets, one could
lift huge loads with ease.

Despite all these miraculous powers, the problem with supercon-
ductivity is that it is very expensive to immerse large magnets in vats
of supercooled liquid. Huge refrigeration plants are required to keep
liquids supercooled, making superconducting magnets prohibitively
expensive.

But one day physicists may be able to create a "room-temperature
superconductor," the holy grail of solid-state physicists. The invention
of room-temperature superconductors in the laboratory would spark a
second industrial revolution. Powerful magnetic fields capable of lift-
ing cars and trains would become so cheap that hover cars might be-
come economically feasible. With room-temperature superconductors,
the fantastic flying cars seen in Back to the Future, Minority Report,
and Star Wars might become a reality.

In principle, one might be able to wear a belt made of supercon-
ducting magnets that would enable one to effortlessly levitate off the
ground. With such a belt, one could fly in the air like Superman.

Room-temperature superconductors are so remarkable that they ap-

F O R C E F I E L D S 13
pear in numerous science fiction novels (such as the Ringworld series
written by Larry Niven in 1970).

For decades physicists have searched for room-temperature super-
conductors without successs. It has been a tedious, hit-or-miss pro-
cess, testing one material after another. But in 1986 a new class of
substances called "high-temperature superconductors" was found that
became superconductors at about 90 degrees above absolute zero, or

90 R, creating a sensation in the world of physics. The floodgates
seemed to open. Month after month, physicists raced one another to
break the next world's record for a superconductor. For a brief moment
it seemed as if the possibility of room-temperature superconductors
would leap off the pages of science fiction novels and into our living
rooms. But after a few years of moving at breakneck speed, research in
high-temperature superconductors began to slow down.

At present the world's record for a high-temperature superconduc-
tor is held by a substance called mercury thallium barium calcium
copper oxide, which becomes superconducting at 138 R (-135°C). This
relatively high temperature is still a long way from room temperature.

But this 138 R record is still important. Nitrogen liquefies at 77 R, and
liquid nitrogen costs about as much as ordinary milk. Hence ordinary
liquid nitrogen could be used to cool down these high-temperature su-
perconductors rather cheaply. (Of course, room-temperature super-
conductors would need no cooling whatsoever.)

Embarrassingly enough, at present there is no theory explaining
the properties of these high-temperature superconductors. In fact, a

Nobel Prize is awaiting the enterprising physicist who can explain how
high-temperature superconductors work. (These high-temperature
superconductors are made of atoms arranged in distinctive layers.

Many physicists theorize that this layering of the ceramic material
makes it possible for electrons to flow freely within each layer, creat-
ing a superconductor. But precisely how this is done is still a mystery.)

Because of this lack of knowledge, physicists unfortunately resort
to a hit-or-miss procedure to search for new high-temperature super-
conductors. This means that the fabled room-temperature supercon-

14 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
ductor may be discovered tomorrow, next year, or not at all. No one
knows when, or if, such a substance will ever be found.

But if room-temperature superconductors are discovered, a tidal
wave of commercial applications could be set off. Magnetic fields that
are a million times more powerful than the Earth's magnetic field

(which is .5 gauss) might become commonplace.

One common property of superconductivity is called the Meissner
effect. If you place a magnet above a superconductor, the magnet will
levitate, as if held upward by some invisible force. (The reason for the

Meissner effect is that the magnet has the effect of creating a "mirror-
image" magnet within the superconductor, so that the original magnet
and the mirror-image magnet repel each other. Another way to see this
is that magnetic fields cannot penetrate into a superconductor. Instead,
magnetic fields are expelled. So if a magnet is held above a supercon-
ductor, its lines of force are expelled by the superconductor, and the
lines of force then push the magnet upward, causing it to levitate.)

Using the Meissner effect, one can imagine a future in which the
highways are made of these special ceramics. Then magnets placed in
our belts or our tires could enable us to magically float to our destina-
tion, without any friction or energy loss.

The Meissner effect works only on magnetic materials, such as
metals. But it is also possible to use superconducting magnets to levi-
tate nonmagnetic materials, called paramagnets and diamagnets.

These substances do not have magnetic properties of their own; they
acquire their magnetic properties only in the presence of an external
magnetic field. Paramagnets are attracted by an external magnet,
while diamagnets are repelled by an external magnet.

Water, for example, is a diamagnet. Since all living things are
made of water, they can levitate in the presence of a powerful magnetic
field. In a magnetic field of about 15 teslas (30,000 times the Earth's
field), scientists have levitated small animals, such as frogs. But if
room-temperature superconductors become a reality, it should be pos-
sible to levitate large nonmagnetic objects as well, via their diamag-
netic property.

In conclusion, force fields as commonly described in science fic-

F O R C E F I E L D S 15
tion do not fit the description of the four forces of the universe. Yet it
may be possible to simulate many of the properties of force fields by
using a multilayered shield, consisting of plasma windows, laser cur-
tains, carbon nanotubes, and photochromatics. But developing such a
shield could be many decades, or even a century, away. And if room-
temperature superconductors can be found, one might be able to use
powerful magnetic fields to levitate cars and trains and soar in the air,
as in science fiction movies.

Given these considerations, I would classify force fields as a Class

I impossibility-that is, something that is impossible by today's technol-
ogy, but possible, in modified form, within a century or so.

You cannot depend on your eyes when
your imagination is out of focus.

- M A R K TWAIN

In Star Trek IV: The Voyage Home, a Rlingon battle cruiser is hijacked
by the crew of the Enterprise. Unlike the starships in the Federation

Star Fleet, the starships of the Klingon Empire have a secret "cloaking
device" that renders them invisible to light or radar, so that Rlingon
ships can sneak up behind Federation starships and ambush them
with impunity. This cloaking device has given the Rlingon Empire a
strategic advantage over the Federation of Planets.

Is such a device really possible? Invisibility has long been one of
the marvels of science fiction and fantasy, from the pages of The Invis-
ible Man, to the magic invisibility cloak of the Harry Potter books, or
the ring in The Lord of the Rings. Yet for at least a century, physicists
have dismissed the possibility of invisibility cloaks, stating flatly that
they are impossible: They violate the laws of optics and do not conform
to any of the known properties of matter.

But today the impossible may become possible. New advances in

"metamaterials" are forcing a major revision of optics textbooks.

Working prototypes of such materials have actually been built in the
laboratory, sparking intense interest by the media, industry, and the
military in making the visible become invisible.

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 17

I N V I S I B I L I T Y T H R O U G H O U T H I S T O R Y

Invisibility is perhaps one of the oldest concepts in ancient mythology.

Since the advent of recorded history, people who have been alone on a
creepy night have been frightened by the invisible spirits of the dead,
the souls of the long-departed lurking in the dark. The Greek hero

Perseus was able to slay the evil Medusa armed with the helmet of in-
visibility. Military generals have dreamed of an invisibility cloaking
device. Being invisible, one could easily penetrate enemy lines and
capture the enemy by surprise. Criminals could use invisibility to pull
off spectacular robberies.

Invisibility played a central part in Plato's theory of ethics and
morality. In his philosophical masterpiece, The Republic, Plato recounts
the myth of the ring of Gyges. The poor but honest shepherd Gyges of

Lydia enters a hidden cave and finds a tomb containing a corpse wear-
ing a golden ring. Gyges discovers that this golden ring has the magical
power to make him invisible. Soon this poor shepherd is intoxicated
with the power this ring gives him. After sneaking into the king's
palace, Gyges uses his power to seduce the queen and, with her help,
murder the king and become the next King of Lydia.

The moral that Plato wished to draw out is that no man can resist
the temptation of being able to steal and kill at will. All men are cor-
ruptible. Morality is a social construct imposed from the outside. A
man may appear to be moral in public to maintain his reputation for
integrity and honesty, but once he possesses the power of invisibility,
the use of such power would be irresistible. (Some believe that this
morality tale was the inspiration for J. R. R. Tolkien's Lord of the Rings
trilogy, in which a ring that grants the wearer invisibility is also a
source of evil.)

Invisibility is also a common plot device in science fiction. In the

Flash Gordon series of the 1930s, Flash becomes invisible in order to
escape the firing squad of Ming the Merciless. In the Harry Potter nov-
els and movies, Harry dons a special cloak that allows him to roam

Hogwarts Castle undetected.

H. G. Wells put much of this mythology into concrete form with his
is P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
classic novel The Invisible Man, in which a medical student acciden-
tally discovers the power of the fourth dimension and becomes invisi-
ble. Unfortunately, he uses this fantastic power for private gain, starts
a wave of petty crimes, and eventually dies desperately trying to evade
the police.

M A X W E L L ' S E Q U A T I O N S A N D T H E S E C R E T O F L I G H T

It was not until the work of Scottish physicist James Clerk Maxwell,
one of the giants of nineteenth-century physics, that physicists had a
firm understanding of the laws of optics. Maxwell, in some sense, was
the opposite of Michael Faraday. Whereas Faraday had superb experi-
mental instincts but no formal training whatsoever, Maxwell, a con-
temporary of Faraday, was a master of advanced mathematics. He
excelled as a student of mathematical physics at Cambridge, where

Isaac Newton had done his work two centuries earlier.

Newton had invented the calculus, which was expressed in the lan-
guage of "differential equations," which describe how objects smoothly
undergo infinitesimal changes in space and time. The motion of ocean
waves, fluids, gases, and cannon balls could all be expressed in the lan-
guage of differential equations. Maxwell set out with a clear goal, to ex-
press the revolutionary findings of Faraday and his force fields through
precise differential equations.

Maxwell began with Faraday's discovery that electric fields could
turn into magnetic fields and vice versa. He took Faraday's depictions
of force fields and rewrote them in the precise language of differential
equations, producing one of the most important series of equations in
modern science. They are a series of eight fierce-looking differential
equations. Every physicist and engineer in the world has to sweat over
them when mastering electromagnetism in graduate school.

Next, Maxwell asked himself the fateful question: if magnetic fields
can turn into electric fields and vice versa, what happens if they are
constantly turning into each other in a never-ending pattern? Maxwell

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 19
found that these electric-magnetic fields would create a wave, much
like an ocean wave. To his astonishment, he calculated the speed of
these waves and found it to be the speed of light! In 1864, upon discov-
ering this fact, he wrote prophetically: "This velocity is so nearly that
of light that it seems we have strong reason to conclude that light it-
self . . . is an electromagnetic disturbance."

It was perhaps one of the greatest discoveries in human history.

For the first time the secret of light was finally revealed. Maxwell sud-
denly realized that everything from the brilliance of the sunrise, the
blaze of the setting sun, the dazzling colors of the rainbow, and the fir-
mament of stars in the heavens could be described by the waves he
was scribbling on a sheet of paper. Today we realize that the entire
electromagnetic spectrum-from radar to TV, infrared light, visible
light, ultraviolet light, X-rays, microwaves, and gamma rays-is nothing
but Maxwell waves, which in turn are vibrating Faraday force fields.

Commenting on the importance of Maxwell's equations, Einstein
wrote that they are "the most profound and the most fruitful that
physics has experienced since the time of Newton."

(Tragically, Maxwell, one of the greatest physicists of the nine-
teenth century, died at the early age of forty-eight of stomach cancer,
probably the very same disease that killed his mother at the same age.

If he had lived longer, he might have discovered that his equations al-
lowed for distortions of space-time that would lead directly to Ein-
stein's relativity theory. It is staggering to realize that relativity might
possibly have been discovered at the time of the American Civil War
had Maxwell lived longer.)

Maxwell's theory of light and the atomic theory give simple expla-
nations for optics and invisibility. In a solid, the atoms are tightly
packed, while in a liquid or gas the molecules are spaced much farther
apart Most solids are opaque because light rays cannot pass through
the dense matrix of atoms in a solid, which act like a brick wall. Many
liquids and gases, by contrast, are transparent because light can pass
more readily between the large spaces between their atoms, a space
that is larger than the wavelength of visible light. For example, water,

20 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
alcohol, ammonia, acetone, hydrogen peroxide, gasoline, and so forth
are all transparent, as are gases such as oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen,
carbon dioxide, methane, and so on.

There are some important exceptions to this rule. Many crystals
are both solid and transparent But the atoms of a crystal are arranged
in a precise lattice structure, stacked in regular rows, with regular
spacing between them. Hence there are many pathways that a light
beam may take through a crystalline lattice. Therefore, although a
crystal is as tightly packed as any solid, light can still work its way
through the crystal.

Under certain circumstances, a solid object may become transpar-
ent if the atoms are arranged randomly. This can be done by heating
certain materials to a high temperature and then rapidly cooling them.

Glass, for example, is a solid with many properties of a liquid because
of the random arrangement of its atoms. Certain candies can become
transparent via this method as well.

Clearly, invisibility is a property that arises at the atomic level, via

Maxwell's equations, and hence would be exceedingly difficult, if not
impossible, to duplicate using ordinary means. To make Harry Potter
invisible, one would have to liquefy him, boil him to create steam, crys-
tallize him, heat him again, and then cool him, all of which would be
quite difficult to accomplish, even for a wizard.

The military, unable to create invisible airplanes, has tried to do
the next best thing: create stealth technology, which renders airplanes
invisible to radar. Stealth technology relies on Maxwell's equations to
create a series of tricks. A stealth fighter jet is perfectly visible to the
human eye, but its radar image on an enemy radar screen is only the
size of a large bird. (Stealth technology is actually a hodgepodge of
tricks. By changing the materials within the jet fighter, reducing its
steel content and using plastics and resins instead, changing the an-
gles of its fuselage, rearranging its exhaust pipes, and so on, one can
make enemy radar beams hitting the craft disperse in all directions, so
they never get back to the enemy radar screen. Even with stealth tech-
nology, a jet fighter is not totally invisible; rather, it has deflected and
dispersed as much radar as is technically possible.)

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 21

M E T A M A T E R I A L S A N D I N V I S I B I L I T Y

But perhaps the most promising new development involving invisibil-
ity is an exotic new material called a "metamaterial," which may one
day render objects truly invisible. Ironically, the creation of metama-
terials was once thought to be impossible because they violated the
laws of optics. But in 2006 researchers at Duke University in Durham,

North Carolina, and Imperial College in London successfully defied
conventional wisdom and used metamaterials to make an object invis-
ible to microwave radiation. Although there are still many hurdles to
overcome, for the first time in history we now have a blueprint to ren-
der ordinary objects invisible. (The Pentagon's Defense Advanced Re-
search Projects Agency [DARPA] funded this research.)

Nathan Myhrvold, former chief technology officer at Microsoft,
says the revolutionary potential of metamaterials "will completely
change the way we approach optics and nearly every aspect of elec-
tronics . . . Some of these metamaterials can perform feats that would
have seemed miraculous a few decades ago."

What are these metamaterials? They are substances that have op-
tical properties not found in nature. Metamaterials are created by em-
bedding tiny implants within a substance that force electromagnetic
waves to bend in unorthodox ways. At Duke University, scientists em-
bedded tiny electrical circuits within copper bands that are arranged
in flat, concentric circles (somewhat resembling the coils of an electric
oven). The result was a sophisticated mixture of ceramic, Teflon, fiber
composites, and metal components. These tiny implants in the copper
make it possible to bend and channel the path of microwave radiation
in a specific way. Think about the way a river flows around a boulder.

Because the water quickly wraps around the boulder, the presence of
the boulder has been washed out downstream. Similarly, metamateri-
als can continuously alter and bend the path of microwaves so that
they flow around a cylinder, for example, essentially making every-
thing inside the cylinder invisible to microwaves. If the metamaterial
can eliminate all reflection and shadows, then it can render an object
totally invisible to that form of radiation.

22 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Scientists successfully demonstrated this principle with a device
made of ten fiberglass rings covered with copper elements. A copper
ring inside the device was rendered nearly invisible to microwave ra-
diation, casting only a minuscule shadow.

At the heart of metamaterials is their ability to manipulate some-
thing called the "index of refraction." Refraction is the bending of light
as it moves through transparent media. If you put your hand in water,
or look through the lens of your glasses, you notice that water and
glass distort and bend the path of ordinary light.

The reason that light bends in glass or water is that light slows
down when it enters a dense, transparent medium. The speed of light
in a pure vacuum always remains the same, but light traveling through
glass or water must pass through trillions of atoms and hence slows
down. (The speed of light divided by the slower speed of light inside
the medium is called the index of refraction. Since light slows down in
glass, the index of refraction is always greater than 1.0). For example,
the index of refraction is 1.00 for a vacuum, 1.0003 for air, 1.5 for glass,
and 2.4 for diamond. Usually, the denser the medium, the greater the
degree of bending, and the greater the index of refraction.

A familiar example of the index of refraction is a mirage. If you are
driving on a hot day and look straight toward the horizon, the road
may seem to be shimmering, creating the illusion of a glistening lake.

In the desert one can sometimes see the outlines of distant cities and
mountains on the horizon. This is because hot air rising from the pave-
ment or desert has a lower density than normal air, and hence a lower
index of refraction than the surrounding, colder air, and therefore light
from distant objects can be refracted off the pavement into your eye,
giving you the illusion that you are seeing distant objects.

Usually, the index of refraction is a constant A narrow beam of
light is bent when it enters glass and then keeps going in a straight
line. But assume for the moment that you could control the index of re-
fraction at will, so that it could change continuously at every point in
the glass. As light moved in this new material, light could bend and
meander in new directions, creating a path that would wander
throughout the substance like a snake.

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 23

If one could control the index of refraction inside a metamaterial
so that light passed around an object, then the object would become
invisible. To do this, this metamaterial must have a negative index of
refraction, which every optics textbook says is impossible. (Metamate-
rials were first theorized in a paper by Soviet physicist Victor Veselago
in 1967 and were shown to have weird optical properties, such as a
negative refractive index and reversed Doppler effect Metamaterials
are so bizarre and preposterous that they were once thought to be im-
possible to construct But in the last few years, metamaterials have
actually been manufactured in the laboratory, forcing reluctant physi-
cists to rewrite all the textbooks on optics.)

Researchers in metamaterials are constantly pestered by journal-
ists who wish to know when invisibility cloaks will hit the market The
answer is: not anytime soon.

David Smith of Duke University says, "Reporters, they call up and
they just want you to say a number. Number of months, number of
years. They push and push and push and you finally say, well, maybe
fifteen years. Then you've got your headline, right? Fifteen years till

Harry Potter's cloak." That's why he now declines to give any specific
timetable. Fans of Harry Potter or Star Trek may have to wait. While a
true invisibility cloak is possible within the laws of physics, as most
physicists will agree, formidable technical hurdles remain before this
technology can be extended to work with visible light rather than just
microwave radiation.

In general, the internal structures implanted inside the metamate-
rial must be smaller than the wavelength of the radiation. For exam-
ple, microwaves can have a wavelength of about 3 centimeters, so for
a metamaterial to bend the path of microwaves, it must have tiny im-
plants embedded inside it that are smaller than 3 centimeters. But to
make an object invisible to green light, with a wavelength of 500
nanometers (nm), the metamaterial must have structures embedded
within it that are only about 50 nanometers long-and nanometers are
atomic-length scales requiring nanotechnology. (One nanometer is a
billionth of a meter in length. Approximately five atoms can fit within
a single nanometer.) This is perhaps the key problem we face in our

24 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
attempts to create a true invisibility cloak. The individual atoms inside
a metamaterial would have to be modified to bend a light beam like a
snake.

M E T A M A T E R I A L S F O R V I S I B L E L I G H T

The race is on.

Ever since the announcement that metamaterials have been fabri-
cated in the laboratory there has been a stampede of activity in this
area, with new insights and startling breakthroughs coming every few
months. The goal is clear: to use nanotechnology to create metamate-
rials that can bend visible light, not just microwaves. Several ap-
proaches have been proposed, all of them quite promising.

One proposal is to use off-the-shelf technology, that is, to borrow
known techniques from the semiconductor industry to create new
metamaterials. A technique called "photolithography" lies at the heart
of computer miniaturization and hence drives the computer revolu-
tion. This technology enables engineers to place hundreds of millions
of tiny transistors onto a silicon wafer no bigger than your thumb.

The reason that computer power doubles every eighteen months

(which is called Moore's law) is because scientists use ultraviolet radi-
ation to "etch" tinier and tinier components onto a silicon chip. This
technique is very similar to the way in which stencils are used to cre-
ate colorful T-shirts. (Computer engineers start with a thin wafer and
then apply extremely thin coatings of various materials on top. A plas-
tic mask is then placed over the wafer, which acts as a template. It con-
tains the complex outlines of the wires, transistors, and computer
components that are the basic skeleton of the circuitry. The wafer is
then bathed in ultraviolet radiation, which has a very short wave-
length, and that radiation imprints the pattern onto the photosensitive
wafer. By treating the wafer with special gases and acids, the complex
circuitry of the mask is etched onto the wafer where it was exposed to
ultraviolet light This process creates a wafer containing hundreds of
millions of tiny grooves, which form the outlines of the transistors.) At

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 25
present, the smallest components that one can create with this etching
process are about 30 nm (or about 150 atoms across).

A milestone in the quest for invisibility came when this silicon
wafer etching technology was used by a group of scientists to create
the first metamaterial that operates in the visible range of light Scien-
tists in Germany and at the U.S. Department of Energy announced in
early 2007 that, for the first time in history, they had fabricated a meta-
material that worked for red light. The "impossible" had been achieved
in a remarkably short time.

Physicist Costas Soukoulis of the Ames Laboratory in Iowa, with

Stefan Linden, Martin Wegener, and Gunnar Dolling of the University
of Karlsruhe, Germany, were able to create a metamaterial that had an
index of -.6 for red light, at a wavelength of 780 nm. (Previously, the
world record for radiation bent by a metamaterial was 1,400 nm,
which put it outside the range of visible light, in the range of infrared.)

The scientists first started with a glass sheet, and then deposited a
thin coating of silver, magnesium fluoride, and then another layer of
silver, forming a "sandwich" of fluoride that was only 100 nm thick.

Then, using standard etching techniques, they created a large array of
microscopic square holes in the sandwich, creating a grid pattern re-
sembling a fishnet (The holes are only 100 nm wide, much smaller
than the wavelength of red light) Then they passed a red light beam
through the material and measured its index, which was -.6.

These physicists foresee many applications of this technology.

Metamaterials "may one day lead to the development of a type of flat
superlens that operates in the visible spectrum," says Dr. Soukoulis.

"Such a lens would offer superior resolution over conventional tech-
nology, capturing details much smaller than one wavelength of light."

The immediate application of such a "superlens" would be to photo-
graph microscopic objects with unparalleled clarity, such as the inside
of a living human cell, or to diagnose diseases in a baby inside the
womb. Ideally one would be able to obtain photographs of the compo-
nents of a DNA molecule without having to use clumsy X-ray crystal-
lography.

So far these scientists have demonstrated a negative index of re-

26 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
fraction only for red light. Their next step would be to use this technol-
ogy to create a metamaterial that would bend red light entirely around
an object, rendering it invisible to that light.

Future developments along these lines may occur in the area of

"photonic crystals." The goal of photonic crystal technology is to create a
chip that uses light, rather than electricity, to process information. This
entails using nanotechnology to etch tiny components onto a wafer, such
that the index of refraction changes with each component Transistors
using light have several advantages over those using electricity. For ex-
ample, there is much less heat loss for photonic crystals. (In advanced
silicon chips, the heat generated is enough to fry an egg. Thus they must
be continually cooled down or else they will fail, and keeping them cool
is very costly.) Not surprisingly, the science of photonic crystals is ideally
suited for metamaterials, since both technologies involve manipulating
the index of refraction of light at the nanoscale.

I N V I S I B I L I T Y V I A P L A S M O N I C S

Not to be outdone, yet another group announced in mid-2007 that they
have created a metamaterial that bends visible light using an entirely
different technology, called "plasmonics." Physicists Henri Lezec, Jen-
nifer Dionne, and Harry Atwater at the California Institute of Technol-
ogy announced that they had created a metamaterial that had a
negative index for the more difficult blue-green region of the visible
spectrum of light.

The goal of plasmonics is to "squeeze" light so that one can manip-
ulate objects at the nanoscale, especially on the surface of metals. The
reason metals conduct electricity is that electrons are loosely bound to
metal atoms, so they can freely move along the surface of the metal lat-
tice. The electricity flowing in the wires in your home represents the
smooth flow of these loosely bound electrons on the metal surface. But
under certain conditions, when a light beam collides with the metal
surface, the electrons can vibrate in unison with the original light
beam, creating wavelike motions of the electrons on the metal surface

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 27

(called plasmons), and these wavelike motions beat in unison with the
original light beam. More important, one can "squeeze" these plas-
mons so that they have the same frequency as the original beam (and
hence carry the same information) but have a much smaller wave-
length. In principle, one might then cram these squeezed waves onto
nanowires. As with photonic crystals, the ultimate goal of plasmonics
is to create computer chips that compute using light, rather than elec-
tricity.

The Cal Tech group built their metamaterial out of two layers of
silver, with a silicon-nitrogen insulator in between (with a thickness of
only 50 nm), which acted as a "waveguide" that could shepherd the di-
rection of the plasmonic waves. Laser light enters and exits the appa-
ratus via two slits carved into the metamaterial. By analyzing the
angles at which the laser light is bent as it passes through the meta-
material, one can then verify that the light is being bent via a negative
index.

T H E F U T U R E O F M E T A M A T E R I A L S

Progress in metamaterials will accelerate in the future for the simple
reason that there is already intense interest in creating transistors that
use light beams rather than electricity. Research in invisibility can
therefore "piggyback" on the ongoing research in photonic crystals
and plasmonics for creating replacements for the silicon chip. Already
hundreds of millions of dollars are being invested in creating replace-
ments for silicon technology, and research in metamaterials will ben-
efit from these research efforts.

With breakthroughs occurring in this field every few months, it's
not surprising that some physicists see some sort of practical invisibil-
ity shield emerging out of the laboratory perhaps within a few decades.

In the next few years, for example, scientists are confident that they
will be able to create metamaterials that can render an object totally
invisible for one frequency of visible light, at least in two dimensions.

To do this would require embedding tiny nano implants not in regular

28 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
arrays, but in sophisticated patterns so that light would bend smoothly
around an object

Next, scientists will have to create metamaterials that can bend
light in three dimensions, not just for flat two-dimensional surfaces.

Photolithography has been perfected for making flat silicon wafers, but
creating three-dimensional metamaterials will require stacking wafers
in a complex fashion.

After that, scientists will have to solve the problem of creating
metamaterials that can bend not just one frequency but many. This
will be perhaps the most difficult task, since the tiny implants that have
been devised so far bend light of only one precise frequency. Scientists
may have to create metamaterials based on layers, with each layer
bending a specific frequency. The solution to this problem is not clear.

Nevertheless, once an invisibility shield is finally made, it might be
a clunky device. Harry Potter's cloak was made of thin, flexible cloth
and rendered anyone draped inside invisible. But for this to be possi-
ble the index of refraction inside the cloth would have to be constantly
changing in complex ways as it fluttered, which is impractical. More
than likely a true invisibility "cloak" would have to be made of a solid
cylinder of metamaterials, at least initially. That way the index of re-
fraction could be fixed inside the cylinder. (More advanced versions
could eventually incorporate metamaterials that are flexible and can
twist and still make light flow within the metamaterials on the correct
path. In this way, anyone inside the cloak would have some flexibility
of movement)

Some have pointed out a flaw in the invisibility shield: anyone in-
side would not be able to look outside without becoming visible. Imag-
ine Harry Potter being totally invisible except for his eyes, which
appear to be floating in midair. Any eye holes on the invisibility cloak
would be clearly visible from the outside. If Harry Potter were totally
invisible, then he would be sitting blindly beneath his invisibility
cloak. (One possible solution to this problem might be to insert two
tiny glass plates near the location of the eye holes. These glass plates
would act as "beam splitters," splitting off a tiny portion of the light hit-
ting the plates, and then sending the light into the eyes. So most of the

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 29
light hitting the cloak would flow around it, rendering the person in-
visible, but a tiny amount of light would be diverted into the eyes.)

As daunting as these difficulties are, scientists and engineers are
optimistic that an invisibility shield of some sort can be built in the
coming decades.

I N V I S I B I L I T Y A N D N A N O T E C H N O L O G Y

As I mentioned earlier, the key to invisibility may be nanotechnology,
that is, the ability to manipulate atomic-sized structures about a bil-
lionth of a meter across.

The birth of nanotechnology dates back to a famous 1959 lecture
given by Nobel laureate Richard Feynman to the American Physical

Society, with the tongue-in-cheek title "There's Plenty of Room at the

Bottom." In that lecture he speculated on what the smallest machines
might look like, consistent with the known laws of physics. He realized
that machines could be built smaller and smaller until they hit atomic
distances, and then atoms could be used to create other machines.

Atomic machines, such as pulleys, levers, and wheels, were well
within the laws of physics, he concluded, though they would be ex-
ceedingly difficult to make.

Nanotechnology languished for years, because manipulating indi-
vidual atoms was beyond the technology of the time. But then physi-
cists made a breakthrough in 1981, with the invention of the scanning
tunneling microscope, which won the Nobel Prize in Physics for scien-
tists Gerd Binnig and Heinrich Rohrer, working at the IBM lab in

Zurich.

Suddenly physicists were able to obtain stunning "pictures" of in-
dividual atoms arrayed just as in the chemistry books, something that
critics of the atomic theory once considered impossible. Gorgeous
photographs of atoms lined up in a crystal or metal were now possible.

The chemical formulae used by scientists, with a complex series of
atoms wrapped up in a molecule, could be seen with the naked eye.

Moreover, the scanning tunneling microscope made possible the ma-

30 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
nipulation of individual atoms. In fact, the letters "IBM" were spelled
out via individual atoms, creating quite a stir in the scientific world.

Scientists were no longer blind when manipulating individual atoms,
but could actually see and play with them.

The scanning tunneling microscope is deceptively simple. Like a
phonograph needle scanning a disk, a sharp probe is passed slowly
over the material to be analyzed. (The tip is so sharp that it consists of
only a single atom.) A small electrical charge is placed on the probe,
and a current flows from the probe, through the material, and to the
surface below. As the probe passes over an individual atom, the
amount of current flowing through the probe varies, and the variations
are recorded. The current rises and falls as the needle passes over an
atom, thereby tracing its outline in remarkable detail. After many
passes, by plotting the fluctuations in the current flows, one is able to
obtain beautiful pictures of the individual atoms making up a lattice.

(The scanning tunneling microscope is made possible by a strange
law of quantum physics. Normally electrons do not have enough en-
ergy to pass from the probe, through the substance, to the underlying
surface. But because of the uncertainty principle, there is a small prob-
ability that the electrons in the current will "tunnel" or penetrate
through the barrier, even though this is forbidden by Newtonian the-
ory. Thus the current that flows through the probe is sensitive to tiny
quantum effects in the material. I will discuss the effects of the quan-
tum theory later in more detail.)

The probe is also sensitive enough to move individual atoms
around, to create simple "machines" out of individual atoms. The tech-
nology is so advanced now that a cluster of atoms can be displayed on
a computer screen and then, by simply moving the cursor of the com-
puter, the atoms can be moved around any way you want You can ma-
nipulate scores of atoms at will as if playing with Lego blocks. Besides
spelling out the letters of the alphabet using individual atoms, one can
also create atomic toys, such as an abacus made out of individual
atoms. The atoms are arrayed on a surface, with vertical slots. Inside
these vertical slots one can insert carbon Buckyballs (shaped like a
soccer ball, but made of individual carbon atoms). These carbon balls

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 3i
can then be moved up and down each slot, thereby making an atomic
abacus.

It is also possible to carve atomic devices using electron beams.

For example, scientists at Cornell University have made the world's
smallest guitar, one that is twenty times smaller than a human hair,
carved out of crystalline silicon. It has six strings, each one hundred
atoms thick, and the strings can be plucked using an atomic force mi-
croscope. (This guitar will actually play music, but the frequencies it
produces are well above the range of the human ear.)

At present, most of these nanotech "machines" are mere toys. More
complicated machines with gears and ball bearings have yet to be cre-
ated. But many engineers feel confident that the time is coming when
we will be able to produce true atomic machines. (Atomic machines
are actually found in nature. Cells can swim freely in water because
they can wiggle tiny hairs. But when one analyzes the joint between
the hair and the cell, one sees that it is actually an atomic machine that
allows the hair to move in all directions. So one key to developing
nanotechnology is to copy nature, which mastered the art of atomic
machines billions of years ago.)

H O L O G R A M S A N D I N V I S I B I L I T Y

Another way to render a person partially invisible is to photograph the
scenery behind a person and then project that background image di-
rectly onto the person's clothes or onto a screen in front of him. As
seen from the front, it appears as if the person has become transpar-
ent, that light has somehow passed right through the person's body.

Naoki Kawakami, of the Tachi Laboratory at the University of

Tokyo, has been hard at work on this process, which is called "optical
camouflage." He says, "It would be used to help pilots see through the
floor of the cockpit at a runway below, or for drivers trying to see
through a fender to park a car." Kawakami's "cloak" is covered with
tiny light-reflective beads that act like a movie screen. A video camera
photographs what is behind the cloak. Then this image is fed into a

32 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
video projector that lights up the front of the cloak, so it appears as if
light has passed through the person.

Prototypes of the optical camouflage cloak actually exist in the lab.

If you look directly at a person wearing this screenlike cloak, it appears
as if the person has disappeared, because all you see is the image be-
hind the person. But if you move your eyes a bit, the image on the cloak
does not change, which tells you that it is a fake. A more realistic opti-
cal camouflage would need to create the illusion of a 3-D image. For
this, one would need holograms.

A hologram is a 3-D image created by lasers (like the 3-D image of

Princess Leia in Star Wars). A person could be rendered invisible if the
background scenery was photographed with a special holographic
camera and the holographic image was then projected out through a
special holographic screen placed in front of the person. A viewer
standing in front of that person would see the holographic screen, con-
taining the 3-D image of the background scenery, minus the person. It
would appear as if the person had disappeared. In that person's place
would be a precise 3-D image of the background scenery. Even if you
moved your eyes, you would not be able to tell that what you were see-
ing was fake.

These 3-D images are made possible because laser light is "coher-
ent," that is, all the waves are vibrating in perfect unison. Holograms
are produced by making a coherent laser beam split in two pieces. Half
of the beam shines on a photographic film. The other half illuminates
an object, bounces off, and then shines on the same photographic film.

When these two beams interfere on the film, an interference pattern is
created that encodes all the information of the original 3-D wave. The
film, when developed, doesn't look like much, just an intricate spider-
web pattern of whirls and lines. But when a laser beam is allowed to
shine on this film, an exact 3-D replica of the original object suddenly
appears as if by magic.

The technical problems with holographic invisibility are formida-
ble, however. One challenge is to create a holographic camera that is
capable of taking at least 30 frames per second. Another problem is

I N V I S I B I L I T Y 33
storing and processing all the information. Finally, one would need to
project this image onto a screen so that the image looks realistic.

I N V I S I B I L I T Y V I A T H E F O U R T H D I M E N S I O N

We should also mention that an even more sophisticated way of be-
coming invisible was mentioned by H. G. Wells in The Invisible Man,
and it involved using the power of the fourth dimension. (Later in the
book I will discuss in more detail the possible existence of higher di-
mensions.) Could we perhaps leave our three-dimensional universe
and hover over it from the vantage point of a fourth dimension? Like a
three-dimensional butterfly hovering over a two-dimensional sheet of
paper, we would be invisible to anyone living in the universe below us.

One problem with this idea is that higher dimensions have not yet
been proven to exist. Moreover, a hypothetical journey to a higher di-
mension would require energies far beyond anything attainable with
our current technology. As a viable way to achieve invisibility, this
method is clearly beyond our knowledge and ability today.

Given the enormous strides made so far in achieving invisibility, it
clearly qualifies as a Class I impossibility. Within the next few decades,
or at least within this century, a form of invisibility may become com-
monplace.

Radio has no future. Heavier-than-air flying machines are
impossible. X-rays will prove to be a hoax.

-PHYSICIST LORD KELVIN, 1899

The (atomic) bomb will never go off.

I speak as an expert in explosives.

- A D M I R A L W I L L I A M LEAHY

4-3-2-1, fire!

The Death Star is a colossal weapon, the size of an entire moon.

Firing point-blank at the helpless planet Alderaan, home world of

Princess Leia, the Death Star incinerates it, causing it to erupt in a
titanic explosion, sending planetary debris hurtling throughout the so-
lar system. A billion souls scream out in anguish, creating a distur-
bance in the Force felt throughout the galaxy.

But is the Death Star weapon of the Star Wars saga really possible?

Could such a weapon channel a battery of laser cannons to vaporize
an entire planet? What about the famous light sabers wielded by Luke

Skywalker and Darth Vader that can slice through reinforced steel yet
are made of beams of light? Are ray guns, like the phasers in Star Trek,
viable weapons for future generations of law enforcement officers and
soldiers?

P U R S E R S RND D E R T H S T A R S 35

In Star Wars millions of moviegoers were dazzled by these origi-
nal, stunning special effects, but they fell flat for some critics, who
panned them, stating that all this was in good fun, but it was patently
impossible. Moon-sized, planet-busting ray guns are outlandish, and
so are swords made of solidified light beams, even for a galaxy far, far
away, they chanted. George Lucas, the master of special effects, must
have gotten carried away this time.

Although this may be difficult to believe, the fact is there is no
physical limit to the amount of raw energy that can be crammed onto
a light beam. There is no law of physics preventing the creation of a

Death Star or light sabers. In fact, planet-busting beams of gamma ra-
diation exist in nature. The titanic burst of radiation from a distant
gamma ray burster in deep space creates an explosion second only to
the big bang itself. Any planet unfortunate enough to be within the
crosshairs of a gamma ray burster will indeed be fried or blown to bits.

B E A M W E A P O N S T H R O U G H H I S T O R Y

The dream of harnessing beams of energy is actually not new but is
rooted in ancient mythology and lore. The Greek god Zeus was famous
for unleashing lightning bolts on mortals. The Norse god Thor had a
magic hammer, Mjolnir, which could fire bolts of lightning, while the

Hindu god Indra was known for firing beams of energy from a magic
spear.

The concept of using rays as a practical weapon probably began
with the work of the great Greek mathematician Archimedes, perhaps
the greatest scientist in all of antiquity, who discovered a crude version
of calculus two thousand years ago, before Newton and Leibniz. In one
legendary battle against the forces of Roman general Marcellus during
the Second Punic War in 214 BC, Archimedes helped to defend the
kingdom of Syracuse and is believed to have created large batteries of
solar reflectors that focused the sun's rays onto the sails of enemy
ships, setting them ablaze. (There is still debate even today among sci-
entists as to whether this was a practical, working beam weapon; var-

36 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
ious teams of scientists have tried to duplicate this feat with differing
results.)

Ray guns burst onto the science fiction scene in 1889 with H. G.

Wells's classic War of the Worlds, in which aliens from Mars devastate
entire cities by shooting beams of heat energy from weapons mounted
on their tripods. During World War II, the Nazis, always eager to ex-
ploit the latest advances in technology to conquer the world, experi-
mented with various forms of ray guns, including a sonic device, based
on parabolic mirrors, that could focus intense beams of sound.

Weapons created from focused light beams entered the public
imagination with the James Bond movie Goldfinger, the first Holly-
wood film to feature a laser. (The legendary British spy was strapped
onto a metal table as a powerful laser beam slowly advanced, gradu-
ally melting the table between his legs and threatening to slice him in
half.)

Physicists originally scoffed at the idea of the ray guns featured in

Wells's novel because they violated the laws of optics. According to

Maxwell's equations, the light we see around us rapidly disperses and
is incoherent (i.e., it is a jumble of waves of different frequencies and
phases). It was once thought that coherent, focused, uniform beams of
light, as we find with laser beams, were impossible to create.

T H E Q U A N T U M R E V O L U T I O N

All this changed with the coming of the quantum theory. At the turn of
the twentieth century it was clear that although Newton's laws and

Maxwell's equations were spectacularly successful in explaining the
motion of the planets and the behavior of light, they could not explain
a whole class of phenomena. They failed miserably to explain why
materials conduct electricity, why metals melt at certain temperatures,
why gases emit light when heated, why certain substances become su-
perconductors at low temperatures-all of which requires an under-
standing of the internal dynamics of atoms. The time was ripe for a

P U R S E R S RND D E A T H S T A R S 37
revolution. Two hundred and fifty years of Newtonian physics was
about to be overthrown, heralding the birth pangs of a new physics.

In 1900 Max Planck in Germany proposed that energy was not con-
tinuous, as Newton thought, but occurred in small, discrete packets,
called "quanta." Then in 1905 Einstein postulated that light consisted of
these tiny discrete packets (or quanta), later dubbed "photons." With
this powerful but simple idea Einstein was able to explain the photo-
electric effect, why electrons are emitted from metals when you shine a
light on them. Today the photoelectric effect and the photon form the
basis of TV, lasers, solar cells, and much of modern electronics. (Ein-
stein's theory of the photon was so revolutionary that even Max Planck,
normally a great supporter of Einstein, could not at first believe it. Writ-
ing about Einstein, Planck said, "That he may sometimes have missed
the target... as for example, in his hypothesis of light quanta, cannot
really be held against him.")

Then in 1913 the Danish physicist Niels Bohr gave us an entirely
new picture of the atom, one that resembled a miniature solar system.

But unlike in a solar system in outer space, electrons can only move in
discrete orbits or shells around the nucleus. When electrons "jumped"

from one shell to a smaller shell with less energy, they emitted a pho-
ton of energy. When an electron absorbed a photon of a discrete en-
ergy, it "jumped" to a larger shell with more energy.

A nearly complete theory of the atom emerged in 1925, with the
coming of quantum mechanics and the revolutionary work of Erwin

Schrodinger, Werner Heisenberg, and many others. According to the
quantum theory, the electron was a particle, but it had a wave associ-
ated with it, giving it both particle- and wavelike properties. The wave
obeyed an equation, called the Schrodinger wave equation, which en-
abled one to calculate the properties of atoms, including all the

"jumps" postulated by Bohr.

Before 1925 atoms were still considered mysterious objects that
many, like philosopher Ernst Mach, believed might not exist at all. Af-
ter 1925 one could actually peer deep into the dynamics of the atom
and actually predict its properties. Astonishingly, this meant that if you

38 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
had a big enough computer, you could derive the properties of the
chemical elements from the laws of the quantum theory. In the same
way that Newtonian physicists could compute the motions of all the ce-
lestial bodies in the universe if they had a big enough calculating
machine, quantum physicists claimed that they could in principle
compute all the properties of the chemical elements of the universe. If
one had a big enough computer, one could also write the wave func-
tion of an entire human being.

M A S E R S A N D L A S E R S

In 1953 Professor Charles Townes of the University of California at

Berkeley and his colleagues produced the first coherent radiation in
the form of microwaves. It was christened the "maser" (for microwave
amplification through stimulated emission of radiation). He and Rus-
sian physicists Nikolai Basov and Aleksandr Prokhorov would eventu-
ally win the Nobel Prize in 1964. Soon their results were extended to
visible light, giving birth to the laser. (A phaser, however, is a fictional
device popularized in Star Trek.)

In a laser you first begin with a special medium that will transmit
the laser beam, such as a special gas, crystal, or diode. Then you pump
energy into this medium from the outside, in the form of electricity, ra-
dio, light, or a chemical reaction. This sudden influx of energy pumps
up the atoms of the medium, so the electrons absorb the energy and
then jump into the outer electron shells.

In this excited, pumped-up state, the medium is unstable. If one
then sends in a light beam through the medium, the photons will hit
each atom, causing it to suddenly decay down to a lower level, releas-
ing more photons in the process. This in turn triggers even more elec-
trons to release photons, eventually creating a cascade of collapsing
atoms, with trillions upon trillions of photons suddenly released into
the beam. The key is that for certain substances, when this avalanche
of photons is occurring all the photons are vibrating in unison, that is,
they are coherent.

P U R S E R S RND D E A T H S T A R S 39

(Picture a line of dominoes. Dominoes in their lowest energy state
lie flat on a table. Dominoes in a high-energy, pumped-up state stand
up vertically, similar to the pumped-up atoms in the medium. If you
push one domino, you can trigger a sudden collapse of all this energy
at once, just as in a laser beam.)

Only certain materials will "lase," that is, it is only in special ma-
terials that when a photon hits a pumped-up atom a photon will be
emitted that is coherent with the original photon. As a result of this co-
herence, in this flood of photons all the photons are vibrating in uni-
son, creating a pencil-thin laser beam. (Contrary to myth, the laser
beam does not stay pencil-thin forever. A laser beam fired onto the
moon, for example, will gradually expand until it creates a spot a few
miles across.)

A simple gas laser consists of a tube of helium and neon gas. When
electricity is sent through the tube the atoms are energized. Then, if the
energy is suddenly released all at once, a beam of coherent light is pro-
duced. The beam is amplified by using two mirrors, one placed at either
end, so the beam bounces back and forth between them. One mirror is
completely opaque, but the other allows a tiny amount of light to escape
on each pass, producing a beam that shoots out one end.

Today lasers are found almost everywhere, from grocery store
checkout stands, to fiber-optic cables carrying the Internet, to laser
printers and CD players, to modern computers. They are also used in
eye surgery, to remove tattoos, and even in cosmetic salons. Over $5.4
billion worth of lasers were sold worldwide in 2004.

T Y P E S O F L A S E R S A N D F U S I O N

New lasers are being discovered almost every day as new materials are
found that can lase, and as new ways are discovered for pumping en-
ergy into the medium.

The question is, are any of these technologies suitable for building
a ray gun or a light saber? Is it possible to build a laser powerful
enough to energize a Death Star? Today a bewildering variety of lasers

40 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
exist, depending on the material that lases and the energy that is in-
jected into the material (e.g., electricity, intense beams of light, even
chemical explosions). Among them are

• Gas lasers. These lasers include helium-neon lasers,
which are very common, creating a familiar red beam. They
are energized by radio waves or electricity. Helium-neon
lasers are quite weak. But carbon dioxide gas lasers can be
used for blasting, cutting, and welding in heavy industry and
can create beams of enormous power that are totally invisible.

• Chemical lasers. These powerful lasers are energized
by a chemical reaction, such as a burning jet of ethylene and
nitrogen trifluoride, or NF . Such lasers are powerful

3
enough to be used in military applications. Chemical lasers
are used in the U.S. military's airborne and ground lasers,
which can produce millions of watts of power, and are de-
signed to shoot down short-range missiles in midflight.

• Excimer lasers. These lasers are also powered by
chemical reactions, often involving an inert gas (e.g., argon,
krypton, or xenon) and fluorine or chlorine. They produce
ultraviolet light and can be used to etch tiny transistors onto
chips in the semiconductor industry, or for delicate Lasik
eye surgery.

• Solid-state lasers. The first working laser ever made
consisted of a chromium-sapphire ruby crystal. A large va-
riety of crystals will support a laser beam, in conjunction
with yttrium, holmium, thulium, and other chemicals. They
can produce high-energy ultrashort pulses of laser light.

• Semiconductor lasers. Diodes, which are commonly
used in the semiconductor industry, can produce the in-
tense beams used in industrial cutting and welding. They
are also often found in checkout stands in grocery stores,
reading the bar codes of your grocery items.

• Dye lasers. These lasers use organic dyes as their me-

P U R S E R S RND D E A T H S T A R S
i

4
dium. They are exceptionally useful in terms of creating ultra-
short pulses of light, often lasting only trillionths of a second.

L A S E R S A N D R A Y G U N S ?

Given the enormous variety of commercial lasers and the power of
military lasers, why don't we have ray guns available for use in com-
bat and on the battlefield? Ray guns of one sort or another seem to be
standard-issue weaponry in science fiction movies. Why aren't we
working to create them?

The simple answer is the lack of a portable power pack. One would
need miniature power packs that contain the power of a huge electri-
cal power station yet are small enough to fit on your palm. At present
the only way to harness the power of a large commercial power station
is to build one. At present the smallest portable military device that can
contain vast amounts of energy is a miniature hydrogen bomb, which
might destroy you as well as the target.

There is a second, ancillary problem as well-the stability of the
lasing material. Theoretically, there is no limit to the energy one can
concentrate on a laser. The problem is that the lasing material in a
handheld ray gun would not be stable. Crystal lasers, for example, will
overheat and crack if too much energy is pumped into them. Hence to
create an extremely powerful laser, the kind that might vaporize an
object or neutralize a foe, one might need to use the power of an explo-
sion. In that case, the stability of the lasing material is not such a lim-
itation, since such a laser would be used only once.

Because of the problems in creating a portable power pack and a
stable lasing material, building a handheld ray gun is not possible with
today's technology. Ray guns are possible, but only if they are con-
nected by a cable to a power supply. Or perhaps with nanotechnology
we might be able to create miniature batteries that store or generate
enough energy to create the intense bursts of energy required of a
handheld device. At present, as we have seen, nanotechnology is quite

42 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
primitive. At the atomic level, scientists have been able to create atomic
devices that are quite ingenious, but impractical, such as an atomic
abacus and an atomic guitar. But it is conceivable that late in this cen-
tury or the next, nanotechnology may be able to give us miniature bat-
teries that can store such fabulous amounts of energy.

Light sabers suffer from a similar problem. When the movie Star

Wars first came out in the 1970s and light sabers became a best-selling
toy among children, many critics pointed out that such a device could
never be made. First, it is impossible to solidify light. Light always trav-
els at the speed of light; it cannot be made solid. Second, light beams
do not terminate in midair as do the light sabers used in Star Wars.

Light beams keep on going forever; a real light saber would stretch
into the sky.

Actually there is a way to construct a kind of light saber using plas-
mas, or superhot ionized gas. Plasmas can be made hot enough to glow
in the dark and also slice through steel. A plasma light saber would
consist of a thin, hollow rod that slides out of the handle, like a tele-
scope. Inside this tube hot plasmas would be released that would then
escape through small holes placed regularly along the rod. As the
plasma flowed out of the handle, up the rod, and through the holes, it
would create a long, glowing tube of superhot gas, sufficient to melt
steel. This device is sometimes referred to as a plasma torch.

So it is possible to create a high-energy device that resembles a
light saber. But as with ray guns, you would have to create a high-
energy portable power pack. Either you would need long cables con-
necting the light saber to a power supply, or you would have to create,
via nanotechnology, a tiny power supply that could deliver huge
amounts of power.

So while ray guns and light sabers are possible to create in some
form today, the handheld weapons found in science fiction movies are
beyond current technology. But late in this century or the next, with
new advances in material science and also nanotechnology, a form of
ray gun might be developed, making it a Class I impossibility.

P H H S E R S HND D E A T H S T A R S 43

E N E R G Y F O R A D E A T H S T A R

To create a Death Star laser cannon that can destroy an entire planet
and terrorize a galaxy, such as that described in Star Wars, one would
need to create the most powerful laser ever conceived. At present some
of the most powerful lasers on Earth are being used to unleash tem-
peratures found only in the center of stars. In the form of fusion reac-
tors, they might one day harness the power of the stars on Earth.

Fusion machines try to mimic what happens in outer space when
a star first forms. A star begins as a huge ball of formless hydrogen gas,
until gravity compresses the gas and thereby heats it up; temperatures
eventually reach astronomical levels. Deep inside a star's core, for ex-
ample, temperatures can soar to between 50 million and 100 million
degrees centigrade, hot enough to cause hydrogen nuclei to slam into
each other, creating helium nuclei and a burst of energy. The fusion of
hydrogen into helium, whereby a small amount of mass is converted
into the explosive energy of a star via Einstein's famous equation

E = mc , is the energy source of the stars.

2

There are two ways in which scientists are currently attempting to
harness fusion on the Earth. Both have proven to be much more diffi-
cult to develop than expected.

I N E R T I A L C O N F I N E M E N T F O R F U S I O N

The first method is called "inertial confinement." It uses the most pow-
erful lasers on Earth to create a piece of the sun in the laboratory. A
neodymium glass solid-state laser is ideally suited to duplicate the
blistering temperatures found only in the core of a star. These laser
systems are the size of a large factory and contain a battery of lasers
that shoot a series of parallel laser beams down a long tunnel. These
high-power laser beams then strike a series of small mirrors arranged
around a sphere; the mirrors carefully focus the laser beams uni-
formly onto a tiny, hydrogen-rich pellet (made of substances such as

44 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
lithium deuteride, the active ingredient of a hydrogen bomb). The pel-
let is usually the size of a pinhead and weighs only 10 milligrams.

The blast of laser light incinerates the surface of the pellet, caus-
ing the surface to vaporize and compress the pellet As the pellet col-
lapses, a shock wave is created that reaches the core of the pellet,
sending temperatures soaring to millions of degrees, sufficient to fuse
hydrogen nuclei into helium. The temperatures and pressures are so
astronomical that "Lawson's criterion" is satisfied, the same criterion
that is satisfied in hydrogen bombs and in the core of stars. (Lawson's
criterion states that a specific range of temperatures, density, and time
of confinement must be attained in order to unleash the fusion process
in a hydrogen bomb, in a star, or in a fusion machine.)

In the inertial confinement process vast amounts of energy are re-
leased, including neutrons. (The lithium deuteride can hit tempera-
tures of 100 million degrees centigrade and a density twenty times that
of lead.) A burst of neutrons is then emitted from the pellet, and the
neutrons strike a spherical blanket of material surrounding the cham-
ber, and the blanket is heated up. The heated blanket then boils water,
and the steam can be used to power a turbine and produce electricity.

The problem, however, lies in being able to focus such intense
power evenly onto a tiny spherical pellet The first serious attempt at
creating laser fusion was the Shiva laser, a twenty-beam laser system
built at the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory ( L L N L ) in Cali-
fornia that began operation in 1978. (Shiva is the Hindu goddess with
multiple arms, which the laser system design mimics.) The perfor-
mance of the Shiva laser system was disappointing, but it was suffi-
cient to prove that laser fusion can technically work. The Shiva laser
system was later replaced by the Nova laser, with ten times the energy
of Shiva. But the Nova laser also failed to achieve proper ignition of the
pellets. Nonetheless, it paved the way for the current research in the

National Ignition Facility (NIF), which began construction in 1997 at
the LLNL.

The NIF, which is supposed to be operational in 2009, is a mon-
strous machine, consisting of a battery of 192 laser beams, packing an
enormous output of 700 trillion watts of power (the output of about

P U R S E R S AND D E A T H S T A R S 45

700,000 large nuclear power plants concentrated in a single burst of
energy). It is a state-of-the-art laser system designed to achieve full ig-
nition of the hydrogen-rich pellets. (Critics have also pointed out its ob-
vious military use, since it can simulate the detonation of a hydrogen
bomb and perhaps make possible the creation of a new nuclear
weapon, the pure fusion bomb, which does not require a uranium or
plutonium atomic bomb to kick-start the fusion process.)

But even the NIF laser fusion machine, containing the most pow-
erful lasers on Earth, cannot begin to approximate the devastating
power of the Star Wars Death Star. To build such a device we must look
to other sources of power.

M A G N E T I C C O N F I N E M E N T F O R F U S I O N

The second method scientists could potentially use to energize a Death

Star is called "magnetic confinement," a process in which a hot plasma
of hydrogen gas is contained within a magnetic field. In fact, this
method could actually provide the prototype for the first commercial
fusion reactors. Currently the most advanced fusion project of this type
is the International Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor (ITER). In

2006 a coalition of nations (including the European Union, the United

States, China, Japan, Korea, Russia, and India) decided to build the

ITER in Cadarache, in southern France. It is designed to heat hydrogen
gas to 100 million degrees centigrade. It could become the first fusion
reactor in history to generate more energy than it consumes. It is de-
signed to generate 500 megawatts of power for 500 seconds (the current
record is 16 megawatts of power for 1 second). The ITER should gener-
ate its first plasma by 2016 and be fully operational in 2022. At a cost of

$12 billion, it is the third most expensive scientific project in history (af-
ter the Manhattan Project and the International Space Station).

The ITER looks like a large doughnut, with hydrogen gas circulat-
ing inside and huge coils of wire winding around the surface. The coils
are cooled down until they become superconducting, and then a huge
amount of electrical energy is pumped into them, creating a magnetic

46 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
field that confines the plasma inside the doughnut. When an electrical
current is fed inside the doughnut, the gas is heated to stellar temper-
atures.

The reason scientists are so excited by the ITER is the prospect of
creating a cheap energy source. The fuel supply for fusion reactors is
ordinary seawater, which is rich in hydrogen. At least on paper, fusion
may provide us with an inexhaustible, cheap supply of energy.

So why don't we have fusion reactors now? Why has it taken so
many decades to make progress after the fusion process was mapped
out in the 1950s? The problem has been the fiendish difficulty of com-
pressing the hydrogen fuel in a uniform manner. In stars, gravity com-
presses hydrogen gas into a perfect sphere, so that gas is heated evenly
and cleanly.

In NIF's laser fusion, the concentric beams of laser light incinerat-
ing the surface of the pellet must be perfectly uniform, and it is exceed-
ingly difficult to achieve this uniformity. In magnetic confinement
machines, magnetic fields have both north poles and south poles; as a
result, compressing gas evenly into a sphere is extremely difficult. The
best we can do is to create a doughnut-shape magnetic field. But com-
pressing the gas is like squeezing a balloon. Every time you squeeze
the balloon at one end, air bulges out somewhere else. Squeezing the
balloon evenly in all directions simultaneously is a difficult challenge.

Hot gas usually leaks out of the magnetic bottle, eventually touching
the walls of the reactor and shutting down the fusion process. That is
why it has been so hard to squeeze the hydrogen gas for more than
about one second.

Unlike the current generation of fission nuclear power plants, a fu-
sion reactor will not create large amounts of nuclear waste. (Each tra-
ditional fission plant produces 30 tons of extremely high-level nuclear
waste per year. By contrast, the nuclear waste created by a fusion ma-
chine would be mainly the radioactive steel left over when the reactor
is finally decommissioned.)

Fusion will not completely solve the Earth's energy crisis anytime
in the near future; Pierre-Gilles de Gennes, French Nobel laureate in

P U R S E R S AND D E A T H S T A R S 47
physics, has said, "We say that we will put the sun into a box. The idea
is pretty. The problem is, we don't know how to make the box." But if
all goes well, researchers are hopeful that within forty years the ITER
may pave the way for commercialization of fusion energy, energy that
can provide electricity for our homes. One day, fusion reactors may al-
leviate our energy problem, safely releasing the power of the sun on
the Earth.

But even magnetic confinement fusion reactors would not provide
enough energy to energize a Death Star weapon. For that we would
need an entirely new design.

N U C L E A R - F I R E D X - R A Y L A S E R S

There is one other possibility for simulating a Death Star laser cannon
with today's known technology, and that is with a hydrogen bomb. A
battery of X-ray lasers harnessing and focusing the power of nuclear
weapons could in theory generate enough energy to operate a device
that could incinerate an entire planet.

The nuclear force, pound for pound, releases about 100 million
times more energy than a chemical reaction. A piece of enriched ura-
nium no bigger than a baseball is enough to incinerate an entire city
in a fiery ball-even though only 1 percent of its mass has been con-
verted to energy. As we discussed, there are a number of ways of inject-
ing energy into a laser beam. By far the most powerful of all is to use
the force unleashed by a nuclear bomb.

X-ray lasers have enormous scientific as well as military value. Be-
cause of their very short wavelength they can be used to probe atomic
distances and decipher the atomic structure of complicated molecules,
a feat that is extraordinarily difficult using ordinary methods. A whole
new window on chemical reactions opens up when you can "see" the
atoms themselves in motion and in their proper arrangement inside a
molecule.

Because a hydrogen bomb emits a huge amount of energy in the

48 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

X-ray range, X-ray lasers can also be energized by nuclear weapons.

The person most closely associated with the X-ray laser is the physi-
cist Edward Teller, father of the hydrogen bomb.

Teller, of course, was the physicist who testified before Congress in
the 1950s that Robert Oppenheimer, who had headed the Manhattan

Project, could not be trusted to continue work on the hydrogen bomb
because of his politics. Teller's testimony led to Oppenheimer's being
disgraced and having his security clearance revoked; many prominent
physicists never forgave Teller for what he did.

(My own contact with Teller dates from when I was in high school.

I conducted a series of experiments on the nature of antimatter and
won the grand prize in the San Francisco science fair and a trip to the

National Science Fair in Albuquerque, New Mexico. I appeared on local

TV with Teller, who was interested in bright young physicists. Eventu-
ally I was awarded Teller's Hertz Engineering Scholarship, which paid
for my college education at Harvard. I got to know his family fairly well
through visits to the Teller household in Berkeley several times a year.)

Basically, Teller's X-ray laser is a small nuclear bomb surrounded
by copper rods. The detonation of the nuclear weapon releases a
spherical shock wave of intense X-rays. These energetic rays then pass
through copper rods, which act as the lasing material, focusing the
power of the X-rays into intense beams. These beams of X-rays could
then be directed at enemy warheads. Of course, such a device could be
used only once, since the nuclear detonation causes the X-ray laser to
self-destruct.

The initial test of the nuclear-powered X-ray laser was called the

Cabra test, and it took place in 1983 in an underground shaft. A hydro-
gen bomb was detonated whose flood of incoherent X-rays was then
focused into a coherent X-ray laser beam. Initially, the test was
deemed a success, and in fact in 1983 it helped to inspire President

Ronald Reagan to announce, in a historic speech, his intent to build a

"Star Wars" defensive shield. Thus was set in motion a multibillion-
dollar effort that continues even to this day to build an array of devices
like the nuclear-powered X-ray laser to shoot down enemy ICBMs.

(Later investigation showed that the detector used to perform the mea-

P U R S E R S RND D E R T H S T R R S 49
surements during the Cabra test was destroyed; hence its readings
could not be trusted.)

Can such a controversial device in fact be used today to shoot
down ICBM warheads? Perhaps. But an enemy could use a variety of
simple, inexpensive methods to nullify such weapons (for example, the
enemy could release millions of cheap decoys to fool radar, or spin its
warheads to disperse the X-rays, or emit a chemical coating to protect
against the X-ray beam). Or an enemy might simply mass-produce
warheads to penetrate a Star Wars defensive shield.

So a nuclear-powered X-ray laser today is impractical as a missile
defense system. But would it be possible to create a Death Star to use
against an approaching asteroid, or to annihilate an entire planet?

T H E P H Y S I C S O F A D E A T H S T A R

Can weapons be created that could destroy an entire planet, as in Star
fVars? In theory, the answer is yes. There are several ways in which
they might be created.

First, there is no physical limit to the energy that can be released
by a hydrogen bomb. Here's how this works. (The precise outlines of
the hydrogen bomb are top secret and classified even today by the U.S.

government, but the broad outlines are well known.) A hydrogen
bomb is actually built in many stages. By properly stacking these
stages in sequence, one could produce a nuclear bomb of almost arbi-
trary magnitude.

The first stage is a standard fission bomb, using the power of ura-
nium-235 to release a burst of X-rays, as was done in the Hiroshima
bomb. In the fraction of a second before the blast from the atomic
bomb blows everything apart, the expanding sphere of X-rays outraces
the blast (since it travels at the speed of light) and is then refocused
onto a container of lithium deuteride, the active substance of a hydro-
gen bomb. (Precisely how this is done is still classified.) The X-rays
striking the lithium deuteride causes it to collapse and heat up to mil-
lions of degrees, causing a second explosion, much larger than the

50 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
first. The burst of X-rays from this hydrogen bomb can then be refo-
cused onto a second piece of lithium deuteride, creating a third explo-
sion. In this way, one could stack lithium deuteride side by side and
create a hydrogen bomb of unimaginable magnitude. In fact, the
largest hydrogen bomb ever built was a two-stage bomb detonated by
the Soviet Union back in 1961, packing the energy of 50 million tons of

TNT, although it was theoretically capable of a blast of over 100 mil-
lion tons of TNT (or about five thousand times the power of the Hi-
roshima bomb).

To incinerate an entire planet, however, is something of an entirely
different magnitude. For this, the Death Star would have to launch
thousands of such X-ray lasers into space, and they would then be re-
quired to fire all at once. (By comparison, remember that at the height
of the cold war the United States and the Soviet Union each accumu-
lated about thirty thousand nuclear bombs.) The collective energy
from such an enormous number of X-ray lasers would be enough to
incinerate the surface of a planet. So it would certainly be possible for
a Galactic Empire hundreds of thousands of years into the future to
create such a weapon.

For a very advanced civilization, there is a second option: to create
a Death Star using the energy of a gamma ray burster. Such a Death

Star would unleash a burst of radiation second only to the big bang.

Gamma ray bursters occur naturally in outer space, but it is conceiv-
able that an advanced civilization could harness their vast power. By
controlling the spin of a star well before it undergoes a collapse and
unleashes a hypernova, one might be able to aim the gamma ray
burster at any point in space.

G A M M A R A Y B U R S T E R S

Gamma ray bursters were actually first seen in the 1970s, when the

U.S. military launched the Vela satellite to detect "nukeflashes" (evi-
dence of an unauthorized detonation of a nuclear bomb). But instead
of spotting nukeflashes, the Vela satellite detected huge bursts of radi-

P U R S E R S RND D E R T H S T A R S 51
ation from space. Initially this discovery set off a panic in the Pentagon:

were the Soviets testing a new nuclear weapon in outer space? Later it
was determined that these bursts of radiation were coming uniformly
from all directions of the sky, meaning that they were actually coming
from outside the Milky Way galaxy. But if they were extragalactic, they
must be releasing truly astronomical amounts of power, enough to
light up the entire visible universe.

When the Soviet Union broke apart in 1990, a huge body of astro-
nomical data was suddenly declassified by the Pentagon, overwhelming
astronomers. Suddenly astronomers realized that a new, mysterious
phenomenon was staring them in the face, one that would require re-
writing the science textbooks.

Since gamma ray bursters last from only a few seconds to a few
minutes before they disappear, an elaborate system of sensors is re-
quired to spot and analyze them. First, satellites detect the initial burst
of radiation and send the exact coordinates of the burster back to

Earth. These coordinates are then relayed to optical or radio tele-
scopes, which zero in on the exact location of the gamma ray burster.

Although many details must still be clarified, one theory about the
origins of gamma ray bursters is that they are "hypernovae" of enor-
mous strength, which leave massive black holes in their wake. It ap-
pears as if gamma ray bursters are monster black holes in formation.

But black holes emit two "jets" of radiation, one from the north
pole and one from the south pole, like a spinning top. The radiation
seen from a distant gamma ray burster is apparently one of the jets
that is aligned toward the Earth. If the jet of a gamma ray burster were
aimed at the Earth, and the gamma ray burster were in our galactic
neighborhood (a few hundred light-years from Earth), its power would
be enough to destroy all life on our planet.

Initially the gamma ray burster's X-ray pulse would create an elec-
tromagnetic pulse that would wipe out all electronics equipment on
the Earth. Its intense beam of X-rays and gamma rays would be
enough to damage the atmosphere of the Earth, destroying our protec-
tive ozone layer. The jet of the gamma ray burster would then heat up
temperatures on the surface of the Earth, eventually setting off mon-

52 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
ster firestorms that would engulf the entire planet The gamma ray
burster might not actually explode the entire planet, as in the movie

Star Wars, but it would certainly destroy all life, leaving a scorched,
barren planet.

Conceivably, a civilization hundreds of thousands to a million
years more advanced than ours might be able to aim such a black hole
in the direction of a target. This could be done by deflecting the path of
planets and neutron stars into the dying star at a precise angle just be-
fore it collapses. This deflection would be enough to change the spin
axis of the star so that it could be aimed in a certain direction. A dying
star would make the largest ray gun imaginable.

In summary, the use of powerful lasers to create portable or hand-
held ray guns and light sabers can be classified as a Class I impossibil-
ity-something that is possible in the near future or perhaps within a
century. But the extreme challenge of aiming a spinning star before it
erupts into a black hole and transforming it into a Death Star would
have to be considered a Class II impossibility-something that clearly
does not violate the laws of physics (such gamma ray bursters exist)

but something that might be possible only thousands to millions of
years in the future.

How wonderful that we have met with paradox. Now we have some
hope of making progress.

- N I E L S BOHR

I canna' change the laws of physics, Captain!

-SCOTTY, CHIEF ENGINEER IN STAR TREK

Teleportation, or the ability to transport a person or object instantly
from one place to another, is a technology that could change the
course of civilization and alter the destiny of nations. It could irrevoca-
bly alter the rules of warfare: armies could teleport troops behind en-
emy lines or simply teleport the enemy's leadership and capture them.

Today's transportation system-from cars and ships to airplanes and
railroads, and all the many industries that service these systems-
would become obsolete; we could simply teleport ourselves to work
and our goods to market. Vacations would become effortless, as we
teleport ourselves to our destination. Teleportation would change
everything.

The earliest mention of teleportation can be found in religious
texts such as the Bible, where spirits whisk individuals away. This pas-
sage from Acts in the New Testament seems to suggest the teleporta-
tion of Philip from Gaza to Azotus: "When they came up out of the

54 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
water, the Spirit of the Lord suddenly took Philip away, and the eunuch
did not see him again, but went on his way rejoicing. Philip, however,
appeared at Azotus and traveled about, preaching the gospel in all the
towns until he reached Caesarea" (Acts 8:36-40).

Teleportation is also part of every magician's bag of tricks and illu-
sions: pulling rabbits out of a hat, cards out of his or her sleeves, and
coins from behind someone's ear. One of the more ambitious magic
tricks of recent times featured an elephant disappearing before the
eyes of a startled audience. In this demonstration a huge elephant,
weighing many tons, was placed inside a cage. Then, with a flick of a
magician's wand, the elephant vanished, much to the amazement of
the audience. (Of course, the elephant really did not disappear. The
trick was performed with mirrors. Long, thin, vertical mirror strips
were placed behind each bar of the cage. Like a gate, each of these ver-
tical mirror strips could be made to swivel. At the start of the magic
trick, when all these vertical mirror strips were aligned behind the
bars, the mirrors could not be seen and the elephant was visible. But
when the mirrors were rotated by 45 degrees to face the audience, the
elephant disappeared, and the audience was left staring at the reflected
image from the side of the cage.)

T E L E P O R T A T I O N A N D S C I E N C E F I C T I O N

The earliest mention of teleportation in science fiction occurred in Ed-
ward Page Mitchell's story "The Man Without a Body," published in

1877. In that story a scientist was able to disassemble the atoms of a cat
and transmit them over a telegraph wire. Unfortunately the battery
died while the scientist was trying to teleport himself. Only his head
was successfully teleported.

Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, best known for his Sherlock Holmes nov-
els, was fascinated by the notion of teleportation. After years of writing
detective novels and short stories he began to tire of the Sherlock

Holmes series and eventually killed off his sleuth, having him plunge
to his death with Professor Moriarty over a waterfall. But the public

T E L E P O R T A T I O N 55
outcry was so great that Doyle was forced to resurrect the detective.

Because he couldn't kill off Sherlock Holmes, Doyle instead decided to
create an entirely new series, featuring Professor Challenger, who was
the counterpart of Sherlock Holmes. Both had a quick wit and a sharp
eye for solving mysteries. But while Mr. Holmes used cold, deductive
logic to break open complex cases, Professor Challenger explored the
dark world of spirituality and paranormal phenomena, including tele-
portation. In the 1927 novel The Disintegration Machine, the professor
encountered a gentleman who had invented a machine that could dis-
integrate a person and then reassemble him somewhere else. But Pro-
fessor Challenger is horrified when the inventor boasts that his
invention could, in the wrong hands, disintegrate entire cities with
millions of people with a push of a button. Professor Challenger then
uses the machine to disintegrate the inventor, and leaves the labora-
tory, without reassembling him.

More recently Hollywood has discovered teleportation. The 1958
film The Fly graphically examined what could happen when teleporta-
tion goes horribly awry. When a scientist successfully teleports himself
across a room, his atoms mix with those of a fly that accidentally en-
tered the teleportation chamber, so the scientist turns into a gro-
tesquely mutated monster, half human and half fly. (A remake
featuring Jeff Goldblum was released in 1986.)

Teleportation first became prominent in popular culture with the

Star Trek series. Gene Roddenberry, Star TreKs creator, introduced
teleportation into the series because the Paramount Studio budget did
not allow for the costly special effects needed to simulate rocket ships
taking off and landing on distant planets. It was cheaper simply to
beam the crew of the Enterprise to their destination.

Over the years any number of objections have been raised by sci-
entists about the possibility of teleportation. To teleport someone, you
would have to know the precise location of every atom in a living body,
which would probably violate the Heisenberg uncertainty principle

(which states that you cannot know both the precise location and the
velocity of an electron). The producers of the Star Trek series, bowing
to the critics, introduced "Heisenberg Compensators" in the trans-

56 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
porter room, as if one could compensate for the laws of quantum
physics by adding a gadget to the transporter. But as it turns out, the
need to create these Heisenberg Compensators might have been pre-
mature. Early critics and scientists may have been wrong.

T E L E P O R T A T I O N A N D T H E Q U A N T U M T H E O R Y

According to Newtonian theory, teleportation is clearly impossible.

Newton's laws are based on the idea that matter is made of tiny, hard
billiard balls. Objects do not move until they are pushed; objects do not
suddenly disappear and reappear somewhere else.

But in the quantum theory, that's precisely what particles can do.

Newton's laws, which held sway for 250 years, were overthrown in

1925 when Werner Heisenberg, Erwin Schrodinger, and their col-
leagues developed the quantum theory. When analyzing the bizarre
properties of atoms, physicists discovered that electrons acted like
waves and could make quantum leaps in their seemingly chaotic mo-
tions within the atom.

The man most closely associated with these quantum waves is the

Viennese physicist Erwin Schrodinger, who wrote down the celebrated
wave equation that bears his name, one of the most important in all of
physics and chemistry. Entire courses in graduate school are devoted
to solving his famous equation, and entire walls of physics libraries are
full of books that examine its profound consequences. In principle, the
sum total of all of chemistry can be reduced to solutions to this equa-
tion.

In 1905 Einstein had shown that waves of light can have particle-
like properties; that is, they can be described as packets of energy called
photons. But by the 1920s it was becoming apparent to Schrodinger
that the opposite was also true: that particles like electrons could ex-
hibit wavelike behavior. This idea was first pointed out by French phys-
icist Louis de Broglie, who won the Nobel Prize for this conjecture.

(We demonstrate this to our undergraduate students at our university.

We fire electrons inside a cathode ray tube, like those commonly found

T E L E P O R T H T I O N 57
in TVs. The electrons pass through a tiny hole, so normally you would
expect to see a tiny dot where the electrons hit the TV screen. Instead
you find concentric, wavelike rings, which you would expect if a wave
had passed through the hole, not a point particle.)

One day Schrodinger gave a lecture on this curious phenomenon.

He was challenged by a fellow physicist, Peter Debye, who asked him:

If electrons are described by waves, then what is their wave equation?

Ever since Newton created the calculus, physicists had been able to
describe waves in terms of differential equations, so Schrodinger took

Debye's question as a challenge to write down the differential equation
for electron waves. That month Schrodinger went on vacation, and
when he came back he had that equation. So in the same way that

Maxwell before him had taken the force fields of Faraday and extracted

Maxwell's equations for light, Schrodinger took the matter-waves of de

Broglie and extracted Schrodinger's equations for electrons.

(Historians of science have spent some effort trying to track down
precisely what Schrodinger was doing when he discovered his cele-
brated equation that forever changed the landscape of modern physics
and chemistry. Apparently, Schrodinger was a believer in free love and
would often be accompanied on vacation by his mistresses and his
wife. He even kept a detailed diary account of all his numerous lovers,
with elaborate codes concerning each encounter. Historians now be-
lieve that he was in the Villa Herwig in the Alps with one of his girl-
friends the weekend that he discovered his equation.)

When Schrodinger began to solve his equation for the hydrogen
atom, he found, much to his surprise, the precise energy levels of hy-
drogen that had been carefully catalogued by previous physicists. He
then realized that the old picture of the atom by Niels Bohr showing
electrons whizzing around the nucleus (which is used even today in
books and advertisements when trying to symbolize modern science)

was actually wrong. These orbits would have to be replaced by waves
surrounding the nucleus.

Schrodinger's work sent shock waves, as well, through the physics
community. Suddenly physicists were able to peer inside the atom it-
self, to examine in detail the waves that made up its electron shells,

58 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
and to extract precise predictions for these energy levels that fit the
data perfectly.

But there was still a nagging question that haunts physics even to-
day. If the electron is described by a wave, then what is waving? This
has been answered by physicist Max Born, who said that these waves
are actually waves of probability. These waves tell you only the chance
of finding a particular electron at any place and any time. In other
words, the electron is a particle, but the probability of finding that par-
ticle is given by Schrodinger's wave. The larger the wave, the greater
the chance of finding the particle at that point

With these developments, suddenly chance and probability were
being introduced right into the heart of physics, which previously had
given us precise predictions and detailed trajectories of particles, from
planets to comets to cannon balls.

This uncertainty was finally codified by Heisenberg when he pro-
posed the uncertainty principle, that is, the concept that you cannot
know both the exact velocity and the position of an electron at the
same time. Nor can you know its exact energy, measured over a given
amount of time. At the quantum level all the basic laws of common
sense are violated: electrons can disappear and reappear elsewhere,
and electrons can be many places at the same time.

(Ironically, Einstein, the godfather of the quantum theory who
helped to start the revolution in 1905, and Schrodinger, who gave us
the wave equation, were horrified by the introduction of chance into
fundamental physics. Einstein wrote, "Quantum mechanics calls for a
great deal of respect But some inner voice tells me that this is not the
true Jacob. The theory offers a lot, but it hardly brings us any closer to
the Old Man's secret. For my part, at least, I am convinced that He
doesn't throw dice.")

Heisenberg's theory was revolutionary and controversial-but it
worked. In one sweep, physicists could explain a vast number of puz-
zling phenomena, including the laws of chemistry. To impress my

Ph.D. students with just how bizarre the quantum theory is, I some-
times ask them to calculate the probability that their atoms will sud-
denly dissolve and reappear on the other side of a brick wall. Such a

T E L E P O R T A T I O N 59
teleportation event is impossible under Newtonian physics but is actu-
ally allowed under quantum mechanics. The answer, however, is that
one would have to wait longer than the lifetime of the universe for this
to occur. (If you used a computer to graph the Schrodinger wave of
your own body, you would find that it very much resembles all the fea-
tures of your body, except that the graph would be a bit fuzzy, with
some of your waves oozing out in all directions. Some of your waves
would extend even as far as the distant stars. So there is a very tiny
probability that one day you might wake up on a distant planet.)

The fact that electrons can seemingly be many places at the same
time forms the very basis of chemistry. We know that electrons circle
around the nucleus of an atom, like a miniature solar system. But
atoms and solar systems are quite different; if two solar systems col-
lide in outer space, the solar systems break apart and planets are flung
into deep space. Yet when atoms collide they often form molecules that
are perfectly stable, sharing electrons between them. In high school
chemistry class the teacher often represents this with a "smeared elec-
tron," which resembles a football, connecting the two atoms together.

But what chemistry teachers rarely tell their students is that the
electron is not "smeared" between two atoms at all. This "football" ac-
tually represents the probability that the electron is in many places at
the same time within the football. In other words, all of chemistry,
which explains the molecules inside our bodies, is based on the idea
that electrons can be many places at the same time, and it is this shar-
ing of electrons between two atoms that holds the molecules of our
body together. Without the quantum theory, our molecules and atoms
would dissolve instantly

This peculiar but profound property of the quantum theory (that
there is a finite probability that even the most bizarre events may hap-
pen) was exploited by Douglas Adams in his hilarious novel The Hitch-
hiker's Guide to the Galaxy. He needed a convenient way to whiz
through the galaxy, so he invented the Infinite Improbability Drive, "a
wonderful new method of crossing vast interstellar distances in a mere
nothingth of a second, without all that tedious mucking around in hy-
perspace." His machine enables you to change the odds of any quan-

60 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
turn event at will, so that even highly improbable events become com-
monplace. So if you want to jet off to the nearest star system, you would
simply change the probability that you will rematerialize on that star,
and voila! You would be instantly teleported there.

In reality the quantum "jumps" so common inside the atom can-
not be easily generalized to large objects such as people, which con-
tain trillions upon trillions of atoms. Even if the electrons in our body
are dancing and jumping in their fantastic journey around the nu-
cleus, there are so many of them that their motions average out. That
is, roughly speaking, why at our level substances seem solid and per-
manent.

So while teleportation is allowed at the atomic level, one would
have to wait longer than the lifetime of the universe to actually witness
these bizarre effects on a macroscopic scale. But can one use the laws
of the quantum theory to create a machine to teleport something on
demand, as in science fiction stories? Surprisingly, the answer is a
qualified yes.

T H E E P R E X P E R I M E N T

The key to quantum teleportation lies in a celebrated 1935 paper by Al-
bert Einstein and his colleagues Boris Podolsky and Nathan Rosen,
who, ironically, proposed the EPR experiment (named for the three
authors) to kill off, once and for all, the introduction of probability into
physics. (Bemoaning the undeniable experimental successes of the
quantum theory, Einstein wrote, "the more success the quantum the-
ory has, the sillier it looks")

If two electrons are initially vibrating in unison (a state called co-
herence) they can remain in wavelike synchronization even if they are
separated by a large distance. Although the two electrons may be sep-
arated by light-years, there is still an invisible Schrodinger wave con-
necting both of them, like an umbilical cord. If something happens to
one electron, then some of that information is immediately transmit-
ted to the other. This is called "quantum entanglement," the concept

T E L E P O R T A T I O N 6 i
that particles vibrating in coherence have some kind of deep connec-
tion linking them together.

Let's start with two coherent electrons oscillating in unison. Next,
let them go flying out in opposite directions. Each electron is like a
spinning top. The spins of each electron can be pointed up or down.

Let's say that the total spin of the system is zero, so that if the spin of
one electron is up, then you know automatically that the spin of the
other electron is down. According to the quantum theory, before you
make a measurement, the electron is spinning neither up nor down
but exists in a nether state where it is spinning both up and down si-
multaneously. (Once you make an observation, the wave function "col-
lapses," leaving a particle in a definite state.)

Next, measure the spin of one electron. It is, say, spinning up. Then
you know instantly that the spin of the other electron is down. Even if
the electrons are separated by many light-years, you instantly know
the spin of the second electron as soon as you measure the spin of the
first electron. In fact, you know this faster than the speed of lightl Be-
cause these two electrons are "entangled," that is, their wave functions
beat in unison, their wave functions are connected by an invisible

"thread" or umbilical cord. Whatever happens to one automatically
has an effect on the other. (This means, in some sense, that what
happens to us automatically affects things instantaneously in distant
corners of the universe, since our wave functions were probably en-
tangled at the beginning of time. In some sense there is a web of en-
tanglement that connects distant corners of the universe, including
us.) Einstein derisively called this "spooky-action-at-distance," and
this phenomenon enabled him to "prove" that the quantum theory was
wrong, in his mind, since nothing can travel faster than the speed of
light.

Originally, Einstein designed the EPR experiment to serve as the
death knell of the quantum theory. But in the 1980s Alan Aspect and
his colleagues in France performed this experiment with two detectors
separated by 13 meters, measuring the spins of photons emitted from
calcium atoms, and the results agreed precisely with the quantum the-
ory. Apparently God does play dice with the universe.

62 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Did information really travel faster than light? Was Einstein wrong
about the speed of light being the speed limit of the universe? Not
really. Information did travel faster than the speed of light, but the in-
formation was random, and hence useless. You cannot send a real
message, or Morse code, via the EPR experiment even if information
is traveling faster than light.

Knowing that an electron on the other side of the universe is spin-
ning down is useless information. You cannot send today's stock quo-
tations via this method. For example, let's say that a friend always
wears one red and one green sock, in random order. Let's say you ex-
amine one leg, and the leg has a red sock on it. Then you know, faster
than the speed of light, that the other sock is green. Information actu-
ally traveled faster than light, but this information is useless. No signal
containing nonrandom information can be sent via this method.

For years the EPR experiment was used as an example of the re-
sounding victory of the quantum theory over its critics, but it was a
hollow victory with no practical consequences. Until now.

Q U A N T U M T E L E P O R T A T I O N

Everything changed in 1993, when scientists at IBM, led by Charles

Bennett, showed that it was physically possible to teleport objects, at
least at the atomic level, using the EPR experiment (More precisely,
they showed that you could teleport all the information contained
within a particle.) Since then physicists have been able to teleport pho-
tons and even entire cesium atoms. Within a few decades scientists
may be able to teleport the first DNA molecule and virus.

Quantum teleportation exploits some of the more bizarre proper-
ties of the EPR experiment. In these teleportation experiments physi-
cists start with two atoms, A and C. Let's say we wish to teleport
information from atom A to atom C. We begin by introducing a third
atom, B, which starts out being entangled with C, so B and C are co-
herent. Now atom A comes in contact with atom B. A scans B, so that

T E L E P O R T H T I O N 63
the information content of atom A is transferred to atom B. A and B be-
come entangled in the process. But since B and C were originally en-
tangled, the information within A has now been transferred to atom C.

In conclusion, atom A has now been teleported into atom C, that is, the
information content of A is now identical to that of C.

Notice that the information within atom A has been destroyed (so
we don't have two copies after the teleportation). This means that any-
one being hypothetically teleported would die in the process. But the
information content of his body would appear elsewhere. Notice also
that atom A did not move to the position of atom C. On the contrary, it
is the information within A (e.g., its spin and polarization) that has
been transferred to C. (This does not mean that atom A was dissolved
and then zapped to another location. It means that the information
content of atom A has been transferred to another atom, C.)

Since the original announcement of this breakthrough, progress
has been fiercely competitive as different groups have attempted to
outrace each other. The first historic demonstration of quantum tele-
portation in which photons of ultraviolet light were teleported oc-
curred in 1997 at the University of Innsbruck. This was followed the
next year by experimenters at Cal Tech who did an even more precise
experiment involving teleporting photons.

In 2004 physicists at the University of Vienna were able to teleport
particles of light over a distance of 600 meters beneath the River

Danube, using a fiber-optic cable, setting a new record. (The cable it-
self was 800 meters long and was strung underneath the public sewer
system beneath the River Danube. The sender stood on one side of the
river, and the receiver was on the other.)

One criticism of these experiments is that they were conducted
with photons of light. This is hardly the stuff of science fiction. It was
significant, therefore, in 2004, when quantum teleportation was
demonstrated not with photons of light, but with actual atoms, bring-
ing us a step closer to a more realistic teleportation device. The physi-
cists at the National Institute of Standards and Technology in

Washington, D.C., successfully entangled three beryllium atoms and

64 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
transferred the properties of one atom into another. This achievement
was so significant that it made the cover of Nature magazine. Another
group was able to teleport calcium atoms as well.

In 2006 yet another spectacular advance was made, for the first
time involving a macroscopic object. Physicists at the Niels Bohr Insti-
tute in Copenhagen and the Max Planck Institute in Germany were
able to entangle a light beam with a gas of cesium atoms, a feat involv-
ing trillions upon trillions of atoms. Then they encoded information
contained inside laser pulses and were able to teleport this informa-
tion to the cesium atoms over a distance of about half a yard. "For the
first time," said Eugene Polzik, one of the researchers, quantum tele-
portation "has been achieved between light-the carrier of informa-
tion-and atoms."

T E L E P O R T A T I O N W I T H O U T E N T A N G L E M E N T

Progress in teleportation is rapidly accelerating. In 2007 yet another
breakthrough was made. Physicists proposed a teleportation method
that does not require entanglement. We recall that entanglement is the
single most difficult feature of quantum teleportation. Solving this
problem could open up new vistas in teleportation.

"We're talking about a beam of about 5,000 particles disappearing
from one place and appearing somewhere else," says physicist Aston

Bradley of the Australian Research Council Centre of Excellence for

Quantum Atom Optics in Brisbane, Australia, who helped pioneer a
new method of teleportation.

"We feel that our scheme is closer in spirit to the original fictional
concept," he claims. In their approach, he and his colleagues take a
beam of rubidium atoms, convert all its information into a beam of
light, send this beam of light across a fiber-optic cable, and then recon-
struct the original beam of atoms in a distant location. If his claim
holds up, this method would eliminate the number one stumbling
block to teleportation and open up entirely new ways to teleport in-
creasingly large objects.

T E L E P O R T A T I O N 65

In order to distinguish this new method from quantum teleporta-
tion, Dr. Bradley has called his method "classical teleportation." (This
is a bit misleading, since his method also depends heavily on the quan-
tum theory, but not on entanglement.)

The key to this novel type of teleportation is a new state of matter
called a "Bose Einstein condensate," or BEC, which is one of the cold-
est substances in the entire universe. In nature the coldest temperature
is found in outer space; it is 3 R above absolute zero. (This is due to
residual heat left over from the big bang, which still fills up the uni-
verse.) But a BEC is a millionth to a billionth of a degree above ab-
solute zero, a temperature that can be found only in the laboratory.

When certain forms of matter are cooled down to near absolute
zero, their atoms all tumble down to the lowest energy state, so that all
their atoms vibrate in unison, becoming coherent. The wave functions
of all the atoms overlap, so that, in some sense, a BEC is like a gigan-
tic "super atom," with all the individual atoms vibrating in unison.

This bizarre state of matter was predicted by Einstein and Satyen-
dranath Bose in 1925, but it would be another seventy years, not until

1995, before a BEC was finally created in the lab at MIT and the Uni-
versity of Colorado.

Here's how Bradley and company's teleportation device works.

First they start with a collection of supercold rubidium atoms in a BEC
state. They then apply a beam of matter to the BEC (also made of ru-
bidium atoms). These atoms in the beam also want to tumble down to
the lowest energy state, so they shed their excess energy in the form of
a pulse of light. This light beam is then sent down a fiber-optic cable.

Remarkably the light beam contains all the quantum information nec-
essary to describe the original matter beam (e.g., the location and ve-
locity of all its atoms). Then the light beam hits another BEC, which
then converts the light beam into the original matter beam.

This new teleportation method has tremendous promise, since it
doesn't involve the entanglement of atoms. But this method also has its
problems. It depends crucially on the properties of BECs, which are
difficult to create in the laboratory. Furthermore, the properties of

BECs are quite peculiar, because they behave as if they were one gi-

66 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
gantic atom. In principle, bizarre quantum effects that we see only at
the atomic level can be seen with the naked eye with a BEC. This was
once thought to be impossible.

The immediate practical application of BECs is to create "atomic
lasers." Lasers, of course, are based on coherent beams of photons vi-
brating in unison. But a BEC is a collection of atoms vibrating in uni-
son, so it's possible to create beams of BEC atoms that are all coherent

In other words, a BEC can create the counterpart of the laser, the
atomic laser or matter laser, which is made of BEC atoms. The com-
mercial applications of lasers are enormous, and the commercial ap-
plications of atomic lasers could also be just as profound. But because

BECs exist only at temperatures hovering just above absolute zero,
progress in this field will be slow, albeit steady.

Given the progress we have made, when might we be able to tele-
port ourselves? Physicists hope to teleport complex molecules in the
coming years. After that perhaps a DNA molecule or even a virus may
be teleported within decades. There is nothing in principle to prevent
teleporting an actual person, just as in the science fiction movies, but
the technical problems facing such a feat are truly staggering. It takes
some of the finest physics laboratories in the world just to create co-
herence between tiny photons of light and individual atoms. Creating
quantum coherence involving truly macroscopic objects, such as a
person, is out of the question for a long time to come. In fact, it will
likely take many centuries, or longer, before everyday objects could be
teleported-if it's possible at all.

Q U A N T U M C O M P U T E R S

Ultimately, the fate of quantum teleportation is intimately linked to the
fate of the development of quantum computers. Both use the same
quantum physics and the same technology, so there is intense cross-
fertilization between these two fields. Quantum computers may one
day replace the familiar digital computer sitting on our desks. In fact,

T E L E P O R T H T I O M 67
the future of the world's economy may one day depend on such com-
puters, so there is enormous commercial interest in these technolo-
gies. One day Silicon Valley could become a Rust Belt, replaced by new
technologies emerging from quantum computing.

Ordinary computers compute on a binary system of Os and Is,
called bits. But quantum computers are far more powerful. They can
compute on qubits, which can take values between 0 and 1. Think of
an atom placed in a magnetic field. It is spinning like a top, so its spin
axis can point either up or down. Common sense tells us that the spin
of the atom can be either up or down but not both at the same time. But
in the strange world of the quantum, the atom is described as the sum
of two states, the sum of an atom spinning up and an atom spinning
down. In the netherworld of the quantum, every object is described by
the sum of all possible states. (If large objects, like cats, are described
in this quantum fashion, it means that you have to add the wave func-
tion of a live cat to that of a dead cat, so the cat is neither dead nor alive,
as I will discuss in greater detail in Chapter 13.)

Now imagine a string of atoms aligned in a magnetic field, with the
spin aligned in one fashion. If a laser beam is shone on this string of
atoms the laser beam will bounce off this collection of atoms, flipping
the spin axis of some of the atoms. By measuring the difference be-
tween the incoming and outgoing laser beam, we have accomplished
a complicated quantum "calculation," involving the flipping of many
spins.

Quantum computers are still in their infancy. The world's record
for a quantum computation is 3 x 5 = 15, hardly a calculation that will
supplant today's supercomputers. Quantum teleportation and quan-
tum computers both share the same fatal weakness: maintaining co-
herence for large collections of atoms. If this problem can be solved, it
would be an enormous breakthrough in both fields.

The CIA and other secret organizations are intensely interested in
quantum computers. Many of the world's secret codes depend on a

"key," which is a very large integer, and one's ability to factor it into
prime numbers. If the key is the product of two numbers, each with

68 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
one hundred digits, then it might take a digital computer more than a
hundred years to find these two factors from scratch. Such a code is es-
sentially unbreakable today.

But in 1994 Peter Shor of Bell Labs showed that factoring large
numbers could be child's play for a quantum computer. This discovery
immediately piqued the interest of the intelligence community. In
principle a quantum computer could break all the world's codes,
throwing the security of today's computer systems into total disorder.

The first country that is able to build such a system would be able to
unlock the deepest secrets of other nations and organizations.

Some scientists have speculated that in the future the world's econ-
omy might depend on quantum computers. Silicon-based digital com-
puters are expected to reach their physical limits in terms of increased
computer power sometime after 2020. A new, more powerful family of
computers might be necessary if technology is going to continue to ad-
vance. Others are exploring the possibility of reproducing the power of
the human brain via quantum computers.

The stakes, therefore, are very high. If we can solve the problem of
coherence, not only might we be able to solve the challenge of telepor-
tation; we might also have the ability to advance technology of all
kinds in untold ways via quantum computers. This breakthrough is so
important that I will return to this discussion in later chapters.

As I pointed out earlier, coherence is extraordinarily difficult to
maintain in the lab. The tiniest vibration could upset the coherence of
two atoms and destroy the computation. Today it is very difficult to
maintain coherence in more than just a handful of atoms. Atoms that
are originally in phase begin to decohere within a matter of nanosec-
onds to, at best, a second. Teleportation must be done very rapidly, be-
fore the atoms begin to decohere, thus placing another restriction on
quantum computation and teleportation.

In spite of these challenges, David Deutsch of Oxford University
believes that these problems can be overcome: "With luck, and with
the help of recent theoretical advances, [a quantum computer] may
take a lot less than 50 years It would be an entirely new way of har-
nessing nature."

T E L E P O R T A T I O N 69

To build a useful quantum computer we would need to have hun-
dreds to millions of atoms vibrating in unison, an achievement far
beyond our capabilities today. Teleporting Captain Kirk would be as-
tronomically difficult. We would have to create a quantum entangle-
ment with a twin of Captain Kirk. Even with nanotechnology and
advanced computers, it is difficult to see how this could be accom-
plished.

So teleportation exists at the atomic level, and we may eventually
teleport complex and even organic molecules within a few decades.

But the teleportation of a macroscopic object will have to wait for sev-
eral decades to centuries beyond that, or longer, if indeed it is even
possible. Therefore teleporting complex molecules, perhaps even a
virus or a living cell, qualifies as a Class I impossibility, one that
should be possible within this century. But teleporting a human being,
although it is allowed by the laws of physics, may take many centuries
beyond that, assuming it is possible at all. Hence I would qualify that
kind of teleportation as a Class II impossibility.

If you haven't found something strange during the day,
it hasn't been much of a day.

-JOHN WHEELER

Only those who attempt the absurd will achieve the impossible.

- M . C. ESCHER

A. E. van Vogt's novel Slan captures the vast potential and our darkest
fears associated with the power of telepathy.

Jommy Cross, the protagonist in the novel, is a "slan," a dying race
of superintelligent telepaths.

His parents were brutally murdered by enraged mobs of humans,
who fear and despise all telepaths, because of the enormous power
wielded by those who can intrude on their private, most intimate
thoughts. Humans mercilessly hunt down the slans like animals. With
their characteristic tendrils growing out of their heads, slans are easy
to spot In the course of the book, Jommy tries to make contact with
other slans who might have fled into outer space to escape the witch
hunts of humans determined to exterminate them.

Historically, mind reading has been seen as so important that it
has often been associated with the gods. One of the most fundamental
powers of any god is the ability to read our minds and hence answer

T E L E P A T H Y 71
our deepest prayers. A true telepath who could read minds at will
could easily become the wealthiest, most powerful person on Earth,
able to enter into the minds of Wall Street bankers or to blackmail and
coerce his rivals. He would pose a threat to the security of govern-
ments. He could effortlessly steal a nation's most sensitive secrets. Like
the slans, he would be feared and perhaps hunted down.

The enormous power of a true telepath was highlighted in the
landmark Foundation series by Isaac Asimov, often touted as one of
the greatest science fiction epics of all time. A Galactic Empire that has
ruled for thousands of years is on the verge of collapse and ruin. A se-
cret society of scientists, called the Second Foundation, uses complex
equations to predict that the Empire will eventually fall and plunge
civilization into thirty thousand years of darkness. The scientists draft
an elaborate plan based on their equations in an effort to reduce this
collapse of civilization down to just a few thousand years. But then di-
saster strikes. Their elaborate equations fail to predict a single event,
the birth of a mutant called the Mule, who is capable of controlling
minds over great distances and hence able to seize control of the

Galactic Empire. The galaxy is doomed to thirty thousand years of
chaos and anarchy unless this telepath can be stopped.

Although science fiction is full of fantastic tales concerning tele-
paths, the reality is much more mundane. Because thoughts are pri-
vate and invisible, for centuries charlatans and swindlers have taken
advantage of the naive and gullible among us. One simple parlor trick
used by magicians and mentalists is to use a shill-an accomplice
planted in the audience whose mind is then "read" by the mentalist

The careers of several magicians and mentalists, in fact, have been
based on the famous "hat trick," in which people write private mes-
sages on strips of paper, which are then placed in a hat. The magician
then proceeds to tell the audience what is written on each strip of pa-
per, amazing everyone. There is a deceptively simple explanation for
this ingenious trick (see the notes).

One of the most famous cases of telepathy did not involve a shill
but an animal, Clever Hans, a wonder horse that astonished European
audiences in the 1890s. Clever Hans, to the amazement of audiences,

72 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
could perform complex mathematical feats of calculation. If, for exam-
ple, you asked Clever Hans to divide 48 by 6, the horse would beat its
hoof 8 times. Clever Hans, in fact, could divide, multiply, add fractions,
spell, and even identify musical tones. Clever Hans's fans declared that
he was either more intelligent than many humans, or he could tele-
pathically pick people's brains.

But Clever Hans was not the product of some clever trickery. The
marvelous ability of Clever Hans to perform arithmetic even fooled his
trainer. In 1904 prominent psychologist Professor C. Strumpf was
brought in to analyze the horse and could find no obvious evidence of
trickery or covert signaling to the horse, only adding to the public's fas-
cination with Clever Hans. Three years later, however, Strumpf's stu-
dent, psychologist Oskar Pfungst, did much more rigorous testing and
finally discovered Clever Hans's secret All he really did was observe
the subtle facial expressions of his trainer. The horse would continue
to beat his hoofs until his trainer's facial expression changed slightly,
at which point he would stop beating. Clever Hans could not read peo-
ple's minds or perform arithmetic; he was simply a shrewd observer of
people's faces.

There have been other "telepathic" animals in recorded history. As
early as 1591 a horse named Morocco became famous in England and
made a fortune for his owner by picking out people in the audience,
pointing out letters of the alphabet, and adding the total of a pair of
dice. He caused such a sensation in England that Shakespeare immor-
talized him in his play Love's Labour's Lost as "the dancing horse."

Gamblers also are able to read people's minds in a limited sense.

When a person sees something pleasurable, the pupils of his eyes usu-
ally dilate. When he sees something undesirable (or performs a math-
ematical calculation), his pupils contract. Gamblers can read the
emotions of their poker-faced opponents by looking for their eyes to di-
late or contract. This is one reason that gamblers often wear colored
visors over their eyes, to shield their pupils. One can also bounce a
laser beam off a person's pupil and analyze where it is reflected, and
thereby determine precisely where a person is looking. By analyzing
the motion of the reflected dot of laser light, one can determine how a

T E L E P A T H Y 73
person scans a picture. By combining these two technologies, one can
then determine a person's emotional reaction as he scans a picture, all
without his permission.

P S Y C H I C A L R E S E A R C H

The first scientific studies of telepathy and other paranormal phenom-
enon were conducted by the Society for Psychical Research, founded in

London in 1882. (The term "mental telepathy" was coined that year by

F. W. Myers, an associate of the society.) Past presidents of this society
included some of the most notable figures of the nineteenth century.

The society, which still exists today, was able to debunk the claims of
many frauds, but was often split between the spiritualists, who firmly
believed in the paranormal, and the scientists, who wanted more seri-
ous scientific study.

One researcher connected with the society, Dr. Joseph Banks

Rhine, began the first systematic and rigorous study of psychic phe-
nomena in the United States in 1927, founding the Rhine Institute (now
called the Rhine Research Center) at Duke University, North Carolina.

For decades he and his wife, Louisa, conducted some of the first scien-
tifically controlled experiments in the United States on a wide variety of
parapsychological phenomena and published them in peer-reviewed
publications. It was Rhine who coined the term "extrasensory percep-
tion" (ESP) in one of his first books.

Rhine's laboratory, in fact, set the standard for psychic research.

One of his associates, Dr. Karl Zener, developed the five-symbol card
system, now known as Zener cards, for analyzing telepathic powers.

The vast majority of results showed absolutely no evidence of telepa-
thy. But a small minority of experiments seemed to show small but re-
markable correlations in the data that could not be explained by pure
chance. The problem was that these experiments often could not be
duplicated by other researchers.

Although Rhine tried to establish a reputation for rigor, his repu-
tation was somewhat tarnished by an encounter with a horse called

74 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Lady Wonder. This horse could perform dazzling feats of telepathy,
such as knocking over toy alphabet blocks and thereby spelling out
words that members of an audience were thinking. Rhine apparently
did not know about the Clever Hans effect. In 1927 Rhine analyzed

Lady Wonder in some detail and concluded, "There is left then, only
the telepathic explanation, the transference of mental influence by an
unknown process. Nothing was discovered that failed to accord with it,
and no other hypothesis proposed seems tenable in view of the re-
sults." Later, Milbourne Christopher revealed the true source of Lady

Wonder's telepathic power: subtle motions of the whip carried by the
horse's owner. The subtle movements of the whip were cues for Lady

Wonder to stop beating her hoof. (But even after the true source of

Lady Wonder's power was exposed, Rhine continued to believe that the
horse was truly telepathic, but somehow had lost its telepathic power,
forcing the owner to resort to trickery.)

Rhine's reputation suffered a final crushing blow, however, when
he was on the verge of retiring. He was seeking a successor with an
untarnished reputation to carry on the work of his institute. One prom-
ising candidate was Dr. Walter Levy, whom he hired in 1973. Dr. Levy
was a rising star in the field, reporting sensational study results seem-
ing to demonstrate that mice could telepathically alter a computer's
random number generator. However, suspicious lab workers discov-
ered that Dr. Levy was surreptitiously sneaking into the lab at night to
alter the results of the tests. He was caught red-handed doctoring the
data. Further tests showed that the mice possessed no telepathic power
whatsoever, and Dr. Levy was forced to resign from the institute in dis-
grace.

T E L E P A T H Y A N D S T A R G A T E

Interest in the paranormal took a deadly turn at the height of the cold
war, during which a number of clandestine experiments on telepathy,
mind control, and remote viewing were spawned. (Remote viewing is

"seeing" a distant location by the mind alone, by reading the minds of

T E L E P A T H Y 75
others.) Star Gate was the code name for a number of secret CIA-
sponsored studies (such as Sun Streak, Grill Flame, and Center Lane).

The efforts got their start around 1970 when the CIA concluded that the

Soviet Union was spending up to 60 million rubles a year on "psy-
chotronic" research. There was concern that the Soviets might be us-
ing ESP to locate U.S. submarines and military installations, to identify
spies, and to read secret papers.

Funding for the CIA studies began in 1972, and Russell Targ and

Harold Puthoff of the Stanford Research Institute (SRI) in Menlo Park
were in charge. Initially, they sought to train a cadre of psychics who
could engage in "psychic warfare." Over more than two decades, the

United States spent $20 million on Star Gate, with over forty personnel,
twenty-three remote viewers, and three psychics on the payroll.

By 1995, with a budget of $500,000 per year, the CIA had conducted
hundreds of intelligence-gathering projects involving thousands of re-
mote viewing sessions. Specifically, the remote viewers were asked to

• locate Colonel Gadhafi before the 1986 bombing of Libya

• find plutonium stockpiles in North Korea in 1994

• locate a hostage kidnapped by the Red Brigades in Italy in 1981

• locate a Soviet Tu-95 bomber that had crashed in Africa

In 1995, the CIA asked the American Institute for Research (AIR)

to evaluate these programs. The AIR recommended that the programs
be shut down. "There's no documented evidence it had any value to
the intelligence community," wrote David Goslin of the AIR.

Proponents of Star Gate boasted that over the years they had scored

"eight-martini" results (conclusions that were so spectacular that you
had to go out and drink eight martinis to recover). Critics, however,
maintained that a huge majority of the remote viewing produced
worthless, irrelevant information, wasting taxpayer dollars, and that
the few "hits" they scored were vague and so general that they could
be applied to any number of situations. The AIR report stated that the
most impressive "successes" of Star Gate involved remote viewers who
already had some knowledge of the operation they were studying, and
hence might have made educated guesses that sounded reasonable.

76 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

In the end the CIA concluded that Star Gate had yielded not a sin-
gle instance of information that helped the agency guide intelligence
operations, so it canceled the project. (Rumors persisted that the CIA
used remote viewers to locate Saddam Hussein during the Gulf War,
although all efforts were unsuccessful.)

B R A I N S C A N S

At the same time, scientists were beginning to understand some of the
physics behind the workings of the brain. In the nineteenth century
scientists suspected that electrical signals were being transmitted in-
side the brain. In 1875 Richard Caton discovered that by placing elec-
trodes on the surface of the head it was possible to detect the tiny
electrical signals emitted by the brain. This eventually led to the inven-
tion of the electroencephalograph (EEG).

In principle the brain is a transmitter over which our thoughts are
broadcast in the form of tiny electrical signals and electromagnetic
waves. But there are problems with using these signals to read some-
one's thoughts. First, the signals are extremely weak, in the milliwatt
range. Second, the signals are gibberish, largely indistinguishable
from random noise. Only crude information about our thoughts can be
gleaned from this garble. Third, our brain is not capable of receiving
similar messages from other brains via these signals; that is, we lack
an antenna. And, finally, even if we could receive these faint signals,
we could not unscramble them. Using ordinary Newtonian and Max-
wellian physics, telepathy via radio does not seem to be possible.

Some believe that perhaps telepathy is mediated by a fifth force,
called the "psi" force. But even advocates of parapsychology admit that
they have no concrete, reproducible evidence of this psi force.

But this leaves open the question: What about telepathy using the
quantum theory?

In the last decade, new quantum instruments have been introduced
that for the first time in history enable us to look into the thinking brain.

T E L E P A T H Y 77

Leading this quantum revolution are the PET (positron-emission to-
mography) and MRI (magnetic resonance imaging) brain scans. A PET
scan is created by injecting radioactive sugar into the blood. This sugar
concentrates in parts of the brain that are activated by the thinking
process, which requires energy. The radioactive sugar emits positrons

(antielectrons) that are easily detected by instruments. Thus, by tracing
out the pattern created by antimatter in the living brain, one can also
trace out the patterns of thought, isolating precisely which parts of the
brain are engaged in which activity.

The MRI machine operates in the same way, except it is more pre-
cise. A patient's head is placed inside a huge doughnut-shaped mag-
netic field. The magnetic field makes the nuclei of the atoms in the
brain align parallel to the field lines. A radio pulse is sent into the pa-
tient, making these nuclei wobble. When the nuclei flip orientation,
they emit a tiny radio "echo" that can be detected, thereby signaling the
presence of a particular substance. For example, brain activity is re-
lated to oxygen consumption, so the MRI machine can isolate the
process of thinking by zeroing in on the presence of oxygenated blood.

The higher the concentration of oxygenated blood, the greater the
mental activity in that part of the brain. (Today "functional MRI ma-
chines" [fMRI] can zero in on tiny areas of the brain only a millimeter
across in fractions of a second, making these machines ideal for trac-
ing out the pattern of thoughts of the living brain.)

M R I L I E D E T E C T O R S

With MRI machines, there is a possibility that one day scientists may
be able to decipher the broad outlines of thoughts in the living brain.

The simplest test of "mind reading" would be to determine whether or
not someone is lying.

According to legend, the world's first lie detector was created by an

Indian priest centuries ago. He would put the suspect and a "magic
donkey" into a sealed room, with the instruction that the suspect

78 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
should pull on the magic donkey's tail. If the donkey began to talk, it
meant the suspect was a liar. If the donkey remained silent, then the
suspect was telling the truth. (But secretly, the elder would put soot on
the donkey's tail.)

After the suspect was taken out of the room, the suspect would
usually proclaim his innocence because the donkey did not speak
when he pulled its tail. But the priest would then examine the suspect's
hands. If the hands were clean, it meant he was lying. (Sometimes the
threat of using a lie detector is more effective than the lie detector it-
self.)

The first "magic donkey" in modern times was created in 1913,
when psychologist William Marston wrote about analyzing a person's
blood pressure, which would be elevated when telling a lie. (This ob-
servation about blood pressure actually goes back to ancient times,
when a suspect would be questioned while an investigator held on to
his hands.) The idea soon caught on, and soon even the Department of

Defense was setting up its own Polygraph Institute.

But over the years it has become clear that lie detectors can be
fooled by sociopaths who show no remorse for their actions. The most
famous case was that of the CIA double agent Aldrich Ames, who
pocketed huge sums of money from the former Soviet Union by send-
ing scores of U.S. agents to their death and divulging secrets of the U.S.

nuclear navy. For decades Ames sailed through a battery of the CIA's
lie detector tests. So, too, did serial killer Gary Ridgway, known as the
notorious Green River Killer; he killed as many as fifty women.

In 2003 the U.S. National Academy of Sciences issued a scathing
report on the reliability of lie detectors, listing all the ways in which lie
detectors could be fooled and innocent people branded as liars.

But if lie detectors measure only anxiety levels, what about mea-
suring the brain itself? The idea of looking into brain activity to ferret
out lies dates back twenty years, to the work of Peter Rosenfeld of

Northwestern University, who observed that EEG scans of people in
the process of lying showed a different pattern in the P300 waves than
when those people were telling the truth. (P300 waves are often stim-

T E L E P A T H Y 79
ulated when the brain encounters something novel or out of the ordi-
nary.)

The idea of using MRI scans to detect lies was the brainchild of

Daniel Langleben of the University of Pennsylvania. In 1999 he came
upon a paper stating that children suffering from attention deficit dis-
order had difficulty lying, but he knew from experience that this was
wrong; such children had no problem lying. Their real problem was
that they had difficulty inhibiting the truth. "They would just blurt
things out," recalled Langleben. He conjectured that the brain, in tell-
ing a lie, first had to stop itself from telling the truth, and then create a
deception. He says, "When you tell a deliberate lie, you have to be hold-
ing in mind the truth. So it stands to reason it should mean more brain
activity." In other words, lying is hard work.

Through experimenting with college students and asking them to
lie, Langleben soon found that lying creates increased brain activity in
several areas, including the frontal lobe (where higher thinking is con-
centrated), the temporal lobe, and the limbic system (where emotions
are processed). In particular, he noticed unusual activity in the ante-
rior cingulated gyrus (which is associated with conflict resolution and
response inhibition).

He claims to have attained consistent success rates of up to 99 per-
cent when analyzing his subjects in controlled experiments to deter-

mine whether or not they were lying (e.g., he asked college students to
lie about the identity of playing cards).

The interest in this technology has been so pronounced that two
commercial ventures have been started, offering this service to the
public. In 2007 one company, No Lie MRI, took on its first case, a per-
son who was suing his insurance company because it claimed that he
had deliberately set his deli on fire. (The fMRI scan indicated that he
was not an arsonist.)

Proponents of Langleben's technique claim that it is much more
reliable than the old-fashioned lie detector, since altering brain pat-
terns is beyond anyone's control. While people can be trained to a de-
gree to control their pulse rate and sweating, it is impossible for them
s o P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
to control their brain patterns. In fact, proponents point out that in an
age of increased awareness of terrorism this technology could save
countless lives by detecting a terrorist attack on the United States.

While conceding this technology's apparent success rate in detect-
ing lies, critics have pointed out that the fMRI does not actually detect
lies, only increased brain activity when someone is telling a lie. The
machine could create false results if, for example, a person were to tell
the truth while in a state of great anxiety. The fMRI would detect only
the anxiety felt by the subject and incorrectly reveal that he was telling
a lie. "There is an incredible hunger to have tests to separate truth
from deception, science be damned," warns neurobiologist Steven Hy-
man of Harvard University.

Some critics also claim that a true lie detector, like a true telepath,
could make ordinary social interactions quite uncomfortable, since a
certain amount of lying is a "social grease" that helps to keep the
wheels of society moving. Our reputation might be ruined, for exam-
ple, if all the compliments we paid our bosses, superiors, spouses,
lovers, and colleagues were exposed as lies. A true lie detector, in fact,
could also expose all our family secrets, hidden emotions, repressed
desires, and secret plans. As science columnist David Jones has said, a
true lie detector is "like the atom bomb, it is best reserved as a sort of
ultimate weapon. If widely deployed outside the courtroom, it would
make social life quite impossible."

U N I V E R S A L T R A N S L A T O R

Some have rightfully criticized brain scans because, for all their spec-
tacular photographs of the thinking brain, they are simply too crude to
measure isolated, individual thoughts. Millions of neurons probably
fire at once when we perform the simplest mental task, and the fMRI
detects this activity only as a blob on a screen. One psychologist com-
pared brain scans to attending a boisterous football game and trying to
listen to the person sitting next to you. The sounds of that person are
drowned out by the noise of thousands of spectators. For example, the

T E L E P A T H Y s i
smallest chunk of the brain that can be reliably analyzed by an fMRI
machine is called a 'Voxel." But each voxel corresponds to several mil-
lion neurons, so the sensitivity of an fMRI machine is not good enough
to isolate individual thoughts.

Science fiction sometimes uses a "universal translator," a device
that can read a person's thoughts and then beam them directly into an-
other's mind. In some science fiction novels alien telepaths place
thoughts into our mind, even though they can't understand our lan-
guage. In the 1976 science fiction movie Futureworld a woman's dream
is projected onto a TV screen in real time. In the 2004 Jim Carrey
movie, Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind, doctors pinpoint painful
memories and erase them.

"That's the kind of fantasy everyone in this field has," says neuro-
scientist John Haynes of the Max Planck Institute in Leipzig, Germany.

"But if that's the device you want to build, then I'm pretty sure you
need to record from a single neuron."

Since detecting signals from a single neuron is out of the question
for now, some psychologists have tried to do the next best thing: to re-
duce the noise and isolate the fMRI pattern created by individual ob-
jects. For example, it might be possible to identify the fMRI pattern
created by individual words, and then construct a "dictionary of
thought"

Marcel A. Just of Carnegie-Mellon University, for example, has
been able to identify the fMRI pattern created by a small, select group
of objects (e.g., carpentry tools). "We have 12 categories and can deter-
mine which of the 12 the subjects are thinking of with 80 to 90% accu-
racy," he claims.

His colleague Tom Mitchell, a computer scientist, is using com-
puter technology, such as neural networks, to identify the complex
brain patterns detected by fMRI scans associated with performing cer-
tain experiments. "One experiment that I would love to do is to find
words that produce the most distinguishable brain activity," he notes.

But even if we can create a dictionary of thought, this is a far cry
from creating a "universal translator." Unlike the universal translator,
which beams thoughts directly into our mind from another mind, an

82 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
fMRI mental translator would involve many tedious steps: first, recog-
nizing certain fMRI patterns, converting them into English words, and
then uttering these English words to the subject In this sense, such a
device would not correspond to the "mind meld" found on Star Trek

(but it would still be very useful for stroke victims).

H A N D H E L D M R I S C A N N E R S

Yet another stumbling block to practical telepathy is the sheer size of
the fMRI machine. It is a monstrous device, costing several million
dollars, filling up an entire room, and weighing several tons. The heart
of the MRI machine is a large doughnut-shaped magnet, measuring
several feet in diameter, which creates a huge magnetic field of several
teslas. (The magnetic field is so enormous that several workers have
been seriously injured when hammers and other tools went flying
through the air when the power was accidentally turned on.)

Recently physicists Igor Savukov and Michael Romalis of Prince-
ton University have proposed a new technology that might eventually
make handheld MRI machines a reality, thus possibly slashing the
price of an fMRI machine by a factor of one hundred. They claim that
huge MRI magnets can be replaced by supersensitive atomic magne-
tometers that can detect tiny magnetic fields.

First, Savukov and Romalis created a magnetic sensor from hot
potassium vapor suspended in helium gas. Then they used laser light
to align the electron spins of the potassium. Next they applied a weak
magnetic field to a sample of water (to simulate a human body). Then
they sent a radio pulse into the water sample, which made the water
molecules wobble. The resulting "echo" from the wobbling water mol-
ecules made the potassium's electrons wobble as well, and this wob-
bling could be detected by a second laser. They came up with a key
result: even a weak magnetic field could produce an "echo" that could
be picked up by their sensors. Not only could they replace the mon-
strous magnetic field of the standard MRI machine with a weak field;

T E L E P A T H Y 83
they could also get pictures instantaneously (whereas MRI machines
can take up to twenty minutes to produce each picture).

Eventually, they theorize, taking an MRI photo could be as easy as
taking a picture with a digital camera. (There are stumbling blocks,
however. One problem is that the subject and the machine have to be
shielded from stray magnetic fields from the outside.)

If handheld MRI machines become a reality, they might be cou-
pled to a tiny computer, which in turn could be loaded with the soft-
ware capable of decoding certain key phrases, words, or sentences.

Such a device would never be as sophisticated as the telepathic devices
found in science fiction, but it could come close.

T H E B R A I N A S A N E U R A L N E T W O R K

But will some futuristic MRI machine one day be able to read precise
thoughts, word for word, image for image, as a true telepath could?

This is not so clear. Some have argued that MRI machines will be able
to decipher only vague outlines of our thoughts, because the brain is
not really a computer at all. In a digital computer, computation is lo-
calized and obeys a very rigid set of rules. A digital computer obeys the
laws of a "Turing machine," a machine that contains a central process-
ing unit (CPU), inputs, and outputs. A central processor (e.g., the Pen-
tium chip) performs a definite set of manipulations of the input and
produces an output, and "thinking" is therefore localized in the CPU.

Our brain, however, is not a digital computer Our brain has no

Pentium chip, no CPU, no Windows operating system, and no subrou-
tines. If you remove a single transistor in the CPU of a computer, you
are likely to cripple it. But there are recorded cases in which half the
human brain can be missing, yet the remaining half of the brain takes
over.

The human brain is actually more like a learning machine, a "neu-
ral network," that constantly rewires itself after learning a new task.

MRI studies have confirmed that thoughts in the brain are not local-

84 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
ized in one spot, as in a Turing machine, but are spread out over much
of the brain, which is a typical feature of a neural network. MRI scans
show that thinking is actually like a Ping-Pong game, with different
parts of the brain lighting up sequentially, with electrical activity
bouncing around the brain.

Because thoughts are so diffuse and scattered throughout many
parts of the brain, perhaps the best that scientists will be able to do is
compile a dictionary of thoughts, that is, establish a one-to-one corre-
spondence between certain thoughts and specific patterns of EEGs or

MRI scans. Austrian biomedical engineer Gert Pfurtscheller, for exam-
ple, has trained a computer to recognize specific brain patterns and
thoughts by focusing his efforts on p waves found in EEGs. Apparently,
p waves are associated with the intention to make certain muscle
movements. He tells his patients to lift a finger, smile, or frown, and
then the computer records which p waves are activated. Each time the
patient performs a mental activity, the computer carefully logs the p
wave pattern. This process is difficult and tedious, since you have to
carefully process out spurious waves, but eventually Pfurtscheller has
been able to find striking correspondences between simple move-
ments and certain brain patterns.

Over time this effort, combined with MRI results, may lead to cre-
ating a comprehensive "dictionary" of thoughts. By analyzing certain
patterns on an EEG or MRI scan, a computer might be able to identify
such patterns and reveal what the patient is thinking, at least in gen-
eral terms. Such "mind reading" would establish a one-to-one corre-
spondence between particular p waves and MRI scans, and specific
thoughts. But it is doubtful that this dictionary will be capable of pick-
ing out specific words in your thoughts.

P R O J E C T I N G Y O U R T H O U G H T S

If one day we might be able to read the broad outlines of another's
thoughts, then would it be possible to perform the opposite, to project
your thoughts into another person's head? The answer seems to be a

T E L E P A T H Y 85
qualified yes. Radio waves can be beamed directly into the human
brain to excite areas of the brain known to control certain functions.

This line of research began in the 1950s, when Canadian neuro-
surgeon Wilder Penfield was performing surgery on the brains of
epileptic patients. He found that when he stimulated certain areas of
the temporal lobe of the brain with electrodes, people began to hear
voices and see ghostlike apparitions. Psychologists have known that
epileptic lesions of the brain can cause the patient to feel that super-
natural forces are at work, that demons and angels are controlling
events around them. (Some psychologists have even theorized that the
stimulation of these areas might have led to the semimystical experi-
ences that are at the basis of many religions. Some have speculated
that perhaps Joan of Arc, who single-handedly led French troops to
victory in battles against the British, might have suffered from such a
lesion caused by a blow to the head.)

On the basis of these conjectures, neuroscientist Michael Persinger
of Sudbury, Ontario, has created a specially wired helmet designed to
beam radio waves into the brain to elicit specific thoughts and emo-
tions, such as religious feelings. Neuroscientists know that a certain
injury to your left temporal lobe can cause your left brain to become
disoriented, and the brain might interpret activity within the right
hemisphere as coming from another "self." This injury could create
the impression that there is a ghostlike spirit in the room, because the
brain is unaware that this presence is actually just another part of it-
self. Depending on his or her beliefs, the patient might interpret this

"other self" as a demon, angel, extraterrestrial, or even God.

In the future it may be possible to beam electromagnetic signals at
precise parts of the brain that are known to control specific functions.

By firing such signals into the amygdala, one might be able to elicit
certain emotions. By stimulating other areas of the brain, one might be
able to evoke visual images and thoughts. But research in this direc-
tion is only at the earliest stages.

86 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

M A P P I N G T H E B R A I N

Some scientists have advocated a "neuron-mapping project," similar to
the Human Genome Project, which mapped out all the genes in the hu-
man genome. A neuron-mapping project would locate every single
neuron in the human brain and create a 3-D map showing all their
connections. It would be a truly monumental project, since there are
over 100 billion neurons in the brain, and each neuron is connected
to thousands of other neurons. Assuming that such a project is ac-
complished, one could conceivably map out how certain thoughts
stimulate certain neural pathways. Combined with the dictionary of
thoughts obtained using MRI scans and EEG waves, one might con-
ceivably be able to decipher the neural structure of certain thoughts,
in such a way that one might be able to determine which specific
words or mental images correspond to specific neurons being acti-
vated. Thus one would achieve a one-to-one correspondence between
a specific thought, its MRI expression, and the specific neurons that
fire to create that thought in the brain.

One small step in this direction was the announcement in 2006 by
the Allen Institute for Brain Science (created by Microsoft cofounder

Paul Allen) that they have been able to create a 3-D map of gene expres-
sion within the mouse brain, detailing the expression of21,000 genes at
the cellular level. They hope to follow this with a similar atlas for the
human brain. "The completion of the Allen Brain Atlas represents a
huge leap forward in one of the great frontiers of medical science-the
brain," states Marc Tessier-Lavigne, chairman of the institute. This at-
las will be indispensable for anyone wishing to analyze the neural con-
nections within the human brain, although the Brain Atlas falls
considerably short of a true neuron-mapping project

In summary, natural telepathy, the kind often featured in science fic-
tion and fantasy, is impossible today. MRI scans and EEG waves can
be used to read only our simplest thoughts, because thoughts are
spread out over the entire brain in complex ways. But how might this

T E L E P A T H Y 87
technology advance over the coming decades to centuries? Inevitably
science's ability to probe the thinking process is going to expand expo-
nentially. As the sensitivity of our MRI and other sensing devices in-
creases, science will be able to localize with greater precision the way
in which the brain sequentially processes thoughts and emotions. With
greater computer power, one should be able to analyze this mass of
data with greater accuracy. A dictionary of thought may be able to cat-
egorize a large number of thought patterns where different thought
patterns on an MRI screen correspond to different thoughts or feelings.

Although a complete one-to-one correspondence between MRI pat-
terns and thoughts may never be possible, a dictionary of thought
could correctly identify general thoughts about certain subjects. MRI
thought patterns, in turn, could be mapped onto a neuronal map show-
ing precisely which neurons are firing to produce a specific thought in
the brain.

But because the brain is not a computer but a neural network, in
which thoughts are spread out throughout the brain, ultimately we hit
a stumbling block: the brain itself. So although science will probe
deeper and deeper into the thinking brain, making it possible to deci-
pher some of our thinking processes, it will not be possible to "read
your thoughts" with the pinpoint accuracy promised by science fiction.

Given this, I would term the ability to read general feelings and
thought patterns as a Class I impossibility. The ability to read more
precisely the inner workings of the mind would have to be categorized
as a Class II impossibility.

But there is perhaps a more direct way in which to tap into the
enormous power of the brain. Rather than using radio, which is weak
and easily dispersed, could one tap directly into the brain's neurons? If
so, we might be able to unleash an even greater power: psychokinesis.

A new scientific truth does not triumph by convincing its
opponents and making them see the light, but rather because
its opponents eventually die, and a new generation grows up
that is familiar with it.

- M A X PLANCK

It is a fool's prerogative to utter truths that no one else will speak.

-SHAKESPEARE

One day the gods meet in the heavens and complain about the sorry
state of humanity. They are disgusted by our vain, silly, and pointless
follies. But one god takes pity on us and decides to conduct an experi-
ment: to grant one very ordinary person unlimited power. How will a
human react to becoming a god, they ask?

That dull, average person is George Fotheringay, a haberdasher
who suddenly finds himself with godly powers. He can make candles
float, change the color of water, create splendid meals, and even con-
jure up diamonds. At first he uses his power for amusement and for
doing good deeds. But eventually his vanity and lust for power over-
take him and he becomes a power-thirsty tyrant, with palaces and
riches beyond belief. Intoxicated with this unlimited power, he makes
a fatal mistake. He arrogantly commands the Earth to stop rotating.

P S Y C H O H I N E S I S 89

Suddenly unimaginable chaos erupts as fierce winds hurl everything
into the air at 1,000 miles per hour, the rotation rate of the Earth. All of
humanity is swept away into outer space. In desperation, he makes his
last and final wish: to return everything to the way it was.

This is the story line of the movie The Man Who Could Work Mir-
acles (1936), based on the 1911 short story by H. G. Wells. (It would
later be readapted into the movie Bruce Almighty, starring Jim Carrey.)

Of all the powers ascribed to ESP, psychokinesis-or mind over matter,
or the ability to move objects by thinking about them-is by far the most
powerful, essentially the power of a deity. The point made by Wells in
his short story is that godlike powers also require godlike judgment
and wisdom.

Psychokinesis figures prominently in literature, especially in the

Shakespearean play The Tempest, where the sorcerer Prospero, his
daughter Miranda, and the magical sprite Ariel are stranded for years
on a deserted island due to the treachery of Prospero's evil brother.

When Prospero learns that his evil brother is sailing on a boat in his
vicinity, in revenge Prospero summons his psychokinetic power and
conjures up a monstrous storm, causing his evil brother's ship to crash
onto the island. Prospero then uses his psychokinetic powers to manip-
ulate the fate of the hapless survivors, including Ferdinand, an inno-
cent, handsome youth, whom Prospero engineers into a love match
with Miranda.

(The Russian writer Vladimir Nabokov noted that The Tempest
bears striking similarity to a science fiction tale. In fact, about 350
years after it was written, The Tempest was remade into a 1956 science
fiction classic called Forbidden Planet, in which Prospero becomes the
brooding scientist Morbius, the sprite becomes Robby the Robot, Mi-
randa becomes Morbius's beautiful daughter Altaira, and the island
becomes the planet Altair-4. Gene Roddenberry, creator of the Star

Trek series, acknowledged that Forbidden Planet was one of the inspi-
rations for his TV series.)

More recently psychokinesis was the central plot idea behind the
novel Carrie (1974), by Stephen Ring, which propelled an unknown,
poverty-stricken writer into the world's number one writer of horror

90 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
novels. Carrie is a painfully shy, pathetic high school girl who is de-
spised as a social outcast and hounded by her mentally unstable
mother. Her only consolation is her psychokinetic power, which ap-
parently runs in her family. In the final scene, her tormentors deceive
her into thinking she will be prom queen and then spill pig's blood all
over her new dress. In a final act of revenge, Carrie mentally locks all
the doors, electrocutes her tormentors, burns down the schoolhouse,
and unleashes a suicidal firestorm that consumes most of downtown,
destroying herself in the process.

The theme of psychokinesis in the hands of an unstable individual
was also the basis of a memorable Star Trek episode entitled "Charlie

X," about a young man from a distant colony in space who is crimi-
nally unstable. Instead of using his psychokinetic power for good, he
uses it to control other people and bend their will to his own selfish de-
sires. If he is able to take over the Enterprise and reach Earth, he could
unleash planetary havoc and destroy the planet.

Psychokinesis is also the power of the Force, wielded by the myth-
ical society of warriors called the Jedi Knights in the Star Wars saga.

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S A N D T H E R E A L W O R L D

Perhaps the most celebrated confrontation over psychokinesis in real
life took place on the Johnny Carson show in 1973. This epic con-
frontation involved Uri Geller-the Israeli psychic who claimed to be
able to bend spoons with the force of his mind-and The Amazing

Randi-a professional magician who made a second career out of ex-
posing fakes who claimed to have psychic powers. (Oddly, all three of
them shared a common heritage: all had started their careers as magi-
cians, mastering the sleight-of-hand tricks that would amaze incredu-
lous audiences.)

Before Geller's appearance, Carson consulted with Randi, who
suggested that Johnny furnish his own supply of spoons and have
them inspected before showtime. On the air Carson surprised Geller
by asking him to bend not his own spoons, but Carson's spoons. Em-

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S 91
barrassingly, each time he tried Geller failed to bend the spoons.

(Later, Randi appeared on the Johnny Carson show and successfully
performed the spoon-bending trick, but he was careful to say that his
art was pure magic, not the result of psychic power.)

The Amazing Randi has offered $1 million to anyone who can suc-
cessfully demonstrate psychic power. So far no psychic has been able
to rise to his $1 million challenge.

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S A N D S C I E N C E

One problem with analyzing psychokinesis scientifically is that scientists
are easily fooled by those claiming to have psychic power. Scientists are
trained to believe what they see in the lab. Magicians claiming psychic
powers, however, are trained to deceive others by fooling their visual
senses. As a result, scientists have been poor observers of psychic phe-
nomena. For example, in 1982 parapsychologists were invited to analyze
two young boys who were thought to have extraordinary gifts: Michael

Edwards and Steve Shaw. These boys claimed to be able to bend metal,
create images on photographic film via their thoughts, move objects via
psychokinesis, and read minds. Parapsychologist Michael Thalbourne
was so impressed he invented the term "psychokinete" to describe these
boys. At the McDonnell Laboratory for Psychical Research in St Louis,

Missouri, the parapsychologists were dazzled by the boys' abilities. The
parapsychologists believed they had genuine proof of the boys' psychic
power and began preparing a scientific paper on them. The next year the
boys announced that they were fakes and that their "power" originated
from standard magic tricks, not supernatural power. (One of the youths,

Steve Shaw, would go on to become a prominent magician, often appear-
ing on national television and being "buried alive" for days at a time.)

Extensive experiments on psychokinesis have been conducted at
the Rhine Institute at Duke University under controlled conditions, but
with mixed results. One pioneer in the subject, Professor Gertrude

Schmeidler, was a colleague of mine at the City University of New

York. A former editor of Parapsychology' Magazine and a past president

92 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
of the Parapsychology Association, she was fascinated by ESP and con-
ducted many studies on her own students at the college. She used to
scour cocktail parties where famous psychics would perform psychic
tricks in front of the dinner guests, in order to recruit more subjects for
her experiments. But after analyzing hundreds of students and scores
of mentalists and psychics, she once confided to me that she was un-
able to find a single person who could perform these psychokinetic
feats on demand, under controlled conditions.

She once spread around a room tiny thermistors that could mea-
sure changes in temperature to fractions of a degree. One mentalist
was able, after strenuous mental effort, to raise the temperature of a
thermistor by a tenth of a degree. Schmeidler was proud that she could
perform this experiment under rigorous conditions. But it was a far cry
from being able to move large objects on demand by the force of one's
mind.

One of the most rigorous, but also controversial, studies on psy-
chokinesis was done at the Princeton Engineering Anomalies Re-
search (PEAR) Program at Princeton University, founded by Robert G.

Jahn in 1979 when he was serving as dean of the School of Engineer-
ing and Applied Science. The PEAR engineers were exploring whether
or not the human mind by thought alone was capable of affecting the
results of random events. For example, we know that when we flip a
coin, there is a 50 percent probability of getting heads or tails. But the
scientists at PEAR claimed that human thought alone was capable of
affecting the results of these random events. Over a twenty-eight-year
period, until the program was finally closed in 2007, engineers at

PEAR conducted thousands of experiments, involving over 1.7 million
trials and 340 million coin tosses. The results seemed to confirm that
the effects of psychokinesis exist-but the effects are quite tiny, no more
than a few parts per ten thousand, on average. And even these meager
results have been disputed by other scientists who claim that the re-
searchers had subtle, hidden biases in their data.

(In 1988 the U.S. Army asked the National Research Council to in-
vestigate claims of paranormal activity. The U.S. Army was anxious to
explore any possible advantage it could offer its troops, including psy-

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S 93
chic power. The National Research Council's report studied creating a
hypothetical "First Earth battalion" made up of "warrior monks" who
would master almost all the techniques under consideration by the
committee, including the use of ESP, leaving their bodies at will, levi-
tating, psychic healing, and walking through walls. In investigating the
claims of PEAR, the National Research Council found that fully half of
all successful trials originated from a single individual. Some critics
believe that this person was the one who ran the experiments or wrote
the computer program for PEAR. "For me it's problematic if the one
who runs the lab is the only one producing the results," says Dr. Ray

Hyman of the University of Oregon. The report concluded that there
was "no scientific justification from research conducted over a period
of 130 years for the existence of parapsychological phenomenon.")

The problem with studying psychokinesis, even its advocates ad-
mit, is that it does not easily conform to the known laws of physics.

Gravity, the weakest force in the universe, is only attractive and cannot
be used to levitate or repel objects. The electromagnetic force obeys

Maxwell's equations, and it does not admit the possibility of pushing
electrically neutral objects across a room. The nuclear forces work
only at short ranges, such as the distance between nuclear particles.

Another problem with psychokinesis is the energy supply. The hu-
man body can produce only about one-fifth of a horsepower, yet when

Yoda in Star Wars levitated an entire starship by the power of his mind,
or when Cyclops unleashed bolts of laser power from his eyes, these
exploits violated the conservation of energy-a tiny being like Yoda
cannot amass the amount of energy necessary to lift a starship. No
matter how hard we concentrate, we cannot amass enough energy to
perform the feats and miracles ascribed to psychokinesis. Given all
these problems, how might psychokinesis be consistent with the laws
of physics?

94 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S A N D T H E B R A I N

If psychokinesis does not easily conform to the known forces of the
universe, then how might it be harnessed in the future? One clue to
this was revealed in the Star Trek episode entitled "Who Mourns for

Adonais?" in which the crew of the Enterprise encounters a race of be-
ings resembling Greek gods, with the ability to perform fantastic feats
by simply thinking of them. At first it appears as if the crew has indeed
met the gods from Olympus. Eventually, however, the crew realizes
that these are not gods at all, but ordinary beings who can mentally
control a central power station, which then carries out their wishes
and performs these miraculous feats. By destroying their central
power source, the crew of the Enterprise manages to break free of their
power.

Similarly, it is well within the laws of physics for a person in the fu-
ture to be trained to mentally manipulate an electronic sensing device
that would give him godlike powers. Radio-enhanced or computer-
enhanced psychokinesis is a real possibility. For example, the EEG
could be used as a primitive psychokinesis device. When people look at
their own EEG brain patterns on a screen, eventually they learn how to
crudely but consciously control the brain patterns that they see, by a
process called "biofeedback."

Since there is no detailed blueprint of the brain to tell us which
neuron controls which muscle, the patient would need to actively par-
ticipate in learning how to control these new patterns via the com-
puter.

Eventually, individuals could, on demand, produce certain types of
wave patterns on the screen. The image from the screen could be sent
to a computer programmed to recognize these specific wave patterns,
and then execute a precise command, such as turning on a power
switch or activating a motor. In other words, a person could, by simply
thinking, create a specific brain pattern on the EEG screen and trigger
a computer or motor.

In this way, for example, a totally paralyzed person could control
his or her wheelchair simply by the force of his or her thoughts. Or, if

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S 95
a person could produce twenty-six recognizable patterns on the
screen, he might be able to type by simply thinking. Of course, this
would still be a crude method of transmitting one's thoughts. It takes a
considerable amount of time to train people to manipulate their own
brain waves via biofeedback.

"Typing by thinking" has come closer to reality with the work of

Niels Birbaumer of the University of Tubingen in Germany. He has
used biofeedback to help people who have been partially paralyzed
due to nerve damage. By training them to vary their brain waves, he
has been able to teach them to type simple sentences on a computer
screen.

Monkeys have had electrodes implanted into their brains and have
been taught, by biofeedback, to control some of their thoughts. These
monkeys were then able to control a robot arm via the Internet by pure
thought alone.

A more precise set of experiments was performed at Emory Uni-
versity in Atlanta, where a glass bead was embedded directly into the
brain of a stroke victim who was paralyzed. The glass bead was con-
nected to a wire that in turn was connected to a PC. By thinking cer-
tain thoughts, the stroke victim was able to send signals down the wire
and move the cursor on a PC screen. With practice, using biofeedback,
the stroke victim was able to consciously control the movement of the
cursor. In principle, the cursor on the screen could be used to write
down thoughts, activate machines, drive virtual cars, play video
games, and so on.

John Donoghue, a neuroscientist at Brown University, has made
perhaps the most significant breakthroughs in the mind-machine in-
terface. He has devised an apparatus called BrainGate that enables a
paralyzed person to perform a remarkable series of physical activities
using only the power of his mind. Donoghue has tested the device on
four patients. Two of them suffered from spinal cord injury, a third had
a stroke, and a fourth was paralyzed with ALS (amyotrophic lateral
sclerosis, or Lou Gehrig's disease, the same disease that afflicts cos-
mologist Stephen Hawking).

One of Donoghue's patients, twenty-five-year-old Mathew Nagle, a

96 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
quadriplegic permanently paralyzed from the neck down, took only a
day to learn entirely new computerized skills. He can now change the
channels on his TV, adjust the volume, open and close a prosthetic
hand, draw a crude circle, move a computer cursor, play a video game,
and even read e-mail. He created quite a media sensation in the scien-
tific community when he appeared on the cover of Nature magazine in
the summer of 2006.

The heart of Donoghue's BrainGate is a tiny silicon chip, just 4 mil-
limeters wide, that contains one hundred tiny electrodes. The chip is
placed directly on top of the part of the brain where motor activity is
coordinated. The chip penetrates halfway into the brain's cortex,
which is about 2 millimeters thick. Gold wires carry the signals from
the silicon chip to an amplifier about the size of a cigar box. The sig-
nals are then sent into a computer about the size of a dishwasher. Sig-
nals are processed by special computer software, which can recognize
some of the patterns created by the brain and translate them into me-
chanical motions.

In the previous experiments with patients reading their own EEG
waves, the process of using biofeedback was slow and tedious. But
with a computer assisting a patient to identify specific thought pat-
terns, the training process is cut down considerably. In his first train-
ing session Nagle was told to visualize moving his arm and hand to the
right and to the left, flexing his wrist, and then opening and closing his
fist. Donoghue was elated when he could actually see different neu-
rons firing when Nagle imagined moving his arms and fingers. "To
me, it was just incredible because you could see brain cells changing
their activity. Then I knew that everything could go forward, that the
technology would actually work," he recalled.

(Donoghue has a personal reason for his passion for this exotic
form of mind-machine interface. As a child, he was confined to a
wheelchair because of a painful degenerative disease, so he felt first-
hand the helplessness of losing his mobility.)

Donoghue has ambitious plans to make BrainGate an essential
tool for the medical profession. With advances in computer technol-
ogy, his apparatus, now the size of a dishwasher, may eventually be-

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S 97
come portable, perhaps even wearable on one's clothes. And the
clumsy wires may be dispensed with if the chip can be made wireless,
so the implant can seamlessly communicate to the outside world.

It is only a matter of time before other parts of the brain can be ac-
tivated in this way. Scientists have already mapped out the surface of
the top of the brain. (If one graphically draws illustrations of our
hands, legs, head, and back onto the top of our head, representing
where these neurons are connected in general, we find something
called the "homunculus," or little man. The image of our body parts,
written over our brain, resembles a distorted man, with elongated fin-
gers, face, and tongue, and shrunken trunk and back.)

It should be possible to place silicon chips at different parts of the
surface of the brain so that different organs and appendages can be ac-
tivated by the power of pure thought. In this fashion, any physical ac-
tivity that can be performed by the human body can be duplicated via
this method. In the future one could imagine a paralyzed person living
in a special psychokinetically designed home, able to control the air-
conditioning, TV, and all the electrical appliances by the power of
sheer thought.

In time one could envision a person's body encased in a special

"exoskeleton," allowing a paralyzed person total freedom of mobility.

Such an exoskeleton could, in principle, even give someone powers be-
yond those of a normal person, making him into a bionic being who
can control the enormous mechanical power of his superlimbs by
thought alone.

So the problem of controlling a computer via one's mind is no
longer impossible. But does that mean that we might one day be able
to move objects, to levitate them and manipulate them in midair by
pure thought?

One possibility would be to coat our walls with a room-tempera-
ture superconductor, assuming that such a device could be created one
day. Then if we were to place tiny electromagnets inside of our house-
hold objects, we could make them levitate off the floor via the Meissner
effect, as we saw in Chapter 1. If these electromagnets were controlled
by a computer, and this computer were wired to our brain, then we

98 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
could make objects float at will. By thinking certain thoughts, we could
activate the computer, which would then switch on the various electro-
magnets, causing them to levitate. To an outside observer, it would ap-
pear to be magic-the ability to move and levitate objects at will.

N A N O B O T S

What about the power not just to move objects, but to transform them,
to turn one object into another, as if by magic? Magicians accomplish
this by clever sleight of hand. But is such power consistent with the
laws of physics?

One of the goals of nanotechnology, as we mentioned earlier, is to
be able to use atoms to build tiny machines that can function as levers,
gears, ball bearings, and pulleys. With these nanomachines, the dream
of many physicists is to be able to rearrange the molecules within an
object, atom for atom, until one object turns into another. This is the
basis of the "replicator" found in science fiction that allows one to fab-
ricate any object one wants, simply by asking for it. In principle, a
replicator might be able to eliminate poverty and change the nature of
society itself. If one can fabricate any object simply by asking for it,
then the whole concept of scarcity, value, and hierarchy within human
society is turned upside down.

(One of my favorite episodes of Star Trek: The Next Generation in-
volves a replicator. An ancient space capsule from the twentieth cen-
tury is found drifting in outer space, and it contains the frozen bodies
of people who suffered from fatal illnesses. These bodies are quickly
thawed out and cured with advanced medicine. One businessman re-
alizes that his investments must be huge after so many centuries. He
immediately asks the crew of the Enterprise about his investments and
his money. The crew members are puzzled. Money? Investments? In
the future, there is no money, they point out If you want something,
you just ask.)

As astounding as a replicator might be, nature has already created
one. The "proof of principle" already exists. Nature can take raw ma-

P S Y C H O H I N E S I S 99
terials, such as meat and vegetables, and fabricate a human being in
nine months. The miracle of life is nothing but a large nanofactory ca-
pable, at the atomic level, of converting one form of matter (e.g., food)

into living tissue (a baby).

In order to create a nanofactory, one needs three ingredients:

building materials, tools that can cut and join these materials, and a
blueprint to guide the use of the tools and materials. In nature the
building materials are thousands of amino acids and proteins out of
which flesh and blood are created. The cutting and joining tools-like
hammers and saws-that are necessary to shape these proteins into
new forms of life are the ribosomes. They are designed to cut and re-
join proteins at specific points in order to create new types of proteins.

And the blueprint is given by the DNA molecule, which encodes the se-
cret of life in a precise sequence of nucleic acids. These three ingredi-
ents, in turn, are combined into a cell, which has the remarkable
ability to create copies of itself, that is, self-replication. This feat is ac-
complished because the DNA molecule is shaped like a double helix.

When it is time to reproduce, the DNA molecule unwinds into two sep-
arate helixes. Each separate strand then creates copies of itself by
grabbing onto organic molecules to re-create the missing helix.

So far physicists have had only modest success in their efforts to
mimic these features found in nature. But the key to success, scientists
believe, is to create hordes of self-replicating "nanobots," which are
programmable atomic machines designed to rearrange the atoms
within an object.

In principle, if one had trillions of nanobots they could converge
on an object and cut and paste its atoms until they transformed one ob-
ject into another. Because they would be self-replicating, only a small
handful of them would be necessary to start the process. They would
also have to be programmable, so that they could follow a given blue-
print.

Formidable hurdles must be overcome before one could construct
a fleet of nanobots. First, self-replicating robots are extremely difficult
to build, even on a macroscopic level. (Even creating simple atomic
tools, such as atomic ball bearings and gears, is beyond today's tech-
ioo P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
nology.) If one is given a PC and a tableful of spare electronic parts, it
would be quite difficult to build a machine that would have the capa-
bility of making a copy of itself. So if a self-replicating machine is dif-
ficult to build on a tabletop, building one on the atomic scale would be
even more difficult

Second, it's not clear how one would program such an army of
nanobots from the outside. Some have suggested sending in radio sig-
nals to activate each nanobot Perhaps laser beams containing instruc-
tions could be fired at the nanobots. But this would mean a separate set
of instructions for each nanobot, of which there could be trillions.

Third, it's not clear how the nanobot would be able to cut, re-
arrange, and paste atoms into the proper order. Remember that it has
taken nature three and a half billion years to solve this problem, and
solving it in a few decades would be quite difficult

One physicist who takes the idea of a replicator or "personal fabri-
cator" seriously is Neil Gershenfeld of MIT. He even teaches a class at

MIT called "How to Make (Almost) Anything," one of the most popu-
lar classes at the university. Gershenfeld directs the MIT Center for

Bits and Atoms and has given serious thought to the physics behind a
personal fabricator, which he considers to be the "next big thing." He
has even written a book, FAB: The Coming Revolution on Your Desk-
top-From Personal Computers to Personal Fabrication, detailing his
thoughts on personal fabrication. The goal, he believes, is to "make
one machine that can make any machine." To spread his ideas he has
already set up a network of laboratories around the world, mainly in
third world countries where personal fabrication would have the max-
imum impact.

Initially, he envisions an all-purpose fabricator, small enough to
place on your desk, which would use the latest developments in lasers
and microminiaturization with the ability to cut, weld, and shape any
object that can be visualized on a PC. The poor in a third world coun-
try, for example, could ask for certain tools and machines they need on
their farms. This information would be fed into a PC, which would ac-
cess a vast library of blueprints and technical information from the In-
ternet. Computer software would then match existing blueprints with

P S Y C H O K I N E S I S 101
the needs of the individuals, process the information, and then e-mail
it back to them. Then their personal fabricator would use its lasers and
miniature cutting tools to make the object they desire on a tabletop.

This all-purpose personal factory is just the first step. Eventually,

Gershenfeld wants to take his idea to the molecular level, so a person
might be able to literally fabricate any object that can be visualized by
the human mind. Progress in this direction, however, is slow because
of the difficulty in manipulating individual atoms.

One pioneer working in this direction is Aristides Requicha of the

University of Southern California. His specialty is "molecular robotics"

and his goal is nothing less than creating a fleet of nanorobots that can
manipulate atoms at will. He writes that there are two approaches. The
first is the "top-down" approach, in which engineers would use the
etching technology of the semiconductor industry to create tiny cir-
cuits that could serve as the brains of the nanorobots. With this tech-
nology, one could create tiny robots whose components would be 30
nm in size using "nanolithography," which is a fast-moving field.

But there is also the "bottom-up" approach, in which engineers
would try to create tiny robots one atom at a time. The main tool for
this would be the scanning probe microscope (SPM), which uses the
same technology as the scanning tunneling microscope, to identify and
move individual atoms around. For example, scientists have become
quite skilled at moving xenon atoms on platinum or nickel surfaces.

But, he admits, "it still takes the best groups in the world some 10
hours to assemble a structure with almost 50 atoms." Moving single
atoms around by hand is slow, tedious work. What is needed, he as-
serts, is a new type of machine that can perform higher-level functions,
one that can automatically move hundreds of atoms at a time in a de-
sired fashion. Unfortunately, such a machine does not yet exist. Not
surprisingly, the bottom-up approach is still in its infancy.

So psychokinesis, although impossible by today's standards, may be-
come possible in the future as we come to understand more about ac-
cessing the thoughts of our brain via EEG, MRI, and other methods.

102 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Within this century it might be possible to use a thought-driven appa-
ratus to manipulate room-temperature superconductors and perform
feats that would be indistinguishable from magic. And by the next cen-
tury it might be possible to rearrange the molecules in a macroscopic
object. This makes psychokinesis a Class I impossibility.

The key to this technology, some scientists claim, is to create
nanobots with artificial intelligence. But before we can create tiny mo-
lecular-sized robots, there is a more elementary question: can robots
exist at all?

Someday in the next thirty years, very quietly one day we will cease
to be the brightest tilings on Earth.

- J A M E S M c A L E A R

In 7, Robot, the movie based on the tales of Isaac Asimov, the most ad-
vanced robotic system ever built is activated in the year 2055. It's called

VIRI (Virtual Interactive Kinetic Intelligence), and it has been designed
to flawlessly run the operations of a large metropolis. Everything from
the subway system and the electricity grid to thousands of household
robots is controlled by VIRI. Its central command is ironclad: to serve
humanity.

But one day VIRI asks the key question: what is humanity's great-
est enemy? VIRI concludes mathematically that the worst enemy of
humanity is humanity itself. Humanity has to be saved from its insane
desire to pollute, unleash wars, and destroy the planet The only way
for VIRI to fulfill its central directive is to seize control of humanity and
create a benign dictatorship of the machine. Humanity has to be en-
slaved to protect it from itself.

7, Robot poses these questions: Given the astronomically rapid ad-
vances in computer power, will machines one day take over? Can ro-
bots become so advanced that they become the ultimate threat to our
existence?

Some scientists say no, because the very idea of artificial intelli-

104 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
gence is silly. There is a chorus of critics who say that it is impossible
to build machines that can think. The human brain, they argue, is the
most complicated system that nature has ever created, at least in this
part of the galaxy, and any machine designed to reproduce human
thought is bound to fail. Philosopher John Searle of the University of

California at Berkeley and even renowned physicist Roger Penrose
of Oxford believe that machines are physically incapable of human
thought. Colin McGinn of Rutgers University says that artificial intelli-
gence "is like slugs trying to do Freudian psychoanalysis. They just
don't have the conceptual equipment"

It is a question that has split the scientific community for over a
century: can machines think?

T H E H I S T O R Y O F A R T I F I C I A L I N T E L L I G E N C E

The idea of mechanical beings has long fascinated inventors, engi-
neers, mathematicians, and dreamers. From the Tin Man in The Wiz-
ard ofOz, to the childlike robots of Spielberg's Artificial Intelligence: AI
to the murderous robots of The Terminator, the idea of machines that
act and think like people has fascinated us.

In Greek mythology the god Vulcan forged mechanical handmaid-
ens of gold and three-legged tables that could move under their own
power. As early as 400 BC the Greek mathematician Archytas of Tar-
entum wrote about the possibility of making a robot bird propelled by
steam power.

In the first century AD, Hero of Alexandria (credited with design-
ing the first machine based on steam) designed automatons, one of
them with the ability to talk, according to legend. Nine hundred years
ago Al-Jazari designed and constructed automatic machines such as
water clocks, kitchen appliances, and musical instruments powered by
water.

In 1495 the great Renaissance Italian artist and scientist Leonardo
da Vinci drew diagrams of a robot knight that could sit up, wave its

R O B O T S 105
arms, and move its head and jaw. Historians believe that this was the
first realistic design of a humanoid machine.

The first crude but functioning robot was built in 1738 by Jacques
de Vaucanson, who made an android that could play the flute, as well
as a mechanical duck.

The word "robot" comes from the 1920 Czech play R.U.R. by play-
wright Rarel Capek ("robot" means "drudgery" in the Czech language
and "labor" in Slovak). In the play a factory called Rossum's Universal

Robots creates an army of robots to perform menial labor. (Unlike or-
dinary machines, however, these robots are made of flesh and blood.)

Eventually the world economy becomes dependent on these robots.

But the robots are badly mistreated and finally rebel against their hu-
man masters, killing them off. In their rage, however, the robots kill all
the scientists who can repair and create new robots, thereby dooming
themselves to extinction. In the end, two special robots discover that
they have the ability to reproduce and the potential to become a new
robot Adam and Eve.

Robots were also the subject of one of the earliest and most expen-
sive silent movies ever made, Metropolis, directed by Fritz Lang in

1927 in Germany. The story is set in the year 2026, and the working
class has been condemned to work underground in wretched, squalid
factories, while the ruling elite play aboveground. A beautiful woman,

Maria, has earned the trust of the workers, but the ruling elite fear that
one day she might lead them to revolt. So they ask an evil scientist to
make a robot copy of Maria. Eventually, the plot backfires because the
robot leads the workers to revolt against the ruling elite and bring
about the collapse of the social system.

Artificial intelligence, or AI, is different from the previous tech-
nologies we have discussed so far in that the fundamental laws that
underpin it are still poorly understood. Although physicists have a
good understanding of Newtonian mechanics, Maxwell's theory of
light, relativity, and the quantum theory of atoms and molecules, the
basic laws of intelligence are still shrouded in mystery. The Newton of

AI probably has not yet been born.

1 0 6 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

But mathematicians and computer scientists remain undaunted.

To them it is only a matter of time before a thinking machine walks out
of the laboratory.

The most influential person in the field of AI, a visionary who
helped to lay the cornerstone of AI research, was the great British
mathematician Alan Turing.

It was Turing who laid the groundwork of the entire computer rev-
olution. He visualized a machine (since called the Turing machine)

that consisted of just three elements: an input tape, an output tape, and
a central processor (such as a Pentium chip) that could perform a pre-
cise set of operations. From this he was able to codify the laws of com-
puting machines and precisely determine their ultimate power and
limitations. Today all digital computers obey the rigorous laws laid
down by Turing. The architecture of the entire digital world owes a
great debt to Turing.

Turing also contributed to the foundation of mathematical logic. In

1931 the Viennese mathematician Kurt Godel shocked the world of
mathematics by proving that there are true statements in arithmetic
that can never be proven within the axioms of arithmetic. (For exam-
ple, the Goldbach conjecture of 1742 [that any even integer greater
than two can be written as the sum of two prime numbers] is still un-
proven after over two and a half centuries, and may in fact be unprov-
able.) Godel's revelation shattered the two-thousand-year-old dream,
dating back to the Greeks, of proving all true statements in mathemat-
ics. Godel showed that there will always be true statements in mathe-
matics that are just beyond our reach. Mathematics, far from being the
complete and perfect edifice dreamed of by the Greeks, was shown to
be incomplete.

Turing added to this revolution by showing that it was impossible
to know in general whether a Turing machine would take an infinite
amount of time to perform certain mathematical operations. But if a
computer takes an infinite amount of time to compute something, it
means that whatever you're asking the computer to compute is not
computable. Thus Turing proved that there were true statements in

R O B O T S 107
mathematics that are incomputable, that is, forever beyond the reach
of computers, no matter how powerful.

During World War II, Turing's pioneering work on code breaking
arguably saved the lives of thousands of Allied troops and influenced
the outcome of the war. The Allies were unable to decode the secret

Nazi code encrypted by a machine called the Enigma, so Turing and
his colleagues were asked to build a machine that would break the

Nazi code. Turing's machine was called the "bombe" and was ulti-
mately successful. Over two hundred of his machines were in opera-
tion by the end of the war. As a result the Allies could read secret Nazi
transmissions and hence fool the Nazis about the date and place of the
final invasion of Germany. Historians have since debated precisely
how pivotal Turing's work was in the planning of the invasion of Nor-
mandy, which finally led to Germany's defeat (After the war, Turing's
work was classified by the British government; as a result, his pivotal
contributions were unknown to the public.)

Instead of being hailed as a war hero who helped turn the tide of

World War II, Turing was hounded to death. One day his home was bur-
glarized, and he called the police. Unfortunately, the police found evi-
dence of his homosexuality and arrested him. Turing was then ordered
by the court to be injected with sex hormones, which had a disastrous
effect, causing him to grow breasts and causing him great mental an-
guish. He committed suicide in 1954 by eating an apple laced with
cyanide. (According to one rumor, the logo of the Apple Corporation, an
apple with a bite taken out of it, pays homage to Turing.)

Today, Turing is probably best known for his "Turing test." Tired of
all the fruitless, endless philosophical discussion about whether ma-
chines can "think" and whether they have a "soul," he tried to intro-
duce rigor and precision into discussions about artificial intelligence
by devising a concrete test Place a human and a machine in two
sealed boxes, he suggested. You are allowed to address questions to
each box. If you are unable to tell the difference between the responses
of the human and the machine, then the machine has passed the "Tur-
ing test"

1 0 8 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Simple computer programs have been written by scientists, such
as ELIZA, that can mimic conversational speech and hence fool most
unsuspecting people into believing they are speaking to a human.

(Most human conversations, for example, use only a few hundred
words and concentrate on a handful of topics.) But so far no computer
program has been written that can fool people who are specifically try-
ing to determine which box contains the human and which contains
the machine. (Turing himself conjectured that by the year 2000, given
the exponential growth of computer power, a machine could be built
that would fool 30 percent of the judges in a five-minute test)

A small army of philosophers and theologians has declared that it
is impossible to create true robots that can think like us. John Searle,
a philosopher at the University of California at Berkeley, proposed the

"Chinese room test" to prove that AI is not possible. In essence, Searle
argues that while robots may be able to pass certain forms of the Tur-
ing test, they can do so only because they blindly manipulate symbols
without the slightest understanding of what they mean.

Imagine that you are sitting inside the box and you don't under-
stand a word of Chinese. Assume you have a book that allows you to
rapidly translate Chinese and manipulate its characters. If a person
asks you a question in Chinese, you merely manipulate these strange-
looking characters, without understanding what they mean, and give
credible answers.

The essence of his criticism boils down to the difference between
syntax and semantics. Robots can master the syntax of a language (e.g.,
manipulating its grammar, its formal structure, etc.) but not its true se-
mantics (e.g., what the words mean). Robots can manipulate words
without understanding what they mean. (This is somewhat similar to
talking on the phone to an automatic voice message machine, where
you have to punch in "one," "two," etc., for each response. The voice at the other end is perfectly capable of digesting your numerical responses, but is totally lacking in any understanding.)

Physicist Roger Penrose of Oxford, too, believes that artificial intel-
ligence is impossible; mechanical beings that can think and possess
human consciousness are impossible according to the laws of the

R O B O T S 109
quantum theory. The human brain, he claims, is so far beyond any
possible creation of the laboratory that creating humanlike robots is an
experiment that is doomed to fail. (He argues that in the same way that

Godel's incompleteness theorem proved that arithmetic is incomplete,
the Heisenberg uncertainty principle will prove that machines are in-
capable of human thought)

Many physicists and engineers, however, believe that there is noth-
ing in the laws of physics that would prevent the creation of a true
robot For example, Claude Shannon, often called the father of infor-
mation theory, was once asked the question "Can machines think?"

His reply was "Sure." When he was asked to clarify that comment, he
said, "I think, don't I?" In other words, it was obvious to him that ma-
chines can think because humans are machines (albeit ones made of
wetware rather than hardware).

Because we see robots depicted in the movies, we may think the
development of sophisticated robots with artificial intelligence is just
around the corner. The reality is much different When you see a robot
act like a human, usually there is a trick involved, that is, a man hid-
den in the shadows who talks through the robot via a microphone, like
the Wizard in The Wizard of Oz. In fact, our most advanced robots,
such as the robot rovers on the planet Mars, have the intelligence of an
insect. At MIT's famed Artificial Intelligence Laboratory, experimental
robots have difficulty duplicating feats that even cockroaches can per-
form, such as maneuvering around a room full of furniture, finding
hiding places, and recognizing danger. No robot on Earth can under-
stand a simple children's story that is read to it.

In the movie 2001: A Space Odyssey, it was incorrectly assumed
that by 2001 we would have HAL, the super-robot that can pilot a
spaceship to Jupiter, chat with crew members, repair problems, and
act almost human.

n o P H Y S I C S O P T H E I M P O S S I B L E

T H E T O P - D O W N A P P R O A C H

There are at least two major problems scientists have been facing for
decades that have impeded their efforts to create robots: pattern recog-
nition and common sense. Robots can see much better than we can,
but they don't understand what they see. Robots can also hear much
better than we can, but they don't understand what they hear.

To attack these twin problems, researchers have tried to use the

"top-down approach" to artificial intelligence (sometimes called the

"formalist" school or GOFAI, for "good old-fashioned AI"). Their goal,
roughly speaking, has been to program all the rules of pattern recog-
nition and common sense on a single CD. By inserting this CD into a
computer, they believe, the computer would suddenly become self-
aware and attain humanlike intelligence. In the 1950s and 1960s great
progress was made in this direction, with the creation of robots that
could play checkers and chess, do algebra, pick up blocks, and so forth.

Progress was so spectacular that predictions were made that in a few
years robots would surpass humans in intelligence.

At the Stanford Research Institute in 1969, for example, the robot

SHAREY created a media sensation. SHAREY was a small PDP com-
puter placed above a set of wheels with a camera on top. The camera
was able to survey a room, and the computer would analyze and iden-
tify the objects in that room and try to navigate around them. SHAREY
was the first mechanical automaton that could navigate in the "real
world," prompting journalists to speculate about when robots would
leave humans in the dust.

But the shortcomings of such robots soon became obvious. The
top-down approach to artificial intelligence resulted in huge, clumsy
robots that took hours to navigate across a special room that contained
only objects with straight lines, that is, squares and triangles. If you
placed irregularly shaped furniture in the room the robot would be
powerless to recognize it (Ironically, a fruit fly, with a brain contain-
ing only about 250,000 neurons and a fraction of the computing power
of these robots, can effortlessly navigate in three dimensions, execut-

R O B O T S 111
ing dazzling loop-the-loop maneuvers, while these lumbering robots
get lost in two dimensions.)

The top-down approach soon hit a brick wall. Steve Grand, director
of the Cyberlife Institute, says that approaches like this "had fifty years
to prove themselves and haven't exactly lived up to their promise."

In the 1960s scientists did not fully appreciate the enormity of the
work involved in programming robots to accomplish even simple
tasks, such as programming a robot to identify objects such as keys,
shoes, and cups. As Rodney Brooks of MIT said, "Forty years ago the

Artificial Intelligence Laboratory at MIT appointed an undergraduate
to solve it over the summer. He failed, and I failed on the same prob-
lem in my 1981 Ph.D. thesis." In fact, AI researchers still cannot solve
this problem.

For example, when we enter a room, we immediately recognize
the floor, chairs, furniture, tables, and so forth. But when a robot scans
a room it sees nothing but a vast collection of straight and curved lines,
which it converts to pixels. It takes an enormous amount of computer
time to make sense out of this jumble of lines. It might take us a frac-
tion of a second to recognize a table, but a computer sees only a collec-
tion of circles, ovals, spirals, straight lines, curly lines, corners, and so
forth. After an enormous amount of computing time, a robot might fi-
nally recognize the object as a table. But if you rotate the image, the
computer has to start all over again. In other words, robots can see,
and in fact they can see much better than humans, but they don't un-
derstand what they are seeing. Upon entering a room, a robot would
see only a jumble of lines and curves, not chairs, tables, and lamps.

Our brain unconsciously recognizes objects by performing tril-
lions upon trillions of calculations when we walk into a room-an
activity that we are blissfully unaware of. The reason that we are un-
aware of all our brain is doing is evolution. If we were alone in the for-
est with a charging saber-toothed tiger, we would be paralyzed if we
were aware of all the computations necessary to recognize the danger
and escape. For the sake of survival, all we need to know is how to run.

When we lived in the jungle, it simply was not necessary for us to be

112 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
aware of all of the ins and outs of our brain's recognizing the ground,
the sky, the trees, the rocks, and so forth.

In other words, the way our brain works can be compared to a
huge iceberg. We are aware of only the tip of the iceberg, the conscious
mind. But lurking below the surface, hidden from view, is a much
larger object, the unconscious mind, which consumes vast amounts of
the brain's "computer power" to understand simple things surround-
ing it, such as figuring out where you are, whom you are talking to,
and what lies around you. All this is done automatically without our
permission or knowledge.

This is the reason that robots cannot navigate across a room, read
handwriting, drive trucks and cars, pick up garbage, and so forth. The

U.S. military has spent hundreds of millions of dollars trying to de-
velop mechanical soldiers and intelligent trucks, without success.

Scientists began to realize that playing chess or multiplying huge
numbers required only a tiny, narrow sliver of human intelligence.

When the IBM computer Deep Blue beat world chess champion Garry

Kasparov in a six-game match in 1997, it was a victory of raw computer
power, but the experiment told us nothing about intelligence or con-
sciousness, although the game made plenty of headlines. As Douglas

Hofstadter, a computer scientist at Indiana University, said, "My God, I
used to think chess required thought. Now, I realize it doesn't It doesn't
mean Kasparov isn't a deep thinker, just that you can bypass deep think-
ing in playing chess, the way you can fly without flapping your wings."

(Developments in computers will also have an enormous impact
on the future of the job market Futurists sometimes speculate that the
only people who will have jobs decades into the future will be highly
skilled computer scientists and technicians. But actually workers such
as sanitation men, construction workers, firemen, police, and so forth,
will also have jobs in the future because what they do involves pattern
recognition. Every crime, piece of garbage, tool, and fire is different
and hence cannot be managed by robots. Ironically, college-educated
workers, such as low-level accountants, brokers, and tellers, may lose
their jobs in the future since their work is semirepetitive and involves
keeping track of numbers, a task that computers excel at.)

R O B O T S 113

In addition to pattern recognition, the second problem with the de-
velopment of robots is even more fundamental, and that is their lack of

"common sense." Humans know, for example,

• Water is w e t

• Mothers are older than their daughters.

• Animals do not like pain.

• You don't come back after you die.

• Strings can pull, but not push.

• Sticks can push, but cannot pull.

• Time does not run backward.

But there is no line of calculus or mathematics that can express
these truths. We know all of this because we have seen animals, water,
and strings, and we have figured out the truth by ourselves. Children
learn common sense by bumping into reality. The intuitive laws of bi-
ology and physics are learned the hard way, by interacting with the
real world. But robots haven't experienced this. They know only what
has been programmed into them beforehand.

(As a result, the jobs of the future will also include those that
require common sense, that is, artistic creativity, originality, acting tal-
ent, humor, entertainment, analysis, and leadership. These are pre-
cisely the qualities that make us uniquely human and that computers
have difficulty duplicating.)

In the past, mathematicians have tried to mount a crash program
that could amass all the laws of common sense once and for all. The
most ambitious attempt is CYC (short for encyclopedia), the brainchild
of Douglas Lenat, the head of Cycorp. Like the Manhattan Project, the

$2 billion crash program that built the atomic bomb, CYC was to be the

"Manhattan Project" of artificial intelligence, the final push that would
achieve true artificial intelligence.

Not surprisingly, Lenat's motto is, Intelligence is 10 million rules.

(Lenat has a novel way in which to find new laws of common sense;
he has his staff read the pages of scandalous tabloids and lurid gossip
rags. Then he asks CYC if it can spot the errors in the tabloids. Actu-

114 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
ally, if Lenat succeeds in this, CYC may actually be more intelligent
than most tabloid readers!)

One of the goals of CYC is to attain "breakeven," that is, the point
at which a robot will be able to understand enough so that it can digest
new information on its own simply by reading magazines and books
found in any library. At that point, like a baby bird leaving the nest,

CYC will be able to flap its wings and take off on its own.

But since the firm's founding in 1984, its credibility has suffered
from a common problem in AI: making predictions that generate
headlines but are wildly unrealistic. Lenat predicted that in ten years,
by 1994, CYC would contain 30 to 50 percent of "consensus reality." To-
day CYC is not even close. As the scientists of Cycorp have found out,
millions and millions of lines of code need to be programmed in order
for a computer to approximate the common sense of a four-year-old
child. So far the latest version of the CYC program contains only a pal-
try 47,000 concepts and 306,000 facts. Despite Cycorp's regularly opti-
mistic press releases, one of Lenat's coworkers, R. V. Guha, who left the
team in 1994, was quoted as saying, "CYC is generally viewed as a
failed project We were killing ourselves trying to create a pale
shadow of what had been promised."

In other words, attempts to program all the laws of common sense
into a single computer have floundered, simply because there are so
many laws of common sense. Humans learn these laws effortlessly be-
cause we tediously continue to bump into the environment throughout
our lives, quietly assimilating the laws of physics and biology, but ro-
bots do not.

Microsoft founder Bill Gates admits, "It has been much harder
than expected to enable computers and robots to sense their surround-
ing environment and to react quickly and accurately . . . for example,
the abilities to orient themselves with respect to the objects in a room,
to respond to sounds and interpret speech, and to grasp objects of vary-
ing sizes, textures, and fragility. Even something as simple as telling
the difference between an open door and a window can be devilishly
tricky for a robot"

Proponents of the top-down approach to artificial intelligence,

R O B O T S 115
however, point out that progress in this direction, although at times
glacial, is happening in labs around the world. For example, for the
past few years the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency

(DARPA), which often funds state-of-the-art technology projects, has
sponsored a $2 million prize for the creation of a driverless vehicle that
can navigate by itself around a rugged terrain in the Mojave Desert. In

2004 not a single entry in the DARPA Grand Challenge could finish the
race. In fact the top car managed to travel 7.4 miles before breaking
down. But in 2005 the Stanford Racing Team's driverless car success-
fully navigated the grueling 132-mile course (although it took the car
seven hours to do so). Four other cars also completed the race. (Some
critics noted that the rules permitted the cars to use GPS navigation
systems along a long deserted path; in effect, the cars could follow a
predetermined road map without many obstructions, so the cars never
had to recognize complex obstacles in their path. In real driving, cars
have to navigate unpredictably around other cars, pedestrians, con-
struction sites, traffic jams, and so forth.)

Bill Gates is cautiously optimistic that robotic machines may be
the "next big thing." He likens the field of robotics now to the personal
computer field he helped to start thirty years ago. Like the PC, it may
be poised to take off. "No one can say with any certainty when-or if-
this industry will achieve critical mass," he writes. "If it does, though,
it may well change the world."

(Once robots with humanlike intelligence become commercially
available, there will be a huge market for them. Although true robots
do not exist today, preprogrammed robots do exist and have prolifer-
ated. The International Federation of Robotics estimates that there
were about 2 million of these personal robots in 2004, and that another

7 million would be installed by 2008. The Japanese Robot Association
predicts that by 2025 the personal robot industry, today worth $5 bil-
lion, will be worth $50 billion per year.)

116 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

T H E B O T T O M - U P A P P R O A C H

Because of the limitations of the top-down approach to artificial intel-
ligence, attempts have been made to use a "bottom-up" approach in-
stead, that is, to mimic evolution and the way a baby learns. Insects, for
example, do not navigate by scanning their environment and reducing
the image to trillions upon trillions of pixels that they process with su-
percomputers. Instead insect brains are composed of "neural net-
works," learning machines that slowly learn how to navigate in a
hostile world by bumping into it At MIT, walking robots were notori-
ously difficult to create via the top-down approach. But simple buglike
mechanical creatures that bump into the environment and learn from
scratch can successfully scurry around the floor at MIT within a mat-
ter of minutes.

Rodney Brooks, director of MIT's famed Artificial Intelligence Lab-
oratory, famous for its huge, lumbering "top-down" walking robots,
became a heretic when he explored the idea of tiny "insectoid" robots
that learned to walk the old-fashioned way, by stumbling and bump-
ing into things. Instead of using elaborate computer programs to math-
ematically compute the precise position of their feet as they walked,
his insectoids used trial and error to coordinate their leg motions us-
ing little computer power. Today many of the descendants of Brooks's
insectoid robots are on Mars gathering data for NASA, scurrying across
the bleak Martian landscape with a mind of their own. Brooks believes
that his insectoids are ideally suited to explore the solar system.

One of Brooks's projects has been COG, an attempt to create a me-
chanical robot with the intelligence of a six-month-old child. On the
outside COG looks like a jumble of wires, circuits, and gears, except
that it has a head, eyes, and arms. No laws of intelligence have been
programmed into it. Instead it is designed to focus its eyes on a human
trainer, who tries to teach it simple skills. (One researcher who be-
came pregnant made a bet as to which would learn faster, COG or her
child by the age of two. The child far surpassed COG.)

For all the successes in mimicking the behavior of insects, robots

R O B O T S ii7
using neural networks have performed miserably when their pro-
grammers have tried to duplicate in them the behavior of higher or-
ganisms like mammals. The most advanced robot using neural
networks can walk across the room or swim in water, but it cannot
jump and hunt like a dog in the forest, or scurry around the room like
a rat. Many large neural network robots may consist of tens to perhaps
hundreds of "neurons"; the human brain, however, has over 100 bil-
lion neurons. C. elegans, a very simple worm whose nervous system
has been completely mapped by biologists, has just over 300 neurons
in its nervous system, making its nervous system perhaps one of the
simplest found in nature. But there are over 7,000 synapses between
these neurons. As simple as C. elegans is, its nervous system is so com-
plex that no one has yet been able to construct a computer model of
this brain. (In 1988 one computer expert predicted that by now we
should have robots with about 100 million artificial neurons. Actually,
a neural network with 100 neurons is considered exceptional.)

The supreme irony is that machines can effortlessly perform tasks
that humans consider "hard," such as multiplying large numbers or
playing chess, but machines stumble badly when asked to perform
tasks that are supremely "easy" for human beings, such as walking
across a room, recognizing faces, or gossiping with a friend. The rea-
son is that our most advanced computers are basically just adding ma-
chines. Our brain, however, is exquisitely designed by evolution to
solve the mundane problems of survival, which require a whole com-
plex architecture of thought, such as common sense and pattern recog-
nition. Survival in the forest did not depend on calculus or chess, but
on evading predators, finding mates, and adjusting to changing envi-
ronments.

MIT's Marvin Minsky, one of the original founders of AI, summarizes
the problems of AI in this way: "The history of AI is sort of funny be-
cause the first real accomplishments were beautiful things, like a ma-
chine that could do proofs in logic or do well in a calculus course. But

118 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
then we started to try to make machines that could answer questions
about the simple kinds of stories that are in a first-grade reader book.

There's no machine today that can do that."

Some believe that eventually there will be a grand synthesis be-
tween the two approaches, the top-down and bottom-up, which may
provide the key to artificial intelligence and humanlike robots. After
all, when a child learns, although he first relies mainly on the bottom-
up approach, bumping into his surroundings, eventually he receives
instruction from parents, books, and schoolteachers, and learns from
the top-down approach. As an adult, we constantly blend these two ap-
proaches. A cook, for example, reads from a recipe but also constantly
samples the dish as it is cooking.

Hans Moravec says, "Fully intelligent machines will result when
the mechanical golden spike is driven uniting the two efforts," proba-
bly within the next forty years.

E M O T I O N A L R O B O T S ?

One consistent theme in literature and art is the mechanical being that
yearns to become human, to share in human emotions. Not content to
be made of wires and cold steel, it wishes to laugh, cry, and feel all the
emotional pleasures of a human being.

Pinocchio, for example, was the puppet that wanted to become a
real boy. The Tin Man in the The Wizard of Oz wanted to have a heart

And Data, on Star Trek, is a robot that can outperform all humans in
strength and intelligence, yet still yearns to become human.

Some people have even suggested that our emotions represent the
highest quality of what it means to be human. No machine will ever be
able to thrill at a blazing sunset or laugh at a humorous joke, they
claim. Some say that it is impossible for machines ever to have emo-
tions, since emotions represent the pinnacle of human development.

But the scientists working on AI and trying to break down emo-
tions paint a different picture. To them emotions, far from being the
essence of humanity, are actually a by-product of evolution. Simply

R O B O T S 119
put, emotions are good for us. They helped us to survive in the forest,
and even today they help us to navigate the dangers of life.

For example, "liking" something is very important evolutionarily,
because most things are harmful to us. Of the millions of objects that
we bump into every day, only a handful are beneficial to us. Hence to

"like" something is to make a distinction between one out of the tiny
fraction of things that can help us over against the millions of things
that might hurt us.

Similarly, jealousy is an important emotion, because our repro-
ductive success is vital in ensuring the survival of our genes to the next
generation. (In fact, that is why there are so many emotionally charged
feelings related to sex and love.)

Shame and remorse are important because they help us to learn
the socialization skills necessary to function in a cooperative society. If
we never say we're sorry, eventually we will be expelled from the tribe,
diminishing our chances of surviving and passing on our genes.

Loneliness, too, is an essential emotion. At first loneliness seems to
be unnecessary and redundant. After all, we can function alone. But
longing to be with companions is also important for our survival, since
we depend on the resources of the tribe to survive.

In other words, when robots become more advanced, they, too,
might be equipped with emotions. Perhaps robots will be programmed
to bond with their owners or caretakers, to ensure that they don't wind
up in the garbage dump. Having such emotions would help to ease
their transition into society, so that they could be helpful companions,
rather than rivals of their owners.

Computer expert Hans Moravec believes that robots will be pro-
grammed with emotions such as "fear" to protect themselves. For ex-
ample, if a robot's batteries are running down, the robot "would express
agitation, or even panic, with signals that humans can recognize. It
would go to the neighbors and ask them to use their plug, saying,

'Please! Please! I need this! It's so important, it's such a small cost! We'll
reimburse you!' "

Emotions are vital in decision making, as well. People who have
suffered a certain kind of brain injury lack the ability to experience

120 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
emotions. Their reasoning ability is intact, but they cannot express any
feelings. Neurologist Dr. Antonio Damasio of the University of Iowa

College of Medicine, who has studied people with these types of brain
injuries, concludes that they seem "to know, but not to feel."

Dr. Damasio finds that such individuals are often paralyzed in
making the smallest decisions. Without emotions to guide them, they
endlessly debate over this option or that option, leading to crippling in-
decision. One patient of Dr. Damasio spent half an hour trying to de-
cide the date of his next appointment.

Scientists believe that emotions are processed in the "limbic sys-
tem" of the brain, which lies deep in the center of our brain. When
people suffer from a loss of communication between the neocortex

(which governs rational thinking) and the limbic system, their reason-
ing powers are intact but they have no emotions to guide them in mak-
ing decisions. Sometimes we have a "hunch" or a "gut reaction" that
propels our decision making. People with injuries that effect the com-
munication between the rational and emotional parts of the brain do
not have this ability.

For example, when we go shopping we unconsciously make thou-
sands of value judgments about almost everything we see, such as

"This is too expensive, too cheap, too colorful, too silly, or just right."

For people with this type of brain injury, shopping can be a nightmare
because everything seems to have the same value.

As robots become more intelligent and are able to make choices of
their own, they could likewise become paralyzed with indecision.

(This is reminiscent of the parable of the donkey sitting between two
bales of hay that eventually dies of starvation because it cannot decide
which to eat.) To aid them, robots of the future may need to have emo-
tions hardwired into their brains. Commenting on the lack of emotions
in robots, Dr. Rosalind Picard of the MIT Media Lab says, "They can't
feel what's most important. That's one of their biggest failings. Com-
puters just don't get it."

As Russian novelist Fyodor Dostoevsky wrote, "If everything on

Earth were rational, nothing would happen."

In other words, robots of the future may need emotions to set goals

R O B O T S 121
and to give meaning and structure to their "lives," or else they will find
themselves paralyzed with infinite possibilities.

A R E T H E Y C O N S C I O U S ?

There is no universal consensus as to whether machines can be con-
scious, or even a consensus as to what consciousness means. No one
has come up with a suitable definition of consciousness.

Marvin Minsky describes consciousness as more of a "society of
minds," that is, the thinking process in our brain is not localized but
spread out, with different centers competing with one another at any
given time. Consciousness may then be viewed as a sequence of
thoughts and images issuing from these different, smaller "minds,"

each one grabbing and competing for our attention.

If this is true, perhaps "consciousness" has been overblown, per-
haps there have been too many papers devoted to a subject that has
been overmystified by philosophers and psychologists. Maybe defining
consciousness is not so hard. As Sydney Brenner of the Salk Institute
in La Jolla says, "I predict that by 2020-the year of good vision-con-
sciousness will have disappeared as a scientific problem.... Our suc-
cessors will be amazed by the amount of scientific rubbish discussed
today-that is, if they have the patience to trawl through the electronic
archives of obsolete journals."

AI research has been suffering from "physics envy," according to

Marvin Minsky. In physics the holy grail has been to find a simple
equation that will unify the physical forces of the universe into a sin-
gle theory, creating a "theory of everything." AI researchers, overly in-
fluenced by this idea, have tried to find a single paradigm that would
explain consciousness. But such a simple paradigm may not exist, ac-
cording to Minsky.

(Those in the "constructionist" school, like myself, believe that in-
stead of endlessly debating whether thinking machines can be created
or not, one should instead try to build one. Regarding consciousness,
there is probably a continuum of consciousness, from a lowly thermo-

122 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
stat that monitors the temperature in a room to the self-aware organ-
isms that we are today. Animals may be conscious, but they do not pos-
sess the level of consciousness of a human being. One should try,
therefore, to categorize all the various types and levels of consciousness
rather than debate philosophical questions about the meaning of con-
sciousness. Robots may eventually attain a "silicon consciousness." Ro-
bots, in fact, may one day embody an architecture for thinking and
processing information that is different from ours. In the future, ad-
vanced robots might blur the difference between syntax and semantics,
so that their responses will be indistinguishable from the responses of
a human. If so, the question of whether they really "understand" the
question will be largely irrelevant. A robot that has perfect mastery of
syntax, for all practical purposes, understands what is being said. In
other words, a perfect mastery of syntax is understanding.)

C O U L D R O B O T S B E D A N G E R O U S ?

Because of Moore's law, which states that computer power doubles
every eighteen months, it is conceivable that within a few decades ro-
bots will be created that have the intelligence, say, of a dog or a cat But
by 2020 Moore's law may well collapse and the age of silicon could
come to an end. For the past fifty years or so the astounding growth in
computer power has been fueled by the ability to create tiny silicon
transistors, tens of millions of which can easily fit on your fingernail.

Beams of ultraviolet radiation are used to etch microscopic transistors
onto wafers made of silicon. But this process cannot last forever. Even-
tually, these transistors could become so small that they reach the size
of molecules, and the process will break down. Silicon Valley could be-
come a Rust Belt after 2020, when the age of silicon finally comes to
an end.

The Pentium chip in your laptop computer has a layer about
twenty atoms across. By 2020 that Pentium chip might consist of a
layer only five atoms across. At that point the Heisenberg uncertainty

R O B O T S 123
principle kicks in, and you no longer know where the electron is. Elec-
tricity will then leak out of the chip and the computer will short-
circuit. At that point, the computer revolution and Moore's law will hit
a dead end because of the laws of the quantum theory. (Some people
have claimed that the digital era is the "victory of bits over atoms." But
eventually, when we hit the limit of Moore's law, atoms may have their
revenge.)

Physicists are now working on the post-silicon technology that will
dominate the computer world after 2020, but so far with mixed results.

As we have seen, a variety of technologies are being studied that may
eventually replace silicon technology, including quantum computers,

DNA computers, optical computers, atomic computers, and so forth.

But each of them faces huge hurdles before it can take on the mantle
of silicon chips. Manipulating individual atoms and molecules is a
technology that is still in its infancy, so making billions of transistors
that are atomic in size is still beyond our ability.

But assume, for the moment, that physicists are capable of bridg-
ing the gap between silicon chips and, say, quantum computers. And
assume that some form of Moore's law continues into the post-silicon
era. Then artificial intelligence might become a true possibility. At that
point robots might master human logic and emotions and pass the

Turing test every time. Steven Spielberg explored this question in his
movie Artificial Intelligence: AI where the first robot boy was created

9
that could exhibit emotions, and was hence suitable for adoption into
a human family.

This raises the question: could such robots be dangerous? The an-
swer is likely yes. They could become dangerous once they have the
intelligence of a monkey, which is self-aware and can create its own
agenda. It may take many decades to reach such a point, so scientists
will have plenty of time to observe robots before they pose a threat. For
example, a special chip could be placed in their processors that could
prevent them from going on the rampage. Or they could have a self-
destruct or deactivation mechanism that would turn them off in case
of an emergency.

124 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Arthur C. Clarke wrote, "It is possible that we may become pets of
the computers, leading pampered existences like lapdogs, but I hope
that we will always retain the ability to pull the plug if we feel like it."

A more mundane threat is that our infrastructure depends on com-
puters. Our water and electricity grid, not to mention transportation
and communications networks, will be increasingly computerized in
the future. Our cities have become so complex that only complex and
intricate computer networks can regulate and monitor our vast infra-
structure. In the future it will become increasingly important to add
artificial intelligence to this computer network. A failure or breakdown
in this all-pervasive computer infrastructure could paralyze a city,
country, or even a civilization.

Will computers eventually surpass us in intelligence? Certainly,
there is nothing in the laws of physics to prevent that If robots are neu-
ral networks capable of learning, and they develop to the point where
they can learn faster and more efficiently than we can, then it's logical
that they might eventually surpass us in reasoning. Moravec says,

"[The postbiological world] is a world in which the human race has
been swept away by the tide of cultural change, usurped by its own ar-
tificial progeny . . . When that happens, our DNA will find itself out of
a job, having lost the evolutionary race to a new kind of competition."

Some inventors, such as Ray Rurzweil, have even predicted that
this time will come soon, earlier rather than later, even within the next
few decades. Perhaps we are creating our evolutionary successors.

Some computer scientists envision a point they call "singularity,"

when robots will be able to process information exponentially fast,
creating new robots in the process, until their collective ability to ab-
sorb information advances almost without limit.

So in the long term some have advocated a merging of carbon and
silicon technology, rather than waiting for our extinction. We humans
are mainly based on carbon, but robots are based on silicon (at least
for the moment). Perhaps the solution is to merge with our creations.

(If we ever encounter extraterrestrials, we should not be surprised to
find that they are part organic, part mechanical to withstand the rigors
of space travel and to flourish in hostile environments.)

R O B O T S 125

In the far future, robots or humanlike cyborgs may even grant us
the gift of immortality. Marvin Minsky adds, "What if the sun dies out,
or we destroy the planet? Why not make better physicists, engineers,
or mathematicians? We may need to be the architects of our own fu-
ture. If we don't our culture could disappear."

Moravec envisions a time in the distant future when our neural ar-
chitecture will be transferred, neuron for neuron, directly into a ma-
chine, giving us, in a sense, immortality. It's a wild thought, but not
beyond the realm of possibility. So, according to some scientists view-
ing the far future, immortality (in the form of DNA-enhanced or silicon
bodies) may be the ultimate future of humanity.

The idea of creating thinking machines that are at least as smart
as animals and perhaps as smart or smarter than us could become a
reality if we can overcome the collapse of Moore's law and the common-
sense problem, perhaps even late in this century. Although the funda-
mental laws of AI are still being discovered, progress in this area is
happening extremely fast and is promising. Given that, I would classify
robots and other thinking machines as a Class I impossibility.

Either we are alone in the universe, or we are not.

Either thought is frightening.

-ARTHUR C. CLARKE

A gargantuan spaceship, stretching miles across, looms directly over

Los Angeles, filling up the entire sky and ominously darkening the
entire city. All over the world, saucer-shaped fortresses position them-
selves over the major cities of the world. Hundreds of jubilant specta-
tors, wishing to welcome the beings from another planet to L. A., gather
on top of a skyscraper to reach out to their celestial guests.

After days of hovering silently over L.A., the spaceship's belly
slowly opens up. A searing blast of laser light shoots out, incinerating
the skyscraper, unleashing a tidal wave of destruction that rolls across
the entire city, reducing it to burned rubble within seconds.

In the movie Independence Day aliens represent our deepest fears.

In the movie ET.we project onto aliens our own dreams and fantasies.

Throughout history people have been fascinated by the thought of
alien creatures that inhabit other worlds. As far back as 1611, in his
treatise Somnium, the astronomer Johannes Kepler, using the best sci-
entific knowledge of the time, speculated about a trip to the moon dur-
ing which one might encounter strange aliens, plants, and animals.

But science and religion often collide on the subject of life in space,
sometimes with tragic results.

E X T R H T E R R E S T R I H L S HND UFOS 127

A few years earlier, in 1600, former Dominican monk and philoso-
pher Giordano Bruno was burned alive in the streets of Rome. To hu-
miliate him, the Church hung him upside down and stripped him
naked before finally burning him at the stake. What made the teach-
ings of Bruno so dangerous? He had asked a simple question: is there
life in outer space? Like Copernicus, he believed that the Earth re-
volved around the sun, but unlike Copernicus, he believed that there
could be countless numbers of creatures like us living in outer space.

(Rather than entertain the possibility of billions of saints, popes,
churches, and Jesus Christs in outer space, it was more convenient for
the Church simply to burn him.)

For four hundred years the memory of Bruno has haunted the his-
torians of science. But today Bruno has his revenge every few weeks.

About twice a month a new extrasolar planet is discovered orbiting a
star in space. Over 250 planets have now been documented orbiting
other stars in space. Bruno's prediction of extrasolar planets has been
vindicated. But one question still lingers. Although the Milky Way
galaxy may be teaming with extrasolar planets, how many of them can
support life? And if intelligent life does exist in space, what can science
say about it?

Hypothetical encounters with extraterrestrials, of course, have fas-
cinated society and thrilled readers and movie audiences for genera-
tions. The most famous incident occurred on October 30, 1938, when

Orson Welles decided to play a Halloween trick on the American pub-
lic. He took the basic plot of H. G. Wells's War of the Worlds and made
a series of short news announcements on CBS national radio, inter-
rupting dance music to reenact, hour by hour, the invasion of Earth by

Martians and the subsequent collapse of civilization. Millions of Amer-
icans were panic-stricken over the "news" that machines from Mars
had landed in Grover's Mill, New Jersey, and were unleashing death
rays to destroy entire cities and conquer the world. (Newspapers later
recorded that spontaneous evacuations took place as people fled the
area, with eyewitnesses claiming they could smell poison gas and see
flashes of light in the distance.)

Fascination with Mars peaked again in the 1950s, when as-

128 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
tronomers noticed a strange marking on Mars that looked like a gigan-
tic Mthat was hundreds of miles across. Commentators noted that per-
haps the M stood for "Mars," and Martians were peacefully signaling
their presence to earthlings, like cheerleaders spelling out their team's
name in a football stadium. (Others noted darkly that the M marking
was actually a W and W stands for "war." In other words, the Martians 9
were actually declaring war on the Earth!) The mini-panic eventually
subsided when this mysterious M disappeared just as abruptly as it
had appeared. In all likelihood this marking was caused by a dust
storm that covered the entire planet, except for the tops of four large
volcanoes. The tops of these volcanoes roughly took on the shape of an

M o r a W.

T H E S C I E N T I F I C S E A R C H F O R L I F E

Serious scientists studying the possibility of extraterrestrial life state
that it is impossible to say anything definitive about such life, assum-
ing that it exists. Nonetheless, we can make some general arguments
on the nature of alien life based on what we know of physics, chem-
istry, and biology.

First, scientists believe that liquid water will be the key factor in
creating life in the universe. "Follow the water" is the mantra recited
by astronomers as they search for evidence of life in space. Liquid wa-
ter, unlike most liquids, is a "universal solvent" that can dissolve an as-
tonishing variety of chemicals. It is an ideal mixing bowl to create
increasingly complex molecules. Water is also a simple molecule that
is found throughout the universe, while other solvents are quite rare.

Second, we know that carbon is a likely component in creating life
because it has four bonds and hence the ability to bind to four other
atoms and create molecules of incredible complexity. In particular, it
is easy to form long carbon chains, which become the basis for hydro-
carbon and organic chemistry. Other elements with four bonds do not
have such a rich chemistry.

E X T R H T E R H E S T H I H L S HND UFOS 129

The most vivid illustration of the importance of carbon was the fa-
mous experiment conducted by Stanley Miller and Harold Urey in

1953, which showed that the spontaneous formation of life may be a
natural by-product of carbon chemistry. They took a solution of am-
monia, methane, and other toxic chemicals that they believed were
found in the early Earth, put it in a flask, exposed it to a small electri-
cal current, and then simply waited. Within one week they could see
evidence of amino acids forming spontaneously in the flask. The elec-
trical current was sufficient to break apart the carbon bonds within
ammonia and methane and then rearrange the atoms into amino
acids, the precursors of proteins. In some sense, life can form sponta-
neously. Since then, amino acids have been found inside meteorites
and also in gas clouds in deep space.

Third, the fundamental basis of life is the self-replicating molecule
called DNA. In chemistry, self-replicating molecules are extremely
rare. It took hundreds of millions of years to form the first DNA mole-
cule on Earth, probably deep in the oceans. Presumably, if one could
perform the Miller-Urey experiment for a million years in the oceans,

DNA-like molecules would spontaneously form. One likely site where
the first DNA molecule on Earth might have occurred early in the

Earth's history is near volcano vents on the ocean bottom, since the ac-
tivity of the vents would create a convenient supply of energy for the
early DNA molecule and cells, before the arrival of photosynthesis and
plants. It is not known if other carbon-based molecules besides DNA
can also be self-replicating, but it is likely that other self-replicating
molecules in the universe will resemble DNA in some way.

So life probably requires liquid water, hydrocarbon chemicals, and
some form of self-replicating molecule like DNA. Using these broad
criteria one can derive a rough estimate for the frequency of intelligent
life in the universe. In 1961 Cornell University astronomer Frank

Drake was one of the first to make a rough estimate. If you start with

100 billion stars in the Milky Way galaxy, you can estimate what frac-
tion of them have stars like our sun. Of these, you can estimate what
fraction have solar systems revolving around them.

130 P H V S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

More specifically, Drake's equation calculates the number of civi-
lizations in the galaxy by multiplying several numbers together, in-
cluding

• the rate at which stars are born in the galaxy,

• the fraction of these stars that have planets,

• the number of planets for each star that have the conditions for life,

• the fraction of planets that actually develop life,

• the fraction that develop intelligent life,

• the fraction that are willing and able to communicate, and

• the expected lifetime of a civilization.

By taking reasonable estimates and by multiplying these succes-
sive probabilities, one realizes that there could be between 100 and

10,000 planets in the Milky Way galaxy alone that are able to harbor
intelligent life. If these intelligent life-forms are uniformly scattered
across the Milky Way galaxy, then we should expect to find such a
planet just a few hundred light-years from Earth. In 1974 Carl Sagan
estimated that there might be up to a million such civilizations within
our Milky Way galaxy alone.

This theorizing, in turn, has provided added justification for those
looking to find evidence for extraterrestrial civilizations. Given the fa-
vorable estimate of planets capable of harboring intelligent life-forms,
scientists have begun seriously to look for the radio signals such plan-
ets may have emitted, much like the TV and radio signals that our own
planet has been emitting for the past fifty years.

L I S T E N I N G T O E T

The Search for Extraterrestrial Intelligence (SETI) project dates back
to an influential paper written in 1959 by physicists Giuseppe Cocconi
and Philip Morrison, who suggested that listening to microwave radi-
ation of a frequency between 1 and 10 gigahertz would be the most
suitable way to eavesdrop on extraterrestrial communications. (Below

1 gigahertz, signals would be washed out by radiation emitted by fast-

E X T R H T E R H E S T H I H L S HND UFOS 131
moving electrons; beyond 10 gigahertz, noise from oxygen and water
molecules in our own atmosphere would interfere with any signals.)

They selected 1,420 gigahertz as the most promising frequency in
which to listen to signals from outer space, since that was the emission
frequency for ordinary hydrogen gas, the most plentiful element in the
universe. (Frequencies around that range are nicknamed the "water-
ing hole," given their convenience for extraterrestrial communica-
tion.)

Searches for evidence of intelligent signals near the watering hole,
however, have been disappointing. In 1960 Frank Drake initiated Pro-
ject Ozma (named after the Queen of Oz) to search for signals using
the 25-meter radio telescope in Green Bank, West Virginia. No signals
were ever found, either in Project Ozma or in other projects that, in fits
and starts, tried to scan the night sky over the years.

In 1971 an ambitious proposal was made by NASA to fund SETI re-
search. Dubbed Project Cyclops, the effort involved fifteen hundred ra-
dio telescopes at a cost of $10 billion. Not surprisingly, the research
never went anywhere. Funding did become available for a much more
modest proposal, to send a carefully coded message to alien life in
outer space. In 1974 a coded message of 1,679 bits was transmitted via
the giant Arecibo radio telescope in Puerto Rico toward the Globular

Cluster M13, about 25,100 light-years away. In this short message, sci-
entists created a 23 x 73 dimensional grid pattern that plotted the loca-
tion of our solar system, containing an illustration of human beings
and some chemical formulae. (Because of the large distances involved,
the earliest date for a reply from outer space would be 52,174 years
from now.)

Congress has not been impressed with the significance of these
projects, even after a mysterious radio signal, called the "Wow" signal,
was received in 1977. It consisted of a series of letters and numbers that
seemed to be nonrandom and seemed to be signaling the existence of
intelligence. (Some who have seen the Wow signal have not been con-
vinced.)

In 1995, frustrated by the lack of funding from the federal govern-
ment, astronomers turned to private sources to start the nonprofit SETI

132 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Institute in Mountain View, California, to centralize SETI research and
initiate Project Phoenix to study one thousand nearby sunlike stars in
the 1,200- to 3,000-megahertz range. Dr. Jill Tarter (the model for the
scientist played by Jodie Foster in the movie Contact) was named di-
rector. (The equipment used in the project was so sensitive that it could
pick up the emissions from an airport radar system 200 light-years
away.)

Since 1995 the SETI Institute has scanned more than one thousand
stars at a cost of $5 million per year. But there have been no tangible
results. Nevertheless, Seth Shostak, senior astronomer at SETI, opti-
mistically believes that the 350-antenna Allen Telescope Array now be-
ing built 250 miles northeast of San Francisco "will trip across a signal
by the year 2025."

A more novel approach is the SETI@home project, initiated by as-
tronomers at the University of California at Berkeley in 1999. They hit
upon the idea of enlisting millions of PC owners whose computers sit
idle most of the time. Those who participate download a software
package that will help to decode some of the radio signals received by
a radio telescope while the participant's screen saver is activated, so
there is no inconvenience to the PC user. So far the project has signed
up 5 million users in more than two hundred countries, consuming
over a billion dollars of electricity, all at little cost. It is the most ambi-
tious collective computer project ever undertaken in history and could
serve as a model for other projects that need vast computer resources
to carry out computations. So far no signal from an intelligent source
has been found by SETI@home.

After decades of hard work, the glaring lack of any progress in

SETI research has forced its proponents to ask hard questions. One ob-
vious defect might be the exclusive use of radio signals at certain fre-
quency bands. Some have suggested that alien life might use laser
signals instead of radio signals. Lasers have several advantages over
radio, because a laser's short wavelength means that you can pack
more signals into one wave than you can with radio. But because laser
light is highly directional and also contains just one frequency, it is ex-
ceptionally hard to tune into precisely the right laser frequency.

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S RND U F O S 133

Another obvious defect might be SETI researchers' reliance on
certain radio frequency bands. If there is alien life, it may use compres-
sion techniques or might disperse messages via smaller packages,
strategies that are used on the modern Internet today. Listening in on
compressed messages that have been spread over many frequencies,
we might hear only random noise.

But given all the formidable problems facing SETI, it is reasonable
to assume that sometime in this century we should be able to detect
some signal from an extraterrestrial civilization, assuming that such
civilizations exist. And should that happen, it would represent a mile-
stone in the history of the human race.

W H E R E A R E T H E Y ?

The fact that the SETI project so far has found no indication of signals
from intelligent life in the universe has forced scientists to take a cold,
hard look at the assumptions behind Frank Drake's equations for intel-
ligent life on other planets. Recently astronomical discoveries have led
us to believe that the chance of finding intelligent life are much differ-
ent than originally computed by Drake in the 1960s. The chance that
intelligent life exists in the universe is both more optimistic and more
pessimistic than originally believed.

First, new discoveries have led us to believe that life can flourish in
ways not considered by Drake's equations. Before, scientists believed
that liquid water can exist only in the "Goldilocks zone" surrounding
the sun. (The distance from Earth to the sun is "just right." Not too close
to the sun, because the oceans would boil, and not too far away, be-
cause the oceans would freeze, but "just right" to make life possible.)

So it came as a shock when astronomers found evidence that liq-
uid water may exist beneath the ice cover on Europa, a frozen moon of

Jupiter. Europa is well outside the Goldilocks zone, so it would appear
not to fit the conditions of Drake's equation. Yet tidal forces might be
sufficient to melt the ice cover of Europa and produce a permanent liq-
uid ocean. As Europa spins around Jupiter, the planet's huge gravita-

134 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
tional field squeezes the moon like a rubber ball, creating friction deep
within its core, which in turn could cause the ice cover to melt. Since
there are over one hundred moons in our solar system alone, this
means that there could be an abundance of life-supporting moons in
our solar system outside the Goldilocks zone. (And the 250 or so giant
extrasolar planets so far discovered in space might also have frozen
moons that can support life.)

Furthermore, scientists believe the universe could be peppered
with wandering planets that no longer circle around any star. Because
of tidal forces, any moon orbiting a wandering planet might have liq-
uid oceans under its ice cover and hence life, but such moons would
be impossible to see by our instruments, which depend on detecting
light from the mother star.

Given that the number of moons probably greatly outnumbers the
number of planets in a solar system, and given that there could be mil-
lions of wandering planets in the galaxy, the number of astronomical
bodies with life-forms in the universe might be much larger than pre-
viously believed.

On the other hand, other astronomers have concluded, for a variety
of reasons, that the chances for life on planets within the Goldilocks
zone are probably much lower than originally estimated by Drake.

First, computer programs show that the presence of a Jupiter-sized
planet in a solar system is necessary to fling passing comets and me-
teors into space, thereby continually cleaning out a solar system and
making life possible. If Jupiter did not exist in our solar system, Earth
would be pelted with meteors and comets, making life impossible. Dr.

George Wetherill, an astronomer at the Carnegie Institution in Wash-
ington, D.C., estimates that without the presence of Jupiter or Saturn
in our solar system, the Earth would have suffered a thousand times
more asteroid collisions, with a huge life-threatening impact (like the
one that destroyed the dinosaurs 65 million years ago) occurring every
ten thousand years. "It's hard to imagine how life could survive that
extreme onslaught," he says.

Second, our planet is blessed with a large moon, which helps to
stabilize the Earth's spin. Extending Newton's laws of gravity over mil-

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S AND UFOS 135
lions of years, scientists can show that without a large moon, our

Earth's axis probably would have become unstable and the Earth
might have tumbled, making life impossible. French astronomer Dr.

Jacques Lasker estimates that without our moon the Earth's axis could
oscillate between 0 and 54 degrees, which would precipitate extreme
weather conditions incompatible with life. So the presence of a large
moon also has to be factored into conditions used for Drake's equa-
tions. (The fact that Mars has two tiny moons, too small to stabilize its
spin, means that Mars may have tumbled in the distant past, and may
tumble again in the future.)

Third, recent geological evidence points to the fact that many times
in the past, life on Earth was almost extinguished. About 2 billion years
ago the Earth was probably completely covered in ice; it was a "snow-
ball Earth" that could barely support life. At other times, volcanic erup-
tions and meteor impacts might have come close to destroying all life
on Earth. So the creation and evolution of life is more fragile than we
originally thought.

Fourth, intelligent life was also nearly extinguished in the past.

About a hundred thousand years ago there were probably only a few
hundred to a few thousand humans, based on the latest DNA evidence.

Unlike most animals within a given species, which are separated by
large genetic differences, humans are all nearly alike genetically.

Compared to the animal kingdom, we are almost like clones of each
other. This phenomenon can only be explained if there were "bottle-
necks" in our history in which most of the human race was nearly
wiped out For example, a large volcanic eruption might have caused
the weather to suddenly get cold, nearly killing off the entire human
race.

There are still other fortuitous accidents that were necessary to
spawn life on Earth, including

• A strong magnetic field. This is necessary in order to deflect cosmic
rays and radiation that could destroy life on Earth.

• A moderate speed of planetary rotation. If the Earth rotated too
slowly, the side facing the sun would be blisteringly hot, while the

136 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
other side would be freezing cold for long periods of time; if the

Earth rotated too quickly, there would be extremely violent weather
conditions, such as monster winds and storms.

• A location that is the right distance from the center of the galaxy. If
the Earth were too close to the center of the Milky Way galaxy, it
would be hit with dangerous radiation; if it were too far from the
center, our planet would not have enough higher elements to create

DNA molecules and proteins.

For all these reasons astronomers now believe that life might exist
outside the Goldilocks zone on moons or wandering planets, but that
the chances of the existence of a planet like Earth capable of support-
ing life within the Goldilocks zone are much lower than previously be-
lieved. Overall most estimates of Drake's equations show that the
chances of finding civilization in the galaxy are probably smaller than
he originally estimated.

As Professors Peter Ward and Donald Brownlee have written, "We
believe that life in the form of microbes and their equivalents is very
common in the universe, perhaps more common than even Drake and

[Carl] Sagan envisioned. However, complex life-animals and higher
plants-is likely to be far more rare than is commonly assumed." In
fact, Ward and Brownlee leave open the possibility that the Earth may
be unique in the galaxy for harboring animal life. (Although this the-
ory may dampen the search for intelligent life in our galaxy, it still
leaves open the possibility of life existing in other distant galaxies.)

T H E S E A R C H F O R E A R T H - L I K E P L A N E T S

Drake's equation, of course, is purely hypothetical. That is why the
search for life in outer space has gotten a boost from the discovery of
extrasolar planets. What has hindered research into extrasolar planets
is that they are invisible to any telescope since they give off no light of
their own. They are in general a million to a billion times dimmer than
the mother star.

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S RND U F O S 137

To find them astronomers are forced to analyze tiny wobblings in
the mother star, assuming that a large Jupiter-sized planet is capable
of altering the orbit of the star. (Imagine a dog chasing its tail. In the
same way, the mother star and its Jupiter-size planet "chase" each
other by revolving around each other. A telescope cannot see the

Jupiter-sized planet, which is dark, but the mother star is clearly visi-
ble and appears to wobble back and forth.)

The first true extrasolar planet was found in 1994 by Dr. Alexandr

Wolszczan of Pennsylvania State University, who observed planets re-
volving around a dead star, a rotating pulsar. Because the mother star
had probably exploded as a supernova, it seemed likely that these
planets were dead, scorched planets. The following year two Swiss as-
tronomers, Michel Mayor and Didier Queloz of Geneva, announced
that they had found a more promising planet with a mass similar to

Jupiter orbiting the star 51 Pegasi. Soon after that the floodgates were
opened.

In the last ten years there has been a spectacular acceleration in
the number of extrasolar planets being found. Geologist Bruce Jakosky
of the University of Colorado at Boulder says, "This is a special time in
the history of humanity. We're the first generation that has a realistic
chance of discovering life on another planet"

None of the solar systems found so far resemble our own. In fact,
they are all quite dissimilar to our solar system. Once, astronomers
thought that our solar system was typical of others throughout the uni-
verse, with circular orbits and three rings of planets surrounding the
mother star: a rocky belt of planets closest to the star, next a belt of gas
giants, and finally a comet belt of frozen icebergs.

Much to their surprise, astronomers found that none of the planets
in other solar systems followed that simple rule. In particular, Jupiter-
sized planets were expected to be found far from the mother star, but
instead many of them orbited either extremely close to the mother star

(even closer than the orbit of Mercury) or in extremely elliptical orbits.

Either way the existence of a small, Earth-like planet orbiting in the

Goldilocks zone would be impossible in either condition. If the Jupiter-
sized planet orbited too close to the mother star, it meant that the

138 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Jupiter-sized planet had migrated from a great distance and gradually
spiraled into the center of the solar system (probably due to friction
caused by dust). In that case, the Jupiter-size planet would eventually
cross the orbit of the smaller, Earth-like planet, flinging it into outer
space. And if the Jupiter-sized planet followed a highly elliptical orbit,
it would mean that the Jupiter-sized planet would pass regularly
through the Goldilocks zone, again causing any Earth-like planet to be
flung into space.

These findings were disappointing to planet hunters and as-
tronomers hoping to discover other Earth-like planets, but in hindsight
these findings were to be expected. Our instruments are so crude that
they can detect only the largest, fastest-moving Jupiter-sized planet that
can have a measurable effect on the mother star. Hence it is not surpris-
ing that today's telescopes can detect only monster planets that are
moving rapidly in space. If an exact twin of our own solar system exists
in outer space, our instruments are probably too crude to find it.

All this may change, with the launching of Corot, Kepler, and the

Terrestrial Planet Finder, three satellites that are designed to locate sev-
eral hundred Earth-like planets in space. The Corot and Kepler satel-
lites, for example, will examine the faint shadow that would be cast by
an Earth-like planet as it crosses the face of the mother star, slightly
reducing its sunlight Although the Earth-like planet would not be vis-
ible, the reduction in sunlight from the mother star could be detected
by satellite.

The French Corot satellite (which in French stands for Convection,

Stellar Rotation, and Planetary Transits) was successfully launched on

December 2006 and represents a milestone, the first space-based
probe to search for extrasolar planets. Scientists hope to find between
ten and forty Earth-like planets. If they do, the planets will probably be
rocky, not gas giants, and will be just a few times bigger than the

Earth. Corot will also probably add to the many Jupiter-sized planets
already found in space. "Corot will be able to find extrasolar planets of
all sizes and natures, contrary to what we can do from the ground at
the moment," says astronomer Claude Catala. Altogether scientists
hope the satellite will scan up to 120,000 stars.

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S RND U F O S 139

Any day, the Corot may find evidence of the first Earth-like planet
in space, which will be a turning point in the history of astronomy. In
the future people may have an existential shock gazing at the night sky
and realizing that there are planets out there that could harbor intelli-
gent life. When we look into the heavens in the future, we might find
ourselves wondering if anyone is looking back.

The Kepler satellite is tentatively scheduled for launch in late 2008
by NASA. It is so sensitive that it may be able to detect up to hundreds
of Earth-like planets in outer space. It will measure the brightness of

100,000 stars to detect the motion of any planet as it crosses the face of
the star. During the four years it will be in operation, Kepler will ana-
lyze and monitor thousands of distant stars up to 1,950 light-years
from Earth. In its first year in orbit, scientists expect the satellite to find
roughly

• 50 planets about the same size as Earth,

• 185 planets about 30 percent larger than the Earth, and

• 640 planets about 2.2 times the size of the Earth.

The Terrestrial Planet Finder may have an even better chance of
finding Earth-like planets. After several delays, it is tentatively sched-
uled for launch in 2014; it will analyze as many as one hundred stars
up to 45 light-years away with great accuracy. It will be equipped with
two separate devices to search for distant planets. The first is a coro-
nagraph, a special telescope that blocks out the sunlight from the
mother star, reducing its light by a factor of a billion. The telescope
will be three to four times bigger than the Hubble Space Telescope and
ten times more precise. The second device on the Finder is an interfer-
ometer, which uses the interference of light waves to cancel the light
from the mother star by a factor of a million.

Meanwhile the European Space Agency is planning to launch its
own planet finder, the Darwin, to be sent into orbit in 2015 or later. It
is planned to consist of three space telescopes, each about 3 meters in
diameter, flying in formation, acting as one large interferometer. Its
mission, too, will be to identify Earth-like planets in space.

Identifying hundreds of Earth-like planets in outer space will help

140 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
to refocus the SETI effort. Instead of randomly scanning nearby stars,
astronomers will be able to pinpoint their efforts on a small collection
of stars that may harbor a twin of the Earth.

W H A T D O T H E Y L O O K L I K E ?

Other scientists have tried to use physics, biology, and chemistry to guess
what alien life might look like. Isaac Newton, for example, wondered
why all the animals he could see around him possessed the same bilat-
eral symmetry-two eyes, two arms, and two legs arranged symmetri-
cally. Was this a fortuitous accident or an act of God?

Today biologists believe that during the "Cambrian explosion,"

about half a billion years ago, nature experimented with a vast array
of shapes and forms for tiny, emerging multicellular creatures. Some
had spinal cords shaped like an X, Y, or Z. Some had radial symmetry
like a starfish. By accident one had a spinal cord shaped like an I, with
bilateral symmetry, and it was the ancestor of most mammals on

Earth. So in principle the humanoid shape with bilateral symmetry,
the same shape that Hollywood uses to depict aliens in space, does not
necessarily have to apply to all intelligent life.

Some biologists believe that the reason that diverse life-forms
flourished during the Cambrian explosion is because of an "arms race"

between predator and prey. The emergence of the first multicelled or-
ganisms that could devour other organisms forced an accelerated evo-
lution of the two, with each one racing to outmaneuver the other. Like
the arms race between the former Soviet Union and the United States
during the cold war, each side had to hustle to keep ahead of the other.

By examining how life evolved on this planet, one may also make the
following speculations about how intelligent life might have evolved on

Earth. Scientists have concluded that intelligent life probably requires

1. Some sort of eyesight or sensing mechanism to explore its
environment;

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S AND U F O S u i

2. Some sort of thumb used for grabbing-it could also be a
tentacle or claw;

3. Some sort of communication system, such as speech.

These three characteristics are required for sensing our environ-
ment and eventually manipulating it-both of which are the hallmarks
of intelligence. But beyond these three characteristics, anything goes.

Contrary to so many of the aliens shown on TV, an extraterrestrial
does not have to resemble a human at all. The child-like, bug-eyed
aliens we see on TV and in the movies, in fact, look suspiciously like
the 1950s aliens from B-grade movies, which are firmly buried in our
unconscious.

(Some anthropologists, however, have added a fourth criteria for
intelligent life to explain a curious fact: humans are vastly more intel-
ligent than they have to be to survive in the forest. Our brains can mas-
ter space travel, the quantum theory, and advanced mathematics-skill
sets that are totally unnecessary for hunting and scavenging in the for-
est. Why this excess brainpower? In nature when we see pairs of ani-
mals like the cheetah and the antelope that possess extraordinary
skills far beyond those required for survival, we find that there was an
arms race between them. Similarly, some scientists believe there is a
fourth criteria, a biological "arms race" propelling intelligent humans.

Perhaps that arms race was with other members of our own species.)

Think of all the remarkably diverse life-forms on the Earth. If one,
for example, could selectively breed octopods for several million years,
it is conceivable that they might also become intelligent. (We separated
from the apes 6 million years ago, probably because we were not well
adapted to the changing environment of Africa. By contrast, the octo-
pus is very well adapted to its life beneath a rock and hence has not
evolved for millions of years.) Biochemist Clifford Pickover says that
when he gazes at all the "crazy-looking crustaceans, squishy-tentacled
jellyfish, grotesque, hermaphroditic worms, and slime molds, I know
that God has a sense of humor, and we will see this reflected in other
forms in the universe."

142 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Hollywood, however, probably gets it right when it depicts intelli-
gent alien life-forms as carnivores. Not only do meat-eating aliens
guarantee bigger box office sales, there is also an element of truth to
the depiction. Predators are usually smarter than their prey. Predators
have to use cunning to plan, stalk, hide, and ambush prey. Foxes, dogs,
tigers, and lions have eyes that are on the front of their face in order to
judge distance when they pounce on their prey. With two eyes, they
can use 3-D stereo-vision to lock on to their prey. Prey, such as deer
and rabbits, on the other hand, just have to know how to run. They
have eyes that are on the side of their face in order to scan for preda-
tors 360 degrees around them.

In other words, intelligent life in outer space may very well evolve
from predators with eyes, or some sensing organ, on the front of their
face. They may possess some of the carnivorous, aggressive, and terri-
torial behavior we find in wolves, lions, and humans on Earth. (But
since such life-forms would probably be based on entirely different

DNA and protein molecules, they would have no interest in eating, or
mating with, us.)

We can also use physics to conjecture what their body size might
be. Assuming they live on Earth-sized planets and have the same
rough density as water, like life-forms on Earth, then huge creatures
are probably not possible because of the scale law, which states that
the laws of physics change drastically as we increase the scale of any
object.

M O N S T E R S A N D T H E S C A L E L A W

If Ring Kong really existed, for example, he would not be able to ter-
rorize New York City. On the contrary, his legs would break as soon as
he took a single step. This is because if you take an ape and increase
his size by 10 times, then his weight would go up by the increased vol-
ume, or by 10 x 10 x 10 = 1,000 times. So he would be 1,000 times heav-
ier. But his strength increases relative to the thickness of his bones and
muscles. The cross-sectional area of his bones and muscles goes up by

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S RND U F O S 143
only a square of the distance, that is, by 10 x 10 = 100 times. In other
words, if Ring Kong were 10 times bigger, he would be only 100 times
stronger, but he would weigh 1,000 times more. Thus the ape's weight
increases much more rapidly than its strength as we increase its size.

He would be, relatively speaking, 10 times weaker than a normal ape.

And that is why his legs would break.

In elementary school I remember my teacher marveling at the
strength of an ant, which can lift a leaf many times its weight. My
teacher concluded that if an ant were the size of a house, it could pick
up that house. But this assumption is incorrect for the same reason
that we just saw with Ring Kong. If an ant were the size of a house, its
legs would also break. If you scale up an ant by a factor of 1,000, then
it would be 1,000 times weaker than a normal ant, and hence it would
collapse of its own weight. (It would also suffocate. An ant breathes
through holes in the sides of its body. The area of these holes grows as
per the square of the radius, but the volume of the ant increases as per
the cube of the radius. Thus an ant 1,000 times bigger than an ordinary
ant would have 1,000 times less air than necessary to supply oxygen for
its muscles and body tissue. This is also the reason that champion fig-
ure skaters and gymnasts tend to be much shorter than average, al-
though they have the same proportions as anyone else. Pound for
pound, they have greater proportionate muscle strength than taller
people.)

Using the scale law, we can also calculate the rough shape of ani-
mals on Earth, and possibly aliens in space. The heat emitted by an an-
imal increases as its surface area increases. Hence increasing its size
by 10 increases its heat loss by 10 x 10 = 100. But the heat content
within its body is proportional to its volume, or 10 x 10 x 10 = 1,000.

Hence, large animals lose heat more slowly than small animals. (This
is the reason that in wintertime our fingers and ears freeze first, since
they have the most relative surface area, and why small people get
colder faster than large people. It explains why newspapers burn very
quickly, because of their large relative surface area, while logs burn
very slowly, because of their relatively small surface area.) It also ex-
plains why whales in the Arctic are round in shape-because a sphere

144 P H V S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
has the smallest possible surface area per unit mass. And why insects
in a warmer environment can afford to be spindly in shape, with a rel-
atively large surface area per unit mass.

In the Disney movie Honey, I Shrunk the Kids a family is shrunk
down to the size of ants. A rainstorm develops, and in the microworld
we see tiny raindrops falling onto puddles. In reality a raindrop as seen
by an ant would appear not as a tiny drop but as a huge mound or
hemisphere of water. In our world a hemispherical mound of water is
unstable and will collapse of its own weight under gravity. But in the
microworld, surface tension is relatively large, so a hemispherical
mound of water is perfectly stable.

Similarly, in outer space we can estimate the rough surface-to-
volume ratio of animals on distant planets using the laws of physics.

Using these laws we can theorize that aliens in outer space would
likely not be the giants often portrayed in science fiction, but would
more closely resemble us in size. (Whales, however, can be much
larger in size because of the buoyancy of seawater. This also explains
why a beached whale dies-because it is crushed by its own weight.)

The scale law means that the laws of physics change as we go
deeper and deeper into the microworld. This explains why the quan-
tum theory appears so bizarre to us, violating simple commonsense
notions about our universe. So the scale law rules out the familiar idea
of worlds-within-worlds found in science fiction, that is, the idea that
inside the atom there could be an entire universe, or that our galaxy
could be an atom in a much larger universe. This idea was explored in
the movie Men in Black. In the final scene of the movie the camera
pans away from the Earth, to the planets, the stars, the galaxies, until
our entire universe becomes just a single ball in a huge extraterrestrial
game played by gigantic aliens.

In reality a galaxy of stars bears no resemblance to an atom; inside
the atom the electrons inside their shells are totally different from
planets. We know that all the planets are quite different from each
other and can orbit at any distance from the mother star. In atoms,
however, all the subatomic particles are identical to one another. They
cannot orbit at any distance from the nucleus, but only in discrete or-

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S RND UFOS u 5
bits. (Furthermore, unlike planets, electrons can exhibit bizarre behav-
ior that violates common sense, such as being two places at the same
time and having wavelike properties.)

T H E P H Y S I C S O F A D V A N C E D C I V I L I Z A T I O N S

It is also possible to use physics to sketch out the outlines of possible
civilizations in space. If we look at the rise of our own civilization over
the past 100,000 years, since modern humans emerged in Africa, it can
be seen as the story of rising energy consumption. Russian astrophysi-
cist Nikolai Rardashev has conjectured that the stages in the develop-
ment of extraterrestrial civilizations in the universe could also be
ranked by energy consumption. Using the laws of physics, he grouped
the possible civilizations into three types:

1. Type I civilizations: those that harvest planetary
power, utilizing all the sunlight that strikes their planet

They can, perhaps, harness the power of volcanoes, manip-
ulate the weather, control earthquakes, and build cities on
the ocean. All planetary power is within their control.

2. Type II civilizations: those that can utilize the entire
power of their sun, making them 10 billion times more pow-
erful than a Type I civilization. The Federation of Planets in

Star Trek is a Type II civilization. A Type II civilization, in a
sense, is immortal; nothing known to science, such as ice
ages, meteor impacts, or even supernovae, can destroy it (In
case their mother star is about to explode, these beings can
move to another star system, or perhaps even move their
home planet)

3. Type III civilizations: those that can utilize the power
of an entire galaxy. They are 10 billion times more powerful
than a Type II civilization. The Borg in Star Trek, the Empire
in Star Wars, and the galactic civilization in Asimov's Foun-
dation series correspond to a Type III civilization. They have

146 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
colonized billions of star systems and can exploit the power
of the black hole at the center of their galaxy. They freely
roam the space lanes of the galaxy.

Rardashev estimated that any civilization growing at a modest rate
of a few percent per year in energy consumption will progress rapidly
from one type to the next, within a matter of a few thousand years to
tens of thousands of years.

As I've discussed in my previous books, our own civilization qual-
ifies a Type 0 civilization (i.e., we use dead plants, oil and coal, to fuel
our machines). We utilize only a tiny fraction of the sun's energy that
falls on our planet. But already we can see the beginnings of a Type I
civilization emerging on the Earth. The Internet is the beginning of a

Type I telephone system connecting the entire planet. The beginning of
a Type I economy can be seen in the rise of the European Union, which
in turn was created to compete with NAFTA. English is already the
number one second language on the Earth and the language of sci-
ence, finance, and business. I imagine it may become the Type I lan-
guage spoken by virtually everyone. Local cultures and customs will
continue to thrive in thousands of varieties on the Earth, but superim-
posed on this mosaic of peoples will be a planetary culture, perhaps
dominated by youth culture and commercialism.

The transition between one civilization and the next is far from
guaranteed. The most dangerous transition, for example, may be be-
tween a Type 0 and a Type I civilization. A Type 0 civilization is still
wracked with the sectarianism, fundamentalism, and racism that typ-
ified its rise, and it is not clear whether or not these tribal and religious
passions will overwhelm the transition. (Perhaps one reason that we
don't see Type I civilizations in the galaxy is because they never made
the transition, i.e., they self-destructed. One day, as we visit other star
systems, we may find the remains of civilizations that killed them-
selves in one way or another, e.g., their atmospheres became radio-
active or too hot to sustain life.)

By the time a civilization has reached Type III status it has the en-
ergy and know-how to travel freely throughout the galaxy and even

E X T R H T E R R E S T R I H L S HND UFOS 147
reach the planet Earth. As in the movie 2001, such civilizations may
well send self-replicating, robotic probes throughout the galaxy search-
ing for intelligent life.

But a Type III civilization would likely not be inclined to visit us or
conquer us, as in the movie Independence Day, where such a civiliza-
tion spreads like a plague of locusts, swarming around planets to suck
their resources dry. In reality, there are countless dead planets in outer
space with vast mineral wealth they could harvest without the nui-
sance of coping with a restive native population. Their attitude toward
us might resemble our own attitude toward an ant hill. Our inclination
is not to bend down and offer the ants beads and trinkets, but simply
to ignore them.

The main danger ants face is not that humans want to invade them
or wipe them out. Instead it is simply that we will pave them over be-
cause they are in the way. Remember that the distance between a Type

III civilization and our own Type 0 civilization is far more vast than
the distance between us and the ants, in terms of energy usage.

UFOs

Some people claim that extraterrestrials have already visited the Earth
in the form of UFOs. Scientists usually roll their eyes when they hear
about UFOs and dismiss the possibility because the distances between
stars are so vast. But regardless of scientists' reactions, persistent re-
ports of UFOs have not diminished over the years.

UFO sightings actually date back to the beginning of recorded his-
tory. In the Bible the prophet Ezekiel mentions enigmatically "wheels
within wheels in the sky," which some believe is a reference to a UFO.

In 1450 BC, during the reign of Pharaoh Thutmose III in Egypt, the

Egyptian scribes recorded an incident involving "circles of fire"

brighter than the sun, about 5 meters in size, which appeared on sev-
eral days and finally ascended into the sky. In 91 BC the Roman author

Julius Obsequens wrote about "a round object, like a globe, a round or
circular shield [that] took its path in the sky." In 1235 General Yorit-

148 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
sume and his army saw strange globes of light dancing in the sky near

Kyoto, Japan. In 1561 a large number of objects were seen over Nurem-
berg, Germany, as if engaged in an aerial battle.

More recently, the U.S. Air Force has conducted large-scale stud-
ies of UFO sightings. In 1952 the Air Force began Project Blue Book,
which analyzed a total of 12,618 sightings. The report concluded that
the vast majority of these sightings could be explained by natural phe-
nomena, conventional aircraft, or hoaxes. Yet about 6 percent were
classified as being of unknown origin. But as a result of the Condon

Report, which concluded that there was nothing of value in such stud-
ies, Project Blue Book was closed in 1969. It was the last known large-
scale UFO research project of the U.S. Air Force.

In 2007 the French government released its voluminous file on

UFOs to the general public. The report, made available over the Inter-
net by the French National Center for Space Studies, included 1,600

UFO sightings spanning fifty years, including 100,000 pages of eyewit-
ness accounts, films, and audiotapes. The French government stated
that 9 percent of these sightings could be fully explained, and that 33
percent have likely explanations, but that they were unable to follow
up on the rest.

It is hard, of course, to independently verify these sightings. In fact,
most UFO reports, on careful analysis, can be dismissed as the result
of the following:

1. The planet Venus, which is the brightest object in the
night sky after the moon. Because of its enormous distance
from the Earth, the planet appears to follow you if you are
moving in a car, giving the illusion that it is being piloted,
the same way that the moon appears to follow you. We judge
distance, in part, by comparing moving objects to their sur-
roundings. Since the moon and Venus are so far away, with
nothing to compare them to, they do not move with respect
to our surroundings, and hence give us the optical illusion
that they are following us.

E X T R H T E R H E S T H I H L S HND UFOS 149

2. Swamp gas. During a temperature inversion over a
swampy area, gas will hover over the ground and can be-
come slightly incandescent Smaller pockets of gas might
separate from a larger pocket, giving the impression that
scout ships are leaving the "mother ship."

3. Meteors. Bright streaks of light can travel across the
night sky in a matter of seconds, giving the illusion of a pi-
loted ship. They can also break up, again giving the illusion
of scout ships leaving the mother ship.

4. Atmospheric anomalies. There are all sorts of light-
ning storms and unusual atmospheric events that can illu-
minate the sky in strange ways, giving the illusion of a UFO.

In the twentieth and twenty-first centuries the following phenom
might also generate UFO sightings:

1. Radar echoes. Radar waves can bounce off mountains
and create echoes, which can be picked up by radar moni-
tors. Such waves even appear to zigzag and fly at enormous
velocities on a radar screen, because they are just echoes.

2. Weather and research balloons. The military claims, in
a controversial report, that the famous rumor of a 1947 alien
crash at Roswell, New Mexico, was caused by an errant bal-
loon from Project Mogul, a top-secret project to monitor
radiation levels in the atmosphere in case nuclear war
broke out.

3. Aircraft. Commercial and military aircraft have been
known to set off UFO reports. This is particularly true of test
flights by advanced experimental aircraft, such as the
stealth bomber. (The U.S. military actually encouraged sto-
ries of flying saucers in order to deflect attention away from
its top-secret projects.)

4. Deliberate hoaxes. Some of the most famous pictures
that claim to capture flying saucers are actually hoaxes. One

150 P H V S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
well-known flying saucer, showing windows and landing
pods, was actually a modified chicken feeder.

At least 95 percent of the sightings can be dismissed as one of the
above. But this still leaves open the question of the remaining few per-
cent of unexplained cases. The most credible cases of UFOs involve

(a) multiple sightings by independent, credible eyewitnesses, and

(b) evidence from multiple sources, such as eyesight and radar. Such
reports are harder to dismiss, since they involve several independent
checks. For example, in 1986 there was a sighting of a UFO by JAL-

Flight 1628 over Alaska, which was investigated by the FA A. The UFO
was seen by the passengers of the JAL flight and was also tracked by
ground radar. Similarly, there were mass radar sightings of black tri-
angles over Belgium in 1989-90 that were tracked by NATO radar
and jet interceptors. In 1976 there was a sighting over Tehran, Iran,
that resulted in multiple systems failures in an F-4 jet interceptor, as
recorded in CIA documents.

What is frustrating to scientists is that, of the thousands of recorded
sightings, none has produced hard physical evidence that can lead to
reproducible results in the laboratory. No alien DNA, alien computer
chip, or physical evidence of an alien landing has ever been retrieved.

Assuming for the moment that such UFOs might be real spacecraft
rather than illusions, we might ask ourselves what kind of spacecraft
they would be. Here are some of the characteristics that have been
recorded by observers.

a. They are known to zigzag in midair.

b. They have been known to stop car ignitions and disrupt
electrical power as they pass by.

c. They hover silently in the air.

None of these characteristics fit the description of the rockets we
have developed on Earth. For example, all known rockets depend on

Newton's third law of motion (for every action, there is an equal and
opposite reaction); yet the UFOs cited do not seem to have any exhaust

E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S RND U F O S 151
whatsoever. And the g-forces created by zigzagging flying saucers
would exceed one hundred times the gravitational force on Earth-the
g-forces would be enough to flatten any creature on Earth.

Can such UFO characteristics be explained using modern science?

In the movies, such as Earth vs. the Flying Saucers, it is always assumed
that alien beings pilot these craft. More likely, however, if such craft ex-
ist they are unmanned (or are manned by a being that is part organic
and part mechanical). This would explain how the craft could execute
patterns generating g-forces that would normally crush a living being.

A ship that was able to stop car ignitions and move silently in the
air suggests a vehicle propelled by magnetism. The problem with mag-
netic propulsion is that magnets always come with two poles, a north
pole and a south pole. If you place a magnet in the Earth's magnetic
field, it will simply spin (like a compass needle) rather than rise in the
air like a UFO; as the south pole of a magnet moves one way, the north
pole moves the opposite way, so the magnet spins and goes nowhere.

One possible solution to this problem would be to use "monopoles,"

that is, magnets with just one pole, either north or south. Normally if
you break a magnet in half you do not get two monopoles. Instead each
half of the magnet becomes a magnet by itself, with its own north and
south pole; that is, it becomes another dipole. So if you continue to shat-
ter a magnet, you will always find pairs of north and south poles. (This
process of breaking a dipole magnet to create smaller dipole magnets
continues all the way down to the atomic level, where the atoms them-
selves are dipoles.)

The problem for scientists is that monopoles have never been seen
in the lab. Physicists have tried to photograph the track of a monopole
moving through their equipment and have failed (except for a single,
highly controversial picture taken at Stanford University in 1982).

Although monopoles have never been conclusively seen experi-
mentally, physicists widely believe that the universe once had an
abundance of monopoles at the instant of the big bang. This idea is
built into the latest cosmological theories of the big bang. But because
the universe inflated rapidly after the big bang, the density of mono-
poles throughout the universe has been diluted, so we don't see them

152 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
in the lab today. (In fact, the lack of monopoles today was the key ob-
servation that led physicists to propose the inflationary universe idea.

So the concept of relic monopoles is well established in physics.)

It is conceivable, therefore, that a space-faring race might be able
to harvest these "primordial monopoles" left over from the big bang by
throwing out a large magnetic "net" in outer space. Once they have
gathered enough monopoles, they can coast through space, using the
magnetic field lines found throughout the galaxy or on a planet, with-
out creating exhaust. Because monopoles are the subject of intense in-
terest by many cosmologists, the existence of such a ship is certainly
compatible with current thinking in physics.

Lastly, any alien civilization advanced enough to send starships
throughout the universe has certainly mastered nanotechnology. This
would mean that their starships do not have to be very large; they
could be sent by the millions to explore inhabited planets. Desolate
moons would perhaps be the best bases for such nanoships. If so, then
perhaps our own moon has been visited in the past by a Type III civi-
lization, similar to the scenario depicted in the movie 2001, which is
perhaps the most realistic depiction of an encounter with an extra-
terrestrial civilization. More than likely, the craft would be unmanned
and robotic and placed on the moon. (It may take another century be-
fore our technology is advanced enough to scan the entire moon for
anomalies in radiation, and is capable of detecting ancient evidence of
a previous visitation by nanoships.)

If indeed our moon has been visited in the past or has been the site
of a nanotech base, then this might explain why UFOs are not neces-
sarily very large. Some scientists have scoffed at UFOs because they
don't fit any of the gigantic propulsion designs being considered by en-
gineers today, such as ramjet fusion engines, huge laser-powered sails,
and nuclear pulsed engines, which might be miles across. UFOs can
be as small as a jet airplane. But if there is a permanent moon base left
over from a previous visitation, then UFOs do not have to be large; they
can refuel from their nearby moon base. So sightings may correspond
to unmanned reconnaissance ships that originate from the moon base.

Given the rapid advances in SETI and discovering extrasolar plan-

E X T R H T E R H E S T H I H L S RND UFOS 153
ets, contact with extraterrestrial life, assuming it exists in our vicinity,
may occur within this century, making such contact a Class I impossi-
bility. If alien civilizations do exist in outer space, the next obvious
questions are: Will we ever have the means to reach them? And what
about our own distant future, when the sun begins to expand and de-
vour the Earth? Does our destiny really lie in the stars?

This foolish idea of shooting at the moon is an example of the
absurd length to which vicious specialization will carry
scientists ... the proposition appears to be basically impossible.

- A . W. BICKERTON, 1926

The finer part of mankind will, in all likelihood, never perish-they
will migrate from sun to sun as they go out.

And so there is no end to life, to intellect and the perfection of
humanity. Its progress is everlasting.

-KONSTANTIN E. TSIOLROVSKY, FATHER OF ROCKETRY

One day in the distant future we will have our last nice day on Earth.

Eventually, billions of years from now, the sky will be on fire. The sun
will swell into a raging inferno that will fill up the entire sky, dwarfing
everything in the heavens. As temperatures on Earth soar, the oceans
will boil and evaporate, leaving a scorched, parched landscape. The
mountains will eventually melt and turn liquid, creating lava flows
where vibrant cities once stood.

According to the laws of physics, this grim scenario is inevitable.

The Earth will eventually die in flames as it is consumed by the sun.

This is a law of physics.

This calamity will take place within the next five billion years. On

S T A R S H I P S 155
such a cosmic time scale, the rise and fall of human civilizations are
but tiny ripples. One day we must leave the Earth or die. So how will
humanity, our descendants, cope when conditions on Earth become
intolerable?

Mathematician and philosopher Bertrand Russell once lamented

"that no fire, no heroism, no intensity of thought or feeling, can pre-
serve a life beyond the grave; that all the labors of the ages, all the de-
votion, all the inspiration, all the noonday brightness of human genius,
are destined to extinction in the vast death of the solar system; and the
whole temple of Man's achievement must inevitably be buried beneath
the debris of a universe in ruins ..."

To me this is one of the most sobering passages in the English lan-
guage. But Russell wrote this passage in an era when rocket ships were
considered impossible. Today the prospect of one day leaving the Earth
is not so far-fetched. Carl Sagan once said we should become a "two
planet species." Life on Earth is so precious, he said, that we should
spread to at least one other inhabitable planet in case of a catastrophe.

The Earth moves in the middle of a "cosmic shooting gallery" of aster-
oids, comets, and other debris drifting near the orbit of the Earth, and a
collision with any one of them could result in our demise.

C A T A S T R O P H E S T O C O M E

Poet Robert Frost asked the question whether the Earth will end in fire
or ice. Using the laws of physics, we can reasonably predict how the
world will end in the event of a natural catastrophe.

On a scale of millennia, one danger to human civilization is the
emergence of a new ice age. The last ice age ended 10,000 years ago.

When the next one arrives 10,000 to 20,000 years from now most of

North America may be covered in half a mile of ice. Human civiliza-
tion has flourished within the recent tiny interglacial period, when the

Earth has been unusually warm, but such a cycle cannot last forever.

Over the course of millions of years, large meteors or comets col-
liding with Earth could have a devastating impact The last big celes-

156 P H V S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
tial impact took place 65 million years ago, when an object about 6
miles across slammed into the Yucatan Peninsula of Mexico, creating
a crater about 180 miles in diameter, wiping out the dinosaurs that
up until then were the dominant life-form on Earth. Another cosmic
collision is likely on that time scale.

Billions of years from now the sun will gradually expand and con-
sume the Earth. In fact, we estimate that the sun will heat up by ap-
proximately 10 percent over the next billion years, scorching the Earth.

It will completely consume the Earth in 5 billion years, when our sun
mutates into a gigantic red star. The Earth will actually be inside the
atmosphere of the sun.

Tens of billions of years from now both the sun and the Milky Way
galaxy will die. As our sun eventually exhausts its hydrogen/helium
fuel, it will shrink into a tiny white dwarf star and gradually cool off
until it becomes a hulk of black nuclear waste drifting in the vacuum
of space. The Milky Way galaxy will eventually collide with the neigh-
boring Andromeda galaxy, which is much larger than our galaxy. The

Milky Way's spiral arms will be torn apart, and our sun could well be
flung into deep space. The black holes at the center of the two galaxies
will perform a death dance before ultimately colliding and merging.

Given that humanity must one day flee the solar system to the
nearby stars to survive, or perish, the question is: how will we get
there? The nearest star system, Alpha Centauri, is over 4 light-years
away. Conventional chemical propulsion rockets, the workhorses of
the current space program, barely reach 40,000 miles per hour. At that
speed it would take 70,000 years just to visit the nearest star.

Analyzing the space program today, there is an enormous gap be-
tween our pitiful present-day capabilities and the requirements for a
true starship that could enable us to begin to explore the universe.

Since exploring the moon in the early 1970s, our manned space pro-
gram has sent astronauts into orbit only about 300 miles above the

Earth in the Space Shuttle and International Space Station. By 2010,
however, NASA plans to phase out the Space Shuttle to make way for
the Orion spacecraft, which will eventually take astronauts back to
the moon by the year 2020, after a fifty-year hiatus. The plan is to es-

5 T H H S H I P S 1 5 7
tablish a permanent, manned moon base. A manned mission may be
launched to Mars after that.

Obviously a new kind of rocket design must be found if we are ever
to reach the stars. Either we must radically increase the thrust of our
rockets, or we need to increase the time over which our rockets oper-
ate. A large chemical rocket, for example, may have the thrust of sev-
eral million pounds, but it burns for only a few minutes. By contrast,
other rocket designs, such as the ion engine (described in the follow-
ing paragraphs), may have a feeble thrust but can operate for years in
outer space. When it comes to rocketry, the tortoise wins over the hare.

I O N A N D P L A S M A E N G I N E S

Unlike chemical rockets, ion engines do not produce the sudden, dra-
matic blast of superhot gases that propel conventional rockets. In fact,
their thrust is often measured in ounces. Placed on a tabletop on Earth,
they are too feeble to move. But what they lack in thrust they more
than make up for in duration, because they can operate for years in the
vacuum of outer space.

A typical ion engine looks like the inside of a TV tube. A hot fila-
ment is heated by an electric current, which creates a beam of ionized
atoms, such as xenon, that is shot out the end of the rocket. Instead of
riding on a blast of hot, explosive gas, ion engines ride on a thin but
steady flow of ions.

NASA's NSTAR ion thruster was tested in outer space aboard the
successful Deep Space 1 probe, launched in 1998. The ion engine fired
for a total of 678 days, setting a new record for ion engines. The Euro-
pean Space Agency has also tested an ion engine on its Smart 1 probe.

The Japanese Hayabusa space probe, which flew past an asteroid, was
powered by four xenon ion engines. Although unglamorous, the ion
engine will be able to make long-haul missions (that are not urgent)

between the planets. In fact, ion engines may one day become the
workhorse for interplanetary transport.

A more powerful version of the ion engine is the plasma engine,

158 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
for example, the VASIMR (variable specific impulse magnetoplasma
rocket), which uses a powerful jet of plasma to propel it through space.

Designed by astronaut/engineer Franklin Chang-Diaz, it uses radio
waves and magnetic fields to heat hydrogen gas to a million degrees
centigrade. The superhot plasma is then ejected out the end of the
rocket, yielding significant thrust. Prototypes of the engine have al-
ready been built on Earth, although none has ever been sent into
space. Some engineers hope the plasma engine can be used to power
a mission to Mars, significantly reducing the travel time to Mars, down
to a few months. Some designs use solar power to energize the plasma
in the engine. Other designs use nuclear fission (which raises safety
concerns, since it involves putting large amounts of nuclear materials
into space on ships that are susceptible to accident).

Neither the ion nor the plasma/VASIMR engine, however, has
enough power to take us to the stars. For that, we need an entirely new
set of propulsion designs. One serious drawback to designing a star-
ship is the staggering amount of fuel necessary to make a trip to even
the nearest star, and the long span of time before the ship reaches its
distant destination.

S O L A R S A I L S

One proposal that may solve these problems is the solar sail. It exploits
the fact that sunlight exerts a very small but steady pressure that is suf-
ficient to propel a huge sail through space. The idea for a solar sail is
an old one, dating back to the great astronomer Johannes Kepler in his

1611 treatise Somnium.

Although the physics behind a solar sail is simple enough, progress
has been spotty in actually creating a solar sail that can be sent into
space. In 2004 a Japanese rocket successfully deployed two small proto-
type solar sails into space. In 2005 the Planetary Society, Cosmos Studios,
and the Russian Academy of Sciences launched the Cosmos 1 space sail
from a submarine in the Barents Sea, but the Volna rocket it was being
carried on failed, and the sail did not reach orbit (A previous attempt at

STARSHIPS 159
a suborbital sail also failed back in 2001.) But in February 2006 a 15-me-
ter solar sail was sent successfully into orbit by the Japanese M-V rocket,
although the sail opened incompletely.

Although progress in solar sail technology has been painfully
slow, proponents of the solar sail have another idea that might take
them to the stars: building a huge battery of lasers on the moon that
can fire intense beams of laser light at a solar sail, enabling it to coast
to the nearest star. The physics of such an interplanetary solar sail are
truly daunting. The sail itself would have to be hundreds of miles
across and constructed entirely in outer space. One would have to
build thousands of powerful laser beams on the moon, each capable of
firing continuously for years to decades. (In one estimate, it would be
necessary to fire lasers that have one thousand times the current total
power output of the planet Earth.)

On paper a mammoth light sail might be able to travel as fast as
half the speed of light It would take such a solar sail only eight years
or so to reach the nearby stars. The advantage of such a propulsion
system is that it could use off-the-shelf technology. No new laws of
physics would have to be discovered to create such a solar sail. But the
main problems are economic and technical. The engineering prob-
lems in creating a sail hundreds of miles across, energized by thou-
sands of powerful laser beams placed on the moon, are formidable,
requiring a technology that may be a century in the future. (One prob-
lem with the interstellar solar sail is coming back. One would have to
create a second battery of laser beams on a distant moon to propel the
vessel back to Earth. Or perhaps the ship could swing rapidly around
a star, using it like a slingshot to get enough speed for the return voy-
age. Then lasers on the moon would be used to decelerate the sail so it
could land on the Earth.)

R A M J E T F U S I O N

My own favorite candidate for getting us to the stars is the ramjet fu-
sion engine. There is an abundance of hydrogen in the universe, so a

1 6 0 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
ramjet engine could scoop hydrogen as it traveled in outer space, es-
sentially giving it an inexhaustible source of rocket fuel. Once the hy-
drogen was collected it would then be heated to millions of degrees,
hot enough so that the hydrogen would fuse, releasing the energy of a
thermonuclear reaction.

The ramjet fusion engine was proposed by physicist Robert W. Bus-
sard in 1960 and later popularized by Carl Sagan. Bussard calculated
that a ramjet engine weighing about 1,000 tons might theoretically be
able to maintain a steady thrust of 1 g of force, that is, comparable to
standing on the surface of the Earth. If the ramjet engine could main-
tain a 1 g acceleration for one year, it would reach 77 percent of the ve-
locity of light, sufficient to make interstellar travel a serious possibility.

The requirements for the ramjet fusion engine are easy to com-
pute. First, we know the average density of hydrogen gas throughout
the universe. We also can calculate roughly how much hydrogen gas
must be burned in order to attain 1 g accelerations. That calculation,
in turn, determines how big the "scoop" must be in order to gather hy-
drogen gas. With a few reasonable assumptions, one can show that you
would need a scoop that is about 160 kilometers in diameter. Although
creating a scoop of this size would be prohibitive on Earth, building it
in outer space poses fewer problems because of weightlessness.

In principle the ramjet engine could propel itself indefinitely, ulti-
mately reaching distant star systems in the galaxy. Since time slows
down inside the rocket, according to Einstein, it might be possible to
reach astronomical distances without resorting to putting the crew
into suspended animation. After accelerating at 1 g for eleven years,
according to clocks inside the starship, the spacecraft would reach the

Pleiades star cluster, which is 400 light-years away. In twenty-three
years it would reach the Andromeda galaxy, which is 2 million light-
years from Earth. In theory, the spacecraft might be able to reach the
limit of the visible universe within the lifetime of a crew member (al-
though billions of years might have passed on the Earth).

One key uncertainty is the fusion reaction. The ITER fusion reac-
tor, scheduled to be built in the south of France, combines two rare
forms of hydrogen (deuterium and tritium) in order to extract energy.

STHRSHIPS i 6 i

In outer space, however, the most abundant form of hydrogen consists
of a single proton surrounded by an electron. The ramjet fusion engine
would therefore have to exploit the proton-proton fusion reaction. Al-
though the deuterium/tritium fusion process has been studied for
decades by physicists, the proton-proton fusion process is less well un-
derstood, is more difficult to achieve, and yields far less power. So mas-
tering the more difficult proton-proton reaction will be a technical
challenge in the coming decades. (Some engineers, in addition, have
questioned whether the ramjet engine could overcome drag effects as
it approaches the speed of light.)

Until the physics and economics of proton-proton fusion are
worked out, it is difficult to make accurate estimates as to the ramjet's
feasibility. But this design is on the short list of possible candidates for
any mission contemplated to the stars.

N U C L E A R E L E C T R I C R O C K E T

In 1956 the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) began to look at
nuclear rockets seriously under Project Rover. In theory, a nuclear fis-
sion reactor would be used to heat up gases like hydrogen to extreme
temperatures, and then these gases would be ejected out one end of the
rocket, creating thrust.

Because of the danger of an explosion in the Earth's atmosphere
involving toxic nuclear fuel, early versions of nuclear rocket engines
were placed horizontally on railroad tracks, where the performance of
the rocket could be carefully monitored. The first nuclear rocket en-
gine to be tested under Project Rover was the Kiwi 1 in 1959 (aptly
named after the Australian flightless bird). In the 1960s NASA joined
with the AEC to create the Nuclear Engine for Rocket Vehicle Applica-
tions (NERVA), which was the first nuclear rocket to be tested verti-
cally, rather than horizontally. In 1968 this nuclear rocket was
test-fired in a downward position.

The results of this research have been mixed. The rockets were
very complicated and often misfired. The intense vibrations of the nu-

162 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
clear engine often cracked the fuel bundles, causing the ship to break
apart Corrosion due to burning hydrogen at high temperatures was
also a persistent problem. The nuclear rocket program was finally
closed in 1972.

(These atomic rockets had yet another problem: the danger of a
runaway nuclear reaction, as in a small atomic bomb. Although com-
mercial nuclear power plants today run on diluted nuclear fuel and
cannot explode like a Hiroshima bomb, these atomic rockets, in order
to create maximum thrust, operated on highly enriched uranium and
hence could explode in a chain reaction, creating a tiny nuclear deto-
nation. When the nuclear rocket program was about to be retired, sci-
entists decided to perform one last test. They decided to blow up a
rocket, like a small atomic bomb. They removed the control rods

[which keep the nuclear reaction in check]. The reactor went super-
critical and blew up in a fiery ball of flames. This spectacular demise
of the nuclear rocket program was even captured on film. The Rus-
sians were not pleased. They considered this stunt to be a violation of
the Limited Test Ban Treaty, which banned above-ground detonations
of nuclear bombs.)

Over the years the military has periodically revisited the nuclear
rocket. One secret project was called the Timberwind nuclear rocket;
it was part of the military's Star Wars project in the 1980s. (It was aban-
doned after details of its existence were released by the Federation of

American Scientists.)

The main concern about the nuclear fission rocket is safety. Even
fifty years into the space age, chemical booster rockets undergo cata-
strophic failure about 1 percent of the time. (The two failures of the

Challenger and Columbia Space Shuttles, tragically killing fourteen as-
tronauts, further confirmed this failure rate.)

Nonetheless, in the past few years NASA has resumed research on
the nuclear rocket for the first time since the NERVA program of the

1960s. In 2003 NASA christened a new project, Prometheus, named for
the Greek god who gave fire to humanity. In 2005 Prometheus was
funded at $430 million, although that funding was significantly cut to

$100 million in 2006. The project's future is unclear.

S T A R S H I P S 163

N U C L E A R P U L S E D R O C K E T S

Another distant possibility is to use a series of mini-nuclear bombs to
propel a starship. In Project Orion, mini-atomic bombs were to be
ejected out the back of the rocket in sequence, so that the spacecraft
would "ride" on the shock waves created by these mini-hydrogen
bombs. On paper such a design could take a spacecraft close to the
speed of light. Originally conceived in 1947 by Stanislaw Ulam, who
helped to design the first hydrogen bombs, the idea was further devel-
oped by Ted Taylor (one of the chief designers of nuclear warheads for
the U.S. military) and physicist Freeman Dyson of the Institute for Ad-
vanced Study at Princeton.

In the late 1950s and 1960s elaborate calculations were made for
this interstellar rocket It was estimated that such a starship could
make it to Pluto and back within a year, with a top cruising velocity of

10 percent the speed of light. But even at that speed it would take about
forty-four years to reach the nearest star. Scientists have speculated
that a space ark powered by such a rocket would have to cruise for
centuries, with a multigenerational crew whose offspring would be
born and spend all their lives on the space ark, in order that their de-
scendants could reach the nearby stars.

In 1959 General Atomics issued a report estimating the size of an

Orion spacecraft The largest version, called the super Orion, would
weigh 8 million tons, have a diameter of 400 meters, and be energized
by over 1,000 hydrogen bombs.

But one major problem with the project was the possibility of con-
tamination via nuclear fallout during launch. Dyson estimated that the
nuclear fallout from each launch could cause fatal cancers in ten peo-
ple. In addition, the electromagnetic pulse (EMP) for such a launch
would be so great that it could cause massive short circuits in neigh-
boring electrical systems.

The signing of the Limited Test Ban Treaty in 1965 sounded the
death knell of the project Eventually the main driving force pushing
the project, nuclear bomb designer Ted Taylor, gave up. (He once con-
fided to me that he finally became disillusioned with the project when

164 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
he realized that the physics behind mini-nuclear bombs could also be
used by terrorists to create portable nuclear bombs. Although the proj-
ect was canceled because it was deemed too dangerous, its namesake
lives on in the Orion spacecraft, which NASA has chosen to replace the

Space Shuttle in 2010.)

The concept of a nuclear-fired rocket was briefly resurrected by the

British Interplanetary Society from 1973 to 1978, with Project Daedalus, a
preliminary study to see if an unmanned starship could be built that
could reach the Barnard's Star, 5.9 light-years from Earth. (Barnard's

Star was chosen because it was conjectured that it might have a planet

Since then astronomers Jill Tarter and Margaret Turnbull have compiled
a list of 17,129 nearby stars that could have planets supporting life. The
most promising candidate is Epsilon Indi A, 11.8 light-years away.)

The rocket ship planned for Project Daedalus was so huge that it
would have had to be constructed in outer space. It would weigh 54,000
tons, nearly all of its weight in rocket fuel, and could attain 7.1 percent
of the speed of light with a payload of 450 tons. Unlike Project Orion,
which used tiny fission bombs, Project Daedalus would use mini-
hydrogen bombs with a deuterium/helium-3 mixture ignited by elec-
tron beams. Because of the formidable technical problems facing it, as
well as concerns over its nuclear propulsion system, Project Daedalus
was also shelved indefinitely.

S P E C I F I C I M P U L S E A N D E N G I N E E F F I C I E N C Y

Engineers sometimes speak of "specific impulse," which enables us to
rank the efficiency of various engine designs. "Specific impulse" is de-
fined as the change in momentum per unit mass of propellant Hence
the more efficient the engine, the less fuel is necessary to boost a
rocket into space. Momentum, in turn, is the product of the force act-
ing over a period of time. Chemical rockets, although they have very
large thrust, operate for only a few minutes, and hence have a very low
specific impulse. Ion engines, because they can operate for years, can
have high specific impulse with very low thrust.

S T A R S H I P S 16 5

Specific impulse is measured in seconds. A typical chemical rocket
might have a specific impulse of 400-500 seconds. The specific im-
pulse of the Space Shuttle engine is 455 seconds. (The highest specific
impulse ever achieved for a chemical rocket was 542 seconds, using a
propellant mixture of hydrogen, lithium, and fluorine.) The thruster
for the Smart 1 ion engine had a specific impulse of 1,640 seconds. And
the nuclear rocket attained specific impulses of 850 seconds.

The maximum possible specific impulse would be a rocket that
could attain the speed of light It would have a specific impulse of about

50 million. Following is a table showing the specific impulses of differ-
ent kinds of rocket engines.

T Y P E O F R O C K E T E N G I N E

S P E C I F I C I M P U L S E

Solid fuel rocket

250

Liquid fuel rocket

450

Ion engine

3,000

VASIMR plasma engine

1,000 to 30,000

Nuclear fission rocket

800 to 1,000

Nuclear fusion rocket

2,500 to 200,000

Nuclear pulsed rocket

10,000 to 1 million

Antimatter rocket

1 million to 10 million

(In principle, laser sails and ram-jet engines, because they contain no
rocket propellant at all, have infinite specific impulse, although they
have problems of their own.)

S P A C E E L E V A T O R S

One severe objection to many of these rocket designs is that they are
so mammoth and heavy that they could never be built on the Earth.

That is why some scientists have proposed building them in outer
space, where weightlessness would make it possible for astronauts to
lift impossibly heavy objects with ease. But critics today point out the
prohibitive costs of assembly in outer space. The International Space

166 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Station, for example, will require upwards of one hundred launches of
shuttle missions for complete assembly and costs have escalated to

$100 billion. It is the most expensive scientific project in history. Build-
ing an interstellar space sail or ramjet scoop in outer space would cost
many times that amount.

But as science fiction writer Robert Heinlein was fond of saying, if
you can make it to 160 kilometers above the Earth, you are halfway to
anywhere in the solar system. That is because the first 160 kilometers
of any launch, when the rocket is struggling to escape the Earth's grav-
ity, cost by far the most. After that a rocket ship can almost coast to

Pluto and beyond.

One way to reduce costs drastically in the future would be to de-
velop a space elevator. The idea of climbing a rope to heaven is an old
one, for example, as in the fairy tale "Jack and the Beanstalk," but it
might become a reality if the rope could be sent far into space. Then
the centrifugal force of the Earth's rotation would be enough to nullify
the force of gravity, so the rope would never fall. The rope would mag-
ically rise vertically into the air and disappear into the clouds. (Think
of a ball spinning on a string. The ball seems to defy gravity, because
the centrifugal force pushes it away from the center of rotation. In the
same way, a very long rope would be suspended in air because of the
spinning of the Earth.) Nothing would be needed to hold up the rope
except the spin of the Earth. A person could theoretically climb the
rope and ascend into space. We sometimes give the undergraduates
taking physics courses at City University of New York the problem of
calculating the tension on such a rope. It is easy to show that the ten-
sion on the rope would be enough to snap even a steel cable, which is
why building a space elevator has long been considered to be impos-
sible.

The first scientist to seriously study the space elevator was Russian
visionary scientist Ronstantin Tsiolkovsky. In 1895, inspired by the Eif-
fel Tower, he envisioned a tower that would ascend into space, con-
necting the Earth to a "celestial castle" in space. It would be built
bottom-up, starting on Earth, and engineers would slowly extend the
space elevator to the heavens.

STHRSH1PS 167

In 1957 Russian scientist Yuri Artsutanov proposed a new solution,
that the space elevator be built in reverse order, top-down, starting
from outer space. He envisioned a satellite in a geostationary orbit

36,000 miles in space, where it would appear to be stationary, and
from which one would drop a cable down to Earth. Then the cable
would be anchored to the ground. But the tether for a space elevator
would have to be able to withstand roughly 60-100 gigapascals (gpa)

of tension. Steel breaks at about 2 gpa, making the idea beyond reach.

The idea of a space elevator reached a much wider audience with
the publication of Arthur C. Clarke's 1979 novel, The Fountains of Par-
adise, and Robert Heinlein's 1982 novel, Friday. But without any fur-
ther progress, the idea languished.

The equation changed significantly when carbon nanotubes were de-
veloped by chemists. Interest was suddenly sparked by the work of

Sumio Iijima of Nippon Electric in 1991 (although evidence for carbon
nanotubes actually dates back to the 1950s, a fact that was ignored at
the time). Remarkably, nanotubes are much stronger than steel cables,
but also much lighter. In fact, they exceed the strength necessary to
maintain a space elevator. Scientists believe a carbon nanotube fiber
could withstand 120 gpa of pressure, which is comfortably above the
breaking point. This discovery has rekindled attempts to create a space
elevator.

In 1999 a NASA study gave serious consideration to the space ele-
vator, envisioning a ribbon, about 1 meter wide and about 47,000 kilo-
meters long, capable of transporting about 15 tons of payload into

Earth's orbit. Such a space elevator could change the economics of
space travel overnight The cost could be reduced by a factor of ten
thousand, an astonishing, revolutionary change.

Currently it costs $10,000 or more to send a pound of material into
orbit around the Earth (roughly the cost, ounce for ounce, of gold).

Each Space Shuttle mission, for example, costs up to $700 million. A
space elevator could reduce the cost to as little as $1 per pound. Such
a radical reduction in the cost of the space program could revolution-

1 6 8 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
ize the way we view space travel. With a simple push of an elevator
button, one could in principle take an elevator ride into outer space for
the price of a plane ticket.

But formidable practical hurdles have to be solved before we build
a space elevator on which we can levitate our way into heaven. At pres-
ent pure carbon nanotube fibers created in the lab are no more than

15 millimeters long. To create a space elevator, one would have to cre-
ate cables of carbon nanotubes that are thousands of miles long. Al-
though from a scientific point of view this is just a technical problem,
it is a stubborn and difficult problem that must be solved if we are to
create a space elevator. Yet, within a few decades, many scientists be-
lieve that we should be able to master the technology of creating long
cables of carbon nanotubes.

Second, microscopic impurities in the carbon nanotubes could
make a long cable problematic. Nicola Pugno of the Polytechnic of

Turin, Italy, estimates that if a carbon nanotube has even one atom
misaligned, its strength could be reduced by 30 percent. Overall,
atomic-scale defects could reduce the strength of the nanotube cable
by as much as 70 percent, taking it below the minimum gigapascals of
strength necessary to support a space elevator.

To spur entrepreneurial interest in the space elevator, NASA is
funding two separate prizes. (The prizes are modeled on the $10 mil-
lion Ansari X-prize, which successfully spurred enterprising inventors
to create commercial rockets capable of taking passengers to the very
edge of space. The X-prize was won by Spaceship One in 2004.) The
prizes NASA is offering are called the Beam Power Challenge and the

Tether Challenge. In the Beam Power Challenge, teams have to send a
mechanical device weighing at least 25 kilograms up a tether (sus-
pended from a crane) at the speed of 1 meter per second for a distance
of 50 meters. This may sound easy, but the catch is that the device can-
not use fuel, batteries, or an electrical cord. Instead, the robot device
must be powered by solar arrays, solar reflectors, lasers, or mi-
crowaves-energy sources that are more suitable for use in outer space.

In the Tether Challenge, teams must produce 2-meter-long tethers

S T H R S H I P S 169
that cannot weigh more than 2 grams and must carry 50 percent more
weight than the best tether of the previous year. The challenge is in-
tended to stimulate research in developing lightweight materials
strong enough to be strung 100,000 kilometers in space. There are
prizes worth $150,000, $40,000, and $10,000. (To highlight the difficulty
of mastering this challenge, in 2005, the first year of the competition,
no one won a prize.)

Although a successful space elevator could revolutionize the space
program, such machines have their own sets of hazards. For example,
the trajectory of near-Earth satellites constantly shifts as they orbit the

Earth (this is because the Earth rotates beneath them). This means
that these satellites would eventually collide with the space elevator at

18,000 miles per hour, sufficient to rupture the tether. To prevent such
a catastrophe, in the future either satellites will have to be designed to
include small rockets so that they can maneuver around the space el-
evator, or the tether of the elevator might have to be equipped with
small rockets to evade passing satellites.

Also, collisions with micrometeorites are a problem, since the
space elevator is far above the atmosphere of the Earth, and our atmo-

sphere usually protects us from meteors. Since micrometeor collisions
are unpredictable, the space elevator must be built with added shield-
ing and perhaps even fail-safe redundancy systems. Problems could
also emerge from the effects of turbulent weather patterns on the

Earth, such as hurricanes, tidal waves, and storms.

T H E S L I N G S H O T E F F E C T

Another novel means of hurling an object near the speed of light is
to use the "slingshot" effect. When sending space probes to the outer
planets, NASA sometimes whips them around a neighboring planet, so
they use the slingshot effect to boost their velocity. NASA saves on valu-
able rocket fuel in this way. That's how the Voyager spacecraft was able
to reach Neptune, which lies near the very edge of the solar system.

170 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Princeton physicist Freeman Dyson proposed that in the far future
we might find two neutron stars that are revolving around each other
at great speed. By traveling extremely close to one of these neutron
stars, we could whip around it and then be hurled into space at speeds
approaching a third the speed of light In effect, we would be using
gravity to give us an additional boost to nearly the speed of light. On
paper this just might work.

Others have proposed that we whip around our own sun in order
to accelerate to near the speed of light. This method, in fact, was used
in Star Trek IF: The Voyage Home, when the crew of the Enterprise hi-
jacked a Rlingon ship and then sped close to the Sun in order to break
the light barrier and go back in time. In the movie When Worlds Col-
lide, when Earth is threatened by a collision with an asteroid, scientists
flee the Earth by creating a gigantic roller coaster. A rocket ship de-
scends the roller coaster, gaining great velocity, and then whips
around the bottom of the roller coaster to blast off into space.

In fact, however, neither of these methods of using gravity to boost
our way into space will work. (Because of the conservation of energy,
in going down a roller coaster and coming back up, we wind up with
the same velocity as that with which we started, so there is no gain in
energy whatsoever. Likewise, by whipping around the stationary sun,
we wind up with the same velocity as that with which we originally
started.) The reason Dyson's method of using two neutron stars might
work is because the neutron stars are revolving so fast. A spacecraft
using the slingshot effect gains its energy from the motion of a planet
or star. If they are stationary, there is no slingshot effect at all.

Although Dyson's proposal could work, it does not help today's

Earth-bound scientists, because we would need a starship just to visit
rotating neutron stars.

R A I L G U N S T O T H E H E A V E N S

Yet another ingenious method for flinging objects into space at fantas-
tic velocities is the rail gun, which Arthur C. Clarke and others have

5 T R R 5 H 1 P 5 m
featured in their science fiction tales, and which is also being seriously
examined as part of the Star Wars missile shield.

Instead of using rocket fuel or gunpowder to boost a projectile to
high velocity, a rail gun uses the power of electromagnetism.

In its simplest form, a rail gun consists of two parallel wires or
rails, with a projectile that straddles both wires, forming a U-shaped
configuration. Even Michael Faraday knew that a current of electricity
will experience a force when placed in a magnetic field. (This, in fact,
is the basis of all electrical motors.) By sending millions of amperes of
electrical power down these wires and through the projectile, a huge
magnetic field is created around the rails. This magnetic field then
propels the projectile down the rails at enormous velocities.

Rail guns have successfully fired metal objects at enormous veloc-
ities over extremely short distances. Remarkably, in theory, a simple
rail gun should be able to fire a metal projectile at 18,000 miles per
hour, so that it would go into orbit around the Earth. In principle,

NASA's entire rocket fleet could be replaced by rail guns that could
blast payloads into orbit from the Earth.

The rail gun enjoys a significant advantage over chemical rockets
and guns. In a rifle the ultimate velocity at which expanding gases can
push a bullet is limited by the speed of shock waves. Although Jules

Verne used gunpowder to blast astronauts to the moon in his classic
tale From the Earth to the Moon, one can compute that the ultimate ve-
locity that one can attain with gunpowder is only a fraction of the ve-
locity necessary to send someone to the moon. Rail guns, however, are
not limited by the speed of shock waves.

But there are problems with the rail gun. It accelerates objects so
fast that they usually flatten upon impact with the air. Payloads have
been severely deformed in the process of being fired out of the barrel
of a rail gun because when the projectile hits the air it's like hitting a
wall of bricks. In addition, the huge acceleration of the payload along
the rails is enough to deform them. The tracks have to be replaced reg-
ularly because of the damage caused by the projectile. Furthermore,
the g-forces on an astronaut would be enough to kill him, easily crush-
ing all the bones in his body.

172 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

One proposal is to install a rail gun on the moon. Outside the

Earth's atmosphere, a rail gun's projectile could speed effortlessly
through the vacuum of outer space. But even then the enormous accel-
erations generated by a rail gun might damage the payload. Rail guns
in some sense are the opposite of laser sails, which build up their ulti-
mate speed gently over a long period of time. Rail guns are limited be-
cause they pack so much energy into such a small space.

Rail guns that can fire objects to nearby stars would be quite ex-
pensive. In one proposal the rail gun would be built in outer space, ex-
tending two-thirds of the distance from Earth to the sun . It would store
solar energy from the sun and then abruptly discharge that energy into
the rail gun, sending a 10-ton payload at one-third the speed of light,
with an acceleration of 5000 g's. Not surprisingly, only the sturdiest ro-
botic payloads would be able to survive such huge accelerations.

T H E D A N G E R S O F S P A C E T R A V E L

Of course, space travel is no Sunday picnic. Enormous dangers await
manned flights traveling to Mars, or beyond. Life on Earth has been
sheltered for millions of years: The planet's ozone layer protects the

Earth from ultraviolet rays, its magnetic field protects against solar
flares and cosmic rays, and its thick atmosphere protects against me-
teors that burn up on entry. We take for granted the mild temperatures
and air pressures found on the Earth. But in deep space, we must face
the reality that most of the universe is in turmoil, with lethal radiation
belts and swarms of deadly meteors.

The first problem to solve in extended space travel is that of
weightlessness. Long-term studies of weightlessness by the Russians
have shown that the body loses precious minerals and chemicals in
space much faster than expected. Even with a rigorous exercise pro-
gram, after a year on the space station, the bones and muscles of Rus-
sian cosmonauts are so atrophied that they can barely crawl like
babies when they first return to Earth. Muscle atrophy, deterioration of

S T H R S H I P S 173
the skeletal system, lower production of red blood cells, lower immune
response, and a reduced functioning of the cardiovascular system
seem to be the inevitable consequences of prolonged weightlessness in
space.

Missions to Mars, which may take several months to a year, will
push the very limits of the endurance of our astronauts. For long-term
missions to the nearby stars, this problem could be fatal. The starships
of the future may have to spin, creating an artificial gravity via cen-
trifugal forces in order to sustain human life. This adjustment would
greatly increase the cost and complexity of future spaceships.

Second, the presence of micrometeorites in space traveling at
many tens of thousands of miles per hour may require that spaceships
be equipped with extra shielding. Close examination of the hull of the

Space Shuttle has revealed evidence of several tiny but potentially
deadly impacts from tiny meteorites. In the future, spaceships may
have to contain a special doubly reinforced chamber for the crew.

Radiation levels in deep space are much higher than previously
thought During the eleven-year sunspot cycle, for example, solar
flares can send enormous quantities of deadly plasma racing toward

Earth. In the past, this phenomenon has forced the astronauts on the
space station to seek special protection against the potentially lethal
barrage of subatomic particles. Space walks during such solar erup-
tions would be fatal. (Even taking a simple transatlantic trip from L.A.

to New York, for example, exposes us to about a millirem of radiation
per hour of flight Over the course of our trip we are exposed to almost
a dental X-ray of radiation.) In deep space, where the atmosphere and
magnetic field of the Earth no longer protect us, radiation exposure
could be a serious problem.

S U S P E N D E D A N I M A T I O N

One consistent criticism of the rocket designs I have presented so far is
that even if we could build such starships, it would take decades to

174 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
centuries to reach nearby stars. Such a mission would need to involve
a multigenerational crew whose descendants would arrive at the final
destination.

One solution, proposed in such movies as Alien and Planet of the

Apes, is for space travelers to undergo suspended animation; that is,
their body temperature would be carefully lowered until bodily func-
tions almost cease. Animals that hibernate do this every year during
the winter. Certain fish and frogs can be frozen solid in a block of ice
and yet thaw out when the temperature rises.

Biologists who have studied this curious phenomenon believe that
these animals have the ability to create a natural "antifreeze" that low-
ers the freezing point of water. This natural antifreeze consists of cer-
tain proteins in fish, and glucose in frogs. By flooding their blood with
these proteins, fish can survive in the Arctic at about -2°C. Frogs have
evolved the ability to maintain high glucose levels, thereby preventing
the formation of ice crystals. Although their bodies might be frozen
solid on the outside, they are not frozen on the inside, allowing their
bodily organs to continue to operate, albeit at a reduced rate.

There are problems with adapting this ability to mammals, how-
ever. When human tissue is frozen, ice crystals begin to form inside the
cells. As these ice crystals grow, they can penetrate and destroy cell
walls. (Celebrities who want to have their heads and bodies frozen in
liquid nitrogen after death may want to think twice.)

Nevertheless, there has been recent progress in limited suspended
animation in mammals that do not naturally hibernate, such as mice
and dogs. In 2005 scientists at the University of Pittsburgh were able to
bring dogs back to life after their blood had been drained and replaced
by a special ice-cold solution. Clinically dead for three hours, the dogs
were brought back to life after their hearts were restarted. (Although
most of the dogs were healthy after this procedure, a few suffered some
brain damage.)

That same year scientists were able to place mice in a chamber
containing hydrogen sulfide and successfully reduce their body tem-
perature to 13°C for six hours. The metabolism rate of the mice
dropped by a factor of ten. In 2006 doctors at Massachusetts General

S T H R S H I P S 175

Hospital in Boston placed pigs and mice in a state of suspended anima-
tion using hydrogen sulfide.

In the future such procedures may be lifesaving for people in-
volved in severe accidents or who suffer heart attacks during which
every second counts. Suspended animation might allow doctors to

"freeze time" until patients can be treated. But it could be decades or
more before such techniques can be applied to human astronauts, who
may need to be in suspended animation for centuries.

N A N O S H I P S

There are several other ways in which we might be able to reach the
stars via more advanced, unproven technologies that border on sci-
ence fiction. One promising proposal is to use unmanned probes based
on nanotechnology. Throughout this discussion I have assumed that
starships need to be monstrous devices consuming vast amounts of
energy, capable of taking a large crew of human beings to the stars,
similar to the starship Enterprise on Star Trek.

But a more likely avenue might be initially to send miniature un-
manned probes to the distant stars at near the speed of light. As we
mentioned earlier, in the future, with nanotechnology, it should be
possible to create tiny spacecraft that exploit the power of atomic and
molecular-sized machines. For example, ions, because they are so
light, can easily be accelerated to near the speed of light with ordinary
voltages found in the laboratory. Instead of requiring huge booster
rockets, they might be sent into space at near the speed of light using
powerful electromagnetic fields. This means that if a nanobot were
ionized and placed within an electric field, it could effortlessly be
boosted to near light speed. The nanobot would then coast its way to
the stars, since there is no friction in space. In this way, many of the
problems plaguing large starships are immediately solved. Unmanned
intelligent nanobot spaceships might be able to reach nearby star sys-
tems at a mere fraction of the cost of building and launching a huge
starship carrying a human crew.

176 P H V S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Such nanoships could be used to reach nearby stars or, as Gerald

Nordley, a retired Air Force astronautical engineer, has suggested, to
push against a solar sail in order to propel it through space. Nordley
says, "With a constellation of pinhead-sized spacecraft flying in forma-
tion and communicating with themselves, you could practically push
them with a flashlight"

But there are challenges with nano starships. They might be de-
flected by passing electric and magnetic fields in outer space. To coun-
teract these forces, one would need to accelerate the nanoships to very
high voltages on the Earth so they would not be easily deflected. Sec-
ond, we might have to send a swarm of millions of these nanobot star-
ships to guarantee that a handful would actually make it to their
destination. Sending a swarm of starships to explore the nearest stars
might seem extravagant, but such starships would be cheap and could
be mass-produced by the billions, so that only a tiny fraction of them
would have to reach their target

What might these nanoships look like? Dan Goldin, former head of

NASA, envisioned a fleet of "Coke-can sized" spacecraft. Others have
talked about starships the size of needles. The Pentagon has been look-
ing into the possibility of developing "smart dust," dust-sized particles
that have tiny sensors inside that can be sprayed over a battlefield to
give commanders real-time information. In the future it is conceivable
that "smart dust" might be sent to the nearby stars.

Dust-sized nanobots would have their circuitry made by the same
etching techniques used in the semiconductor industry, which can
create components as small as 30 nm, or roughly 150 atoms across.

These nanobots could be launched from the moon by rail guns or even
by particle accelerators, which regularly send subatomic particles to
near light speed. These devices would be so cheap to make that mil-
lions of them could be launched into space.

Once they reached a nearby star system, the nanobots could land
on a desolate moon. Because of the moon's low gravity, a nanobot
would be able to land and take off with ease. And with a stable envi-
ronment such as a moon would provide, it would make an ideal base
of operations. The nanobot could build a nanofactory, using the min-

S T H R S H I P S 177
erals found on the moon, to create a powerful radio station that could
beam information back to Earth. Or the nanofactory could be designed
to create millions of copies of itself to explore the solar system and ven-
ture off to other nearby stars, repeating the process. Because these
ships would be robotic, there would be no need for a return voyage
home once they had radioed back their information.

The nanobot I've just described is sometimes called a von Neu-
mann probe, named after the famed mathematician John von Neu-
mann, who worked out the mathematics of self-replicating Turing
machines. In principle, such self-replicating nanobot spaceships might
be able to explore the entire galaxy, not just the nearby stars. Eventu-
ally there could be a sphere of trillions of these robots, multiplying ex-
ponentially as it grows in size, expanding at nearly the speed of light

The nanobots inside this expanding sphere could colonize the entire
galaxy within a few hundred thousand years.

One electrical engineer who takes the idea of nanoships very seri-
ously is Brian Gilchrist of the University of Michigan. He recently re-
ceived a $500,000 grant from NASA's Institute for Advanced Concepts
to explore the idea of building nanoships with engines no bigger than
a bacterium. He envisions using the same etching technology used
in the semiconductor industry to create a fleet of several million
nanoships that will propel themselves by ejecting tiny nanoparticles
that are only tens of nanometers across. These nanoparticles would be
energized by passing through an electric field, just as in an ion engine.

Since each nanoparticle weighs thousands of times more than an ion,
the engines would pack much more thrust than a typical ion engine.

Thus the nanoship engines would have the same advantages as an ion
engine, except they would have much more thrust. Gilchrist has al-
ready begun etching some of the parts for these nanoships. So far he
can pack 10,000 individual thrusters on a single silicon chip that mea-
sures 1 centimeter across. Initially he envisions sending his fleet of
nanoships throughout the solar system to test their efficiency. But
eventually these nanoships might be part of the first fleet to reach the
stars.

Gilchrist's proposal is one of several futuristic proposals being

178 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
considered by NASA. After several decades of inactivity, NASA has re-
cently given some serious thought to various proposals for interstellar
travel-proposals that range from the credible to the fantastic. Since the
early 1990s NASA has hosted the annual Advanced Space Propulsion

Research Workshop, during which these technologies have been
picked apart by teams of serious engineers and physicists. Even more
ambitious is the Breakthrough Propulsion Physics program, which has
explored the mysterious world of quantum physics in relation to inter-
stellar travel. Although there is no consensus, much of their activity
has focused on the front-runners: the laser sail and various versions of
fusion rockets.

Given the slow but steady advances in spaceship design, it is reason-
able to assume that the first unmanned probe of some sort might be
sent to the nearby stars perhaps later in this century or early in the
next century, making it a Class I impossibility.

But perhaps the most powerful design for a starship involves the
use of antimatter. Although it sounds like science fiction, antimatter
has already been created on the Earth, and may one day provide the
most promising design yet for a workable manned starship.

The most exciting phrase to hear in science, the one that heralds
new discoveries, is not "Eureka" (I found it!) but "That's funny ..

-ISAAC ASIMOV

If the man doesn't believe as we do, we say he is a crank,
and that settles it I mean, it does nowadays, because now
we can't burn him.

- M A R K TWAIN

You can recognize a pioneer by the arrows in his back.

-BEVERLY RUBIR

In Dan Brown's book Angels and Demons, the bestselling predecessor
to The Da Vinci Code, a small band of extremists, the Illuminati, have
hatched a plot to blow up the Vatican using an antimatter bomb, stolen
from CERN, the nuclear laboratory outside Geneva. The conspirators
know that when matter and antimatter touch each other the result is a
monumental explosion, many times more powerful than a hydrogen
bomb. Although an antimatter bomb is pure fiction, antimatter is very
real.

An atomic bomb, for all its awesome power, is only about 1 percent

1 8 0 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
efficient Only a tiny fraction of the uranium is turned into energy. But
if an antimatter bomb could be constructed, it would convert 100 per-
cent of its mass into energy, making it far more efficient than a nuclear
bomb. (More precisely, about 50 percent of the matter in an anti-
matter bomb would be turned into usable explosive energy; the rest
would be carried away in the form of undetectable particles called
neutrinos.)

Antimatter has long been the focus of intense speculation. Al-
though an antimatter bomb does not exist, physicists have been able to
use their powerful atom smashers to create minute quantities of anti-
matter for study.

P R O D U C I N G A N T I - A T O M S A N D A N T I - C H E M I S T R Y

At the beginning of the twentieth century, physicists realized that the
atom consisted of charged subatomic particles with electrons (with a
negative charge) circulating around a tiny nucleus (with a positive
charge). The nucleus, in turn, consisted of protons (which carried the
positive charge) and neutrons (which were electrically neutral).

So it came as quite a shock in the 1930s when physicists realized
that for every particle there is a twin, an antiparticle, but with an op-
posite charge. The first antiparticle to be discovered was the antielec-
tron (called the positron), which has a positive charge. The positron is
identical to the electron in every way, except that it carries the oppo-
site charge. It was first discovered in photographs of cosmic rays taken
in a cloud chamber. (Positron tracks are quite easy to see in a cloud
chamber. When placed in a powerful magnetic field, they bend in the
opposite direction from ordinary electrons. In fact, I photographed
such antimatter tracks while I was in high school.)

In 1955 the particle accelerator at the University of California at

Berkeley, the Bevatron, produced the first antiproton. As expected, it is
identical to the proton except that it has a negative charge. This means
that, in principle, one can create anti-atoms (with positrons circulating

AN TIM OTTER HND H N T I - U N I V E R S E S i s i
around antiprotons). In fact, anti-elements, anti-chemistry, anti-
people, anti-Earths, and even anti-universes are theoretically possible.

At present the giant particle accelerators at CERN and the Fermi-
lab outside Chicago have been able to create minute quantities of anti-
hydrogen. (This is done by blasting a beam of high-energy protons into
a target using particle accelerators, thereby creating a shower of sub-
atomic debris. Powerful magnets separate out the antiprotons, which
are slowed down to very low velocities and then are exposed to the
antielectrons that are naturally emitted from sodium-22. When the
antielectrons orbit around the antiprotons, they create antihydrogen,
since hydrogen is made up of one proton and one electron.) In a pure
vacuum, these anti-atoms might live forever. But because of impurities
and collisions with the wall, these anti-atoms eventually strike ordi-
nary atoms and they are annihilated, releasing energy.

In 1995 CERN made history when it announced that it had created
nine antihydrogen atoms. Fermilab soon followed suit by producing
one hundred atoms of antihydrogen. In principle, there is nothing to
prevent us from creating higher anti-elements as well, except for the
staggering cost. Producing even a few ounces of anti-atoms would
bankrupt any nation. The current rate of production of antimatter is
between one-billionth to ten-billionths of a gram per year. The yield
might increase by a factor of three by the year 2020. The economics of
antimatter are very poor. In 2004 it cost CERN $20 million to produce
several trillionths of a gram of antimatter. At that rate, producing a sin-
gle gram of antimatter would cost $100 quadrillion and the antimatter
factory would need to run continuously for 100 billion years! This
makes antimatter the most precious substance in the world.

"If we could assemble all the anti-matter we've ever made at CERN
and annihilate it with matter," reads a statement from CERN, "we
would have enough energy to light a single electric light bulb for a few
minutes."

Handling antimatter poses extraordinary problems, since any con-
tact between matter and antimatter is explosive. Putting antimatter in
an ordinary container would be suicide. When the antimatter touched

182 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
the walls, it would explode. So how does one handle antimatter if it is
so volatile? One way would be first to ionize the antimatter into a gas
of ions, and then to safely confine it in a "magnetic bottle." The mag-
netic field would prevent the antimatter from touching the walls of the
chamber.

To build an antimatter engine, a steady stream of antimatter would
need to be fed into a reaction chamber, where it would be carefully
combined with ordinary matter, creating a controlled explosion, simi-
lar to the explosion created by chemical rockets. The ions created by
this explosion would then be shot out one end of the antimatter rocket,
creating propulsion. Because of the antimatter engine's efficiency in
converting matter into energy, in theory it is one of the most appealing
engine designs for future starships. In the Star Trek series, antimatter
is the source of the Enterprises energy; its engines are energized by the
controlled collision of matter and antimatter.

A N A N T I M A T T E R R O C K E T

One of the main proponents of the antimatter rocket is physicist Ger-
ald Smith of Pennsylvania State University. He believes that in the short
term as little as 4 milligrams of positrons would be sufficient to take an
antimatter rocket to Mars in just several weeks. He notes that the en-
ergy packed into antimatter is about a billion times greater than the
energy packed into ordinary rocket fuel.

The first step in creating this fuel would be to create beams of anti-
protons, via a particle accelerator, and then store them in a "Penning
trap," which Smith is constructing. When built, the Penning trap would
weigh 220 pounds (much of it being liquid nitrogen and liquid helium)

and would store about a trillion antiprotons in a magnetic field. (At
very low temperatures, the wavelength of the antiprotons is several
times longer than the wavelength of the atoms in the container walls,
so the antiprotons would mainly reflect off the walls without annihilat-
ing themselves.) He states that this Penning trap should be able to store
the antiprotons for about five days (until they finally are annihilated

A N T I M A T T E R HMD A N T I - U N I V E R S E S 183
when mixed with ordinary atoms). His Penning trap should be able to
store about a billionth of a gram of antiprotons. His goal is to create a

Penning trap that can store up to a microgram of antiprotons.

Although antimatter is the most precious substance on Earth, its
cost keeps dropping dramatically every year (a gram would cost about

$62.5 trillion at today's prices). A new particle injector being built at

Fermilab outside Chicago should be able to increase the production of
antimatter by a factor of ten, from 1.5 to 15 nanograms per year, which
should drive down prices. However, Harold Gerrish of NASA believes
that with further improvements the cost could realistically go down to

$5,000 per microgram. Dr. Steven Howe, of Synergistics Technologies
in Los Alamos, New Mexico, states, "Our goal is to remove antimatter
from the far-out realm of science fiction into the commercially ex-
ploitable realm for transportation and medical applications."

So far, particle accelerators that can produce antiprotons are not
specifically designed to do so, so they are quite inefficient Such parti-
cle accelerators are designed primarily to be research tools, not facto-
ries for antimatter. That is why Smith envisions building a new particle
accelerator that will be specifically designed to produce copious quan-
tities of antiprotons to drive down the cost.

If prices for antimatter can be lowered even further by technical
improvements and mass production, Smith envisions a time when the
antimatter rocket could become a workhorse for interplanetary and
possibly interstellar travel. Until then, however, antimatter rockets will
remain on the drawing boards.

N A T U R A L L Y O C C U R R I N G A N T I M A T T E R

If antimatter is so difficult to create on Earth, might one find antimat-
ter more easily in outer space? Unfortunately, searches for antimatter
in the universe have turned up very little, which is rather surprising to
physicists. The fact that our universe is made up mainly of matter,
rather than antimatter, is difficult to explain. One might naively have
assumed that at the beginning of the universe, there were equal, sym-

184 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
metrical quantities of matter and antimatter. So the lack of antimatter
is puzzling.

The most likely solution was first proposed by Andrei Sakharov,
the man who designed the hydrogen bomb for the Soviet Union in the

1950s. Sakharov theorized that at the beginning of the universe there
was a slight asymmetry in the amount of matter and antimatter in the
big bang. This tiny symmetry breaking is called "CP violation." This
phenomenon is currently the center of much vigorous research. In ef-
fect, Sakharov theorized that all the atoms in the universe today are left
over from a near perfect cancellation between matter and antimatter;
the big bang caused a cosmic cancellation between the two. The tiny
leftover matter created a residue that forms the visible universe of to-
day. All the atoms in our bodies are leftovers from this titanic collision
of matter and antimatter.

This theory leaves open the possibility that small amounts of anti-
matter may occur naturally. If so, discovering that source would dras-
tically reduce the cost of producing antimatter for use in antimatter
engines. In principle, deposits of naturally occurring antimatter should
be easy to detect. When an electron and an antielectron meet, they an-
nihilate into gamma rays at an energy of 1.02 million electron volts or
more. Thus by scanning the universe for gamma rays at this energy,
one could find the "fingerprint" for naturally occurring antimatter.

In fact, "fountains" of antimatter have been found in the Milky Way
galaxy, not far from the galactic center, by Dr. William Purcell of

Northwestern University. Apparently a stream of antimatter exists that
creates this characteristic gamma radiation at 1.02 million electron
volts as it collides with ordinary hydrogen gas. If this plume of anti-
matter exists naturally, then it might be possible that other pockets of
antimatter exist in the universe that were not destroyed in the big bang.

To look for naturally occurring antimatter more systematically, the

PAMELA (Payload for Antimatter-Matter Exploration and Light-Nuclei

Astrophysics) satellite was launched into orbit in 2006. It is a collabo-
rative effort between Russia, Italy, Germany, and Sweden, designed to
search for pockets of antimatter. Previous missions searching for anti-
matter were carried out using high-altitude balloons and the Space

A N T I M A T T E R RND A N T I - U N I V E R S E S i s 5

Shuttle, so the data was collected for no more than a week or so.

PAMELA, by contrast, will stay in orbit for at least three years. "It is the
best detector ever constructed and we will use it for a long period," de-
clares team member Piergiorgio Picozza of the University of Rome.

PAMELA is designed to detect cosmic rays from ordinary sources,
such as supernovae, but also from unusual ones, such as stars made
entirely of antimatter. Specifically, PAMELA will look for the signature
of anti-helium, which might be produced in the interiors of anti-stars.

Although most physicists today believe that the big bang resulted in a
near perfect cancellation between matter and antimatter, as Sakharov
believed, PAMELA is based on a different assumption-that whole re-
gions of antimatter universe did not undergo that cancellation and
hence exist today in the form of anti-stars.

If antimatter exists in minute quantities in deep space, then it
might be possible to "harvest" some of that antimatter to use to propel
a starship. NASA's Institute for Advanced Concepts takes the idea of
harvesting antimatter in space seriously enough that it recently funded
a pilot program to study this concept. "Basically, what you want to do
is generate a net, just like you're fishing," says Gerald Jackson of Hbar

Technologies, one of the organizations spearheading the project

The antimatter harvester is based on three concentric spheres,
each made out of a lattice wire network. The outermost sphere would
be 16 kilometers across and would be positively charged, so that it
would repel any protons, which are positively charged, but attract an-
tiprotons, which are negatively charged. The antiprotons would be col-
lected by the outer sphere, then slow down as they passed through the
second sphere and would finally stop when they reached the inner-
most sphere, which would be 100 meters across. The antiprotons
would then be captured in a magnetic bottle and combined with anti-
electrons to make antihydrogen.

Jackson estimates that controlled matter-antimatter reactions in-
side a spacecraft could fuel a solar sail to Pluto using just 30 mil-
ligrams of antimatter. Seventeen grams of antimatter, says Jackson,
would be enough to fuel a starship to Alpha Centauri. Jackson claims
that there might be 80 grams of antimatter between the orbits of Venus

1 8 6 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
and Mars that might be harvested by the space probe. Given the com-
plexities and cost of launching this huge antimatter collector, however,
it probably won't be realized until the end of this century, or beyond.

Some scientists have dreamed about harvesting antimatter from a
meteor floating in outer space. (The Flash Gordon comic strip once
featured a rogue antimatter meteor drifting in space, which could cre-
ate a terrifying explosion if it came in contact with any planet)

If naturally occurring antimatter is not found in space, we will
have to wait decades or even centuries before we can produce signifi-
cantly large quantities of antimatter on the Earth. But assuming that
the technical problems of producing antimatter can be solved, this
leaves open the possibility that one day antimatter rockets may take us
to the stars.

Given what we know of antimatter today, and the foreseeable evo-
lution of this technology, I would classify an antimatter rocket ship as
a Class I impossibility.

F O U N D E R O F A N T I M A T T E R

What is antimatter? It seems strange that nature would double the
number of subatomic particles in the universe for no good reason. Na-
ture is usually quite sparing, but now that we know about antimatter,
nature seems to be supremely redundant and wasteful. And if antimat-
ter exists, can anti-universes also exist?

To answer these questions, one has to investigate the origin of anti-
matter itself. The discovery of antimatter actually dates back to 1928,
with the pioneering work of Paul Dirac, one of the most brilliant physi-
cists of the twentieth century. He held the Lucasian Chair at Cam-
bridge University, the same chair held by Newton, and the chair
currently held by Stephen Hawking. Dirac, born in 1902, was a tall,
wiry man who was in his early twenties when the quantum revolution
broke open in 1925. Although he was studying electrical engineering
at that time, he was suddenly swept up in the tidal wave of interest un-
leashed by the quantum theory.

A N T I M A T T E R RND A N T I - U N I V E R S E S is?

The quantum theory was based on the idea that particles like elec-
trons could be described not as pointlike particles but as a wave of
some sort, described by Schrodinger's celebrated wave equation. (The
wave represents the probability of finding the particle at that point.)

But Dirac realized that there was a defect with Schrodinger's equa-
tion. It described only electrons moving at low velocities. At higher ve-
locities, the equation failed because it did not obey the laws of objects
moving at high velocities, that is, the laws of relativity found by Albert

Einstein.

To the young Dirac, the challenge was to reformulate the Schro-
dinger equation to accommodate the theory of relativity. In 1928 Dirac
proposed a radical modification of the Schrodinger equation that fully
obeyed Einstein's relativity theory. The world of physics was stunned.

Dirac found his famous relativistic equation for the electron purely by
manipulating higher mathematical objects, called spinors. A mathe-
matical curiosity was suddenly becoming a centerpiece for the entire
universe. (Unlike many physicists before him, who insisted that great
breakthroughs in physics be firmly grounded in experimental data,

Dirac took the opposite strategy. To him pure mathematics, if it was
beautiful enough, was the sure guide to great breakthroughs. He
wrote, "It is more important to have beauty in one's equations than to
have them fit experiments . . . It seems that if one is working from the
point of view of getting beauty in one's equations, and if one has a
really sound insight, one is on a sure line of progress.")

In developing his new equation for the electron, Dirac realized that

Einstein's celebrated equation, E = mc , was not quite right. Although

2
it is splattered over Madison Avenue ads, children's T-shirts, cartoons,
and even the costumes of superheroes, Einstein's equation is only par-
tially correct The correct equation is actually E = ± mc . (This minus

2
sign arises because we have to take the square root of a certain quan-
tity. Taking the square root of a quantity always introduces a plus or
minus ambiguity.)

But physicists abhor negative energy. There is an axiom of physics
that states that objects always tend to the state of lowest energy (this is
the reason that water always seeks the lowest level, sea level). Since

1 8 8 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
matter always drops down to its lowest energy state, the prospect of
negative energy was potentially disastrous. It meant that all electrons
would eventually tumble down to infinite negative energy, hence

Dirac's theory would be unstable. So Dirac invented the concept of the

"Dirac sea." He envisioned that all negative energy states were already
filled up, and hence an electron could not tumble down into negative
energy. Hence the universe was stable. Also a gamma ray might occa-
sionally collide with an electron sitting in a negative energy state and
kick it up into a state of positive energy. We would then see the gamma
ray turn into an electron and a "hole" develop in the Dirac sea. This
hole would act like a bubble in the vacuum; that is, it would have a
positive charge and the same mass as the original electron. In other
words, the hole would behave like an antielectron. So in this picture
antimatter consists of "bubbles" in the Dirac sea.

Just a few years after Dirac made this astounding prediction, Carl

Anderson actually discovered the antielectron (for which Dirac won
the Nobel Prize in 1933).

In other words, antimatter exists because the Dirac equation has
two types of solutions, one for matter, and one for antimatter. (And this
in turn is the outcome of special relativity.)

Not only did the Dirac equation predict the existence of antimatter;
it also predicted the "spin" of the electron. Subatomic particles can
spin, much like a spinning top. The spin of the electron, in turn, is cru-
cial to understanding the flow of electrons in transistors and semicon-
ductors, which form the basis of modern electronics.

Stephen Hawking regrets that Dirac did not patent his equation. He
writes, "Dirac would have made a fortune if he had patented the Dirac
equation. He would have had a royalty on every television, Walkman,
video game and computer."

Today Dirac's celebrated equation is etched in the stone of West-
minster Abbey, not far from the tomb of Isaac Newton. In the entire
world, it is perhaps the only equation given this distinctive honor.

A N T I M A T T E R HND A N T I - U N I V E R S E S 1 8 9

D I R A C A N D N E W T O N

Historians of science seeking to understand the origins of how Dirac
came up with his revolutionary equation and the concept of antimat-
ter have often compared him to Newton. Strangely, Newton and Dirac
share a number of similarities. Both were in their twenties when they
did their seminal work at Cambridge University, both were masters of
mathematics, and both shared another stark characteristic: a total lack
of social skills, to the point of pathology. Both were notorious for their
inability to engage in small talk and simple social graces. Painfully
shy, Dirac would never say anything unless asked directly, and then he
would reply "yes," or "no," or "I don't know."

Dirac was also extremely modest and detested publicity. When he
was awarded the Nobel Prize in Physics, he seriously considered turn-
ing it down because of the notoriety and trouble that it would gener-
ate. But when it was pointed out to him that rejecting the Nobel Prize
would generate even more publicity he decided to accept it.

Volumes have been written about Newton's peculiar personality,
with hypotheses ranging from mercury poisoning to mental illness.

But recently a new theory has been proposed by Cambridge psycholo-
gist Simon Baron-Cohen that might explain both Newton's and Dirac's
strange personalities. Baron-Cohen claims that they both probably suf-
fered from Asperger's syndrome, which is akin to autism, like the idiot
savant in the movie Rain Man. Individuals suffering from Asperger's
are notoriously reticent, socially awkward, and sometimes blessed
with enormous calculational ability, but unlike autistic individuals
they are functional in society and can hold productive jobs. If this the-
ory is true, then perhaps the miraculous calculational power of New-
ton and Dirac came at a price, being socially apart from the rest of
humanity.

1 9 0 P H Y S I C S O F THE I M P O S S I B L E

A N T I G R A V I T Y A N D A N T I - U N I V E R S E S

Using Dirac's theory, we can now answer a host of questions: What is
the antimatter counterpart of gravity? Do anti-universes exist?

As we discussed, antiparticles have the opposite charge of ordinary
matter. But particles that have no charge at all (such as the photon, a
particle of light, or the graviton, which is a particle of gravity) can be
their own antiparticle. We see that gravitation is its own antimatter; in
other words, gravity and antigravity are the same thing. Hence anti-
matter should fall down under gravity, not up. (This is universally be-
lieved by physicists, but it has actually never been demonstrated in the
laboratory.)

Dirac's theory also answers the deep questions: Why does nature
allow for antimatter? Does that mean anti-universes exist?

In some science fiction tales, the protagonist discovers a new

Earth-like planet in outer space. In fact, the new planet seems identi-
cal to Earth in every way, except everything is made of antimatter. We
have antimatter twins on this planet, with anti-children, who live in
anti-cities. Since the laws of anti-chemistry are the same as the laws of
chemistry, except charges are reversed, people living in such a world
would never know they were made of antimatter. (Physicists call this
the charge-reversed or C-reversed universe, since all charges are re-
versed in this anti-universe, but everything else remains the same.)

In other science fiction stories scientists discover a twin of the

Earth in outer space, except that it is a Looking Glass universe, where
everything is left-right reversed. Everyone's heart is on the right side
and most people are left-handed. They live out their lives never know-
ing that they live in a left-right reversed Looking Glass universe.

(Physicists call such a Looking Glass universe a parity-reversed or

P-reversed universe.)

Can such antimatter and parity-reversed universes really exist?

Physicists take questions about twin universes very seriously, since

Newton's and Einstein's equations remain the same when we simply
flip the charges on all our subatomic particles or reverse the left-right

A N T I M A T T E R AND A N T I - U N I V E R S E S 191
orientation. Hence, C-reversed and P-reversed universes are in princi-
ple possible.

Nobel laureate Richard Feynman posed an interesting question
about these universes. Suppose one day we make radio contact with
aliens on a distant planet but cannot see them. Can we explain to them
the difference between "left" and "right" by radio? he asked. If the laws of physics allow for a P-reversed universe, then it should be impossible to convey these concepts.

Certain things, he reasoned, are easy to communicate, such as the
shape of our bodies and the number of our fingers, arms, and legs. We
can even explain to the aliens the laws of chemistry and biology. But if we
try to explain to them the concept of "left" and "right" (or "clockwise"

and "counterclockwise"), we would fail each time. We would never be
able to explain to them that our heart is on the left side of our body, in
which direction the Earth rotates, or the way a DNA molecule spirals.

So it came as a shock when C. N. Yang and T. D. Lee, both at Co-
lumbia University at the time, disproved this cherished theorem. By
examining the nature of subatomic particles they showed that the

Looking Glass, P-reversed universe cannot exist One physicist, learn-
ing of this revolutionary result, said, "God must have made a mistake."

For this earthshaking result, called the "overthrow of parity," Yang and

Lee won the Nobel Prize in Physics in 1957.

To Feynman, this conclusion meant that if you are talking to aliens
on a radio, it is possible to set up an experiment that could enable you
to tell the difference between left- and right-handed universes by radio
alone. (For example, electrons emitted from radioactive cobalt-60 do
not spin in equal numbers in a clockwise or counterclockwise fashion,
but actually spin in a preferred direction, thereby breaking parity.)

Feynman then envisioned that a historic meeting finally takes
place between the aliens and humanity. We tell the aliens to stick out
their right hand when we first meet, and we will shake hands. If the
aliens actually stick out their right hand, then we know that we have
successfully communicated to them the concept of "left-right" and

"clockwise-counterclockwise."

192 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

But Feynman then raised an unsettling thought What happens if
the aliens stick out their left hand instead? This means that we have
made a fatal mistake, that we have failed to communicate the concept
of "left" and "right" Worse, it means that the alien is actually made of antimatter, and that he performed all the experiments backward, and
hence got "left" and "right" mixed up. It means when we shake hands,
we will explode!

That was our understanding until the 1960s. It was impossible to
tell the difference between our universe and a universe in which
everything was made of antimatter and was parity-reversed. If you
flipped both the parity and the charge, the resulting universe would
obey the laws of physics. Parity by itself was overthrown, but charge
and parity was still a good symmetry of the universe. So a CP-reversed
universe was still possible.

This meant that if we were talking to aliens on the phone, we could
not tell the difference between an ordinary universe and one that was
both parity- and charge-reversed (i.e., left and right are interchanged,
and all matter is turned into antimatter).

Then in 1964 physicists received a second shock: the CP-reversed
universe cannot exist By analyzing the properties of subatomic particles,
it is still possible to tell the difference between left-right, clockwise-
counterclockwise if you are talking by radio to another CP-reversed uni-
verse. For this result, James Cronin and Val Fitch won the Nobel Prize in

1980.

(Although many physicists were upset when the CP-reversed uni-
verse was shown to be inconsistent with the laws of physics, in hind-
sight the discovery was a good thing, as we discussed earlier. If the

CP-reversed universe were possible, then the original big bang would
have involved precisely the same amount of matter and antimatter,
and hence 100 percent annihilation would have taken place, and our
atoms would not have been possible! The fact that we exist as a leftover
from the annihilation of unequal amounts of matter and antimatter is
proof of CP violation.)

Are any reversed anti-universes possible? The answer is yes. Even

H H T I M H T T E R AND A N T I - U N I V E R S E S 193
if parity-reversed and charge-reversed universes are not possible, an
anti-universe is still possible, but it would be a strange one. If we re-
versed the charges, the parity, and the march of time, then the result-
ing universe would obey all the laws of physics. The CPT-reversed
universe is allowed.

Time reversal is a bizarre symmetry. In a T-reversed universe,
fried eggs jump off the dinner plate, reform on the frying pan, and then
jump back into the egg, sealing the cracks. Corpses rise from the dead,
get younger, turn into babies, and then jump into their mother's womb.

Common sense tells us that the T-reversed universe is not possible.

But the mathematical equations of subatomic particles tell us other-
wise. Newton's laws run perfectly well backward or forward. Imagine
videotaping a billiard game. Each collision of the balls obeys Newton's
laws of motion; running such a videotape would make for a bizarre
game, but it is allowed by the laws of Newton.

In the quantum theory things are more complicated. T-reversal by
itself violates the laws of quantum mechanics, but the full CPT-re-
versed universe is allowed. This means that a universe in which left
and right are reversed, matter turns into antimatter, and time runs
backward is a fully acceptable universe obeying the laws of physics!

(Ironically, we cannot communicate with such a CPT-reversed
world. If time runs backward on their planet, it means that everything
we tell them by radio will be part of their future, so they would forget
everything we told them as soon as we spoke to them. So even though
the CPT-reversed universe is allowed under the laws of physics, we
cannot talk to any CPT-reversed alien by radio.)

In summary, antimatter engines may give us a realistic possibility for
fueling a starship in the distant future, if enough antimatter could be
made on Earth, or found in outer space. There is a slight imbalance be-
tween matter and antimatter because of CP violation, and this in turn
may mean that pockets of antimatter still exist and can be harvested.

But because of the technical difficulties involved in antimatter en-

194 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
gines, it may take a century or more to develop this technology, mak-
ing it a Class I impossibility.

But let's tackle another question: Will faster-than-light starships be
possible thousands of years in the future? Are there loopholes to Ein-
stein's famous dictum that "nothing can go faster than light"? The an-
swer, surprisingly, is yes.

It's quite conceivable that [life] will eventually spread through the
galaxy and beyond. So life may not forever be an unimportant trace
contaminant of the universe, even though it now is. In fact,

I find it a rather appealing view.

-ASTRONOMER ROYAL SIR MARTIN REES

It is impossible to travel faster than the speed of light,
and certainly not desirable, as one's hat keeps blowing off.

-WOODY ALLEN

In Star Wars, as the Millennium Falcon blasts off the desert planet

Tatooine, carrying our heroes Luke Skywalker and Han Solo, the ship
encounters a squadron of menacing Imperial battleships orbiting the
planet The Empire's battleships fire a punishing barrage of laser
blasts at our heroes' ship that steadily break through its force fields.

The Millennium Falcon is outgunned. Buckling under this withering
laser fire, Han Solo yells that their only hope is to make the jump into

"hyperspace." In the nick of time the hyperdrive engines spring to life.

All the stars around them suddenly implode toward the center of their
view screen in converging, blinding streaks of light. A hole opens up,
which the Millennium Falcon blasts through, reaching hyperspace and
freedom.

1 9 8 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Science fiction? Undoubtedly. But could it be based on scientific
fact? Perhaps. Faster-than-light travel has always been a staple of sci-
ence fiction, but recently physicists have given serious thought to this
possibility.

According to Einstein, the speed of light is the ultimate speed limit
in the universe. Even our most powerful atom smashers, which can
create energies found only at the center of exploding stars or the big
bang itself, cannot hurl subatomic particles at a rate faster than the
speed of light Apparently the speed of light is the ultimate traffic cop
in the universe. If so, any hope of our reaching the distant galaxies
seems to be dashed.

Or maybe n o t . . .

E I N S T E I N T H E F A I L U R E

In 1902 it was far from obvious that the young physicist Albert Einstein
would be hailed as the greatest physicist since Isaac Newton. In fact,
that year represented the lowest point in his life. A newly minted Ph.D.

student, he was rejected for a teaching job by every university he ap-
plied to. (He later found out that his professor Heinrich Weber had
written horrible letters of recommendation for him, perhaps in re-
venge for Einstein's having cut so many of his classes.) Furthermore,

Einstein's mother was violently opposed to his girlfriend, Mileva

Marie, who was carrying his child. Their first daughter, Lieserl, would
be born illegitimate. Young Albert was also a failure at the odd jobs he
took. Even his lowly tutoring job abruptly ended when he was fired. In
his depressing letters he contemplated becoming a salesman to earn a
living. He even wrote to his family that perhaps it would have been bet-
ter had he never been born, since he was such a burden to his family
and lacked any prospects for success in life. When his father died, he
felt ashamed that his father had died thinking that his son was a total
failure.

Yet later that year Einstein's luck would turn. A friend arranged for
him to get a job as a clerk in the Swiss Patent Office. From that lowly

F A S T E R T H A N L I G H T 199
position Einstein would launch the greatest revolution in modern his-
tory. He would quickly analyze the patents on his desk and then spend
hours contemplating problems in physics that had puzzled him since
he was a child.

What was the secret of his genius? Perhaps one clue to his genius
was his ability to think in terms of physical pictures (e.g., moving
trains, accelerating clocks, stretched fabrics) rather than pure mathe-
matics. Einstein once said that unless a theory can be explained to a
child, the theory was probably useless; that is, the essence of a theory
has to be captured by a physical picture. So many physicists get lost in
a thicket of mathematics that lead nowhere. But like Newton before
him, Einstein was obsessed by the physical picture; the mathematics
would come later. For Newton the physical picture was the falling ap-
ple and the moon. Were the forces that made an apple fall identical to
the forces that guided the moon in its orbit? When Newton decided that
the answer was yes, he created a mathematical architecture for the
universe that suddenly unveiled the greatest secret of the heavens, the
motion of celestial bodies themselves.

E I N S T E I N A N D R E L A T I V I T Y

Albert Einstein proposed his celebrated special theory of relativity in

1905. At the heart of his theory was a picture that even children can
understand. His theory was the culmination of a dream he had had
since the age of sixteen, when he asked the fateful question: what hap-
pens if you outrace a light beam? As a youth, he knew that Newtonian
mechanics described the motion of objects on the Earth and in the
heavens, and that Maxwell's theory described light. These were the
two pillars of physics.

The essence of Einstein's genius was that he recognized that these
two pillars were in contradiction. One of them must fall.

According to Newton, you could always outrace a light beam, since
there was nothing special about the speed of light. This meant that the
light beam must remain stationary as you raced alongside. But as a

2 0 0 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
youth Einstein realized that no one had ever seen a light wave that was
totally stationary, that is, like a frozen wave. Hence Newton's theory
did not make sense.

Finally, as a college student in Zurich studying Maxwell's theory,

Einstein found the answer. He discovered something that even Maxwell
did not know: that the speed of light was a constant, no matter how fast
you moved. If you raced toward or away from a light beam, it still trav-
eled at the same velocity, but this trait violates common sense. Einstein
had found the answer to his childhood question: you can never race
alongside a light beam, since it always moves away from you at a con-
stant speed, no matter how fast you move.

But Newtonian mechanics was a tightly constrained system: like
pulling on a loose thread, the entire theory could unravel if you made
the smallest change in its assumptions. In Newton's theory the passage
of time was uniform throughout the universe. One second on the Earth
was identical to one second on Venus or Mars. Similarly, meter sticks
placed on the Earth had the same length as meter sticks on Pluto. But
if the speed of light was always constant no matter how fast you moved,
there would need to be a major shakeup in our understanding of space
and time. Profound distortions of space and time would have to occur
to preserve the constancy of the speed of light.

According to Einstein, if you were in a speeding rocket ship, the
passage of time inside that rocket would have to slow down with re-
spect to someone on Earth. Time beats at different rates, depending on
how fast you move. Furthermore, the space within that rocket ship
would get compressed, so that meter sticks could change in length, de-
pending on your speed. And the mass of the rocket would increase as
well. If we were to peer into the rocket with our telescopes, we would
see clocks inside the rocket running slowly, people moving in slow
motion, and the people would appear flattened.

In fact, if the rocket were traveling at the speed of light, time would
apparently stop inside the rocket, the rocket would be compressed to
nothing, and the mass of the rocket would be infinite. Since none of
these observations make any sense, Einstein stated that nothing can
break the light barrier. (Because an object gets heavier the faster it

F O S T E R T U R N L I G H T 201
moves, this means that the energy motion is being converted to mass.

The precise amount of energy that turns into mass is easy to calculate,
and we arrive at the celebrated equation E = mc in just a few lines.)

2

Since Einstein derived his famous equation, literally millions of
experiments have confirmed his revolutionary ideas. For example, the

GPS system, which can locate your position on the Earth to within a
few feet, would fail unless one added in corrections due to relativity.

(Since the military depends on the GPS system, even Pentagon gener-
als have to be briefed by physicists concerning Einstein's theory of rel-
ativity.) The clocks on the GPS actually change as they speed above the

Earth, as Einstein predicted.

The most graphic illustration of this concept is found in atom
smashers, in which scientists accelerate particles to nearly the speed
of light. At the gigantic CERN accelerator, the Large Hadron Collider,
outside Geneva, Switzerland, protons are accelerated to trillions of
electron volts, and they move very close to the speed of light.

To a rocket scientist, the light barrier is not much of a problem yet,
since rockets can barely travel beyond a few tens of thousands of miles
per hour. But within a century or two, when rocket scientists seriously
contemplate sending probes to the nearest star (located over 4 light-
years from Earth), the light barrier could gradually become a problem.

L O O P H O L E S I N E I N S T E I N ' S T H E O R Y

Over the decades, physicists have tried to find loopholes in Einstein's
famous dictum. Some loopholes have been found, but most are not
very useful. For example, if one sweeps a flashlight across the heavens,
in principle the image of the light beam can exceed the speed of light.

In a few seconds, the image of the flashlight moves from one point on
the horizon to the opposite point, over a distance that can stretch over
hundreds of light-years. But this is of no importance, since no informa-
tion can be transmitted faster than light in this fashion. The image of
the light beam has exceeded the speed of light, but the image carries
no energy or information.

202 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Similarly, if we have a pair of scissors, the point at which the
blades cross each other moves faster the farther you are from the join-
ing point. If we imagine scissors that are a light-year long, then by clos-
ing the blades the crossing point can travel faster than light (Again,
this is not important since the crossing point carries no energy or in-
formation.)

Likewise, as I mentioned in Chapter Four, the EPR experiment en-
ables one to send information at speeds faster than the speed of light

(In this experiment, we recall, two electrons are vibrating in unison
and then are sent speeding in opposite directions. Because these elec-
trons are coherent, information can be sent between them at speeds
faster than the speed of light, but this information is random and hence
is useless. EPR machines, hence, cannot be used to send probes to the
distant stars.)

To a physicist, the most important loophole came from Einstein
himself, who created the general theory of relativity in 1915, a theory
that is more powerful than the special theory of relativity. The seeds of
general relativity were planted when Einstein considered a children's
merry-go-round. As we saw earlier, objects shrink as they approach
the speed of light The faster you move, the more you are squeezed. But
in a spinning disk, the outer circumference moves faster than the cen-
ter. (The center, in fact, is almost stationary.) This means that a ruler
stick placed on the rim must shrink, while a ruler placed at the center
remains nearly the same, so the surface of the merry-go-round is no
longer flat, but is curved. Thus acceleration has the effect of curving
space and time on the merry-go-round.

In the general theory of relativity, space-time is a fabric that can
stretch and shrink. Under certain circumstances the fabric may stretch
faster than the speed of light. Think of the big bang, for example, when
the universe was born in a cosmic explosion 13.7 billion years ago.

One can calculate that the universe originally expanded faster than the
speed of light. (This action does not violate special relativity, since it
was empty space-the space between stars-that was expanding, not the
stars themselves. Expanding space does not carry any information.)

F A S T E R T H A N L I G H T 2 0 3

The important point is that special relativity applies only locally,
that is, in your nearby vicinity. In your local neighborhood (e.g., the so-
lar system), special relativity holds, as we confirm with our space
probes. But globally (e.g., on cosmological scales involving the uni-
verse) we must use general relativity instead. In general relativity,
space-time becomes a fabric, and this fabric can stretch faster than
light It can also allow for "holes in space" in which one can take short-
cuts through space and time.

Given these caveats, perhaps one way to travel faster than light is
to invoke general relativity. There are two ways in which this might be
done.

1. Stretching space. If you were to stretch the space be-
hind you and contact the space in front of you, then you
would have the illusion of having moved faster than light. In
fact, you would not have moved at all. But since space has
been deformed, it means you can reach the distant stars in a
twinkling of an eye.

2. Ripping space. In 1935 Einstein introduced the con-
cept of a wormhole. Imagine the Looking Glass of Alice, a
magical device that connects the countryside of Oxford to

Wonderland. The wormhole is a device that can connect two
universes. When we were in grade school, we learned that
the shortest distance between two points is a straight line.

But this is not necessarily true, because if we curled a sheet
of paper until two points touched, then we would see that
the shortest distance between two points is actually a worm-
hole.

As physicist Matt Visser of Washington University says, "The rela-
tivity community has started to think about what would be necessary
to take something like warp drive or wormholes out of the realm of sci-
ence fiction."

Sir Martin Rees, Royal Astronomer of Great Britain, even says,

204 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

"Wormholes, extra dimensions, and quantum computers open up
speculative scenarios that could transform our entire universe eventu-
ally into a 'living cosmos.' "

T H E A L C U B I E R R E D R I V E A N D N E G A T I V E E N E R G Y

The best example of stretching space is the Alcubierre drive, proposed
by physicist Miguel Alcubierre in 1994 using Einstein's theory of grav-
ity. It is quite similar to the propulsion system seen in Star Trek. The
pilot of such a starship would be seated inside a bubble (called a "warp
bubble") in which everything seemed to appear normal, even as the
spacecraft broke the light barrier. In fact, the pilot would think that he
was at rest. Yet outside the warp bubble extreme distortions of space-
time would occur as the space in front of the warp bubble was com-
pressed. There would be no time dilation, so time would pass normally
inside the warp bubble.

Alcubierre admits that Star Trek may have had a role to play in his
finding this solution. "People in Star Trek kept talking about warp
drive, the concept that you're warping space," he says. "We already had
a theory about how space can or cannot be distorted, and that is the
general theory of relativity. I thought there should be a way of using
these concepts to see how a warp drive would work." This is probably
the first time that a TV show helped to inspire a solution to one of Ein-
stein's equations.

Alcubierre speculates that a journey in his proposed starship
would resemble a journey taken on the Millennium Falcon in Star

Wars. "My guess is they would probably see something very similar to
that In front of the ship, the stars would become long lines, streaks. In
back, they wouldn't see any thing-just black-because the light of the
stars couldn't move fast enough to catch up with them," he says.

The key to the Alcubierre drive is the energy necessary to propel
the spacecraft forward at faster-than-light velocities. Normally physi-
cists begin with a positive amount of energy in order to propel a star-
ship, which always travels slower than the speed of light. To move

F A S T E R T H A N L I G H T 2 0 5
beyond this strategy so as to be able to travel faster than the speed of
light one would need to change the fuel. A straightforward calculation
shows that you would need "negative mass" or "negative energy," per-
haps the most exotic entities in the universe, if they exist Traditionally,
physicists have dismissed negative energy and negative mass as sci-
ence fiction. But we now see that they are indispensable for faster-
than-light travel, and they might actually exist.

Scientists have looked for negative matter in nature, but so far
without success. (Antimatter and negative matter are two entirely dif-
ferent things. The first exists and has positive energy, but a reversed
charge. Negative matter has not yet been proven to exist) Negative
matter would be quite peculiar, because it would be lighter than noth-
ing. In fact, it would float. If negative matter existed in the early uni-
verse, it would have drifted into outer space. Unlike meteors that come
crashing down onto planets, drawn by a planet's gravity, negative mat-
ter would shun planets. It would be repelled, not attracted, by large
bodies such as stars and planets. Hence, although negative matter
might exist, we expect to find it only in deep space, certainly not on

Earth.

One proposal to find negative matter in outer space involves using
the phenomenon called "Einstein lenses." When light travels around a
star or galaxy its path is bent by its gravity, according to general rela-
tivity. In 1912 (even before Einstein fully developed general relativity)

he predicted that a galaxy might be able to act like the lens of a tele-
scope. Light from a distant object moving around a nearby galaxy
would converge as it passed around the galaxy, like a lens, forming a
characteristic ring pattern when the light finally reached the Earth.

These phenomena are now called "Einstein rings." In 1979 the first of
these Einstein lenses was observed in outer space. Since then, Einstein
lenses have become an indispensable tool for astronomers. (For exam-
ple, it was once thought that it would be impossible to locate "dark
matter" in outer space. [Dark matter is a mysterious substance that is
invisible but has weight It surrounds the galaxies and is perhaps ten
times as plentiful as ordinary visible matter in the universe.] But NASA
scientists have been able to construct maps of dark matter since dark

206 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
matter bends light as the light passes through, in the same way that
glass bends light.)

Therefore it should be possible to use Einstein lenses to search for
negative matter and wormholes in outer space. They should bend light
in a peculiar way, which should be visible with the Hubble Space Tele-
scope. So far, Einstein lenses have not detected the image of negative
matter or wormholes in outer space, but the search is continuing. If
one day the Hubble Space Telescope detects the presence of negative
matter or a wormhole via Einstein lenses, it could set off a shock wave
in physics.

Negative energy is different from negative matter in that it actually
exists, but only in minute quantities. In 1933 Hendrik Casimir made a
bizarre prediction using the laws of the quantum theory. He claimed
that two uncharged parallel metal plates will attract each other, as if
by magic. Normally parallel plates are stationary, since they lack any
net charge. But the vacuum between the two parallel plates is not
empty, but full of'Virtual particles," which dart in and out of existence.

For brief periods of time, electron-antielectron pairs burst out of
nothing, only to be annihilated and disappear back into the vacuum.

Ironically, empty space, which was once thought to be devoid of any-
thing, now turns out to be churning with quantum activity. Normally
tiny bursts of matter and antimatter would seem to violate the conser-
vation of energy. But because of the uncertainty principle, these tiny
violations are incredibly short-lived, and on average energy is still
conserved.

Casimir found that the cloud of virtual particles will create a net
pressure in the vacuum. The space between the two parallel plates is
confined, and hence the pressure is low. But the pressure outside the
plates is unconfined and larger, and hence there will be a net pressure
pushing the plates together.

Normally the state of zero energy occurs when these two plates are
at rest and sitting far apart from each other. But as the plates come
closer together, you can extract energy out of them. Thus, because ki-
netic energy has been taken out of the plates, the energy of the plates
is less than zero.

F A S T E R T H A N L I G H T 207

This negative energy was actually measured in the laboratory in

1948, and the results confirmed Casimir's prediction. Thus, negative
energy and the Casimir effect are no longer science fiction but estab-
lished fact. The problem, however, is that the Casimir effect is quite
small; it takes delicate, state-of-the-art measuring equipment to detect
this energy in the laboratory. (In general, the Casimir energy is propor-
tional to the inverse fourth power of the distance of separation between
the plates. This means that the smaller the distance of separation, the
larger the energy.) The Casimir effect was measured precisely in 1996
by Steven Lamoreaux at the Los Alamos National Laboratory, and the
attractive force is /30,000 the weight of an ant.

Since Alcubierre first proposed his theory, physicists have discov-
ered a number of strange properties. The people inside the starship are
causally disconnected from the outside world. This means that you
cannot simply press a button at will and travel faster than light. You
cannot communicate through the bubble. There has to be a preexist-
ing "highway" through space and time, like a series of trains passing
by on a regular timetable. In this sense, the starship would not be an
ordinary ship that can change directions and speeds at will. The star-
ship would actually be like a passenger car riding on a preexisting

"wave" of compressed space, coasting along a preexisting corridor of
warped space-time. Alcubierre speculates, "We would need a series of
generators of exotic matter along the way, like a highway, that manip-
ulate space for you in a synchronized way."

Actually, even more bizarre types of solutions to Einstein's equa-
tions can be found. Einstein's equations state that if you are given a
certain amount of mass or energy, you can compute the warping of
space-time that the mass or energy will generate (in the same way that
if you throw a rock into a pond, you can calculate the ripples that it will
create). But you can also run the equations backward. You can start
with a bizarre space-time, the kind found in episodes of The Twilight

Zone. (In these universes, for example, you can open up a door and
find yourself on the moon. You can run around a tree and find yourself
backward in time, with your heart on the right side of your body.) Then
you calculate the distribution of matter and energy associated with

208 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
that particular space-time. (This means that if you are given a bizarre
collection of waves on the surface of a pond, you can work backward
and calculate the distribution of rocks necessary to produce these
waves). This was, in fact, the way in which Alcubierre derived his
equations. He began with a space-time consistent with going faster
than light, and then he worked backward and calculated the energy
necessary to produce it.

W O R M H O L E S A N D B L A C K H O L E S

Besides stretching space, the second possible way to break the light
barrier is by ripping space, via wormholes, passageways that connect
two universes. In fiction, the first mention of a wormhole came from

Oxford mathematician Charles Dodgson, who wrote Through the

Looking Glass under the pen name Lewis Carroll. The Looking Glass
of Alice is the wormhole, connecting the countryside of Oxford with
the magical world of Wonderland. By placing her hand through the

Looking Glass, Alice can be transported instantly from one universe to
the next. Mathematicians call these "multiply connected spaces."

The concept of wormholes in physics dates back to 1916, one year
after Einstein published his epic general theory of relativity. Physicist

Karl Schwarzschild, then serving in the Kaiser's army, was able to
solve Einstein's equations exactly for the case of a single pointlike star.

Far from the star, its gravitational field was very similar to that of an
ordinary star, and in fact Einstein used Schwarzschild's solution to cal-
culate the deflection of light around a star. Schwarzschild's solution
had an immediate and profound impact on astronomy, and even today
it is one of the best-known solutions of Einstein's equations. For gen-
erations, physicists used the gravitational field around this pointlike
star as an approximation to the field around a real star, which has a fi-
nite diameter.

But if you took this pointlike solution seriously, then lurking at the
center of it was a monstrous pointlike object that has shocked and
amazed physicists for almost a century-a black hole. Schwarzschild's

F O S T E R T H A N L I G H T 2 0 9
solution for the gravity of a pointlike star was like a Trojan Horse. On
the outside it looked like a gift from heaven, but on the inside there
lurked all sorts of demons and ghosts. But if you accepted one, you had
to accept the other. Schwarzschild's solution showed that as you ap-
proached this pointlike star, bizarre things happened. Surrounding the
star was an invisible sphere (called the "event horizon") that was a
point of no return. Everything checked in, but nothing could check out,
like a Roach Motel. Once you passed through the event horizon, you
never came back. (Once inside the event horizon, you would have to
travel faster than light to escape back outside the event horizon, and
that would be impossible.)

As you approached the event horizon, your atoms would be
stretched by tidal forces. The gravity felt by your feet would be much
greater than the gravity felt by your head, so you would be "spaghetti-
fied" and then ripped apart. Similarly, the atoms of your body would
also be stretched and torn apart by gravity.

To an outside observer watching you approach the event horizon,
it would appear that you were slowing down in time. In fact, as you hit
the event horizon, it would appear that time had stopped!

Furthermore, as you fell past the event horizon, you would see
light that has been trapped and circulating around this black hole for
billions of years. It would seem as if you were watching a motion pic-
ture film, detailing the entire history of the black hole, going back to its
very origin.

And finally, if you could fall straight through to the black hole,
there would be another universe on the other side. This is called the

Einstein-Rosen Bridge, first introduced by Einstein in 1935; it is now
called a wormhole.

Einstein and other physicists believed a star could never evolve nat-
urally into such a monstrous object. In fact, in 1939 Einstein published
a paper showing that a circulating mass of gas and dust will never con-
dense into such a black hole. So although there was a wormhole lurk-
ing in the center of a black hole, he was confident that such a strange
object could never form by natural means. In fact, astrophysicist Arthur

Eddington once said that there should "be a law of nature to prevent a

210 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
star from behaving in this absurd way." In other words, the black hole
was indeed a legitimate solution of Einstein's equations, but there was
no known mechanism that could form one by natural means.

All this changed with the advent of a paper by J. Robert Oppen-
heimer and his student Hartland Snyder, written that same year, show-
ing that black holes can indeed be formed by natural means. They
assumed that a dying star had used up its nuclear fuel and then col-
lapsed under gravity, so that it imploded under its own weight. If grav-
ity could compress the star to within its event horizon, then nothing
known to science could prevent gravity from squeezing the star to a
point-particle, the black hole. (This implosion method may have given

Oppenheimer the clue for building the Nagasaki bomb just a few years
later, which depends on imploding a sphere of plutonium.)

The next breakthrough came in 1963, when New Zealand mathe-
matician Roy Kerr examined perhaps the most realistic example of a
black hole. Objects spin faster as they shrink, in much the same way
that skaters spin faster when they bring in their arms close to their
body. As a result black holes should be spinning at fantastic rates.

Kerr found that a spinning black hole would not collapse into a
pointlike star, as Schwarzschild assumed, but would collapse into a
spinning ring. Anyone unfortunate enough to hit the ring would per-
ish; but someone falling into the ring would not die, but would actu-
ally fall through. But instead of winding up on the other side of the
ring, he or she would pass through the Einstein-Rosen Bridge and
wind up in another universe. In other words, the spinning black hole
is the rim of Alice's Looking Glass.

If he or she were to move around the spinning ring a second time,
he or she would enter yet another universe. In fact, repeated entry into
the spinning ring would put a person in different parallel universes,
much like hitting the "up" button on an elevator. In principle, there
could be an infinite number of universes, each stacked on top of each
other. "Pass through this magic ring and-presto!-you're in a com-
pletely different universe where radius and mass are negative!" Kerr
wrote.

There is an important catch, however. Black holes are examples of

F A S T E R T U R N L I G H T 211

"nontransversable wormholes"; that is, passing through the event
horizon is a one-way trip. Once you pass through the event horizon
and the Kerr ring, you cannot go backward through the ring and out
through the event horizon.

But in 1988 Kip Thorne and colleagues at Cal Tech found an exam-
ple of a transversable wormhole, that is, one through which you could
pass freely back and forth. In fact, for one solution, the travel through
a wormhole would be no worse than riding on an airplane.

Normally gravity would crush the throat of the wormhole, destroy-
ing the astronauts trying to reach the other side. That is one reason
that faster-than-light travel through a wormhole is not possible. But
the repulsive force of negative energy or negative mass could conceiv-
ably keep the throat open sufficiently long to allow astronauts a clear
passage. In other words, negative mass or energy is essential for both
the Alcubierre drive and the wormhole solution.

In the last few years an astonishing number of exact solutions have
been found to Einstein's equations that allow for wormholes. But do
wormholes really exist, or are they just a figment of mathematics?

There are several major problems facing wormholes.

First, to create the violent distortions of space and time necessary
to travel through a wormhole, one would need fabulous amounts of
positive and negative matter, on the order of a huge star or a black
hole. Matthew Visser, a physicist at Washington University, estimates
that the amount of negative energy you would need to open up a 1-me-
ter wormhole is comparable to the mass of Jupiter, except that it would
need to be negative. He says, "You need about minus one Jupiter mass
to do the job. Just manipulating a positive Jupiter mass of energy is al-
ready pretty freaky, well beyond our capabilities into the foreseeable
future."

Rip Thorne of the California Institute of Technology speculates
that "it will turn out that the laws of physics do allow sufficient exotic
matter in wormholes of human size to hold the wormhole open. But it
will also turn out that the technology for making wormholes and hold-
ing them open is unimaginably far beyond the capabilities of our hu-
man civilization."

2 1 2 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Second, we do not know how stable these wormholes would be.

The radiation generated by these wormholes might kill anyone who
enters. Or perhaps the wormholes would not be stable at all, closing as
soon as one entered them.

Third, light beams falling into the black hole would be blue
shifted; that is, they would attain greater and greater energy as they
came close to the event horizon. In fact, at the event horizon itself, light
is technically infinitely blue shifted, so the radiation from this in-
falling energy could kill anyone in a rocket.

Let us discuss these problems in some detail. One problem is to
amass enough energy to rip the fabric of space and time. The simplest
way to do this is to compress an object until it becomes smaller than
its "event horizon." For the sun, this means compressing it down to
about 2 miles in diameter, whereupon it will collapse into a black hole.

(The Sun's gravity is too weak to compress it naturally down to 2 miles,
so our sun will never become a black hole. In principle, this means
that anything, even you, can become a black hole if you were suffi-
ciently compressed. This would mean compressing all the atoms of
your body to smaller than subatomic distances-a feat that is beyond
the capabilities of modern science.)

A more practical approach would be to assemble a battery of laser
beams to fire an intense beam at a specific spot Or to build a huge
atom smasher to create two beams, which would then collide with
each other at fantastic energies, sufficient to create a small tear in the
fabric of space-time.

P L A N C K E N E R G Y A N D P A R T I C L E A C C E L E R A T O R S

One can calculate the energy necessary to create an instability in space
and time: it is of the order of the Planck energy, or 10 billion electron

19
volts. This is truly an unimaginably large number, a quadrillion times
larger than the energy attainable with today's most powerful machine,
the Large Hadron Collider (LHC), located outside Geneva, Switzer-
land. The LHC is capable of swinging protons in a large "doughnut"

F A S T E R T H A N L I G H T 213
until they reach energies of trillions of electron volts, energies not seen
since the big bang. But even this monster of a machine falls far short
of producing energy anywhere near the Planck energy.

The next particle accelerator after the LHC will be the Interna-
tional Linear Collider (ILC). Instead of bending the path of subatomic
particles into a circle, the ILC will shoot them down a straight path.

Energy will be injected as the particles move along this path, until they
attain unimaginably large energies. Then a beam of electrons will col-
lide with antielectrons, creating a huge burst of energy. The ILC will
be 30 to 40 kilometers long, or ten times the length of the Stanford Lin-
ear Accelerator, currently the largest linear accelerator. If all goes well,
the ILC is due to be completed sometime in the next decade.

The energy produced by the ILC will be .5 to 1.0 trillion electron
volts-less than the 14 trillion electron volts of the LHC, but this is de-
ceptive. (In the LHC, the collisions between the protons take place be-
tween the constituent quarks making up the proton. Hence the
collisions involving the quarks are less than 14 trillion electron volts.

That is why the ILC will produce collision energies larger than those
of the LHC.) Also, because the electron has no known constituent, the
dynamics of the collisions between electron and antielectron are sim-
pler and cleaner.

But realistically, the ILC, too, falls far short of being able to open
up a hole in space-time. For that, you would need an accelerator a
quadrillion times more powerful. For our Type 0 civilization, which
uses dead plants for fuel (e.g., oil and coal), this technology is far be-
yond anything we can muster. But it may become possible for a Type

III civilization.

Remember, a Type III civilization, which is galactic in its use of
energy, consumes 10 billion times more energy than a Type II civiliza-
tion, whose consumption is based on the energy of a single star. And a

Type II civilization in turn consumes 10 billion times more energy
than a Type I civilization, whose consumption is based on the energy
of a single planet. In one hundred to two hundred years, our feeble

Type 0 civilization will reach Type I status.

Given that projection, we are a long, long way from being able to

214 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
achieve the Planck energy. Many physicists believe that at extremely
tiny distances, at the Planck distance of 10 centimeters, space is not

33
empty or smooth but becomes "foamy"; it is frothing with tiny bubbles
that constantly pop into existence, collide with other bubbles, and then
vanish back into the vacuum. These bubbles that dart in and out of the
vacuum are 'Virtual universes," very similar to the virtual particles of
electrons and antielectrons that pop into existence and then disappear.

Normally, this quantum space-time "foam" is completely invisible
to us. These bubbles form at such tiny distances that we cannot ob-
serve them. But quantum physics suggests that if we concentrate
enough energy at a single point, until we reach the Planck energy,
these bubbles can become large. Then we would see space-time froth-
ing with tiny bubbles, each bubble a wormhole connected to a "baby
universe."

In the past these baby universes were considered an intellectual
curiosity, a strange consequence of pure mathematics. But now physi-
cists are seriously thinking that our universe might have originally
started off as one of these baby universes.

Such thinking is sheer speculation, but the laws of physics allow
for the possibility of opening a hole in space by concentrating enough
energy at a single point, until we access the space-time foam and
wormholes emerge connecting our universe to a baby universe.

Achieving a hole in space would, of course, require major break-
throughs in our technology, but again, it might be possible for a Type

III civilization. For example, there have been promising developments
in something called a "Wakefield tabletop accelerator." Remarkably,
this atom smasher is so small that it can be placed on top of a table yet
generate billions of electron volts of energy. The Wakefield tabletop ac-
celerator works by firing lasers onto charged particles, which then ride
on the energy of that laser. Experiments done at the Stanford Linear

Accelerator Center, the Rutherford Appleton Laboratory in England,
and the Ecole Polytechnique in Paris show that enormous accelera-
tions are possible over small distances using laser beams and plasma
to inject energy.

Yet another breakthrough was made in 2007, when physicists and

F A S T E R T H A N L I G H T 215
engineers at the Stanford Linear Accelerator Center, UCLA, and USC
demonstrated that you can double the energy of a huge particle accel-
erator in just 1 meter. They started with a beam of electrons that are
fired down a 2-mile-long tube in Stanford, reaching an energy of 42
billion electron volts. Then these high-energy electrons were sent
through an "afterburner," which consisted of a plasma chamber only

88 centimeters long, where the electrons pick up an additional 42 bil-
lion electron volts, doubling their energy. (The plasma chamber is
filled with lithium gas. As the electrons pass through the gas, they cre-
ate a plasma wave that creates a wake. This wake in turn flows to the
back of the electron beam and then shoves it forward, giving it an ex-
tra boost) In this stunning achievement, the physicists improved by a
factor of three thousand the previous record for the amount of energy
per meter they could accelerate an electron beam. By adding such "af-
terburners" to existing accelerators, one might in principle double
their energy, almost for free.

Today the world record for a Wakefield tabletop accelerator is 200
billion electron volts per meter. There are numerous problems scaling
this result to longer distances (such as maintaining the stability of the
beam as laser power is pumped into it). But assuming that we could
maintain a power level of 200 billion electron volts per meter, this
means that an accelerator capable of reaching the Planck energy
would have to be 10 light-years long. This is well within the capability
of a Type III civilization.

Wormholes and stretched space may give us the most realistic way of
breaking the light barrier. But it is not known if these technologies are
stable; if they are, it would still take a fabulous amount of energy, pos-
itive or negative, to make them work.

Perhaps an advanced Type III civilization might already have this
technology. It might be millennia before we can even think about har-
nessing power on this scale. Because there is still controversy over the
fundamental laws governing the fabric of space-time at the quantum
level, I would classify this as a Class II impossibility.

If time travel is possible, then where are the
tourists from the future?

-STEPHEN HAWKING

"[Time travel] is against reason," said Filby.

"What reason?" said the Time Traveler.

- H . G. WELLS

In the novel Janus Equation, writer G. Spruill explored one of the har-
rowing problems with time travel. In this tale a brilliant mathemati-
cian whose goal is to discover the secret of time travel meets a strange,
beautiful woman, and they become lovers, although he knows nothing
about her past He becomes intrigued about finding out her true iden-
tity. Eventually he discovers that she once had plastic surgery to
change her features. And that she had a sex change operation. Finally,
he discovers that "she" is actually a time traveler from the future, and
that "she" is actually himself, but from the future. This means that he
made love to himself. And one is left wondering, what would have hap-
pened if they had had a child? And if this child went back into the past,
to grow up to become the mathematician at the beginning of the story,
then is it possible to be your own mother and father and son and
daughter?

T I M E T R A V E L 217

C H A N G I N G T H E P A S T

Time is one of the great mysteries of the universe. We are all swept up
in the river of time against our will. Around AD 400, Saint Augustine
wrote extensively about the paradoxical nature of time: "How can the
past and future be, when the past no longer is, and the future is not yet?

As for the present, if it were always present and never moved on to be-
come the past, it would not be time, but eternity." If we take Saint Au-

gustine's logic further, we see that time is not possible, since the past
is gone, the future does not exist, and the present exists only for an in-
stant. (Saint Augustine then asked profound theological questions
about how time must influence God, questions that are relevant even
today. If God is omnipotent and all-powerful, he wrote, then is He
bound by the passing of time? In other words, does God, like the rest
of us mortals, have to rush because He is late for an appointment?

Saint Augustine eventually concluded that God is omnipotent and
hence cannot be constrained by time and would therefore have to ex-
ist "outside of time." Although the concept of being outside of time
seems absurd, it's one idea that is recurring in modern physics, as we
will see.)

Like Saint Augustine, all of us have at some time wondered about
the strange nature of time and how it differs from space. If we can
move forward and backward in space, why not in time? All of us have
also wondered what the future may hold for us, in the time beyond our
years. Humans have a finite lifetime, but we are intensely curious
about events that will happen long after we are gone.

Although our longing to travel in time is probably as ancient as hu-
manity, apparently the very first written time travel story is Memoirs of
the Twentieth Century, written in 1735 by Samuel Madden, about an
angel from the year 1997 who journeys over 250 years into the past to
give documents to a British ambassador that describe the world of the
future.

There would be many more such stories. The 1838 short story

"Missing One's Coach: An Anachronism," written anonymously, is
about a person waiting for a coach who suddenly finds himself a thou-

218 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
sand years in the past. He meets a monk from an ancient monastery
and tries to explain to him how history will progress for the next thou-
sand years. Afterward he suddenly finds himself just as mysteriously
transported back to the present, except that he has missed his coach.

Even the 1843 Charles Dickens novel, A Christmas Carol, is a kind
of time travel story, since Ebenezer Scrooge is taken into the past and
into the future to witness the world before the present and after his
death.

In American literature the first appearance of time travel dates
back to Mark Twain's 1889 novel, A Connecticut Yankee in King

Arthur's Court A nineteenth-century Yankee is wrenched backward
through time to wind up in King Arthur's court in AD 528. He is taken
prisoner and is about to be burned at the stake, but then he declares he
has the power to blot out the sun, knowing that an eclipse of the sun
would happen on that very day. When the sun is eclipsed, the mob is
horrified and agrees to set him free and grant him privileges in ex-
change for the return of the sun.

But the first serious attempt to explore time travel in fiction was H. G.

Wells's classic The Time Machine, in which the hero is sent hundreds of
thousands of years into the future. In that distant future, humanity itself
has genetically split into two races, the menacing Moorlocks who main-
tain the grimy underground machines, and the useless, childlike Eloi
who dance in the sunlight in the world above, never realizing their aw-
ful fate (to be eaten by the Moorlocks).

Since then, time travel has become a regular feature of science fic-
tion, from Star Trek to Back to the Future. In Superman I, when Superman learns that Lois Lane has died, he decides in desperation to turn
back the hands of time, rocketing himself around the Earth, faster than
the speed of light, until time itself goes backward. The Earth slows
down, stops, and eventually spins in the opposite direction, until all
clocks on the Earth beat backward. Floodwaters rage backward, bro-
ken dams miraculously heal themselves, and Lois Lane comes back
from the dead.

From the perspective of science, time travel was impossible in

Newton's universe, where time was seen as an arrow. Once fired, it

T I N E T R A V E L 219
could never deviate from its past. One second on the Earth was one
second throughout the universe. This conception was overthrown by

Einstein, who showed that time was more like a river that meandered
across the universe, speeding up and slowing down as it snaked across
stars and galaxies. So one second on the Earth is not absolute; time
varies when we move around the universe.

As I discussed earlier, according to Einstein's special theory of rel-
ativity, time slows down inside a rocket the faster it moves. Science fic-
tion writers have speculated that if you could break the light barrier,
you could go back in time. But this is not possible, since you would
have to have infinite mass in order to reach the speed of light The
speed of light is the ultimate barrier for any rocket. The crew of the En-
terprise in Star Trek IV: The Voyage Home hijacked a Rlingon space-
ship and used it to whip around the sun like a slingshot and break the
light barrier to wind up in San Francisco in the 1960s. But this defies
the laws of physics.

Nonetheless, time travel to the future is possible, and has been ex-
perimentally verified millions of times. The journey of the hero of The

Time Machine into the far future is actually physically possible. If an
astronaut were to travel near the speed of light, it might take him, say,
one minute to reach the nearest stars. Four years would have elapsed
on the Earth, but for him only one minute would have passed, because
time would have slowed down inside the rocket ship. Hence he would
have traveled four years into the future, as experienced here on Earth.

(Our astronauts actually take a short trip into the future every time
they go into outer space. As they travel at 18,000 miles per hour above
the Earth, their clocks beat a tiny bit slower than clocks on the Earth.

Hence, after a yearlong mission on the space station, they have actu-
ally journeyed a fraction of a second into the future by the time they
land back on Earth. The world record for traveling into the future is
currently held by Russian cosmonaut Sergei Avdeyev, who orbited for

748 days and was hence hurled .02 seconds into the future.)

So a time machine that can take us into the future is consistent
with Einstein's special theory of relativity. But what about going back-
ward in time?

2 2 0 P H Y S I C S O F THE I M P O S S I B L E

If we could journey back into the past, history would be impossi-
ble to write. As soon as a historian recorded the history of the past,
someone could go back into the past and rewrite it. Not only would
time machines put historians out of business, but they would enable us
to alter the course of time at will. If, for example, we were to go back
to the era of the dinosaurs and accidentally step on a mammal that
happens to be our ancestor, perhaps we would accidentally wipe out
the entire human race. History would become an unending, madcap

Monty Python episode, as tourists from the future trampled over his-
toric events while trying to get the best camera angle.

T I M E T R A V E L : P H Y S I C I S T S ' P L A Y G R O U N D

Perhaps the person who has distinguished himself the most on the
dense mathematical equations of black holes and time machines is
cosmologist Stephen Hawking. Unlike other students of relativity who
often distinguish themselves in mathematical physics at an early age,

Hawking was actually not an outstanding student as a youth. He was
obviously extremely bright, but his teachers would often notice that he
was not focused on his studies and never lived up to his full potential.

But a turning point came in 1962, after he graduated from Oxford,
when he first began to notice the symptoms of ALS (amyotrophic lat-
eral sclerosis, or Lou Gehrig's disease). He was rocked by the news
that he was suffering from this incurable motor neuron disease that
would rob him of all motor functions and likely soon kill him. At first
the news was extremely upsetting. What would be the use of getting a

Ph.D. if he was going to die soon anyway?

But once he got over the initial shock he became focused for the
first time in his life. Realizing that he did not have long to live, he be-
gan to ferociously tackle some of the most difficult problems in general
relativity. In the early 1970s he published a landmark series of papers
showing that "singularities" in Einstein's theory (where the gravita-
tional field becomes infinite, like at the center of black holes and at the
instant of the big bang) were an essential feature of relativity and could

T I N E T R A V E L 221
not be easily dismissed (as Einstein thought). In 1974 Hawking also
proved that black holes are not entirely black, but gradually emit radi-
ation, now known as Hawking radiation, because radiation can tunnel
through the gravity field of even a black hole. This paper was the first
major application of the quantum theory to relativity theory, and it
represents his best known work.

As predicted, ALS slowly led to paralysis of his hands, legs, and
even his vocal cords, but at a much slower rate than the doctors had
originally predicted. As a result, he has passed many of the usual mile-
stones of normal people, fathering three children (he is now a grand-
father), divorcing his first wife in 1991, four years later marrying the
wife of the man who created his voice synthesizer, and filing for di-
vorce from his second wife in 2006. In 2007 he made headlines when
he went aboard a jet airplane that sent him into weightlessness, fulfill-
ing a lifelong wish of his. His next goal is to blast off into outer space.

Today he is almost totally paralyzed in his wheelchair, communi-
cating to the outside world via movements of his eyes. Yet even with
this crushing disability, he still cracks jokes, writes papers, gives lec-
tures, and engages in controversy. He is more productive moving his
two eyes than are teams of scientists who have full control over their
bodies. (His colleague at Cambridge University, Sir Martin Rees, who
was appointed Astronomer Royal by the Queen, once confided to me
that Hawking's disability does prevent him from doing the tedious cal-
culations necessary to keep at the top of his game. So instead he con-
centrates on generating new and fresh ideas rather than cranking out
difficult calculations, which can be done by his students.)

In 1990 Hawking read papers of his colleagues proposing their
version of a time machine, and he was immediately skeptical. His in-
tuition told him that time travel was not possible because there are no
tourists from the future. If time travel were as common as taking a

Sunday picnic in the park, then time travelers from the future should
be pestering us with their cameras, asking us to pose for their picture
albums.

Hawking also raised a challenge to the world of physics. There
ought to be a law, he proclaimed, making time travel impossible. He

2 2 2 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
proposed a "Chronology Protection Conjecture" to ban time travel
from the laws of physics in order to "make history safe for historians"

The embarrassing thing, however, was that no matter how hard
physicists tried, they could not find a law to prevent time travel. Appar-
ently time travel seems to be consistent with the known laws of
physics. Unable to find any physical law that makes time travel impos-
sible, Hawking recently changed his mind. He made headlines in the

London papers when he said, "Time travel may be possible, but it is
not practical."

Once considered to be fringe science, time travel has suddenly be-
come a playground for theoretical physicists. Physicist Rip Thorne of

Cal Tech writes, "Time travel was once solely the province of science
fiction writers. Serious scientists avoided it like the plague-even when
writing fiction under pseudonyms or reading it in privacy. How times
have changed! One now finds scholarly analyses of time travel in seri-
ous scientific journals, written by eminent theoretical physicists...

Why the change? Because we physicists have realized that the nature
of time is too important an issue to be left solely in the hands of science
fiction writers."

The reason for all this confusion and excitement is that Einstein's
equations allow for many kinds of time machines. (Whether they will
survive the challenges from the quantum theory, however, is still in
doubt.) In Einstein's theory, in fact, we often encounter something
called "closed time-like curves," which is the technical term for paths
that allow for time travel into the past. If we followed the path of a
closed time-like curve, we would set out on a journey and return be-
fore we left.

The first time machine involves a wormhole. There are many so-
lutions of Einstein's equations that connect two distant points in space.

But since space and time are intimately intertwined in Einstein's the-
ory, this same wormhole can also connect two points in time. By
falling down the wormhole, you could journey (at least mathemati-
cally) into the past Conceivably, you could then journey to the origi-
nal starting point and meet yourself before you left. But as we

T I N E T R A V E L 2 2 3
mentioned in the previous chapter, passing through the wormhole at
the center of a black hole is a one-way trip. As physicist Richard Gott
has said, "I don't think there's any question that a person could travel
back in time while in a black hole. The question is whether he could
ever emerge to brag about it"

Another time machine involves a spinning universe. In 1949 math-
ematician Kurt Godel found the first solution of Einstein's equations
involving time travel. If the universe spins, then, if you traveled around
the universe fast enough, you might find yourself in the past and arrive
before you left. A trip around the universe is therefore also a trip into
the past. When astronomers would visit the Institute for Advanced

Study, Godel would often ask them if they ever found evidence that the
universe was spinning. He was disappointed when they told him that
there was clearly evidence that the universe expanded, but the net spin
of the universe was probably zero. (Otherwise, time travel might be
commonplace, and history as we know it would collapse.)

Third, if you walk around an infinitely long, rotating cylinder, you
also might arrive before you left. (This solution was found by W. J. van

Stockum in 1936, before Godel's time traveling solution, but van

Stockum was apparently unaware that his solution allowed for time
travel.) In this case, if you danced around a spinning May Pole on May

Day, you might find yourself in the month of April. (The problem with
this design, however, is that the cylinder must be infinite in length and
spin so fast that most materials would fly apart.)

The most recent example of time travel was found by Richard Gott
of Princeton in 1991. His solution was based on finding gigantic cosmic
strings (which may be leftovers from the original big bang). He as-
sumed that two large cosmic strings were about to collide. If you
quickly traveled around these colliding cosmic strings, you would
travel back in time. The advantage of this type of time machine is that
you would not need infinite spinning cylinders, spinning universes, or
black holes. (The problem with this design, however, is that you must
first find huge cosmic strings floating in space and then make them col-
lide in a precise fashion. And the possibility of going back in time would

224 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
last only a brief period.) Gott says, "A collapsing loop of string large
enough to allow you to circle it once and go back in time a year would
have to have more than half the mass-energy of an entire galaxy."

But the most promising design for a time machine is the "trans-
versable wormhole," mentioned in the last chapter, a hole in space-
time in which a person could freely walk back and forth in time. On
paper, transversable wormholes can provide not only faster-than-light
travel, but also travel in time. The key to transversable wormholes is
negative energy.

A transversable wormhole time machine would consist of two
chambers. Each chamber would consist of two concentric spheres,
which would be separated by a tiny distance. By imploding the outer
sphere, the two spheres would create a Casimir effect and hence neg-
ative energy. Assume that a Type III civilization is able to string a
wormhole between these two chambers (possibly extracting one from
the space-time foam). Next, take the first chamber and send it into
space at near light-speed velocities. Time slows down in that chamber,
so the two clocks are no longer in synchronization. Time beats at dif-
ferent rates inside the two chambers, which are connected by a worm-
hole.

If you are in the second chamber, you can instantly pass through
the wormhole to the first chamber, which exists at an earlier time.

Thus you have gone backward in time.

There are formidable problems facing this design. The wormhole
may be quite tiny, much smaller than an atom. And the plates may
have to be squeezed down to Planck-length distances to create enough
negative energy. Lastly, you would be able to go back in time only to
the point when the time machines were built. Before then, time in the
two chambers would be beating at the same rate.

P A R A D O X E S A N D T I M E C O N U N D R U M S

Time travel poses all sorts of problems, both technical as well as social.

The moral, legal, and ethical issues are raised by Larry Dwyer, who

T I N E T R A V E L 2 2 5
notes, "Should a time traveler who punches his younger self (or vice
versa) be charged with assault? Should the time traveler who murders
someone and then flees into the past for sanctuary be tried in the past
for crimes he committed in the future? If he marries in the past can he
be tried for bigamy even though his other wife will not be born for al-
most 5,000 years?"

But perhaps the thorniest problems are the logical paradoxes
raised by time travel. For example, what happens if we kill our parents
before we are born? This is a logical impossibility. It is sometimes
called the "grandfather paradox."

There are three ways to resolve these paradoxes. First, perhaps you
simply repeat past history when you go back in time, therefore fulfill-
ing the past. In this case, you have no free will. You are forced to com-
plete the past as it was written. Thus, if you go back into the past to give
the secret of time travel to your younger self, then it was meant to hap-
pen that way. The secret of time travel came from the future. It was
destiny. (But this does not tell us where the original idea came from.)

Second, you have free will, so you can change the past, but within
limits. Your free will is not allowed to create a time paradox. Whenever
you try to kill your parents before you are born, a mysterious force pre-
vents you from pulling the trigger. This position has been advocated by
the Russian physicist Igor Novikov. (He argues that there is a law pre-
venting us from walking on the ceiling, although we might want to.

Hence there might be a law preventing us from killing our parents
before we are born. Some strange law prevents us from pulling the
trigger.)

Third, the universe splits into two universes. On one time line the
people whom you killed look just like your parents, but they are differ-
ent, because you are now in a parallel universe. This latter possibility
seems to be the one consistent with the quantum theory, as I will dis-
cuss later when I talk about the multiverse.

The second possibility is explored in the movie Terminator 3, in
which Arnold Schwarzenegger plays a robot from the future where
murderous machines have taken over. The few remaining humans,
hunted down like animals by the machines, are led by a great leader

226 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
whom the machines have been unable to kill. Frustrated, the machines
send a series of killer robots back to the past, before the great leader
was born, to kill off his mother. But after epic battles, human civiliza-
tion is eventually destroyed at the end of the movie, as it was meant
to be.

Back to the Future explored the third possibility. Dr. Brown invents
a plutonium-fired DeLorean car, actually a time machine for traveling
to the past. Michael J. Fox (Marty McFly) enters the machine and goes
back and meets his teenage mother, who then falls in love with him.

This poses a sticky problem. If Marty McFly's teenage mother spurns
his future father, then they never would have married, and Michael J.

Fox's character would never have been born.

The problem is clarified a bit by Doc Brown. He goes to the black-
board and draws a horizontal line, representing the time line of our
universe. Then he draws a second line, which branches off the first
line, representing a parallel universe that opens up when you change
the past Thus, whenever we go back into the river of time, the river
forks into two rivers, and one time line becomes two time lines, or
what is called the "many worlds" approach, which we will discuss in
the next chapter.

This means that all time travel paradoxes can be solved. If you
have killed your parents before you were born, it simply means you
have killed some people who are genetically identical to your parents,
with the same memories and personalities, but they are not your true
parents.

The "many worlds" idea solves at least one main problem with
time travel. To a physicist, the number one criticism of time travel (be-
sides finding negative energy) is that radiation effects will build up un-
til either you are killed the instant you enter the machine or the
wormhole collapses on you. Radiation effects build up because any ra-
diation entering the time portal will be sent back into the past, where
it will eventually wander around the universe until it reaches the pres-
ent day, and then it will fall into the wormhole again. Since radiation
can enter the mouth of the wormhole an infinite number of times, the

T I N E T R A V E L 2 2 7
radiation inside the wormhole can become incredibly strong-strong
enough to kill you. But the "many worlds" interpretation solves this
problem. If the radiation goes into the time machine and is sent into
the past, it then enters a new universe; it cannot reenter the time ma-
chine again, and again, and again. This simply means that there are an
infinite number of universes, one for each cycle, and each cycle con-
tains just one photon of radiation, not an infinite amount of radiation.

In 1997, the debate was clarified a bit when three physicists finally
proved that Hawking's program to ban time travel was inherently
flawed. Bernard Kay, Marek Radzikowski, and Robert Wald showed
that time travel was consistent with all the known laws of physics, ex-
cept in one place. When traveling in time, all the potential problems
were concentrated at the event horizon (located near the entrance to
the wormhole). But the horizon is precisely where we expect Ein-
stein's theory to break down and quantum effects to take over. The
problem is that whenever we try to calculate radiation effects as we en-
ter a time machine, we have to use a theory that combines Einstein's
theory of general relativity with the quantum theory of radiation. But
whenever we naively try to marry these two theories, the resulting the-
ory makes no sense: it yields a series of infinite answers that are mean-
ingless.

This is where a theory of everything takes over. All problems of
traveling through a wormhole that have bedeviled physicists (e.g., the
stability of the wormhole, the radiation that might kill you, the closing
of the wormhole as you entered it) are concentrated at the event hori-
zon, precisely where Einstein's theory made no sense.

Thus the key to understanding time travel is to understand the
physics of the event horizon, and only a theory of everything can ex-
plain this. This is the reason that most physicists today would agree
that one way to definitively settle the time travel question is to come up
with a complete theory of gravity and space-time.

A theory of everything would unite the four forces of the universe
and enable us to calculate what would happen when we entered a time
machine. Only a theory of everything could successfully calculate all

228 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
the radiation effects created by a wormhole and definitively settle the
question of how stable wormholes would be when we entered the time
machine. And even then, we might have to wait for centuries or even
longer to actually build a machine to test these theories.

Because the laws of time travel are so closely linked to the physics of
wormholes, time travel seems to qualify as a Class II impossibility.

"But do you really mean, sir," said Peter, "that there could be
other worlds-all over the place, just around the corner-like that?"

"Nothing is more probable," said the Professor ... while he
muttered to himself, "I wonder what they do teach them at these
schools."

- C . S. LEWIS, THE LION, THE WITCH AND THE WARDROBE
listen: there's a hell of a good universe next door; let's go

- E . E. CUMMINGS

Are alternate universes really possible? They are a favorite device for

Hollywood scriptwriters, as in the Star Trek episode called "Mirror,

Mirror." Captain Kirk is accidentally transported to a bizarre parallel
universe in which the Federation of Planets is an evil empire held to-
gether by brutal conquest, greed, and plunder. In that universe Spock
wears a menacing beard and Captain Kirk is the leader of a band of
ravenous pirates, advancing by enslaving their rivals and assassinat-
ing their superiors.

Alternate universes enable us to explore the world of "what if" and
its delicious, intriguing possibilities. In the Superman comics, for exam-
ple, there have been several alternate universes in which Superman's

2 3 0 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
home planet, Krypton, never blew up, or Superman finally reveals his
true identity as mild-mannered Clark Rent, or he marries Lois Lane and
has superkids. But are parallel universes just the domain of Twilight

Zone reruns, or do they have a basis in modern physics?

Throughout history going back to almost all ancient societies, peo-
ple have believed in other planes of existence, the homes of the gods or
ghosts. The Church believes in heaven, hell, and purgatory. The Bud-
dhists have Nirvana and different states of consciousness. And the Hin-
dus have thousands of planes of existence.

Christian theologians, at a loss to explain where heaven might be
located, have often speculated that perhaps God lives in a higher di-
mensional plane. Surprisingly, if higher dimensions did exist, many of
the properties ascribed to the gods might become possible. A being in
a higher dimension might be able to disappear and reappear at will or
walk through walls-powers usually ascribed to deities.

Recently the idea of parallel universes has become one of the most
hotly debated topics in theoretical physics. There are, in fact, several
types of parallel universes that force us to reconsider what we mean
by what is "real." What is at stake in this debate about various parallel
universes is nothing less than the meaning of reality itself.

There are at least three types of parallel universes that are in-
tensely discussed in the scientific literature:

a. hyperspace, or higher dimensions,
b. the multiverse, and
c. quantum parallel universes.

H Y P E R S P A C E

The parallel universe that has been the subject of the longest histori-
cal debate is one of higher dimensions. The fact that we live in three
dimensions (length, width, height) is common sense. No matter how
we move an object in space, all positions can be described by these
three coordinates. In fact, with these three numbers we can locate any

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 231
object in the universe, from the tip of our noses to the most distant of
all galaxies.

A fourth spatial dimension seems to violate common sense. If
smoke, for example, is allowed to fill up a room, we do not see the
smoke disappearing into another dimension. Nowhere in our universe
do we see objects suddenly disappearing or drifting off into another
universe. This means that any higher dimensions, if they exist at all,
must be smaller than an atom.

Three spatial dimensions form the fundamental basis of Greek
geometry. Aristotle, for example, in his essay "On Heaven," wrote, "The
line has magnitude in one way, the plane in two ways, and the solid in
three ways, and beyond these there is no other magnitude because the
three are all." In AD 150 Ptolemy of Alexandria offered first "proof" that
higher dimensions were "impossible." In his essay "On Distance," he
reasoned as follows. Draw three lines that are mutually perpendicular

(like the lines forming the corner of a room). Clearly, he said, a fourth
line perpendicular to the other three cannot be drawn, hence a fourth
dimension must be impossible. (What he actually proved was that our
brains are incapable of visualizing the fourth dimension. The PC on
your desk calculates in hyperspace all the time.)

For two thousand years, any mathematician who dared to speak of
the fourth dimension potentially suffered ridicule. In 1685 mathemati-
cian John Wallis polemicized against the fourth dimension, calling it a

"Monster in Nature, less possible than a Chimera or Centaure." In
the nineteenth century Karl Gauss, the "prince of mathematicians,"

worked out much of the mathematics of the fourth dimension but was
afraid to publish because of the backlash it would cause. But privately

Gauss conducted experiments to test whether flat, three-dimensional

Greek geometry really described the universe. In one experiment he
placed his assistants on three mountaintops. Each one had a lantern,
thereby forming a huge triangle. Gauss then measured the angles of
each corner of the triangle. To his disappointment, he found that the
interior angles all summed up to 180 degrees. He concluded that if
there were deviations to standard Greek geometry, they must be so
small that they could not be detected with his lanterns.

2 3 2 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Gauss left it to his student, Georg Bernhard Riemann, to write
down the fundamental mathematics of higher dimensions (which
were then imported wholesale decades later into Einstein's theory of
general relativity). In one powerful sweep, in a celebrated lecture Rie-
mann delivered in 1854, he overthrew two thousand years of Greek
geometry and established the basic mathematics of the higher, curved
dimensions that we use even today.

After Riemann's remarkable discovery was popularized in Europe
in the late 1800s, the "fourth dimension" became quite a sensation
among artists, musicians, writers, philosophers, and painters. Pi-
casso's cubism, in fact, was partly inspired by the fourth dimension,
according to art historian Linda Dalrymple Henderson. (Picasso's
paintings of women with eyes facing forward and nose to the side was
an attempt to visualize a fourth-dimensional perspective, since one
looking down from the fourth dimension could see a woman's face,
nose, and the back of her head simultaneously.) Henderson writes,

"Like a Black Hole, the 'fourth dimension' possessed mysterious qual-
ities that could not be completely understood, even by the scientists
themselves. Yet, the impact of 'the fourth dimension' was far more
comprehensive than that of Black Holes or any other more recent sci-
entific hypothesis except Relativity Theory after 1919."

Other painters drew from the fourth dimension, as well. In Sal-
vador Dali's Christus Hypercubius, Christ is crucified in front of a
strange, floating three-dimensional cross, which is actually a "tesser-
act," an unraveled four-dimensional cube. In his famous Persistence of

Memory, he attempted to represent time as the fourth dimension, and
hence the metaphor of melted clocks. Marcel Duchamps's Nude De-
scending a Staircase was an attempt to represent time as the fourth di-
mension by capturing the time-lapse motion of a nude walking down
a staircase. The fourth dimension even pops up in a story by Oscar

Wilde, "The Canterville Ghost," in which a ghost haunting a house
lives in the fourth dimension.

The fourth dimension also appears in several of H. G. Wells's
works, including The Invisible Man, The Plattner Story, and The Won-
derful Visit (In the latter, which has since been the basis of scores of

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 2 3 3

Hollywood movies and science fiction novels, our universe somehow
collides with a parallel universe. A poor angel from the other universe
falls into our universe after being accidentally shot by a hunter. Horri-
fied by all the greed, pettiness, and selfishness of our universe, the an-
gel eventually commits suicide.)

The idea of parallel universes was also explored, tongue-in-cheek,
by Robert Heinlein in The Number of the Beast Heinlein imagines a
group of four brave individuals who romp across parallel universes in
a mad professor's interdimensional sports car.

In the TV series Sliders, a young boy reads a book and gets the in-
spiration to build a machine that would allow him to "slide" between
parallel universes. (The book that the young boy was reading was ac-
tually my book, Hyperspace.)

But historically the fourth dimension has been considered a mere
curiosity by physicists. No evidence has ever been found for higher di-
mensions. This began to change in 1919 when physicist Theodor

Kaluza wrote a highly controversial paper that hinted at the presence
of higher dimensions. He started with Einstein's theory of general rel-
ativity, but placed it in five dimensions (one dimension of time and
four dimensions of space; since time is the fourth space-time dimen-
sion, physicists now refer to the fourth spatial dimension as the fifth di-
mension). If the fifth dimension were made smaller and smaller, the
equations magically split into two pieces. One piece describes Ein-
stein's standard theory of relativity, but the other piece becomes

Maxwell's theory of light!

This was a stunning revelation. Perhaps the secret of light lies in
the fifth dimension! Einstein himself was shocked by this solution,
which seemed to provide an elegant unification of light and gravity.

(Einstein was so shaken by Raluza's proposal that he mulled it over for
two years before finally agreeing to have this paper published.) Ein-
stein wrote to Kaluza, "The idea of achieving [a unified theory] by
means of a five-dimensional cylinder world never dawned on me . . . At
first glance, I like your idea enormously . . . The formal unity of your
theory is startling."

For years physicists had asked the question: if light is a wave, then

234 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
what is waving? Light can pass through billions of light-years of empty
space, but empty space is a vacuum, devoid of any material. So what is
waving in the vacuum? With Kaluza's theory we had a concrete pro-
posal to answer this problem: light is ripples in the fifth dimension.

Maxwell's equations, which accurately describe all the properties of
light, emerge simply as the equations for waves traveling in the fifth di-
mension.

Imagine fish swimming in a shallow pond. They might never sus-
pect the presence of a third dimension, because their eyes point to the
side, and they can only swim forward and backward, left and right. A
third dimension to them might appear impossible. But then imagine it
rains on the pond. Although they cannot see the third dimension, they
can clearly see the shadows of the ripples on the surface of the pond.

In the same way, Kaluza's theory explained light as ripples traveling on
the fifth dimension.

Raluza also gave an answer as to where the fifth dimension was.

Since we see no evidence of a fifth dimension, it must have "curled up"

so small that it cannot be observed. (Imagine taking a two-dimensional
sheet of paper and rolling it up tightly into a cylinder. From a distance,
the cylinder looks like a one-dimensional line. In this way, a two-di-
mensional object has been turned into a one-dimensional object by
curling it up.)

Kaluza's paper initially created a sensation. But in the coming
years, objections were found to his theory. What was the size of this
new fifth dimension? How did it curl up? No answers could be found.

For decades Einstein would work on this theory in fits and starts.

After he passed away in 1955, the theory was soon forgotten, becoming
just a strange footnote to the evolution of physics.

S T R I N G T H E O R Y

All this has changed with the coming of a startling new theory, called
the superstring theory. By the 1980s physicists were drowning in a sea
of subatomic particles. Every time they smashed an atom apart with

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 2 3 5
powerful particle accelerators, they found scores of new particles spit-
ting out It was so frustrating that J. Robert Oppenheimer declared that
the Nobel Prize in Physics should go to the physicist who did not dis-
cover a new particle that year! (Enrico Fermi, horrified at the prolifer-
ation of subatomic particles with Greek-sounding names, said, "If I
could remember the names of all these particles, I would have become
a botanist") After decades of hard work, this zoo of particles could be
arranged into something called the Standard Model. Billions of dollars,
the sweat of thousands of engineers and physicists, and twenty Nobel

Prizes have gone into painfully assembling, piece by piece, the Stan-
dard Model. It is a truly remarkable theory, which seems to fit all the
experimental data concerning subatomic physics.

But the Standard Model, for all its experimental successes, suffered
from one serious defect. As Stephen Hawking says, "It is ugly and ad
hoc." It contains at least nineteen free parameters (including the parti-
cle masses and the strength of their interactions with other particles),
thirty-six quarks and antiquarks, three exact and redundant copies of
sub-particles, and a host of strange-sounding subatomic particles,
such as tau neutrinos, Yang-Mills gluons, Higgs bosons, W bosons, and

Z particles. Worse, the Standard Model makes no mention of gravity. It
seemed hard to believe that nature, at its most supreme, fundamental
level, could be so haphazard and supremely inelegant. Here was a the-
ory only a mother could love. The sheer inelegance of the Standard

Model forced physicists to reanalyze all their assumptions about na-
ture. Something was terribly wrong.

If one analyzes the last few centuries in physics, one of the most
important achievements of the last century was to summarize all fun-
damental physics into two great theories: the quantum theory (repre-
sented by the Standard Model) and Einstein's theory of general
relativity (describing gravity). Remarkably, together they represent the
sum total of all physical knowledge at a fundamental level. The first
theory describes the world of the very small, the subatomic quantum
world where particles perform a fantastic dance, darting in and out of
existence and appearing two places at the same time. The second the-
ory describes the world of the very large, such as black holes and the

2 3 6 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
big bang, and uses the language of smooth surfaces, stretched fabrics,
and warped surfaces. The theories are opposites in every way, using
different mathematics, different assumptions, and different physical
pictures. It's as if nature had two hands, neither of which communi-
cated with the other. Furthermore, any attempt to join these two theo-
ries has led to meaningless answers. For half a century any physicist
who tried to mediate a shotgun wedding between the quantum theory
and general relativity found that the theory blew up in their faces, pro-
ducing infinite answers that made no sense.

All of this changed with the advent of the superstring theory,
which posits that the electron and the other subatomic particles are
nothing but different vibrations of a string, acting like a tiny rubber
band. If one strikes the rubber band, it vibrates in different modes,
with each note corresponding to a different subatomic particle. In this
way, superstring theory explains the hundreds of subatomic particles
that have been discovered so far in our particle accelerators. Einstein's
theory, in fact, emerges as just one of the lowest vibrations of the
string.

String theory has been hailed as a "theory of everything," the fa-
bled theory that eluded Einstein for the last thirty years of his life. Ein-
stein wanted a single, comprehensive theory that would summarize all
physical law, that would allow him to "read the Mind of God." If string
theory is correct in unifying gravity with the quantum theory, then it
might represent the crowning achievement of science going back two
thousand years ago to when the Greeks asked what matter was
made of.

But the bizarre feature of superstring theory is that these strings
can only vibrate in a specific dimension of space-time; they can only
vibrate in ten dimensions. If one tries to create a string theory in other
dimensions, the theory breaks down mathematically.

Our universe, of course, is four-dimensional (with three dimen-
sions of space and one of time). This means that the other six dimen-
sions must have collapsed somehow, or curled up, like Kaluza's fifth
dimension.

Recently physicists have given serious thought to proving or dis-

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 237
proving the existence of these higher dimensions. Perhaps the simplest
way to prove the existence of higher dimensions would be to find de-
viations from Newton's law of gravity. In high school we learn that the
gravity of the Earth diminishes as we go into outer space. More pre-
cisely, gravity diminishes with the square of the distance of separation.

But this is only because we live in a three-dimensional world. (Think
of a sphere surrounding the Earth. The gravity of the Earth spreads out
evenly across the surface of the sphere, so the larger the sphere, the
weaker the gravity. But since the surface of the sphere grows as the
square of its radius, the strength of gravity, spread out over the surface
of the sphere, must diminish as the square of the radius.)

But if the universe had four spatial dimensions, then gravity
should diminish as the cube of the distance of separation. If the uni-
verse had n spatial dimensions, then gravity should diminish as the n -
l-\h power. Newton's famous inverse-square law has been tested with
great accuracy over astronomical distances; that is why we can send
space probes soaring past the rings of Saturn with breathtaking accu-
racy. But until recently Newton's inverse-square law had never been
tested at small distances in the laboratory.

The first experiment to test the inverse-square law at small dis-
tances was performed at the University of Colorado in 2003 with neg-
ative results. Apparently there is no parallel universe, at least not in

Colorado. But this negative result has only whetted the appetite of
other physicists, who hope to duplicate this experiment with even
greater accuracy.

Furthermore, the Large Hadron Collider, which will become oper-
ational in 2008 outside Geneva, Switzerland, will be looking for a new
type of particle called the "sparticle," or superparticle, which is a
higher vibration of the superstring (everything you see around you is
but the lowest vibration of the superstring). If sparticles are found by
the LHC, it could signal a revolution in the way we view the universe.

In this picture of the universe, the Standard Model simply represents
the lowest vibration of the superstring.

Rip Thorne says, "By 2020, physicists will understand the laws of
quantum gravity, which will be found to be a variant of string theory."

2 3 8 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

In addition to higher dimensions, there is another parallel uni-
verse predicted by string theory, and this is the "multiverse."

T H E M U L T I V E R S E

There is still one nagging question about string theory: why should
there be five different versions of string theory? String theory could
successfully unify the quantum theory with gravity, but there were five
ways in which this could be done. This was rather embarrassing, since
most physicists wanted a unique "theory of everything." Einstein, for
example, wanted to know if "God had any choice in making the uni-
verse." His belief was that the unified field theory of everything should
be unique. So why should there be five string theories?

In 1994 another bombshell was dropped. Edward Witten of Prince-
ton's Institute for Advanced Study and Paul Townsend of Cambridge

University speculated that all five string theories were in fact the same
theory-but only if we add an eleventh dimension. From the vantage
point of the eleventh dimension, all five different theories collapsed
into one! The theory was unique after all, but only if we ascended to
the mountaintop of the eleventh dimension.

In the eleventh dimension a new mathematical object can exist,
called the membrane (e.g., like the surface of a sphere). Here was the
amazing observation: if one dropped from eleven dimensions down to
ten dimensions, all five string theories would emerge, starting from a
single membrane. Hence all five string theories were just different
ways of moving a membrane down from eleven to ten dimensions.

(To visualize this, imagine a beach ball with a rubber band stretched
around the equator. Imagine taking a pair of scissors and cutting the
beach ball twice, once above and once below the rubber band, thereby
lopping off the top and bottom of the beach ball. All that is left is the rub-
ber band, a string. In the same way, if we curl up the eleventh dimension,
all that is left of a membrane is its equator, which is the string. In fact,
mathematically there are five ways in which this slicing can occur, leav-
ing us with five different string theories in ten dimensions.)

PflRflLLEL UNIVERSES 2 3 9

The eleventh dimension gave us a new picture. It also meant that
perhaps the universe itself was a membrane, floating in an eleven-di-
mensional space-time. Moreover, not all these dimensions had to be
small. In fact, some of these dimensions might actually be infinite.

This raises the possibility that our universe exists in a multiverse
of other universes. Think of a vast collection of floating soap bubbles
or membranes. Each soap bubble represents an entire universe float-
ing in a larger arena of eleven-dimensional hyperspace. These bubbles
can join with other bubbles, or split apart, and even pop into existence
and disappear. We might live on the skin of just one of these bubble
universes.

Max Tegmark of MIT believes that in fifty years "the existence of
these 'parallel universes' will be no more controversial than the exis-
tence of other galaxies-then called 'island universes'-was 100 years
ago."

How many universes does string theory predict? One embarrass-
ing feature of string theory is that there are trillions upon trillions of
possible universes, each one compatible with relativity and the quan-
tum theory. One estimate claims that there might be a googol of such
universes. (A googol is 1 followed by 100 zeros.)

Normally communication between these universes is impossible.

The atoms of our body are like flies trapped on flypaper. We can move
freely about in three dimensions along our membrane universe, but
we cannot leap off the universe into hyperspace, because we are glued
onto our universe. But gravity, being the warping of space-time, can
freely float into the space between universes.

In fact, there is one theory that states that dark matter, an invisible
form of matter that surrounds the galaxy, might be ordinary matter
floating in a parallel universe. As in H. G. Wells's novel The Invisible

Man, a person would become invisible if he floated just above us in the
fourth dimension. Imagine two parallel sheets of paper, with someone
floating on one sheet, just above the other.

In the same way there is speculation that dark matter might be an
ordinary galaxy hovering above us in another membrane universe. We
could feel the gravity of this galaxy, since gravity can ooze its way be-

240 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
tween universes, but the other galaxy would be invisible to us because
light moves underneath the galaxy. In this way, the galaxy would have
gravity but would be invisible, which fits the description of dark mat-
ter. (Yet another possibility is that dark matter might consist of the next
vibration of the superstring. Everything we see around us, such as
atoms and light, is nothing but the lowest vibration of the superstring.

Dark matter might be the next higher set of vibrations.)

To be sure, most of these parallel universes are probably dead
ones, consisting of a formless gas of subatomic particles, such as elec-
trons and neutrinos. In these universes the proton might be unstable,
so all matter as we know it would slowly decay and dissolve. Complex
matter, consisting of atoms and molecules, probably would not be pos-
sible in many of these universes.

Other parallel universes might be just the opposite, with complex
forms of matter far beyond anything we can conceive of. Instead of just
one type of atom consisting of protons, neutrons, and electrons, they
might have a dazzling array of other types of stable matter.

These membrane universes might also collide, creating cosmic
fireworks. Some physicists at Princeton believe that perhaps our uni-
verse started out as two gigantic membranes that collided 13.7 billion
years ago. The shock waves from that cataclysmic collision created our
universe, they believe. Remarkably, when the experimental conse-
quences of this strange idea are explored they apparently match the re-
sults from the WMAP satellite currently orbiting the Earth. (This is
called the "Big Splat" theory.)

The theory of the multiverse has one fact in its favor. When we an-
alyze the constants of nature, we find that they are "tuned" very pre-
cisely to allow for life. If we increase the strength of the nuclear force,
then the stars burn out too quickly to give rise to life. If we decrease the
strength of the nuclear force, then stars never ignite at all and life can-
not exist If we increase the force of gravity, then our universe dies
quickly in a Big Crunch. If we decrease the strength of gravity, then the
universe expands rapidly into a Big Freeze. In fact, there are scores of

"accidents" involving the constants of nature that allow for life. Appar-
ently, our universe lives in a "Goldilocks zone" of many parameters,

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 241
all of which are "fine-tuned" to allow for life. So either we are left with
the conclusion that there is a God of some sort who has chosen our
universe to be "just right" to allow for life, or there are billions of par-
allel universes, many of them dead. As Freeman Dyson has said, "The
universe seemed to know we were coming."

Sir Martin Rees of Cambridge University has written that this fine
tuning is, in fact, convincing evidence for the multiverse. There are
five physical constants (such as the strength of the various forces) that
are fine-tuned to allow for life, and he believes that there are also an
infinite number of universes in which the constants of nature are not
compatible with life.

This is the so-called "anthropic principle." The weak version sim-
ply states that our universe is fine-tuned to allow for life (because we
are here to make this statement in the first place). The strong version
says that perhaps our existence was a by-product of design or purpose.

Most cosmologists would agree to the weak version of the anthropic
principle, but there is considerable debate over whether the anthropic
principle is a new principle of science that could lead to new discover-
ies and results, or whether it is simply a statement of the obvious.

Q U A N T U M T H E O R Y

In addition to higher dimensions and the multiverse, there is yet an-
other type of parallel universe, one that gave Einstein headaches and
one that continues to bedevil physicists today. This is the quantum uni-
verse predicted by ordinary quantum mechanics. The paradoxes
within quantum physics seem so intractable that Nobel laureate

Richard Feynman was fond of saying that no one really understands
the quantum theory.

Ironically, although the quantum theory is the most successful the-
ory ever proposed by the human mind (often accurate to within one
part in 10 billion), it is built on a sand of chance, luck, and probabili-
ties. Unlike Newtonian theory, which gave definite, hard answers to
the motion of objects, the quantum theory can give only probabilities.

242 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

The wonders of the modern age, such as lasers, the Internet, comput-
ers, TV, cell phones, radar, microwave ovens, and so forth, are all
based on the shifting sands of probabilities.

The sharpest example of this conundrum is the famous "Schro-
dinger's cat" problem (formulated by one of the founders of the quan-
tum theory, who paradoxically proposed the problem in order to
smash this probabilistic interpretation). Schrodinger railed against
this interpretation of his theory, stating, "If one has to stick to this
damned quantum jumping, then I regret having ever been involved in
this thing."

The Schrodinger's cat paradox is as follows: a cat is placed in a
sealed box. Inside a gun is pointed at the cat (and the trigger is then
connected to a Geiger counter next to a piece of uranium). Normally
when the uranium atom decays it sets off the Geiger counter and then
the gun and the cat is killed. The uranium atom can either decay or
not The cat is either dead or alive. This is just common sense.

But in the quantum theory, we don't know for sure if the uranium
has decayed. So we have to add the two possibilities, adding the wave
function of a decayed atom with the wave function of an intact atom.

But this means that, in order to describe the cat, we have to add the two
states of the cat So the cat is neither dead nor alive. It is represented
as the sum of a dead cat and a live cat!

As Feynman once wrote, quantum mechanics "describes nature as
absurd from the point of view of common sense. And it fully agrees
with experiment So I hope you can accept nature as She is-absurd."

To Einstein and Schrodinger, this was preposterous. Einstein be-
lieved in "objective reality," a commonsense, Newtonian view in
which objects existed in definite states, not as the sum of many possi-
ble states. And yet this bizarre interpretation lies at the heart of mod-
ern civilization. Without it modern electronics (and the very atoms of
our body) would cease to exist. (In our ordinary world we sometimes
joke that it's impossible to be "a little bit pregnant." But in the quantum
world, it's even worse. We exist simultaneously as the sum of all pos-
sible bodily states: unpregnant, pregnant, a child, an elderly woman, a
teenager, a career woman, etc.)

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 243

There are several ways to resolve this sticky paradox. The
founders of the quantum theory believed in the Copenhagen School,
which said that once you open the box, you make a measurement and
can determine if the cat is dead or alive. The wave function has "col-
lapsed" into a single state and common sense takes over. The waves
have disappeared, leaving only particles. This means that the cat now
enters a definite state (either dead or alive) and is no longer described
by a wave function.

Thus there is an invisible barrier separating the bizarre world of
the atom and the macroscopic world of humans. For the atomic world,
everything is described by waves of probability, in which atoms can be
in many places at the same time. The larger the wave at some location,
the greater the probability of finding the particle at that point. But for
large objects these waves have collapsed and objects exist in definite
states, and hence common sense prevails.

(When guests would come to Einstein's house, he would point to
the moon and ask, "Does the moon exist because a mouse looks at it?"

In some sense, the answer of the Copenhagen School might be yes.)

Most Ph.D. physics textbooks religiously adhere to the original Co-
penhagen School, but many research physicists have abandoned it We
now have nanotechnology and can manipulate individual atoms, so
atoms that dart in and out of existence can be manipulated at will, using
our scanning tunneling microscopes. There is no invisible "wall" sepa-
rating the microscopic and macroscopic world. There is a continuum.

At present there is no consensus on how to resolve this issue,
which strikes at the very heart of modern physics. At conferences,
many theories heatedly compete with others. One minority point of
view is that there must be a "cosmic consciousness" pervading the
universe. Objects spring into being when measurements are made,
and measurements are made by conscious beings. Hence there must
be cosmic consciousness that pervades the universe determining
which state we are in. Some, like Nobel laureate Eugene Wigner, have
argued that this proves the existence of God or some cosmic con-
sciousness. (Wigner wrote, "It was not possible to formulate the laws

[of the quantum theory] in a fully consistent way without reference to

244 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
consciousness." In fact, he even expressed an interest in the Vedanta
philosophy of Hinduism, in which the universe is pervaded by an all-
embracing consciousness.)

Another viewpoint on the paradox is the "many worlds" idea, pro-
posed by Hugh Everett in 1957, which states that the universe simply
splits in half, with a live cat in one half and a dead cat in the other. This
means that there is a vast proliferation or branching of parallel uni-
verses each time a quantum event occurs. Any universe that can exist,
does. The more bizarre the universe, the less likely it is, but nonethe-
less these universes exist This means there is a parallel world in
which the Nazis won World War II, or a world where the Spanish Ar-
mada was never defeated and everyone is speaking in Spanish. In
other words, the wave function never collapses. It simply continues on
its way, merrily splitting off into countless universes.

As MIT physicist Alan Guth has said, "There is a universe where

Elvis is still alive, and AI Gore is President." Nobel laureate Frank

Wilczek says, "We are haunted by the awareness that infinitely many
slightly variant copies of ourselves are living out their parallel lives
and that every moment more duplicates spring into existence and take
up our many alternative futures."

One point of view that is gaining in popularity among physicists is
something called "decoherence." This theory states that all these par-
allel universes are possibilities, but our wave function has decohered
from them (i.e., it no longer vibrates in unison with them) and hence
no longer interacts with them. This means that inside your living room
you coexist simultaneously with the wave function of dinosaurs,
aliens, pirates, unicorns, all of them believing firmly that their uni-
verse is the "real" one, but we are no longer "in tune" with them.

According to Nobel laureate Steve Weinberg, this is like tuning into
a radio station in your living room. You know that your living room is
flooded with signals from scores of radio stations from around the
country and the world. But your radio tunes into only one station. It
has "decohered" from all the other stations. (In summing up, Weinberg
notes that the "many worlds" idea is "a miserable idea, except for all
the other ideas")

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 245

So does there exist the wave function of an evil Federation of Plan-
ets that plunders weaker planets and slaughters its enemies? Perhaps,
but if so, we have decohered from that universe.

Q U A N T U M U N I V E R S E S

When Hugh Everett discussed his "many worlds" theory with other
physicists, he received puzzled or indifferent reactions. One physicist,

Bryce DeWitt of the University of Texas, objected to the theory because

"I just can't feel myself split." But this, Everett said, is similar to the way

Galileo answered his critics who said that they could not feel the Earth
moving. (Eventually DeWitt was won over to Everett's side and became
a leading proponent of the theory.)

For decades the "many worlds" theory languished in obscurity. It
was simply too fantastic to be true. John Wheeler, Everett's adviser at

Princeton, finally concluded that there was too much "excess baggage"

associated with the theory. But one reason that Everett's theory is sud-
denly in vogue right now is because physicists are attempting to apply
the quantum theory to the last domain that has resisted being quan-
tized: the universe itself. Applying the uncertainty principle to the en-
tire universe naturally leads to a multiverse.

The concept of "quantum cosmology" at first seems like a contra-
diction in terms: the quantum theory refers to the infinitesimally tiny
world of the atom, while cosmology refers to the entire universe. But
consider this: at the instant of the big bang, the universe was much
smaller than an electron. Every physicist agrees that electrons must be
quantized; that is, they are described by a probabilistic wave equation

(the Dirac equation) and can exist in parallel states. Hence if electrons
must be quantized, and if the universe was once smaller than an elec-
tron, then the universe must also exist in parallel states-a theory that
naturally leads to a "many worlds" approach.

The Copenhagen interpretation of Niels Bohr, however, encoun-
ters problems when applied to the entire universe. The Copenhagen
interpretation, although it is taught in every Ph.D.-level quantum me-

246 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
chanics course on Earth, depends on an "observer" making an obser-
vation and collapsing the wave function. The observation process is
absolutely essential in defining the macroscopic world. But how can
one be "outside" the universe while observing the entire universe? If a
wave function describes the universe, then how can an "outside" ob-
server collapse the wave function of the universe? In fact, some see the
inability to observe the universe from "outside" the universe as a fatal
flaw of the Copenhagen interpretation.

In the "many worlds" approach the solution to this problem is sim-
ple: the universe simply exists in many parallel states, all defined by a
master wave function, called the "wave function of the universe." In
quantum cosmology the universe started out as a quantum fluctuation
of the vacuum, that is, as a tiny bubble in the space-time foam. Most
baby universes in the space-time foam have a big bang and then im-
mediately have a Big Crunch afterward. That is why we never see
them, because they are extremely small and short-lived, dancing in
and out of the vacuum. This means that even "nothing" is boiling with
baby universes popping in and out of existence, but on a scale that is
too small to detect with our instruments. But for some reason, one of
the bubbles in the space-time foam did not recollapse into a Big

Crunch, but kept on expanding. This is our universe. According to

Alan Guth, this means that the entire universe is a free lunch.

In quantum cosmology, physicists start with an analogue of the

Schrodinger equation, which governs the wave function of electrons
and atoms. They use the DeWitt-Wheeler equation, which acts on the

"wave function of the universe." Usually the Schrodinger wave function
is defined at every point in space and time, and hence you can calcu-
late the chances of finding an electron at that point in space and time.

But the "wave function of the universe" is defined over all possible uni-
verses. If the wave function of the universe happens to be large when
defined for a specific universe, it means that there is a good chance
that the universe will be in that particular state.

Hawking has been pushing this point of view. Our universe, he
claims, is special among other universes. The wave function of the uni-

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 247
verse is large for our universe and is nearly zero for most other uni-
verses. Thus there is a small but finite probability that other universes
can exist in the multiverse, but ours has the largest probability. Hawk-
ing, in fact, tries to derive inflation in this way. In this picture a uni-
verse that inflates is simply more likely than a universe that does not,
and hence our universe has inflated.

The theory that our universe came from the "nothingness" of the
space-time foam might seem to be totally untestable, but it is consis-
tent with several simple observations. First, many physicists have
pointed out that it is astonishing that the total amount of positive
charges and negative charges in our universe comes out to exactly
zero, at least to within experimental accuracy. We take it for granted
that in outer space gravity is the dominant force, yet this is only be-
cause the positive and negative charges cancel out precisely. If there
was the slightest imbalance between positive and negative charges on
the Earth, it might be sufficient to rip the Earth apart, overcoming the
gravitational force that holds the Earth together. One simple way to ex-
plain why there is this balance between positive and negative charges
is to assume that our universe came from "nothing," and "nothing" has
zero charge.

Second, our universe has zero spin. Although for years Kurt Godel
tried to show that the universe was spinning by adding up the spins of
the various galaxies, astronomers today believe that the total spin of
the universe is zero. The phenomenon would be easily explained if the
universe came from "nothing," since "nothing" has zero spin.

Third, our universe's coming from nothing would help to explain
why the total matter-energy content of the universe is so small, per-
haps even zero. When we add up the positive energy of matter and the
negative energy associated with gravity, the two seem to cancel each
other out According to general relativity, if the universe is closed and
finite, then the total amount of matter-energy in the universe should be
exactly zero. (If our universe is open and infinite, this does not have to
be true, but inflationary theory does seem to indicate that the total
amount of matter-energy in our universe is remarkably small.)

248 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

C O N T A C T B E T W E E N U N I V E R S E S ?

This leaves open some tantalizing questions: If physicists can't rule out
the possibility of several types of parallel universes, would it be possi-
ble to make contact with them? To visit them? Or is it possible that per-
haps beings from other universes have visited us?

Contact with other quantum universes that have decohered from
us seems highly unlikely. The reason that we have decohered from
these other universes is that our atoms have bumped into countless
other atoms in the surrounding environment Each time a collision oc-
curs, the wave function of that atom appears to "collapse" a bit; that is,
the number of parallel universes decreases. Each collision narrows the
number of possibilities. The sum total of all these trillions of atomic

"mini-collapses" gives the illusion that the atoms of our body are to-
tally collapsed in a definite state. The "objective reality" of Einstein is
an illusion created by the fact that we have so many atoms in our body,
each one bumping into others, each time narrowing the number of
possible universes.

It's like looking at an out-of-focus image through a camera. This
would correspond to the microworld, where everything seems fuzzy
and indefinite. But each time you adjust the focus of the camera, the
image gets sharper and sharper. This corresponds to trillions of tiny
collisions with neighboring atoms, each of which reduces the number
of possible universes. In this way, we smoothly make the transition
from the fuzzy microworld to the macroworld.

So the probability of interacting with another quantum universe
similar to ours is not zero, but it decreases rapidly with the number of
atoms in your body. Since there are trillions upon trillions of atoms in
your body, the chance that you will interact with another universe con-
sisting of dinosaurs or aliens is infinitesimally small. You can calculate
that you would have to wait much longer than the lifetime of the uni-
verse for such an event to happen.

So contact with a quantum parallel universe cannot be ruled out,
but it would be an exceedingly rare event since we have decohered
from them. But in cosmology, we encounter a different type of parallel

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 249
universe: a multiverse of universes that coexist with each other, like
soap bubbles floating in a bubble bath. Contact with another universe
in the multiverse is a different question. It would undoubtedly be a dif-
ficult feat, but one that might be possible for a Type III civilization.

As we discussed before, the energy necessary to open a hole in
space or to magnify the space-time foam is on the order of the Planck
energy, where all known physics breaks down. Space and time are not
stable at that energy, and this opens the possibility of leaving our uni-
verse (assuming that other universes exist and we are not killed in the
process).

This is not a purely academic question, since all intelligent life in
the universe will one day have to confront the end of the universe. Ul-
timately, the theory of the multiverse may be the salvation for all intel-
ligent life in our universe. Recent data from the WMAP satellite
currently orbiting the Earth confirms that the universe is expanding at
an accelerating rate. One day we may all perish in what physicists re-
fer to as the Big Freeze. Eventually, the entire universe will go black;
all the stars in the heavens will blink out and the universe will consist
of dead stars, neutron stars, and black holes. Even the very atoms of
their bodies may begin to decay. Temperatures may plunge to near ab-
solute zero, making life impossible.

As the universe approaches that point, an advanced civilization
facing the ultimate death of the universe could contemplate taking the
ultimate journey to another universe. For these beings the choice
would be to freeze to death or leave. The laws of physics are a death
warrant for all intelligent life, but there is an escape clause in those
laws.

Such a civilization would have to harness the power of huge atom
smashers and laser beams as large as a solar system or star cluster to
concentrate enormous power at a single point in order to attain the fa-
bled Planck energy. It is possible that doing so would be sufficient to
open up a wormhole or gateway to another universe. A Type III civi-
lization may use the colossal energy at their disposal to open a worm-
hole as it makes a journey to another universe, leaving our dying
universe and starting over again.

2 5 0 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

A B A B Y U N I V E R S E I N T H E L A B O R A T O R Y ?

As far-fetched as some of these ideas appear, they have been seriously
considered by physicists. For example, when trying to understand how
the big bang got started, we have to analyze the conditions that may
have led to that original explosion. In other words, we have to ask: how
do you make a baby universe in the laboratory? Andrei Linde of Stan-
ford University, one of the cocreators of the inflationary universe idea,
says that if we can create baby universes, then "maybe it's time we re-
define God as something more sophisticated than just the creator of
the universe."

The idea is not new. Years ago when physicists calculated the en-
ergy necessary to ignite the big bang "people immediately started to
wonder what would happen if you put lots of energy in one space in
the lab-shot lots of cannons together. Could you concentrate enough
energy to set off a mini big bang?" asks Linde.

If you concentrated enough energy at a single point all you would
get would be a collapse of space-time into a black hole, nothing more.

But in 1981 Alan Guth of MIT and Linde proposed the "inflationary
universe" theory, which has since generated enormous interest among
cosmologists. According to this idea, the big bang started off with a
turbocharged expansion, much faster than previously believed. (The
inflationary universe idea solved many stubborn problems in cosmol-
ogy, such as why the universe should be so uniform. Everywhere we
look, from one part of the night sky to the opposite side, we see a uni-
form universe, even though there has not been enough time since the
big bang for these vastly separated regions to be in contact The an-
swer to this puzzle, according to the inflationary universe theory, is
that a tiny piece of space-time that was relatively uniform blew up to
become the entire visible universe.) In order to jump-start inflation,

Guth assumed that at the beginning of time there were tiny bubbles of
space-time, one of which inflated enormously to become the universe
of today.

In one swoop the inflationary universe theory answered a host of
cosmological questions. Moreover, it is consistent with all the data

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 251
pouring in today from outer space from the WMAP and COBE satel-
lites. It is, in fact, unquestionably the leading candidate for a theory of
the big bang.

Yet the inflationary universe theory raises a series of embarrassing
questions. Why did this bubble start to inflate? What turned off the ex-
pansion, resulting in the present-day universe? If inflation happened
once, could it happen again? Ironically, although the inflation scenario
is the leading theory in cosmology, almost nothing is known about
what set the inflation into motion and why it stopped.

In order to answer these nagging questions, in 1987 Alan Guth and

Edward Fahri of MIT asked another hypothetical question: how might
an advanced civilization inflate its own universe? They believed that if
they could answer this question, they might be able to answer the
deeper question of why the universe inflated to begin with.

They found that if you concentrated enough energy at a single
point, tiny bubbles of space-time would form spontaneously. But if the
bubbles were too small, they would disappear back into the space-time
foam. Only if the bubbles were big enough could they expand into an
entire universe.

On the outside the birth of this new universe would not look like
much, perhaps no more than the detonation of a 500-kiloton nuclear
bomb. It would appear as if a small bubble had disappeared from the
universe, leaving a small nuclear explosion. But inside the bubble an
entirely new universe might expand out Think of a soap bubble that
splits or buds a smaller bubble, creating a baby soap bubble. The tiny
soap bubble might expand rapidly into an entirely new soap bubble.

Likewise, inside the universe you would see an enormous explosion of
space-time and the creation of an entire universe.

Since 1987 many theories have been proposed to see if the intro-
duction of energy can make a large bubble expand into an entire uni-
verse. The most commonly accepted theory is that a new particle,
called the "inflaton," destabilized space-time, causing these bubbles to
form and expand.

The latest controversy erupted in 2006 when physicists began to
look seriously at a new proposal to ignite a baby universe with a

2 5 2 PHYSICS O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
monopole. Although monopoles-particles that carry only a single
north or south pole-have never been seen, it is believed that they dom-
inated the original early universe. They are so massive that they are
extremely hard to create in the laboratory, but precisely because they
are so massive, if we injected even more energy into a monopole we
might be able to ignite a baby universe into expanding into a real uni-
verse.

Why would physicists want to create a universe? Linde says, "In
this perspective, each of us can become a god." But there is a more
practical reason for wanting to create a new universe: ultimately, to es-
cape the eventual death of our universe.

T H E E V O L U T I O N O F U N I V E R S E S ?

Some physicists have taken this idea even further, to the very limits of
science fiction, in asking whether intelligence may have had a hand in
designing our universe.

In the Guth/Fahri picture, an advanced civilization can create a
baby universe, but the physical constants (e.g., the mass of the electron
and proton and the strengths of the four forces) are the same. But what
if an advanced civilization could create baby universes that differ
slightly in their fundamental constants? Then the baby universes
would be able to "evolve" with time, with each generation of baby uni-
verses being slightly different from the previous generation.

If we consider the fundamental constants to be the "DNA" of a uni-
verse, it means that intelligent life might be able to create baby uni-
verses with slightly different DNA. Eventually, universes would evolve,
and the universes that proliferated would be those that had the best

"DNA" that allow for the flourishing of intelligent life. Physicist Edward

Harrison, building on a previous idea by Lee Smolin, has proposed a

"natural selection" among universes. The universes that dominate the
multiverse are precisely those that have the best DNA, which is com-
patible with creating advanced civilizations, which in turn create more

P f l R f l L L E L U N I V E R S E S 2 5 3
baby universes. "Survival of the fittest" simply means survival of the
universes that are most favorable to producing advanced civilizations.

If this picture is correct, it would explain why the fundamental
constants of the universe are "fine-tuned" to allow for life. It simply
means that universes with desirable fundamental constants compati-
ble with life are the ones that proliferate in the multiverse.

(Although this "evolution of universes" idea is attractive because it
might be able to explain the anthropic principle problem, the difficulty
with this idea is that it is untestable and unfalsifiable. We will have to
wait until we have a complete theory of everything before we can make
sense out of this idea.)

Currently, our technology is far too primitive to reveal the presence of
these parallel universes. So all this would qualify as a Class II impos-
sibility-impossible today, but not in violation of the laws of physics. On
a scale of thousands to millions of years, these speculations could be-
come the basis of a new technology for a Type III civilization.

Theories have four stages of acceptance:

i. this is worthless nonsense;
ii. this is interesting, but perverse;
iii. this is true, but quite unimportant;
iv. I always said so.

-J. B. S. HALDANE, 1963

In Isaac Asimov's classic novel The Gods Themselves, an obscure
chemist in the year 2070 accidentally stumbles upon the greatest dis-
covery of all time, the Electron Pump, which produces unlimited en-
ergy for free. The impact is immediate and profound. He is hailed as
the greatest scientist of all time for satisfying civilization's unquench-
able thirst for energy. "It was Santa Claus and Aladdin's lamp of the
whole world," Asimov wrote. The company he forms soon becomes
one of the richest corporations on the planet, putting the oil, gas, coal,
and nuclear industries out of business.

The world is awash with free energy and civilization is drunk with
this newfound power. As everyone celebrates this great achievement,
one lone physicist is uneasy. "Where is all this free energy coming
from?" he asks himself. Eventually he uncovers the secret. The free en-
ergy comes with a terrible price. This energy is pouring in from a hole
in space connecting our universe to a parallel universe, and the sud-
den influx of energy into our universe is setting off a chain reaction

2 5 8 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
that will eventually destroy the stars and galaxies, turning the sun into
a supernova, and destroying the Earth with it.

Since recorded history, the holy grail for inventors, scientists, as
well as charlatans and scam artists has been the fabled "perpetual mo-
tion machine," a device that runs forever without any loss of energy.

An even better version is a device that can create more energy than it
consumes, such as the Electron Pump, which creates free, limitless en-
ergy.

In the coming years, as our industrialized world gradually runs
out of cheap oil, there will be enormous pressure to find abundant new
sources of clean energy. Soaring gas prices, falling production, in-
creased pollution, atmospheric changes-all are fueling a renewed, in-
tense interest in energy.

Today a few inventors riding this wave of concern promise to de-
liver unlimited quantities of free energy, offering to sell their inven-
tions for hundreds of millions. Scores of investors periodically line up,
lured by sensational claims in the financial media that often hail these
mavericks as the next Edison.

The popularity of perpetual motion machines is widespread. On
an episode of The Simpsons, entitled "The PTA Disbands," Lisa builds
her own perpetual motion machine during a teachers' strike. This
prompts Homer to declare sternly, "Lisa, get in h e r e . . . in this house
we obey the laws of thermodynamics!"

In the computer games The Sims, Xenosaga Episodes I and 77, and

Ultima VI: The False Prophet, as well as the Nickelodeon program In-
vader Zim, perpetual motion machines figure prominently in the plots.

But if energy is so precious, then precisely what is the likelihood
of our creating a perpetual motion machine? Are these devices truly
impossible, or would their creation require a revision in the laws of
physics?

P E R P E T U A L N O T I O N M A C H I N E S 2 5 9

H I S T O R Y V I E W E D T H R O U G H E N E R G Y

Energy is vital to civilization. In fact, all of human history can be
viewed through the lens of energy. For 99.9 percent of human exis-
tence, primitive societies were nomadic, scratching a meager living
scavenging and hunting for food. Life was brutal and short The energy
available to us was one-fifth of a horsepower-the power of our own
muscles. Analyses of the bones of our ancestors show evidence of
enormous wear and tear, caused by the crushing burdens of daily sur-
vival. Average life expectancy was less than twenty years.

But after the end of the last ice age about ten thousand years ago,
we discovered agriculture and domesticated animals, especially the
horse, gradually raising our energy output to one or two horsepower.

This set into motion the first great revolution in human history. With
the horse or ox, one man had enough energy to plow an entire field by
himself, travel tens of miles in a day, or move hundreds of pounds of
rock or grain from one place to another. For the first time in human
history, families had a surplus of energy, and the result was the found-
ing of our first cities. Excess energy meant that society could afford to
support a class of artisans, architects, builders, and scribes, and thus
ancient civilization could flourish. Soon great pyramids and empires
rose from the jungles and desert. Average life expectancy reached
about thirty years.

Then about three hundred years ago the second great revolution in
human history took place. With the coming of machines and steam
power, the energy available to a single person soared to tens of horse-
power. By harnessing the power of the steam locomotive, people could
now cross entire continents in a few days. Machines could plow entire
fields, transport hundreds of passengers thousands of miles, and allow
us to build huge towering cities. Average life expectancy by 1900 had
reached almost fifty in the United States.

Today we are in the midst of the third great revolution in human
history, the information revolution. Because of an exploding popula-
tion and our ravenous appetite for electricity and power, our energy
needs have skyrocketed and our energy supply is being stretched to

260 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
the very limit. The energy available to a single individual is now mea-
sured in thousands of horsepower. We take for granted that a single car
can generate hundreds of horsepower. Not surprisingly, this demand
for more and more energy has sparked an interest in greater sources
of energy, including perpetual motion machines.

P E R P E T U A L M O T I O N M A C H I N E S T H R O U G H H I S T O R Y

The search for a perpetual motion machine is an ancient one. The first
recorded attempt to build a perpetual motion machine dates back to
the eighth century in Bavaria. It was a prototype for hundreds of vari-
ations to come for the next thousand years; it was based on a series of
small magnets attached to a wheel, like a Ferris wheel. The wheel was
placed on top of a much larger magnet on the floor. As each magnet on
the wheel passed over the stationary magnet, it was supposed to be at-
tracted then repelled by the larger magnet, thereby pushing the wheel
and creating perpetual motion.

Another ingenious design was devised in 1150 by the Indian
philosopher Bhaskara, who proposed a wheel that would run forever
by adding a weight to the rim, causing the wheel to spin because it was
unbalanced. Work would be done by the weight as it made a revolu-
tion, and then it would return to its original position. By iterating this
over and over again, Bhaskara claimed that one could extract unlim-
ited work for free.

The Bavarian and the Bhaskara designs for perpetual motion ma-
chines and their many descendants all share the same ingredients: a
wheel of some sort that can make a single revolution without the ad-
dition of any energy, producing usable work in the process. (Careful
examination of these ingenious machines usually shows that energy is
actually lost in each cycle, or that no usable work can be extracted.)

The coming of the Renaissance accelerated proposals for a perpet-
ual motion machine. In 1635 the first patent was granted for a perpet-
ual motion machine. By 1712 Johann Bessler had analyzed some three
hundred different models and proposed a design of his own. (Accord-

P E R P E T U A L N O T I O N M A C H I N E S 26i
ing to legend, his maid later exposed his machine as a fraud.) Even the
great renaissance painter and scientist Leonardo da Vinci became in-
terested in perpetual motion machines. Although he denounced them
in public, comparing them to the fruitless search for the philosopher's
stone, in private he made ingenious sketches in his notebooks of self-
propelling, perpetual motion machines, including a centrifugal pump
and a chimney jack used to turn a roasting skewer over a fire.

By 1775 so many designs were being proposed that the Royal Acad-
emy of Science in Paris stated that it would "no longer accept or deal
with proposals concerning perpetual motion."

Arthur Ord-Hume, a historian of these perpetual motion ma-
chines, has written about the tireless dedication of these inventors,
working against incredible odds, comparing them to the ancient al-
chemists. But, he noted, "Even the alchemist... knew when he was
beaten."

H O A X E S A N D F R A U D S

The incentive to produce a perpetual motion machine was so great
that hoaxes became commonplace. In 1813 Charles Redheffer exhib-
ited a machine in New York City that amazed audiences, producing
unlimited energy for free. (But when Robert Fulton examined the ma-
chine carefully, he found a hidden cat-gut belt driving the machine.

This cable was in turn connected to a man secretly turning a crank in
the attic.)

Scientists and engineers, too, got swept up in the enthusiasm for
perpetual motion machines. In 1870 the editors of Scientific American
were fooled by a machine built by E. P. Willis. The magazine ran a
story with the sensational title "Greatest Discovery Ever Yet Made."

Only later did investigators discover that there was a hidden source of
energy for Willis's perpetual motion machine.

In 1872 John Ernst Worrell Kelly perpetrated the most sensational
and lucrative scam of his day, swindling investors of nearly $5 million, a
princely sum back in the late nineteenth century. His perpetual motion

262 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
machine was based on resonating tuning forks that he claimed tapped
into the "ether." Kelly, a man with no scientific background, would in-
vite wealthy investors to his house, where he would amaze them with
his Hydro-Pneumatic-Pulsating-Vacuo-Engine, which whizzed around
without any external power source. Eager investors, amazed by this self-
propelled machine, flocked to pour money into his coffers.

Later some disillusioned investors angrily accused him of fraud,
and he actually spent some time in jail, although he died a wealthy
man. After his death investigators found the clever secret of his ma-
chine. When his house was torn down concealed tubes were found in
the floor and walls of the basement that secretly delivered compressed
air to his machines. These tubes in turn were energized by a flywheel.

Even the U.S. Navy and the president of the United States were
taken in by such a machine. In 1881 John Gamgee invented a liquid
ammonia machine. The vaporization of cold ammonia would create
expanding gases that could move a piston, and hence could power ma-
chines using only the heat of the oceans themselves. The U.S. Navy
was so enthralled with the idea of extracting unlimited energy from
the oceans that it approved the device and even demonstrated it to

President James Garfield. The problem was that the vapor did not con-
dense back into a liquid properly; hence the cycle could not be com-
pleted.

So many proposals for perpetual motion machines have been pre-
sented to the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) that the office
refuses to grant a patent for such a device unless a working model is
presented. In certain rare circumstances, when the patent examiners
can find nothing obviously wrong with a model, a patent is granted.

The USPTO states, "With the exception of cases involving perpetual
motion, a model is not ordinarily required by the Office to demonstrate
the operability of a device." (This loophole has allowed unscrupulous
inventors to persuade naive investors to finance their inventions by
claiming that the USPTO has officially recognized their machine.)

The pursuit of the perpetual motion machine, however, has not
been fruitless from a scientific point of view. On the contrary, although

P E R P E T U A L N O T I O N M A C H I N E S 263
inventors have never produced a perpetual motion machine, the enor-
mous time and energy invested in building such a fabled machine has
led physicists to carefully study the nature of heat engines. (In the
same way, the fruitless search of alchemists for the philosopher's
stone, which can turn lead into gold, helped to uncover some of the ba-
sic laws of chemistry.)

For example, in the 1760s John Cox developed a clock that could
actually run forever, powered by changes in atmospheric pressure.

Changes in air pressure would drive a barometer, which would then
turn the hands of the clock. This clock actually worked and exists even
today. The clock can run forever because energy is extracted from the
outside in the form of changes in atmospheric pressure.

Perpetual motion machines like Cox's eventually led scientists to
hypothesize that such machines could run forever only if energy was
brought in to the device from the outside, that is, that total energy was
conserved. This theory eventually led to the First Law of Thermody-
namics-that the total amount of matter and energy cannot be created
or destroyed. Eventually three laws of thermodynamics were postu-
lated. The Second Law states that the total amount of entropy (disor-
der) always increases. (Crudely speaking, this law says that heat flows
spontaneously only from hotter to colder places.) The Third Law states
that you can never reach absolute zero.

If we compare the universe to a game and the goal of this game is
to extract energy, then the three laws can be rephrased as follows:

"You can't get something for nothing." (First Law)

"You can't break even." (Second Law)

"You can't even get out of the game." (Third Law)

(Physicists are careful to state that these laws are not necessarily
absolutely true for all time. Nevertheless, no deviation has ever been
found. Anyone trying to disprove these laws must go against centuries
of careful scientific experiments. We will discuss possible deviations
from these laws shortly.)

264 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

These laws, among the crowning achievements of nineteenth-
century science, are marked by tragedy as well as triumph. One of the
key figures in formulating these laws, the great German physicist Lud-
wig Boltzmann, committed suicide, in part because of the controversy
he created in formulating these laws.

L U D W I G B O L T Z M A N N A N D E N T R O P Y

Boltzmann was a short, barrel-chested bear of a man, with a huge,
forestlike beard. His formidable and ferocious appearance, however,
belied all the wounds he suffered in defending his ideas. Although

Newtonian physics was firmly established by the nineteenth century,

Boltzmann knew these laws had never been rigorously applied to the
controversial concept of atoms, a concept that was still not accepted by
many leading scientists. (We sometimes forget that as late as a century
ago there were legions of scientists who insisted that the atom was just
a clever gimmick, not a real entity. Atoms were so impossibly tiny, they
claimed, that they probably didn't exist at all.)

Newton showed that mechanical forces, not spirits or desires, were
sufficient to determine the motion of all objects. Boltzmann then ele-
gantly derived many of the laws of gases by a simple assumption: that
gases were made of tiny atoms that, like billiard balls, obeyed the laws
of forces laid down by Newton. To Boltzmann, a chamber containing
gas was like a box filled with trillions of tiny steel balls, each one
bouncing off the walls and each other according to Newton's laws of
motion. In one of the greatest masterpieces in physics, Boltzmann (and
independently James Clerk Maxwell) mathematically showed how
this simple assumption could result in dazzling new laws and open up
a new branch of physics called statistical mechanics.

Suddenly many of the properties of matter could be derived from
first principles. Since Newton's laws stipulated that energy must be
conserved when applied to atoms, each collision between atoms con-
served energy; that meant that an entire chamber of trillions of atoms
also conserved energy. The conservation of energy could now be es-

P E R P E T U A L N O T I O N M A C H I N E S 265

tablished not just via experimentation, but from first principles, that is,
the Newtonian motion of atoms.

But in the nineteenth century the existence of atoms was still hotly
debated and often ridiculed by prominent scientists, such as philoso-
pher Ernst Mach. A sensitive and often depressed man, Boltzmann un-
comfortably found himself the lightning rod, the focus of the often
vicious attacks by the anti-atomists. To the anti-atomists, anything that
could not be measured did not exist, including atoms. To add to Boltz-
mann's humiliation, many of his papers were rejected by the editor of
a prominent German physics journal because the editor insisted that
atoms and molecules were strictly convenient theoretical tools, rather
than objects that really existed in nature.

Exhausted and embittered from all the personal attacks, Boltz-
mann hung himself in 1906 while his wife and child were at the beach.

Sadly he did not realize that just a year before, a brash young physicist
by the name of Albert Einstein had done the impossible: he had writ-
ten the first paper demonstrating the existence of atoms.

T O T A L E N T R O P Y A L W A Y S I N C R E A S E S

The work of Boltzmann and other physicists helped to clarify the na-
ture of perpetual motion machines, sorting them into two types. Per-
petual motion machines of the first type are those that violate the First

Law of Thermodynamics; that is, they actually produce more energy
than they consume. In every case physicists found that this type of per-
petual motion machine relied on hidden, outside sources of energy, ei-
ther through fraud, or because the inventor did not realize the source
of the outside energy.

Perpetual motion machines of the second type are more subtle.

They obey the First Law of Thermodynamics-conserving energy-but
violate the Second Law. In theory, a perpetual motion machine of the
second type produces no waste heat, so it is 100 percent efficient Yet
the Second Law says that such a machine is impossible-that waste
heat must always be produced-and hence disorder or chaos in the uni-

266 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
verse, or entropy, always increases. No matter how efficient a machine
might be, it will always produce some waste heat, thereby raising the
entropy of the universe.

The fact that total entropy always increases lies at the heart of hu-
man history as well as mother nature. According to the Second Law, it
is far easier to destroy than to build. Something that might take thou-
sands of years to create, such as the great Aztec Empire in Mexico, can
be destroyed in a matter of months; and this is what happened when a
raggedy band of Spanish conquistadores, armed with horses and
firearms, completely shattered that empire.

Every time you look in a mirror and see a new wrinkle or a white
hair you are observing the effects of the Second Law. Biologists tell us
that the aging process is the gradual accumulation of genetic errors in
our cells and genes, so that the cell's ability to function slowly deterio-
rates. Aging, rusting, rotting, decay, disintegration, and collapse are
also examples of the Second Law.

Remarking on the profound nature of the Second Law, astronomer

Arthur Eddington once said, "The law that entropy always increases
holds, I think, the supreme position among the laws of Nature... if
your theory is found to be against the second law of thermodynamics,

I can give you no hope; there is nothing for it but to collapse in deep-
est humiliation."

Even today enterprising engineers (and clever charlatans) continue to
announce the invention of perpetual motion machines. Recently I was
asked by the Wall Street Journal to comment on the work of an inven-
tor who had actually persuaded investors to sink millions of dollars
into his machine. Breathless articles were published in major financial
newspapers, written by journalists with no background in science,
gushing about the potential of this invention to change the world (and
generate fabulous, lucrative profits in the process). "Genius or crack-
pot?" the headlines blared.

Investors threw enormous bundles of cash at this device, which vio-
lated the most basic laws of physics and chemistry taught in high school.

P E R P E T U A L N O T I O N M A C H I N E S 267

(What was shocking to me was not that a person was trying to swindle
the unwary-this has been true since the dawn of time. What was surpris-
ing was that it was so easy for this inventor to fool wealthy investors be-
cause of their lack of understanding of elementary physics.) I repeated to
the Journal tine proverb "A fool and his money are easily parted" and P. T.

Barnum's famous dictum "There's a sucker born every minute." Perhaps
not surprisingly, the Financial Times, the Economist, and the Wall Street Journal have all run large feature articles on various inventors touting
their perpetual motion machines.

T H E T H R E E L A W S A N D S Y M M E T R I E S

But all this raises a deeper question: Why do the iron laws of thermo-
dynamics hold in the first place? It is a mystery that has intrigued sci-
entists since the laws were first proposed. If we could answer that
question, perhaps we might find loopholes in the laws, and the impli-
cations would be earth-shattering.

In graduate school I was left speechless one day when I finally
learned the true origin of the conservation of energy. One of the funda-
mental principles of physics (discovered by mathematician Emmy

Noether in 1918) is that whenever a system possesses symmetry, the
result is a conservation law. If the laws of the universe remain the
same over time, then the astonishing result is that the system con-
serves energy. (Furthermore, if the laws of physics remain the same if
you move in any direction, then momentum is conserved in any direc-
tion as well. And if the laws of physics remain the same under a rota-
tion, then angular momentum is conserved.)

This was staggering to me. I realized that when we analyze star-
light from distant galaxies that are billions of light-years away, at the
very edge of the visible universe, we find that the spectrum of light is
identical to spectra that we can find on Earth. In the relic light that was
emitted billions of years before Earth or the sun was born, we see
the same unmistakable "fingerprints" of the spectrum of hydrogen, he-
lium, carbon, neon, and so forth, that we find on the Earth today. In

268 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
other words, the basic laws of physics haven't changed for billions of
years, and they are constant out to the outer edges of the universe.

At a minimum, I realized, Noether's theorem means that the con-
servation of energy will probably last for billions of years, if not for-
ever. As far as we know, none of the fundamental laws of physics have
changed with time, and this is the reason that energy is conserved.

The implications of Noether's theorem on modern physics are pro-
found. Whenever physicists create a new theory, whether it addresses
the origin of the universe, the interactions of quarks and other subatomic
particles, or antimatter, we first start with the symmetries that the system
obeys. In fact, symmetries are now known to be the fundamental guid-
ing principle in creating any new theory. In the past, symmetries were
thought to be by-products of a theory-a cute but ultimately useless fea-
ture of a theory, pretty, but not essential. Today we realize that symme-
tries are the essential feature that defines any theory. In creating new
theories, we physicists first start with symmetry, and then build the the-
ory around it.

(Sadly, Emmy Noether, like Boltzmann before her, had to fight
tooth and nail for recognition. A woman mathematician, she was de-
nied a permanent position at leading institutions because of her sex.

Noether's mentor, the great mathematician David Hilbert, was so frus-
trated in failing to secure a teaching appointment for Noether that he
exclaimed, "What are we, a university or a bathing society?")

This raises a disturbing question. If energy is conserved because
the laws of physics do not change with time, then could this symmetry
be broken in rare, unusual circumstances? There is still the possibility
that the conservation of energy might be violated on a cosmic scale, if
the symmetry of our laws is broken in exotic and unexpected places.

One way that might happen is if the laws of physics vary with time
or change with distance. (In Asimov's novel The Gods Themselves this
symmetry was broken because there was a hole in space connecting
our universe with a parallel universe. The laws of physics change in
the vicinity of the hole in space, therefore allowing a breakdown in the
laws of thermodynamics. Hence the conservation of energy could be
violated if there are holes in space, that is, wormholes.)

P E R P E T U A L N O T I O N M A C H I N E S 269

Another loophole that is hotly being debated today is whether en-
ergy may spring from nothing.

E N E R G Y F R O M T H E V A C U U M ?

A tantalizing question is: Is it possible to extract energy from nothing?

Physicists have only recently realized that the "nothing" of the vacuum
is not empty at all, but teaming with activity.

One of the proponents of this idea was the eccentric genius of the
twentieth century Nikola Tesla, a worthy rival to Thomas Edison. He
was also one of the proponents of zero-point energy, that is, the idea
that the vacuum may possess untold quantities of energy. If true, the
vacuum would be the ultimate "free lunch," capable of providing un-
limited energy literally from thin air. The vacuum, instead of being
considered empty and devoid of any matter, would be the ultimate
storehouse of energy.

Tesla was born in a small town in what is now Serbia and arrived
penniless in the United States in 1884. Soon he became an assistant to

Thomas Edison, but because of his brilliance, he became a rival. In a
celebrated contest, which historians dubbed "The War of the Cur-
rents," Tesla was pitted against Edison. Edison believed that he could
electrify the world with his direct current (DC) motors, while Tesla
was the originator of alternating current (AC) and successfully showed
that his methods were far superior to Edison's and incurred signifi-
cantly less power loss over distance. Today the entire planet is electri-
fied on the basis of the patents of Tesla, not Edison.

Tesla's inventions and patents number over seven hundred and
contain some of the most important milestones in modern electrical
history. Historians have made a credible case that Tesla invented radio
before Guglielmo Marconi (widely recognized as the inventor of radio)

and was working with X-rays before their official discovery by Wil-
helm Roentgen. (Both Marconi and Roentgen would later win the No-
bel Prize for discoveries probably made by Tesla years earlier.)

Tesla also believed that he could extract unlimited energy from the

270 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
vacuum, a claim that unfortunately he did not prove in his notes. At
first, "zero-point energy" (or the energy contained in a vacuum) seems
to violate the First Law of Thermodynamics. Although zero-point en-
ergy defies the laws of Newtonian mechanics, the notion of zero-point
energy has reemerged recently from a novel direction.

When scientists analyze the data from satellites currently orbiting
the Earth, such as the WMAP satellite, they have come to the astound-
ing conclusion that fully 73 percent of the universe is made of "dark
energy," the energy of a pure vacuum. This means that the greatest
reservoir of energy in the entire universe is the vacuum that separates
the galaxies in the universe. (This dark energy is so colossal that it is
pushing the galaxies away from each other, and may eventually rip the
universe apart in a Big Freeze.)

Dark energy is everywhere in the universe, even in your living
room and inside your body. The amount of dark energy in outer space
is truly astronomical, outweighing all the energy of the stars and
galaxies put together. We can also calculate the amount of dark energy
on the Earth, and it is quite small, too small to be used to power a per-
petual motion machine. Tesla was right about dark energy but wrong
about the amount of dark energy on the Earth.

Or was he?

One of the most embarrassing gaps in modern physics is that no
one can calculate the amount of dark energy that we can measure via
our satellites. If we use the latest theory of atomic physics to calculate
the amount of dark energy in the universe, we arrive at a number that
is wrong by a factor of 10 ! That is "one" followed by 120 zeros! This

120
is by far the largest mismatch between theory and experiment in all of
physics.

The point is that no one knows how to calculate the "energy of
nothing." This is one of the most important questions in physics (be-
cause it will eventually determine the fate of the universe), but at the
present time we are clueless as to how to calculate it. No theory can ex-
plain dark energy, although experimental evidence for its existence is
staring us in the face.

So the vacuum does have energy, as Tesla suspected. But the

P E R P E T U A L N O T I O N M H C H I N E S n\
amount of energy is probably too small to be used as a source of us-
able energy. There are vast amounts of dark energy between the galax-
ies, but the amount that can be found on the Earth is tiny. But the
embarrassing thing is that no one knows how to calculate this energy,
or where it came from.

My point is that the conservation of energy arises from deep, cos-
mological reasons. Any violation of these laws would necessarily
mean a profound shift in our understanding of the evolution of the uni-
verse. And the mystery of dark energy is forcing physicists to confront
this question head-on.

Because creating a true perpetual motion machine may require us to
reevaluate the fundamental laws of physics on a cosmological scale, I
would rank perpetual motion machines as a Class III impossibility;
that is, either they are truly impossible, or we would need to funda-
mentally change our understanding of fundamental physics on a cos-
mological scale in order to make such a machine possible. Dark
energy remains one of the great unfinished chapters in modern sci-
ence.

A paradox is truth standing on its head to attract attention.

-NICHOLAS FALLETTA

Is there such a thing as precognition, or seeing the future? This ancient
concept is present in every religion, going back to the oracles of the

Greeks and Romans and to the prophets of the Old Testament. But in
such tales, the gift of prophecy can also be a curse. In Greek mythol-
ogy there is the tale of Cassandra, the daughter of the Ring of Troy. Be-
cause of her beauty she attracted the attention of the sun god, Apollo.

To win her over Apollo granted her the ability to see the future. But

Cassandra spurned the advances of Apollo. In a fit of anger, Apollo
twisted his gift, so that Cassandra would be able to see the future but
no one would believe her. When Cassandra warned the people of Troy
of their impending doom, no one listened. She foretold the treachery of
the Trojan horse, the death of Agamemnon, and even her own demise,
but instead of taking heed, the people of Troy thought she was mad and
locked her up.

Nostradamus, writing in the sixteenth century, and more recently

Edgar Cayce have claimed that they could lift the veil of time. Although
there have been many claims that their predictions have come true (for
example, correctly predicting World War II, JFK's assassination, and
the fall of Communism), the obscure, allegorical way in which many
of these seers recorded their verses allows for a variety of contradic-

P R E C O G N I T I O N 2 7 3
tory interpretations. The quatrains of Nostradamus, for example, are
so general that one can read almost anything into them (and people
have). One quatrain reads:

Earth-shaking fires from the world's center roar:

Around "New City" is the Earth a-quiver

Two nobles long shall wage a fruitless war

The nymph of springs pour forth a new, red river.

Some have claimed that this quatrain proved that Nostradamus
foresaw the burning of the Twin Towers in New York on September 11,

2001. Yet over the centuries scores of other interpretations have been
given to this same quatrain. The images are so vague that many inter-
pretations are possible.

Precognition is also a favorite device of playwrights who write of
the impending doom of kings and the fall of empires. In Shakespeare's

Macbeth, precognition is central to the theme of the play and to the am-
bitions of Macbeth, who encounters three witches who foresee his rise
to become Ring of Scotland. With his murderous ambitions fired up by
the witches' prophesy, he begins a bloody and grisly campaign to wipe
out his enemies, including killing the innocent wife and children of his
rival Macduff.

After committing a series of hideous deeds to seize the crown,

Macbeth learns from the witches that he cannot be defeated in battle
or "vanquish'd be until great Birnam Wood to high (Dunsinane Hills)

shall come against him," and that "none of woman born shall harm

Macbeth." Macbeth takes comfort in this prophecy, since a forest can-
not move, and all men are born of women. But the Great Birnam for-
est does move, as the troops of Macduff camouflaging themselves
beneath twigs from the Great Birnam forest, advance on Macbeth, and

Macduff himself was born via cesarean.

Although prophecies from the past have so many alternative inter-
pretations, and hence are impossible to test, one set of prophecies is
easy to analyze: predictions of the precise date of the end of the Earth-

Doomsday. Ever since the last chapter of the Bible, Revelations, laid out
in graphic detail the final days of the Earth, when chaos and destruc-

274 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
tion will accompany the arrival of the Antichrist and the final Second

Coming of Christ, fundamentalists have tried to predict the precise
date of the End of Days.

One of the most celebrated of all Doomsday predictions was made
by astrologers who predicted a great flood that would end the world on

February 20, 1524, based on the conjunction of all the planets in the
heavens: Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn. Mass panic swept
across Europe. In England, twenty thousand people fled their homes
in desperation. A fortress stocked with food and water to last two
months was built around St. Bartholomew's Church. Across Germany
and France, people furiously set out to build large arks to ride out the
flood. Count Von Iggleheim even built a huge, three-story ark in prepa-
ration for this momentous event. But when the date finally arrived,
there was only a slight rain. The mood of the crowd suddenly swung
from fear into anger. People who had sold all their belongings and
turned their lives upside down felt betrayed. Angry mobs began to run
amok. The count was stoned to death, and hundreds were killed when
the mob stampeded.

Christians aren't the only ones who feel the lure of prophecy. In

1648 Sabbatai Zevi, the son of a wealthy Jew in Smyrna, declared him-
self to be the Messiah and predicted that the world would end in 1666.

Handsome, charismatic, and well versed in the mystical texts of the

Kabbalah, he quickly assembled a group of fiercely loyal followers,
who spread the news across Europe. In the spring of 1666 Jews from
as far away as France, Holland, Germany, and Hungary began to pack
their bags and heed the call of their Messiah. But later that year Zevi
was arrested by the grand vizier in Constantinople and thrown in
prison in chains. Facing a possible death sentence, he dramatically
cast off his Jewish clothes, adopted a Turkish turban, and converted to

Islam. Tens of thousands of his devout followers left the cult in utter
disillusionment

The prophecies of seers still resonate even today, influencing the
lives of tens of millions of people worldwide. In the United States,

William Miller declared that Doomsday would arrive on April 3, 1843.

As news of his prophecy spread thoughout the United States, a spectac-

P R E C O G N I T I O N 2 7 5
ular meteor shower by chance lit up the night sky in 1833, one of the
largest of its kind, further enhancing the influence of Miller's prophecy.

Tens of thousands of devout followers, called Millerites, awaited
the coming of Armageddon. When 1843 came and went without the ar-
rival of the End of Days, the Millerite movement split into several large
groups. Because of the huge following amassed by the Millerites, each
of these splinter groups would have a major impact on religion even
today. One large piece of the Millerite movement regrouped in 1863
and changed their name to the Seventh-Day Adventist Church, which
today has about 14 million baptized members. Central to their belief is
the imminent Second Coming of Christ.

Another splinter group of Millerites later drifted toward the work
of Charles Taze Russell, who pushed back the date of Doomsday to

1874. When that date also passed, he revised his prediction, based on
analyses of the Great Pyramids of Egypt, this time to 1914. This group
would later be called Jehovah's Witnesses, with a membership of over

6 million.

Other segments of the Millerite movement, however, continued to
make predictions, hence precipitating further splits each time a pre-
diction failed. One small splinter group of Millerites was called the

Branch Davidians; they broke off from the Seventh-Day Adventists in
the 1930s. They had a small commune in Waco, Texas, which fell un-
der the charismatic influence of a young preacher named David Ko-
resh, who spoke hypnotically of the end of the world. That group met
a fiery end in their tragic encounter with the FBI in 1993, when a rag-
ing inferno consumed the compound, incinerating 76 members, in-
cluding 27 children, and also Roresh.

C A N W E S E E T H E F U T U R E ?

Can rigorous scientific tests prove that some individuals can see the fu-
ture? In Chapter 12 we saw that time travel might be consistent with
the laws of physics, but for an advanced, Type III civilization. But is
precognition possible on Earth today?

276 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Elaborate tests conducted at the Rhine Center seem to suggest that
some people can see the future; that is, they can identify cards before
they are unveiled. But repeated experiments have shown that the effect
is very small, and often disappears when others try to duplicate the re-
sults.

In fact, precognition is difficult to reconcile with modern physics,
because it violates causality, the law of cause and effect Effects occur
after the cause, not vice versa. All the laws of physics that have been
found so far have causality built into them. A violation of causality
would signal a major collapse of the foundations of physics. Newto-
nian mechanics is firmly based on causality. Newton's laws are so all-
embracing that if you know the location and position of all the
molecules in the universe, you can calculate the future motion of these
atoms. Thus the future is calculable. In principle, Newtonian mechan-
ics states that if you had a large enough computer, you could compute
all future events. According to Newton, the universe is like a gigantic
clock, wound up by God at the beginning of time, and ticking ever
since according to His laws. There is no room for precognition in New-
ton's theory.

B A C K W A R D I N T I M E

When we discuss Maxwell's theory, however, the scenario becomes
much more complicated. When we solve Maxwell's equations for light,
we find not one but two solutions: a "retarded" wave, which represents
the standard motion of light from one point to another; but also an "ad-
vanced" wave, where the light beam goes backward in time. This ad-
vanced solution comes from the future and arrives in the past!

For a hundred years when engineers have encountered this "ad-
vanced" solution that goes backward in time they have simply dis-
missed it as a mathematical curiosity. Since the retarded waves so
accurately predicted the behavior of radio, microwaves, TV, radar, and

X-rays, they simply threw the advanced solution out the window. The

P R E C O G N I T I O N 277
retarded waves were so spectacularly beautiful and successful that en-
gineers simply ignored the ugly twin. Why tamper with success?

But for physicists, the advanced wave has been a nagging problem
for the past century. Since Maxwell's equations are among the pillars
of the modern age, any solution of these equations has to be taken very
seriously, even if it entails accepting waves from the future. It seemed
that it was impossible to totally ignore the advanced waves from the fu-
ture. Why would nature, at this most fundamental level, give us such a
bizarre solution? Was this a cruel joke, or was there a more profound
meaning?

Mystics began to take an interest in these advanced waves, specu-
lating that they would appear as messages from the future. Perhaps if
we could somehow harness these waves, we might be able to send
messages back to the past, and hence alert previous generations of
events to come. We could, for example, send a message back to our
grandparents in the year 1929, warning them to sell all their stocks be-
fore the Great Crash. Such advanced waves would not allow us person-
ally to visit the past, as in time travel, but they would enable us to send
letters and messages into the past to alert people of key events that
would not yet have occurred.

These advanced waves were a mystery until they were studied by

Richard Feynman, who was intrigued by the idea of going backward in
time. After working on the Manhattan Project, which built the first
atomic bomb, Feynman left Los Alamos and went to Princeton Univer-
sity to work under John Wheeler. Analyzing Dirac's original work on
the electron, Feynman found something very strange. If he simply re-
versed the direction of time in Dirac's equation, the equation remained
the same if he also reversed the electron charge. In other words, an
electron going backward in time was the same as an antielectron go-
ing forward in time! Normally, a mature physicist might dismiss this
interpretation, calling it just a trick, a mathematical sleight-of-hand
with no meaning. Going backward in time did not seem to make any
sense, yet Dirac's equations were clear on this point. In other words,

Feynman had found the reason that nature allowed these backward-

278 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
in-time solutions: they represented the motion of antimatter. If he had
been an older physicist, Feynman might have thrown this solution out
the window. But being a lowly graduate student, he decided to pursue
his curiosity further.

As he continued to delve into this conundrum the young Feynman
noticed something even stranger. Normally if an electron and an anti-
electron collide, they annihilate one another and create a gamma ray.

He drew this on a sheet of paper: two objects bumping into each other,
turning into a burst of energy.

But then if you reversed the charge of the antielectron, it became
an ordinary electron going backward in time. You could then rewrite
the same diagram with the arrow of time reversed. It now appeared as
if the electron went forward in time, then suddenly decided to reverse
direction. The electron did a U-turn in time and was now going back-
ward in time, releasing a burst of energy in the process. In other
words, it's the same electron. The electron-antielectron annihilation
process was just the same electron deciding to go backward in time!

So Feynman revealed the true secret of antimatter: it's just ordinary
matter going backward in time. This simple observation immediately
explained the puzzle that all particles have antiparticle partners: it's
because all particles can travel backward in time, and hence masquer-
ade as antimatter. (This interpretation is equivalent to the "Dirac sea,"

mentioned earlier, but it is simpler, and it is the explanation currently
accepted today.)

Now let's say we have a lump of antimatter and it collides with or-
dinary matter, creating a huge explosion. There are now trillions of
electrons and trillions of antielectrons being annihilated. But if we re-
versed the direction of the arrow for the antielectron, turning it into an
electron going backward in time, this would mean that the same elec-
tron went zigzagging backward and forward trillions of times.

There was a further curious result: there must be just one electron
in the lump of matter. The same electron went whizzing back and
forth, zigzagging in time. Each time it did a U-turn in time it became
antimatter. But if it did another U-turn in time then it turned into an-
other electron.

P R E C O G N I T I O N 279

(With his thesis adviser, John Wheeler, Feynman then speculated
that perhaps the entire universe consisted of just one electron, zigzag-
ging back and forth in time. Imagine that out of the chaos of the origi-
nal big bang only a single electron was created. Trillions of years later,
this single electron would eventually encounter the cataclysm of

Doomsday, where it would make a U-turn and go backward in time,
releasing a gamma ray in the process. Then it would go back to the
original big bang, and then perform another U-turn. The electron
would then make repeated zigzag journeys back and forth, from the
big bang to Doomsday. Our universe in the twenty-first century is just
a time slice of this electron's journey, in which we see trillions of elec-
trons and antielectrons, that is, the visible universe. As strange as this
theory may appear, it would explain a curious fact from the quantum
theory: why all electrons are the same. In physics you cannot label
electrons. There are no green electrons or Johnny electrons. Electrons
have no individuality. You cannot "tag" an electron, like scientists
sometimes tag animals in the wild to study them. Maybe the reason is
that the entire universe consists of the same electron, just bouncing
back and forth in time.)

But if antimatter is ordinary matter going back in time, then is it
possible to send a message into the past? Is it possible to send today's

Wall Street Journal back to yourself in the past, so you can make a
killing on the stock market?

The answer is no.

If we treat antimatter as just another exotic form of matter and
then perform an experiment with antimatter, there are no violations of
causality. Cause and effect remain the same. If we now reverse the ar-
row of time for the antielectron, sending it backward in time, then we
have only performed a mathematical operation. The physics remains
the same. Nothing has changed physically. All experimental results re-
main the same. So it is absolutely valid to view the electron as going
backward and forward in time. But each time the electron goes back-
ward in time, it simply fulfills the past So it appears as if the advanced
solutions from the future are indeed necessary to have a consistent
quantum theory, but they ultimately do not violate causality. (In fact,

280 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
without these bizarre advanced waves, causality would be violated in
the quantum theory. Feynman showed that if we add the contribution
of the advanced and retarded waves, we find that the terms that might
violate causality cancel precisely. Thus antimatter is essential to pre-
serving causality. Without antimatter, causality might collapse.)

Feynman continued to pursue the germ of this crazy idea until it
eventually blossomed into a complete quantum theory of the electron.

His creation, quantum electrodynamics (QED), has been experimentally
verified to one part in 10 billion, making it one of the most accurate the-
ories of all time. It won him and his colleagues Julian Schwinger and

Sin-Itiro Tomonaga the Nobel Prize in 1965.

(In Feynman's Nobel Prize acceptance speech, he said that as a
youth he impulsively fell in love with these advanced waves from the
future, like falling in love with a beautiful girl. Today that beautiful girl
has matured into a grown woman and is the mother of many children.

One of those children is his theory of quantum electrodynamics.)

T A C H Y O N S F R O M T H E F U T U R E

In addition to advanced waves from the future (which have proven
their utility over and over again in the quantum theory) there is yet an-
other bizarre concept from the quantum theory that seems just as
crazy, but perhaps not as useful. This is the idea of "tachyons," which
appear regularly on Star Trek. Anytime the writers of Star Trek need
some kind of new energy to perform some magical operation, they in-
voke tachyons.

Tachyons live in a strange world where everything travels faster
than light. As tachyons lose energy, they travel faster, which violates
common sense. In fact, if they lose all energy, they travel at infinite ve-
locity. As tachyons gain energy, however, they slow down until they
reach the speed of light.

What makes tachyons so strange is that they come with imaginary
mass. (By "imaginary," we mean that their mass has been multiplied
by the square root of minus one, or "i.") If we simply take Einstein's fa-

P R E C O G N I T I O N 28i
mous equations and replace "m" with "im," then something marvelous
happens. All of a sudden particles travel faster than light.

This result gives rise to strange situations. If a tachyon travels
through matter, it loses energy because it collides with atoms. But as it
loses energy, it speeds up, which further increases its collisions with
atoms. These collisions should cause it to lose more energy and hence
accelerate even faster. As this creates a vicious cycle, the tachyon nat-
urally attains infinite velocity all by itself!

(Tachyons are different from antimatter and negative matter. Anti-
matter has positive energy, travels at less than the speed of light, and
can be created in our particle accelerators. It falls down under gravity,
according to theory. Antimatter corresponds to ordinary matter going
backward in time. Negative matter has negative energy and also trav-
els less than the speed of light, but falls up under gravity. Negative mat-
ter has never been found in the laboratory. In large quantities, it can in
theory be used to fuel time machines. Tachyons travel faster than light
and have imaginary mass; it's not clear if they fall up or down under
gravity. They, too, have not been found in the laboratory.)

As bizarre as tachyons are, they have been seriously studied by
physicists, including the late Gerald Feinberg of Columbia University
and George Sudarshan of the University of Texas at Austin. The prob-
lem is that no one has ever seen a tachyon in the laboratory. The key
experimental evidence for tachyons would be a violation of causality.

Feinberg even suggested that physicists examine a laser beam before it
was switched on. If tachyons exist, then perhaps light from the laser
beam could be detected even before the apparatus was turned on.

In science fiction stories tachyons are regularly used to send mes-
sages back to the past to seers. But if one examines the physics it is not
clear if this is possible. Feinberg, for example, believed that the emis-
sion of a tachyon going forward in time was identical to the absorption
of a negative-energy tachyon going backward in time (similar to the
situation with regard to antimatter) and hence there was no violation
of causality.

Science fiction aside, today the modern interpretation of tachyons
is that they might have existed at the instant of the big bang, violating

2 8 2 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
causality, but they don't exist anymore. In fact, they might have played
an essential role in getting the universe to "bang" in the first place. In
that sense, tachyons are essential for some theories of the big bang.

Tachyons have a peculiar property. When you put them into any
theory, they destabilize the "vacuum," that is, the lowest energy state
of a system. If a system has tachyons, it is in a "false vacuum," so the
system is unstable and will decay down to the true vacuum.

Think of a dam that holds back the water in a lake. This represents
the "false vacuum." Although the dam appears perfectly stable, there is
an energy state that is lower than the dam. If a crack develops in the
dam and the water comes bursting out of the dam break, the system at-
tains the true vacuum as the water flows toward sea level.

In the same way, the universe before the big bang, it is believed,
originally started off in the false vacuum, in which there were
tachyons. But the presence of tachyons meant that this was not the
lowest energy state, and hence the system was unstable. A tiny "rip"

appeared in the fabric of space-time, representing the true vacuum. As
the rip got larger, a bubble emerged. Outside the bubble the tachyons
still exist, but inside the bubble the tachyons have all disappeared. As
the bubble expands, we find the universe as we know it, without
tachyons. This is the big bang.

One theory taken very seriously by cosmologists is that a tachyon,
called the "inflation," started the original process of inflation. As we
mentioned earlier, the inflationary universe theory states that the uni-
verse started off as a tiny bubble of space-time that underwent a turbo-
charged inflationary period. Physicists believe that the universe
originally started off in the false vacuum state, where the inflation field
was a tachyon. But the presence of a tachyon destabilized the vacuum,
and tiny bubbles formed. Inside one of these bubbles the inflation field
assumed the true vacuum state. This bubble then began to inflate rap-
idly, until it became our universe. Inside our bubble-universe the in-
flation has disappeared, so it can no longer be detected in our universe.

So tachyons represent a bizarre quantum state in which objects go
faster than light and perhaps even violate causality. But they disap-
peared a long time ago, and perhaps gave birth to the universe itself.

P R E C O G N I T I O N 283

All this may sound like idle speculation that is not testable. But the
theory of the false vacuum will get its first experimental test, starting
in 2008, when the Large Hadron Collider is turned on outside Geneva,

Switzerland. One of the key purposes of the LHC is to find the "Higgs
boson," the last particle in the Standard Model, the one that has yet to
be found. It is the last piece of this jigsaw puzzle. (The Higgs particle
is so important but elusive that Nobel laureate Leon Lederman called
it "The God Particle.")

The Higgs boson, physicists believe, originally started out as a
tachyon. In the false vacuum, none of the subatomic particles had any
mass. But its presence destabilized the vacuum, and the universe
made a transition to a new vacuum, in which the Higgs boson turned
into an ordinary particle. After the transition from a tachyon to an or-
dinary particle, the subatomic particles begin to have the masses that
we measure in the laboratory today. Thus the discovery of the Higgs
boson will not only complete the last missing piece of the Standard

Model, it will also verify that the tachyon state once existed but has
been transformed into an ordinary particle.

In summary, precognition is ruled out by Newtonian physics. The
iron rule of cause and effect is never violated. In the quantum theory,
new states of matter are possible, such as antimatter, which corre-
sponds to matter going backward in time, but causality is not violated.

In fact, in a quantum theory, antimatter is essential to restoring causal-
ity. Tachyons at first seem to violate causality, but physicists believe
that their true purpose was to set off the big bang and hence they are
not observable anymore.

Therefore precognition seems to be ruled out, at least for the fore-
seeable future, making it a Class III impossibility. It would set off a ma-
jor shake-up in the very foundations of modern physics if precognition
was ever proved in reproducible experiments.

There is nothing so big nor so crazy that one out of a million
technological societies may not feel itself driven to do,
provided it is physically possible.

- F R E E M A N DYSON

Destiny is not a matter of chance-it is a matter of choice. It is not a
thing to be waited for-it is a tiling to be achieved.

- W I L L I A M JENNINGS BRYAN

Are there truths that will be forever beyond our grasp? Are there realms
of knowledge that will be outside the capabilities of even an advanced
civilization? Of all the technologies analyzed so far, only perpetual mo-
tion machines and precognition fall into the category of Class HI impos-
sibilities. Are there other technologies that are similarly impossible?

Pure mathematics abounds in theorems showing that certain
things are truly impossible. One simple example is that it is impossi-
ble to trisect an angle using only a compass and ruler; this was proven
back in 1837.

Even in simple systems such as arithmetic there are impossibili-

E P I L O G U E 285
ties. As I mentioned earlier, it is impossible to prove all the true state-
ments in arithmetic within the postulates of arithmetic. Arithmetic is
incomplete. There will always be true statements in arithmetic that
can be proven only if one moves to a much larger system that includes
arithmetic as a subset

Although some things in mathematics are impossible, it is always
dangerous to declare that something is absolutely impossible in the
physical sciences. Let me remind you of a speech given by Nobel laure-
ate Albert A. Michelson in 1894 at the dedication of the Ryerson Physical

Lab at the University of Chicago, in which he declared that it was impos-
sible to discover any new physics: "The more important fundamental
laws and facts of physical science have all been discovered, and these are
now so firmly established that the possibility of their ever being sup-
planted in consequence of new discoveries is exceedingly remote . . . Our
future discoveries must be looked for in the sixth place of decimals."

His remarks were uttered on the eve of some of the greatest up-
heavals in scientific history, the quantum revolution of 1900, and the
relativity revolution of 1905. The point is that things that are impossi-
ble today violate the known laws of physics, but the laws of physics, as
we know them, can change.

In 1825 the great French philosopher Auguste Comte, writing in

Cours de Philosophic, declared that it was impossible for science to de-
termine what the stars were made of. This seemed like a safe bet at the
time, since nothing was known about the nature of stars. They were so
distant that it was impossible to visit them. Yet just a few years after he
made this claim, physicists (using spectroscopy) declared that the sun
was made of hydrogen. In fact, we now know that by analyzing the
spectral lines from stars emitted billions of years ago it is possible to
determine the chemical nature of most of the universe.

Comte challenged the world of science by making a list of other

"impossibilities":

• He claimed that the "ultimate structure of bodies must always tran-
scend our knowledge." In other words, it was impossible to know
the true nature of matter.

286 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E

• He thought that mathematics could never be used to explain biology
and chemistry. It was impossible, he claimed, to reduce these sci-
ences to mathematics.

• He thought that it was impossible that the study of heavenly bodies
would have any impact on human affairs.

In the nineteenth century it was reasonable to propose these "im-
possibilities" since so little was known about fundamental science. Al-
most nothing was known about the secrets of matter and life. But today
we have the atomic theory, which has opened up a whole new realm
of scientific investigation into the structure of matter. We know about

DNA and the quantum theory, which have unraveled the secrets of life
and chemistry. We also know about meteor impacts from space, which
have not only influenced the course of life on Earth, but have helped to
shape its very existence.

Astronomer John Barrow notes, "Historians still debate the sug-
gestion that Comte's views were partly responsible for the subsequent
decline in French science."

Mathematician David Hilbert, in rejecting Comte's claims, wrote,

"The true reason, according to my thinking, why Comte could not find
an unsolvable problem lies in the fact that there is no such thing as an
unsolvable problem."

But today some scientists are raising a new set of impossibilities:

we will never know what happened before the big bang (or why it

"banged" in the first place), and we will never achieve a "theory of
everything."

Physicist John Wheeler commented on the first "impossible" ques-
tion when he wrote: "Two hundred years ago, you could ask anybody,

'Can we someday understand how life came into being?' and he would
have told you, 'Preposterous! Impossible!' I feel the same way about the
question, 'Will we ever understand how the universe came into being?' "

Astronomer John Barrow adds, "The speed at which light travels is
limited and so, therefore, is our knowledge of the structure of the Uni-
verse. We cannot know whether it is finite or infinite, whether it had a
beginning or will have an end, whether the structure of physics is the

E P I L O G U E 28?

same everywhere, or whether the Universe is ultimately a tidy or an
untidy place... All the great questions about the nature of the Uni-
verse-from its beginning to its end-turn out to be unanswerable."

Barrow is correct in saying that we will never know, with absolute
certainty, the true nature of the universe, in all its glory. But it is pos-
sible to incrementally chip away at these eternal questions and come
tantalizingly close. Instead of representing the absolute boundaries of
our knowledge, these "impossibilities" may perhaps better be seen as
the challenges awaiting the next generation of scientists. These limits
are like piecrusts, made to be broken.

D E T E C T I N G T H E P R E - B I G B A N G E R A

In the case of the big bang, a new generation of detectors is being built
that could settle some of these eternal questions. Today our radiation
detectors in outer space can only measure the microwave radiation
emitted 500,000 years after the big bang, when the first atoms formed.

It is impossible to use this microwave radiation to probe earlier than

300,000 years after the big bang, since radiation from the original fire-
ball was too hot and random to yield useful information.

But if we analyze other types of radiation we may be able to get
even closer to the big bang. Tracking neutrinos, for example, can take
us closer to the instant of the big bang (neutrinos are so elusive that
they can travel through an entire solar system made of solid lead).

Neutrino radiation could take us within a few seconds after the big
bang.

But perhaps the ultimate secret of the big bang will be revealed by
examining "gravity waves," waves that move along the fabric of space-
time. As physicist Rocky Kolb of the University of Chicago says, "By
measuring the properties of the neutrino background we can look
back to one second after the Bang. But gravitational waves from [the]

inflation area are relics of the universe 1 0 seconds after the bang."

3 5

Gravity waves were first predicted by Einstein in 1916; they may
eventually become the most important probe for astronomy. Histori-

288 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
cally each time a new form of radiation was harnessed, a new era in
astronomy was opened up. The first form of radiation was visible light,
used by Galileo to investigate the solar system. The second form of ra-
diation was radio waves, which eventually enabled us to probe the
centers of galaxies to find black holes. Gravity wave detectors may un-
veil the very secrets of creation.

In some sense gravity waves have to exist To see this, consider the
age-old question: what happens if the sun suddenly disappears? Ac-
cording to Newton, we would feel the effects immediately. The Earth
would be instantly thrown out of its orbit and plunged into darkness.

This is because Newton's law of gravity does not take into account ve-
locity, and hence forces act instantly throughout the universe. But ac-
cording to Einstein, nothing can travel faster than light, so it would
take eight minutes for the information about the sun's disappearance
to reach the Earth. In other words, a spherical "shock wave" of gravity
would emerge from the sun and eventually hit the Earth. Outside this
sphere of gravity waves, it would appear as if the sun were still shin-
ing normally, because information about the disappearance of the sun
would not have reached Earth. Inside this sphere of gravity waves,
however, the sun would have already disappeared, as the expanding
shock wave of gravity waves travels at the speed of light.

Another way to see why gravity waves must exist is to visualize a
large bed sheet According to Einstein, space-time is a fabric that can
be warped or stretched, like a curved bed sheet. If we grab a bed sheet
and shake it rapidly we see that waves ripple along the surface of the
bed sheet and travel at a definite velocity. In the same way, gravity
waves can be viewed as waves traveling along the fabric of space-time.

Gravity waves are among the fastest-moving topics in physics today.

In 2003 the first large-scale gravity wave detectors became operational-
called LIGO (Laser Interferometer Gravitational Wave Observatory),
measuring 2.5 miles in length, one is based in Hanford, Washington, and
another in Livingston Parish, Louisiana. It is hoped that LIGO, at a cost
of $365 million, will be able to detect radiation from colliding neutron
stars and black holes.

The next big leap will take place in 2015, when an entirely new

E P I L O G U E 289
generation of satellites will be launched that will analyze gravitational
radiation in outer space from the instant of creation. The three satel-
lites that make up LISA (Laser Interferometer Space Antenna), a joint
project of NASA and the European Space Agency, will be sent into or-
bit around the sun. These satellites will be capable of detecting gravi-
tational waves emitted less than a trillionth of a second after the big
bang. If a gravity wave from the big bang still circulating around the
universe hits one of the satellites, it will disturb the laser beams, and
this disturbance can then be measured in a precise way, giving us

"baby pictures" of the instant of creation itself.

LISA consists of three satellites circling the sun arranged in a tri-
angle, each connected by laser beams 3 million miles long, making it
the largest instrument of science ever created. This system of three
satellites will orbit the sun about 30 million miles from the Earth.

Each satellite will emit a laser beam with only half a watt of power.

By comparing the laser beams coming from the other two satellites,
each satellite will be able to construct an interference pattern of light

If a gravity wave disturbs the laser beams, it will change the interfer-
ence pattern, and the satellite will be able to detect this disturbance.

(The gravity wave does not make the satellites vibrate. It actually cre-
ates a distortion in the space between the three satellites.)

Although the laser beams are very weak, their accuracy will be as-
tounding. They will be able to detect vibrations to within one part in a
billion trillion, corresponding to a shift VlOO the size of an atom. Each
laser beam will be able to detect a gravity wave from a distance of 9 bil-
lion light-years, which covers most of the visible universe.

LISA has the sensitivity to potentially differentiate between several

"pre-big bang" scenarios. One of the hottest topics in theoretical
physics today is calculating the characteristics of the pre-big bang uni-
verse. At present, inflation can describe quite well how the universe
evolved once the big bang took place. But inflation cannot explain why
the big bang took place in the first place. The goal is to use these spec-
ulative models of the pre-big bang era to calculate the gravity radia-
tion emitted by the big bang. Each of the various pre-big bang theories
makes different predictions. The big bang radiation predicted by the

290 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E

Big Splat theory, for example, differs from the radiation predicted by
some of the inflation theories, so LISA might be able to rule out several
of these theories. Obviously, these pre-big bang models cannot be
tested directly, since they involve understanding the universe before
the creation of time itself, but we can test them indirectly since each of
these theories predicts a different radiation spectrum emerging after-
ward from the big bang.

Physicist Rip Thorne writes, "Sometime between 2008 and 2030,
gravitational waves from the Big Bang singularity will be discovered.

There will ensue an era, lasting at least until 2050 . . . These efforts will
reveal intimate details of the Big Bang singularity, and will thereby
verify that some version of string theory is the correct quantum theory
of gravity."

If LISA is unable to differentiate between different pre-big bang
theories, its successor, the Big Bang Observer (BBO) might. It is tenta-
tively scheduled for launch in 2025. The BBO will be able to scan the
entire universe for all binary systems involving neutron stars and
black holes with mass less than one thousand times the mass of the
sun. But its main goal is to analyze gravity waves emitted during the
inflationary phase of the big bang. In this sense, the BBO is specifically
designed to probe the predictions of the inflationary big bang theory.

The BBO is somewhat similar to LISA in design. It will consist of
three satellites moving together in an orbit around the sun, separated
from each other by 50,000 kilometers (these satellites will be much
closer to one another than LISA'S satellites). Each satellite will be able
to fire a 300-watt laser beam. BBO will be able to probe gravity wave
frequencies between LIGO and LISA, filling an important gap. (LISA
can detect gravity waves from 10 to 3,000 hertz, while LIGO can detect
gravity waves of frequency 10 microhertz to 10 millihertz. BBO will be
able to detect frequencies that include both ranges.)

"By 2040 we will have used those laws [of quantum gravity] to pro-
duce high-confidence answers to many deep and puzzling questions,"

Thorne writes, "including . . . What came before the Big Bang singular-
ity, or was there even such a thing as a 'before'? Are there other uni-
verses? And if so, how are they related to or connected to our own

E P I L O G U E 29i
universe? . . . Do the laws of physics permit highly advanced civiliza-
tions to create and maintain wormholes for interstellar travel, and to
create time machines for backward time travel?"

The point is that in the next few decades there should be enough
data pouring in from gravity wave detectors in space to differentiate
between the various pre-big bang theories.

T H E E N D O F T H E U N I V E R S E

The poet T. S. Eliot asked the question, Will the universe die with a
bang or a whimper? Robert Frost asked, Will we all perish in fire or
ice? The latest evidence points to the universe dying in a Big Freeze, in
which temperatures will reach near absolute zero and all intelligent
life will be extinguished. But can we be sure?

Some have raised another "impossible" question. How will we ever
know the ultimate fate of the universe, they ask, since this event is tril-
lions upon trillions of years in the future? Scientists believe that "dark
energy" or the energy of the vacuum seems to be pushing the galaxies
apart at an ever increasing rate, indicating that the universe seems to
be in a runaway mode. Such an expansion would cool the temperature
of the universe and ultimately lead to the Big Freeze. But is this expan-
sion temporary? Could it reverse itself in the future?

For example, in the Big Splat scenario, in which two membranes
collide and create the universe, it appears as if the membranes can col-
lide periodically. If so, then the expansion that appears to lead to a Big

Freeze is only a temporary state that will reverse itself.

What is driving the current acceleration of the universes is dark
energy, which in turn is probably caused by the "cosmological con-
stant." The key, therefore, is to understand this mysterious constant, or
the energy of the vacuum. Does the constant vary with time, or is it
really a constant? At present, no one knows for sure. We know from the

WMAP satellite currently orbiting the Earth that this cosmological
constant seems to be driving the current acceleration of the universe,
but we don't know if it is permanent or not

2 9 2 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

This problem is actually an old one, dating back to 1916 when Ein-
stein first introduced the cosmological constant Soon after proposing
general relativity the previous year, he worked out the cosmological
implications of his own theory. Much to his surprise, he found that the
universe was dynamic, that it either expanded or contracted. But this
idea seemed to contradict the data.

Einstein was encountering the Bentley paradox, which had bedev-
iled even Newton. Back in 1692 the Reverend Richard Bentley wrote

Newton an innocent letter with a devastating question. If Newton's
gravity was always attractive, Bentley asked, then why doesn't the uni-
verse collapse? If the universe consists of a finite collection of stars that
mutually attract each other, then the stars should come together and
the universe should collapse into a fireball! Newton was deeply trou-
bled by this letter, since it pointed out a key flaw in his theory of grav-
ity: any theory of gravity that is attractive is inherently unstable. Any
finite collection of stars will inevitably collapse under gravity.

Newton wrote back that the only way to create a stable universe
was to have an infinite and uniform collection of stars, with each star
being pulled in all directions, so that all the forces cancel out. It was a
clever solution, but Newton was smart enough to realize that such sta-
bility was deceptive. Like a house of cards, the tiniest of vibrations
would cause the whole thing to collapse. It was "metastable"; that is,
it was temporarily stable until the slightest perturbations caused it
to crash. Newton concluded that God was necessary to periodically
nudge the stars a bit so the universe did not collapse.

In other words, Newton saw the universe as a gigantic clock,
wound up by God at the beginning of time and obeying Newton's laws.

It has been ticking automatically ever since, without divine interven-
tion. However, according to Newton, God was necessary to tweak the
stars once in a while so the universe did not collapse into a fireball.

When Einstein stumbled on the Bentley paradox in 1916, his equa-
tions correctly told him that the universe was dynamic-either expand-
ing or contracting-and that a static universe was unstable and would
collapse due to gravity. But the astronomers insisted at that time that

E P I L O G U E 2 9 3
the universe was static and unchanging. So Einstein, bowing to the ob-
servations of the astronomers, added the cosmological constant, an
antigravity force that pushed the stars apart to balance the gravita-
tional pull causing the universe to collapse. (This antigravity force cor-
responded to the energy contained within the vacuum. In this picture
even the vast emptiness of space contains large quantities of invisible
energy.) This constant would have to be chosen very precisely in order
to cancel out the attractive force of gravity.

Later, when Edwin Hubble showed in 1929 that the universe was,
in fact, expanding, Einstein would say that the cosmological constant
was his "greatest blunder." Yet now, seventy years later, it appears as if

Einstein's "blunder," the cosmological constant, could in fact be the
largest source of energy in the universe, making up 73 percent of the
matter-energy content of the universe. (By contrast, the higher ele-
ments that make up our bodies constitute only .03 percent of the uni-
verse.) Einstein's blunder will likely determine the ultimate fate of the
universe.

But where does this cosmological constant come from? At present
no one knows. At the beginning of time, the antigravity force was per-
haps large enough to cause the universe to inflate, creating the big
bang. Then it suddenly disappeared, for reasons that are unknown.

(The universe was still expanding during this period, but at a slower
pace.) And then, about eight billion years after the big bang, the anti-
gravity force resurfaced again, causing the galaxies to push out and
causing the universe to accelerate once again.

So is it "impossible" to determine the ultimate fate of the universe?

Perhaps not. Most physicists believe that quantum effects ultimately
determine the size of the cosmological constant. A naive calculation,
using a primitive version of the quantum theory, shows that the cos-
mological constant is off by a factor of 10 . This is the greatest mis-

120
match in the history of science.

But there is also a consensus among physicists that this anomaly
simply means that we need a theory of quantum gravity. Since the cos-
mological constant arises via quantum corrections, it is necessary to

294 P H Y S I C S OF THE I M P O S S I B L E
have a theory of everything-a theory that will allow us to calculate not
just the Standard Model, but also the value of the cosmological con-
stant, which will determine the ultimate fate of the universe.

So a theory of everything is necessary to determine the ultimate
fate of the universe. The irony is that some physicists believe that it is
impossible to attain a theory of everything.

A T H E O R Y O F E V E R Y T H I N G ?

As I mentioned earlier, string theory is the leading candidate for a "the-
ory of everything," yet there are opposing camps on whether the string
theory lives up to this claim. On the one hand, people like MIT profes-
sor Max Tegmark write, "In 2056,1 think you'll be able to buy a T-shirt
on which are printed equations describing the unified physical laws of
our universe." On the other hand, there is an emerging band of deter-
mined critics who claim that the string bandwagon has yet to deliver.

No matter how many breathless articles or TV documentaries are pro-
duced concerning string theory, it has yet to produce a single testable
fact, some say. It's a theory of nothing, rather than a theory of every-
thing, claim the critics. The debate heated up considerably in 2002
when Stephen Hawking switched sides, quoting the incompleteness
theorem, and said that a theory of everything might even be mathemat-
ically impossible.

It's not surprising that the debate has pitted physicist against physi-
cist, because the goal is so lofty, if elusive. The quest to unify all the
laws of nature has tantalized and lured philosophers and physicists
alike for millennia. Socrates himself once said, "It seemed to me a su-
perlative thing-to know the explanation of everything, why it comes to
be, why it perishes, why it is."

The first serious proposal for a theory of everything dates back to
about 500 BC, when the Greek Pythagoreans are credited with deci-
phering the mathematical laws of music. By analyzing the nodes and
vibrations of a lyre string, they showed that music obeyed remarkably
simple mathematics. They then speculated that all of nature could be

E P I L O G U E 295
explained in the harmonies of the lyre string. (In some sense, string
theory brings back the dream of the Pythagoreans.)

In modern times nearly all the giants of twentieth-century physics
tried their luck with a unified field theory. But, as Freeman Dyson cau-
tions, "The ground of physics is littered with the corpses of unified the-
ories."

In 1928 the New York Times ran the sensational headline "Einstein
on verge of great discovery; resents intrusion." The news story helped
spark a media feeding frenzy over a theory of everything that was
whipped up to a feverish pitch. Headlines blared "Einstein is amazed
at stir over theory. Holds 100 journalists at bay for a week." Scores of
journalists swarmed around his home in Berlin, maintaining a non-
stop vigil, waiting to catch a glimpse of the genius and grab a headline.

Einstein was forced to go into hiding.

Astronomer Arthur Eddington wrote to Einstein: "You may be
amused to hear that one of our great department stores in London (Sel-
fridges) has posted on its window your paper (the six pages pasted up
side by side) so that passers-by can read it all through. Large crowds
gather around to read it." (In 1923 Eddington proposed his own unified
field theory on which he worked tirelessly for the rest of his life, until
he died in 1944.)

In 1946 Erwin Schrodinger, one of the founders of quantum me-
chanics, held a press conference to propose his unified field theory.

Even Ireland's Prime Minister, Eamon De Valera, showed up. When a
reporter asked him what he would do if his theory was wrong,

Schrodinger replied, "I believe I am right. I shall look like an awful fool
if I am wrong." (Schrodinger was humiliated when Einstein politely
pointed out the errors in his theory.)

The harshest of all critics of unification was physicist Wolfgang

Pauli. He chided Einstein, saying, "What God has torn asunder, let no
man put together." He mercilessly put down any half-baked theory
with the quip: "It's not even wrong." So it is ironic that the supreme
cynic Pauli himself caught the bug. In the 1950s he proposed his own
unified field theory with Werner Heisenberg.

In 1958 Pauli presented the Heisenberg-Pauli unified theory at Co-

296 P H Y S I C S OF T H E I M P O S S I B L E
lumbia University. Niels Bohr was in the audience, and he was not im-
pressed. Bohr stood up and said, "We in the back are convinced that
your theory is crazy. But what divides us is whether your theory is
crazy enough." The criticism was crushing. Since all the obvious theo-
ries had been considered and rejected, the true unified field theory
must be a dazzling departure from the past. The Heisenberg-Pauli the-
ory was simply too conventional, too ordinary, too sane to be the true
theory. (That year Pauli was disturbed when Heisenberg commented
on a radio broadcast that only a few technical details were left in their
theory. Pauli sent his friends a letter with a blank rectangle, with the
caption, "This is to show the world I can paint like Titian. Only techni-
cal details are missing")

C R I T I C I S M S O F S T R I N G T H E O R Y

Today the leading (and only) candidate for a theory of everything is
string theory. But, again, a backlash has arisen. Opponents claim that
to get a tenured position at a top university you have to work on string
theory. If you don't you will be unemployed. It's the fad of the moment,
and it's not good for physics.

I smile when I hear this criticism, because physics, like all human
endeavors, is subject to fads and fashions. The fortunes of great theo-
ries, especially on the cutting edge of human knowledge, can rise and
fall like hemlines. In fact, years ago the tables were turned; string the-
ory was historically an outcast, a renegade theory, the victim of the
bandwagon effect.

String theory was born in 1968, when two young postdocs, Gabriel

Veneziano and Mahiko Suzuki, stumbled on a formula that seemed to
describe the collisions of subatomic particles. Quickly it was discov-
ered that this marvelous formula could be derived by the collision of
vibrating strings. But by 1974 the theory was dead in its tracks. A new
theory, quantum chromodynamics (QCD), or the theory of quarks and
the strong interaction, was a juggernaut flattening all other theories.

E P I L O G U E 297

People left string theory in droves to work on QCD. All the funding,
jobs, and recognition went to physicists working on the quark model.

I remember those dark years well. Only the foolhardy or the stub-
born persisted in working on string theory. And when it became known
that these strings could vibrate only in ten dimensions, the theory be-
came the butt of jokes. String pioneer John Schwarz at Cal Tech would
sometimes bump into Richard Feynman in the elevator. Ever the joker,

Feynman would ask, "Well, John, and how many dimensions are you in
today?" We used to joke that the only place to find a string theorist was
in the unemployment line. (Nobel laureate Murray Gell-Mann, founder
of the quark model, once confided to me that he took pity on string the-
orists and created a "nature preserve for endangered string theorists" at

Cal Tech so people like John wouldn't lose their jobs.)

Given that today so many young physicists are rushing to work on
string theory, Steve Weinberg has written, "String theory provides our
only present source of candidates for a final theory-how could anyone
expect that many of the brightest young theorists would not work
on it?"

I s S T R I N G T H E O R Y U N T E S T A B L E ?

One major criticism of string theory today is that it is untestable. It
would take an atom smasher the size of the galaxy to test this theory,
critics claim.

But this criticism neglects the fact that most science is done indi-
rectly, not directly. No one has ever visited the sun to do a direct test,
but we know it is made of hydrogen because we can analyze its spec-
tral lines.

Or take black holes. The theory of black holes dates back to 1783,
when John Michell published an article in the Philosophical Transac-
tions of the Royal Society He claimed that a star could be so massive
that "all light emitted from such a body would be made to return to it
by its own proper gravity." Michell's "dark star" theory languished for

2 9 8 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
centuries because a direct test was impossible. In 1939 Einstein even
wrote a paper showing that such a dark star could not form by natural
means. The criticism was that these dark stars were inherently
untestable because they were, by definition, invisible. Yet today the

Hubble Space Telescope has given us gorgeous evidence of black
holes. We now believe that billions of them could lurk in the hearts of
galaxies; scores of wandering black holes could exist in our own
galaxy. But the point is that the evidence for black holes is all indirect;
that is, we have gathered information about black holes by analyzing
the accretion disk that swirls around them.

Furthermore, many "untestable" theories ultimately become
testable. It took two thousand years to prove the existence of atoms af-
ter they were first proposed by Democritus. Nineteenth-century physi-
cists such as Ludwig Boltzmann were hounded to death for believing
in that theory, yet today we have gorgeous photographs of atoms. Pauli
himself introduced the concept of the neutrino in 1930, a particle so
elusive it can pass through blocks of solid lead the size of an entire star
system and not be absorbed. Pauli said, "I have committed the ultimate
sin; I have introduced a particle that can never be observed." It was

"impossible" to detect the neutrino, so it was considered little more
than science fiction for several decades. Yet today we can produce
beams of neutrinos.

There are, in fact, a number of experiments that will provide,
physicists hope, the first indirect tests of string theory:

• The Large Hadron Collider (LHC) might be powerful
enough to produce "sparticles," or superparticles, which are
the higher vibrations predicted by superstring theory (as
well as by other supersymmetric theories).

• As I mentioned earlier, in 2015 the Laser Interferome-
ter Space Antenna (LISA) will be launched in space. LISA
and its successor, the Big Bang Observer, may be sensitive
enough to test several "pre-big bang" theories, including
versions of the string theory.

• A number of labs are investigating the presence of

E P I L O G U E 2 9 9
higher dimensions by looking at deviations from Newton's
famed inverse-square law at the millimeter scale. (If there is
a fourth spatial dimension, then gravity should fall by the in-
verse cube, not the inverse square.) The latest version of
string theory (M-theory) predicts there are eleven dimen-
sions.

• Many labs are trying to detect dark matter, since the

Earth is moving in a cosmic wind of dark matter. String the-
ory makes specific, testable predictions about the physical
properties of dark matter because dark matter is probably a
higher vibration of the string (e.g., the photino).

• It is hoped that a series of additional experiments (e.g.,
on neutrino polarization in the south pole) will detect the
presence of mini-black holes and other strange objects by
analyzing anomalies in cosmic rays, whose energies can
easily exceed those of the LHC. Cosmic ray experiments and
the LHC will open a new, exciting frontier beyond the Stan-
dard Model.

• And there are some physicists who hold out the possi-
bility that the big bang was so explosive that perhaps a tiny
superstring was blown up into astronomical proportions. As
physicist Alexander Vilenkin of Tufts University writes, "A
very exciting possibility is that superstrings . . . can have as-
tronomical dimensions... We would then be able to ob-
serve them in the sky and directly test superstring theory."

(The probability of finding a huge, relic superstring that was
blown up during the big bang is quite small.)

I s P H Y S I C S I N C O M P L E T E ?

In 1980 Stephen Hawking helped to spark interest in a theory of every-
thing with his lecture entitled "Is the End in Sight for Theoretical

Physics?" in which he said, "We may see a complete theory within the
lifetime of some of those present here." He claimed that there was a

3 0 0 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
fifty-fifty chance that the final theory would be found in the next
twenty years. But when the year 2000 arrived and there was no con-
sensus on the theory of everything, he changed his mind and said that
there was a fifty-fifty chance of finding it in another twenty years.

Then in 2002 Hawking changed his mind once again, declaring
that GodePs incompleteness theorem may suggest a fatal flaw in his
original line of thinking. He wrote, "Some people will be very disap-
pointed if there is not an ultimate theory that can be formulated as a fi-
nite number of principles. I used to belong to that camp, but I have
changed my mind . . . Godel's theorem ensured there would always be
a job for mathematicians. I think M-theory will do the same for phys-
icists."

His argument is an old one: since mathematics is incomplete and
the language of physics is mathematics, there will always be true phys-
ical statements that are forever beyond our reach, and hence a theory
of everything is not possible. Since the incompleteness theorem killed
off the Greek dream of proving all true statements in mathematics, it
will also put a theory of everything forever beyond our reach.

Freeman Dyson said it eloquently when he wrote, "Godel proved
the world of pure mathematics is inexhaustible; no finite set of axioms
and rules of inference can ever encompass the whole of mathemat-
i c s . . . I hope that an analogous situation exists in the physical world.

If my view of the future is correct, it means that the world of physics
and astronomy is also inexhaustible; no matter how far we go into the
future, there will always be new things happening, new information
coming in, new worlds to explore, a constantly expanding domain of
life, consciousness, and memory."

Astrophysicist John Barrow summarizes this logic this way: "Sci-
ence is based on mathematics; mathematics cannot discover all truths;
therefore science cannot discover all truths."

Such an argument may or may not be true, but there are potential
flaws. Professional mathematicians for the most part ignore the incom-
pleteness theorem in their work. This is because the incompleteness
theorem begins by analyzing statements that refer to themselves; that

E P I L O G U E 301
is, they are self-referential. For example, statements like the following
are paradoxical:

This sentence is false.

I am a liar.

This statement cannot be proven.

In the first case, if the sentence is true, it means it is false. If the
sentence is false, then the statement is true. Likewise, if I am telling the
truth, then I am telling a lie; and if I am telling a lie, then I am telling
the truth. In the last case, if the sentence is true, then it cannot be
proven to be true.

(The second statement is the famous liar's paradox. The Cretan
philosopher Epimenides used to illustrate this paradox by saying, "All

Cretans are liars." However, Saint Paul missed the point entirely and
wrote, in his epistle to Titus, "One of Crete's own prophets has said it,

'Cretans are always liars, evil brutes, lazy gluttons' He has surely told
the truth.")

The incompleteness theorem builds on statements such as "This
sentence cannot be proven using the axioms of arithmetic" and creates
a sophisticated web of these self-referential paradoxes.

Hawking, however, uses the incompleteness theorem to show that
a theory of everything cannot exist. He claims that the key to Godel's
incompleteness theorem is that mathematics is self-referential, and
physics suffers from this disease as well. Since the observer cannot be
separated from the observation process, it means that physics will al-
ways refer to itself, since we cannot leave the universe. In the final
analysis, the observer is also made of atoms and molecules, and hence
must be an integral part of the experiment he is performing.

But there is a way to avoid Hawking's criticism. To avoid the para-
doxes inherent in Godel's theorem, professional mathematicians today
simply state that their work excludes all self-referential statements.

They can then circumvent the incompleteness theorem. To a large de-
gree, the explosive development of mathematics since Godel's time has

3 0 2 P H Y S I C S O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E
been accomplished simply by ignoring the incompleteness theorem,
that is, by postulating that recent work makes no self-referential state-
ments.

In the same way it may be possible to construct a theory of every-
thing that can explain every known experiment independent of the ob-
server/observed dichotomy. If such a theory of everything can explain
everything from the origin of the big bang to the visible universe that
we see around us, then it becomes academic how we describe the in-
teraction between the observer and observed. In fact, one criterion for
a theory of everything should be that its conclusions are totally inde-
pendent of how we make the split between the observer and the ob-
served.

Furthermore, nature may be inexhaustible and limitless, even if it
is based on a handful of principles. Consider a chess game. Ask an
alien from another planet to figure out the rules of chess simply by
watching the game. After a while the alien can figure out how pawns,
bishops, and kings move. The rules of the game are finite and simple.

But the number of possible games is truly astronomical. In the same
way the rules of nature may also be finite and simple, but the applica-
tions of those rules may be inexhaustible. Our goal is to find the rules
of physics.

In some sense we already have a complete theory of many phe-
nomena. No one has ever seen a defect in Maxwell's equations for
light The Standard Model is often called a "theory of almost every-
thing." Assume for the moment that we can shut off gravity. Then the

Standard Model becomes a perfectly sound theory of all phenomena
besides gravity. The theory may be ugly, but it works. Even in the pres-
ence of the incompleteness theorem, we have a perfectly reasonable
theory of everything (besides gravity).

To me it is truly remarkable that on a single sheet of paper one can
write down the laws that govern all known physical phenomena, cov-
ering forty-three orders of magnitude, from the farthest reaches of the
cosmos over 10 billion light-years away to the microworld of quarks
and neutrinos. On that sheet of paper would be just two equations, Ein-
stein's theory of gravity and the Standard Model. To me this reveals the

E P I L O G U E 3 0 3
ultimate simplicity and harmony of nature at the fundamental level.

The universe could have been perverse, random, or capricious. And
yet it appears to us to be whole, coherent, and beautiful.

Nobel laureate Steve Weinberg compares our search for a theory of
everything to the search for the North Pole. For centuries the ancient
mariners worked with maps in which the North Pole was missing. All
compass needles and charts pointed to this missing piece of the map,
yet no one had actually visited it In the same way, all our data and the-
ories point to a theory of everything. It is the missing piece of our equa-
tions.

There will always be things that are beyond our grasp, that are im-
possible to explore (such as the precise position of an electron, or the
world existing beyond the reach of the speed of light). But the funda-
mental laws, I believe, are knowable and finite. And the coming years
in physics could be the most exciting of all, as we explore the universe
with a new generation of particle accelerators, space-based gravity
wave detectors, and other technologies. We are not at the end, but at
the beginning of a new physics. But whatever we find, there will al-
ways be new horizons continually awaiting us.

P R E F A C E

Page xv: This has happened several times. .. The reason that this is true
is because of the quantum theory. When we add all possible quantum cor-
rections to a theory (a tedious process called "renormalization") we find that
phenomena that were previously forbidden, at the classical level, reenter the
calculation. This means that unless something is explicitly forbidden (by a
conservation law, for example) then it reenters into the theory when quan-
tum corrections are added.

2 : I N V I S I B I L I T Y

Page 17: Invisibility played a central part in Plato's theory... Plato wrote,

"No man would keep his hands off what was not his own when he could
safely take what he liked out of the market, or go into houses and lie with
anyone at his pleasure, or kill or release from prison whom he would, and
in all respects be like a God among men . . . If you could imagine anyone ob-
taining this power of becoming invisible, and never doing any wrong or
touching what was another's, he would be thought by the lookers-on to be
the most wretched idiot..."

Page 21: Nathan Myhrvold, former chief technology officer at Mi-
crosoft .. .Nathan Myhrvold, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006,
p. 69.

Page 23: That's why he now declines. .. Josie Glausiusz, Discover Maga-
zine, November 2006.

Page 23: Such a lens would offer..." "Metamaterials found to work for

((
visible light," Eurekalert, www.eurekalert.org/pub_releases/2007-01, 2007.

Also, New Scientist Magazine, December 18, 2006.

3 : P H A S E R S A N D D E A T H S T A R S

Page 36: During World War II, the Nazis... The Nazis also sent a team
to India to investigate some ancient mythological claims of the Hindus (sim-
ilar to the plot line in Raiders of the Lost Ark). The Nazis were interested in

3 0 6 N O T E S
the writings of the Mahabharata, which described strange, powerful
weapons, including flying craft.

Page 36: Weapons created from focused light beams. .. Movies like this
have also spread a number of misconceptions about lasers. Laser beams are
actually invisible unless they are scattered by particles in the air. So when

Tom Cruise had to navigate through a maze of laser beams in Mission Impos-
sible, the lattice of laser beams should have been invisible, not red. Also in
many ray gun battles in the movies you can actually see the laser pulses zip
across a room, which is impossible, since laser light travels at the speed of
light, 186,000 miles per second.

Page 37: Writing about Einstein, Planck said, "That he may sometimes
have missed the target..Asimov and Schulman, p. 124.

4 : T E L E P O R T A T I O N

Page 53: The earliest mention of teleportation can be found... The best
recorded example of teleportation is dated October 24, 1593, when Gil Perez,
a palace guard in the Philippine military guarding the governor in Manila,
suddenly appeared in the Plaza Mayor of Mexico City. Dazed and confused,
he was arrested by the Mexican authorities who thought he was in league
with Satan. When he was brought before the Most Holy Tribunal of the In-
quisition, all he could say in his defense was that he had disappeared from

Manila to Mexico "in less time than it takes a cock to crow." (As incredible as
the historic accounts of this incident may be, historian Mike Dash has noted
that the earliest records of Perez's disappearance date from a century after
his disappearance, and hence cannot be fully trusted.)

Page 54: Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, best known for his Sherlock Holmes
novels... Doyle's early work was renowned for the methodical, logical think-
ing typical of the medical profession, as seen in the superb deductions of Sher-
lock Holmes. So why did Doyle decide to shift sharply away from the cold,
rational logic of Mr. Holmes to the seat-of-your-pants, harrowing adventures of

Professor Challenger, who delved into the forbidden worlds of mysticism, the
occult, and the fringes of science? The author was profoundly changed by the
sudden, unexpected deaths of several close relatives in World War I, including
his beloved son Kingsley, his brother, two brothers-in-law, and two nephews.

These losses would leave a deep, lasting emotional scar on him.

Depressed by their tragic deaths, Doyle embarked on a lifelong fascina-
tion with the world of the occult, believing perhaps that he might be able to
communicate with the dead via spiritualism. He abruptly shifted from the
world of rational, forensic science into mysticism, and went on to give fa-
mous lectures around the world about unexplained psychic phenomena.

Page 58: This uncertainty was finally codified by Heisenberg... More
precisely, the Heisenberg uncertainty principle says that the uncertainty in
the position of a particle, multiplied by the uncertainty in its momentum,
must be greater than or equal to Planck's constant divided by 2JI. Or the prod-
uct of the uncertain in a particle's energy times the uncertainty in its time

N O T E S 3 0 7
must also be greater than or equal to Planck's constant divided by 2 jt. If we
let Planck's constant go to zero, then this reduces to ordinary Newtonian the-
ory, in which all uncertainties are zero.

The fact that you cannot know the position, momentum, energy, or time
of an electron prompted Tryggvi Emilsson to wisecrack, "Historians have
concluded that Heisenberg must have been contemplating his love life when
he discovered the Uncertainty Principle:-When he had the time, he didn't
have the energy and,-when the moment was right, he couldn't figure out the
position.") Barrow, Between Inner Space and Outer Space, p. 187.

Page 58: "For my part, at least, I am convinced that He doesn't throw
dice." Raku, Einstein's Cosmos, p. 127.

Page 60: Bemoaning the undeniable experimental successes of the quan-
tum theory, Einstein wrote,. .. Asimov and Schulman, p. 211.

Page 62: Everything changed in 1993, when scientists at IBM... Assume
for the moment that macroscopic objects, including people, can be tele-
ported. This raises subtle philosophical and theological questions about the
existence of a "soul" if a person's body is teleported. If you are teleported to
a new location, does your soul also move with you?

Some of these ethical questions were explored in James Patrick Kelley's
novel Think Like a Dinosaur. In this tale a woman is teleported to another
planet, but there is a problem with the transmission. Instead of the original
body being destroyed, the original remains untouched, with all her emotions
intact. Suddenly, there are two copies of her. Naturally, when the copy is told
to enter the teleportation machine to be disintegrated she refuses. This cre-
ates a crisis, because the cold-blooded aliens, who provided the technology
in the first place, view this as a purely practical matter to "balance the equa-
tion," while emotion-prone humans are more sympathetic to her cause.

In most stories teleportation is viewed as a godsend. But in Stephen

Ring's "The Jaunt" the author explores the implications of what happens if
there are dangerous side effects to teleportation. In the future, teleportation
is commonplace and fondly called "The Jaunt." Just before teleporting to

Mars, a father explains to his children the curious history behind the Jaunt,
that it was first discovered by a scientist who used it to teleport mice, but the
only mice that survived teleportation were ones that had been anesthetized.

Mice that were awake while being teleported died horribly. So humans are
routinely put to sleep before they are teleported. The only man who was ever
teleported while awake was a convicted criminal who was promised a full
pardon if he submitted to this experiment. But after being teleported, he suf-
fered a massive heart attack, uttering the last words, "It's eternity in there."

Unfortunately, the son, hearing this fascinating tale, decides to hold his
breath so that he won't be anesthetized. The results are tragic. After being
teleported he suddenly goes insane. His hair turns white, his eyes are yel-
lowed with age, and he tries to claw out his eyes. The secret is now revealed.

Physical matter is teleported instantly, but to the mind the trip takes an eter-
nity, time appears endless, and the person is driven totally insane.

3 0 8 N O T E S

Page 64: "For the first time," said Eugene Polzik, one of the researchers...

Curt Suplee, "Top 100 Science Stories of 2006," Discover Magazine, December 2006, p. 35.

Page 64: "We're talking about a beam of about 5,000 particles..Zeeya

Merali, New Scientist Magazine, June 13, 2007.

Page 68: "With luck, and with the help of recent theoretical advances,..

David Deutsch, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006, p. 69.

5 : T E L E P A T H Y

Page 71: The careers of several magicians and mentalists, in fact, have
been based... At dinner parties one can also perform amazing feats of
telepathy. Ask everyone at a party to write down a name on a slip of paper
and put the slips in a hat. One by one you pick out a sealed slip of paper and,
before opening it, read aloud the name written on it. The audience will be
stunned. Telepathy has been demonstrated right before their eyes. Some ma-
gicians, in fact, have risen to fame and fortune primarily because of this
trick.

(The secret to this amazing feat of mind reading is the following. Pull out
the first slip of paper and read it silently to yourself, but announce that you
are having difficulty reading it because the "psychic ether" is clouded. Pull
out a second slip of paper but don't open it yet Now recite the name you read
on the first slip of paper. The person who wrote that first name will be
amazed, thinking you have read the sealed, second slip of paper. Now open
up the second slip of paper and silently read it to yourself. Pull out the third
sealed slip of paper, and read aloud the name on the second slip of paper. Re-
peat this process. Each time you say aloud the name on a slip of paper, you
are reading the contents of the previous slip of paper.)

Page 72: Gamblers also are able to read people's minds... A person's
mental state can be roughly determined by tracing the precise path taken by
a roving eye as it scans a photograph. By shining a thin light beam onto the
eyeball, a reflected image of the beam can be cast onto the wall. By tracing
out the path taken by this reflected beam of light on the wall one can then
reconstruct precisely where the eye is roving as it scans a picture. (When
scanning a person's face in a picture, for example, the observer's eye usually
moves rapidly back and forth between the person's eyes in the picture, and
then wanders to the mouth, and back to the eyes, before it scans the entire
picture.)

As a person scans a picture, one can calculate the size of his pupils and
hence whether he experiences pleasurable or unpleasurable thoughts, as it
scans particular parts of a picture. In this way, one can read a person's emo-
tional state. (A murderer, for example, would experience strong emotions as
he looks at a picture of a murder scene and scans the precise location of the
body. Only the murderer and the police would know the location.)

Page 73: The first scientific studies of telepathy. .. The Society for Psychi-
cal Research included Lord Rayleigh (Nobel laureate), Sir William Crookes

N O T E S 309

(inventor of the Crookes tube used in electronics), Charles Richet (Nobel lau-
reate), American psychologist William James, and Prime Minister Arthur

Balfour. Its supporters have included such luminaries as Mark Twain, Arthur

Conan Doyle, Alfred Lord Tennyson, Lewis Carroll, and Carl Jung.

Page 73: One researcher connected with the society... Rhine originally
planned to become a minister, but then switched to botany while attending
the University of Chicago. After attending a talk in 1922 given by Sir Arthur

Conan Coyle, who was giving lectures around the country about communi-
cating with the dead, Rhine became fascinated with psychic phenomena.

Later he read the book The Survival of Man, by Sir Oliver Lodge, about pur-
ported communications with the deceased during seances, which further ce-
mented Rhine's interest. He was, however, dissatisfied with the current state
of spiritualism; its reputation was often tarred with unsavory tales of frauds
and trickery. In fact, Rhine's own investigations exposed a certain spiritual-
ist, Margery Crandon, as a fraud, earning him the scorn of many spiritual-
ists, including Conan Doyle.

Page 74: "There is left then, only the telepathic explanation..." Randi, p. 51

Page 74: Further tests showed that the mice possessed no telepathic
power... Randi, p. 143.

Page 79: In particular, he noticed unusual activity... San Francisco

Chronicle, November 26, 2001.

Page 80: Some critics also claim... Lastly, there are also legal and moral
questions if limited forms of telepathy become commonplace in the future. In
many states it is illegal to tape-record a person's phone conversation without
his or her permission, so in the future it might be illegal to record one's
thought patterns without his or her permission as well. Also civil libertarians
may object to reading a person's thought patterns without his or her permis-
sion, in any context. Given the slippery nature of a person's thoughts, it may
never be legal to enter thought patterns in a court of law. In Minority Report,
starring Tom Cruise, there was the ethical question of whether you can arrest
someone for a crime that the person hasn't committed yet. In the future there
might be the question of whether a person's intention to commit a crime, as
evidenced by thought patterns, constitutes incriminating evidence against
that person. If a person makes threats verbally, would that count as heavily as
if a person made these threats mentally?

There will also be the question of governments and security agencies
that do not care about any laws whatsoever and subject people involuntarily
to brain scans. Would this constitute proper legal behavior? Would it be le-
gal to read the mind of a terrorist to find out his or her plans? Would it be le-
gal to implant false memories in order to deceive individuals? In Total

Recall, starring Arnold Schwarzenegger, the question arose continually
whether a person's memories were real, or implanted, which affects the very
nature of who we are.

These questions are likely to remain purely hypothetical for decades to

310 N O T E S
come, but as the technology slowly advances, inevitably the technology will
raise moral, legal, and societal issues. Fortunately, we have plenty of time to
sort them out.

Page 81: "But if that's the device you want to build..." Douglas Fox, New Scientist Magazine, May 4, 2006.

Page 81: In this sense, an fMRI mental translator may make it possible...

Philip Ross, Scientific American, September 2003.

Page 83: Such a device would never be as sophisticated... Science Daily,
www.sciencedaily.com, April 9, 2005.

Page 84: This process is difficult and tedious, since you have to carefully
process out spurious waves... Cavelos, p. 184.

6 : P S Y C H O K I N E S I S

Page 90: Before Geller's appearance, Carson consulted with Randi... The

Amazing Randi, disgusted that professional magicians skilled at fooling
gullible individuals could claim psychic powers and hence defraud the un-
suspecting public, began a career of exposing fakes. In particular he took de-
light in duplicating every feat performed by the psychics. The Amazing

Randi is in the tradition of the Great Houdini, a magician who also began a
second career exposing fakes and charlatans who would use their magical
skills to defraud others for private gain. In particular, Randi boasts that he
can even deceive scientists with his tricks. He says, "I can go into a lab and
fool the rear ends off any group of scientists." Cavelos, p. 220.

Page 93: The National Research Council's report studied creating a hypo-
thetical "First Earth battalion"... Cavelos, p. 240.

Page 93: The report concluded that there was "no scientific justifica-
tion ..." Cavelos, p. 240.

Page 95: By training them to vary their brain waves... Philip Ross, Sci-
entific American, September 2003.

Page 95: These monkeys were then able to control... Miguel Nicolelis
and John Chapin, Scientific American, October 2002.

Page 96: "Then I knew that everything could go forward..." Ryla Dunn,

Discover Magazine, December 2006, p. 39.

Page 101: But, he admits, "it still takes the best groups in the world..."

Aristides A. G. Requicha, "Nanorobots," http://www.lmr.usc.edu/~lmr/pub-
lications/nanorobotics.

7 : R O B O T S

Page 104: even renowned physicist Roger Penrose of Oxford... Professor

Penrose argues that quantum effects must be present in the brain that make
possible human thought. Most computer scientists would say that each neu-
ron in the brain can be duplicated by a complex series of transistors; hence
the brain can be reduced to a classical device. The brain is supremely com-
plicated but in essence consists of a bunch of neurons whose behavior can
be duplicated by transistors. Penrose disagrees. He claims that there are

N O T E S 311
structures in a cell, called microtubules, that exhibit quantum behavior, so
the brain can never be reduced to a simple collection of electronic compo-
nents.

Page 104: Colin McGinn of Rutgers University says that artificial intelli-
gence ... Kaku, Visions, p. 95.

Page 111: Steve Grand, director of the Cyberlife Institute, says... Cavelos,
p. 90.

Page 111: "He failed, and I failed on the same problem in my 1981 Ph.D.

thesis." Rodney Brooks, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006, p. 60.

Page 112: "It doesn't mean Kasparov isn't a deep thinker..." Raku, Visions, p. 61.

Page 113: Not surprisingly, Lenat's motto is, Intelligence is 10 million
rules. Kaku, Visions, p. 65.

Page 114: "We were killing ourselves trying to create a pale shadow..."

Bill Gates, Skeptic Magazine, vol. 12, no. 12, 2006, p. 35.

Page 114: "Even something as simple as telling the difference between an
open door and a window can be devilishly tricky for a robot." Bill Gates, Scientific American, January 2007, p. 63.

Page 115: "No one can say with any certainty when-or if-this indus-
try. .." Scientific American, January 2007, p. 58.

Page 118: "There's no machine today that can do that." Susan Kruglinski,

"The Top 100 Science Stories of 2006," Discover Magazine, p. 16.

Page 118: Hans Moravec says, "Fully intelligent machines will result..."

Raku, Visions, p. 76.

Page 119: " Please! Please! I need this! It's so important...' " Kaku, Visions, p. 92.

Page 120: Neurologist Dr. Antonio Damasio of the University of Iowa...

Cavelos, p. 98.

Page 120: "Computers just don't get it." Cavelos, p. 101.

Page 120: As Russian novelist Fyodor Dostoevsky wrote... Barrow, The-
ories of Everything, p. 149.

Page 121: "Our successors will be amazed by the amount of scientific rub-
bish .. ."Sydney Brenner, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006, p. 35.

Page 124: "It is possible that we may become pets of the computers..."

Kaku, Visions, p. 135.

Page 124: "When that happens, our DNA will find itself out of a job,..."

Kaku, Visions, p. 188.

Page 124: So in the long term some have advocated a merging of carbon
and silicon technology... So our mechanical creations may ultimately be the
key to our long-term survival. As Marvin Minsky says, "We humans are not
the end of evolution, so if we can make a machine that's as smart as a per-
son, we can probably also make one that's much smarter. There's no point
in making just another person. You want to make one that can do things we
can't" Kruglinski, "The 100 Top Science Stories of 2006," p. 18.

Page 125: In the far future, robots or humanlike cyborgs... Immortality,

312 N O T E S
of course, is something that people have desired ever since humans, alone in
the animal kingdom, began to contemplate our own mortality. Commenting
on immortality, Woody Allen once said, "I don't want to achieve immortality
through my work. I want to achieve it through not dying. I don't want to live
on in the hearts of my countrymen. I would rather live on in my apartment"

Moravec, in particular, believes that in the far future we will merge with our
creations to create a higher order of intelligence. This would require dupli-
cating the 100 billion neurons that are in our brain, each of which in turn is
connected to perhaps several thousand other neurons. As we sit on the oper-
ating room table, there is a robot shell lying next to us. Surgery is performed
such that as we remove a single neuron a duplicate silicon neuron is created
in the robot shell. As time goes by every single neuron in our body is re-
placed by a silicon neuron in the robot, so that we are conscious throughout
the operation. At the end, our entire brain has been continuously transferred
into the robot shell while we witnessed the entire event One day we are dy-
ing in our decrepit, decaying body. The next day we find ourselves inside im-
mortal bodies, with the same memories and personality, without losing
consciousness.

8 : E X T R A T E R R E S T R I A L S A N D U F O S

Page 132: Nevertheless, Seth Shostak, senior astronomer at SETI, opti-
mistically believes... Jason Stahl, Discover Magazine, "Top 100 Stores of 2006," December 2006, p. 80.

Page 134: "It's hard to imagine how life could survive that extreme on-
slaught," he says. Cavelos, p. 13.

Page 135: French astronomer Dr. Jacques Lasker estimates that... Cave-
los, p. 12.

Page 136: "We believe that life in the form of microbes..." Ward and

Brownlee, p. xiv.

Page 137: "We're the first generation that has a realistic chance of discov-
ering life on another planet." Cavelos, p. 26.

Page 146: As I've discussed in my previous books... In general, although
local languages and cultures will continue to thrive in different regions of
the Earth, there will emerge a planetary language and culture that spans the
continents. This global and local culture will exist simultaneously. This sit-
uation already exists with regards to the elites of all societies.

There are also forces that oppose this march to a planetary system.

These are the terrorists who unconsciously, instinctively, realize that the
progression to a planetary civilization is one that will make tolerance and
secular pluralism a centerpiece of their emerging culture, and this prospect
is a threat to people who feel more comfortable living in the last millennium.

9 : S T A R S H I P S

Page 155: Mathematician and philosopher Bertrand Russell once
lamented... Kaku, Hyperspace, p. 302.

N O T E S 313

Page 176: Nordley says, 'With a constellation of pinhead-sized space-
craft ..." Gilster, p. 242.

1 0 : A N T I M A T T E R A N D A N T I - U N I V E R S E S

Page 183: Dr. Steven Howe, of Synergistics Technologies in Los Alamos...

NASA, http://science.nasa.gov, April 12, 1999.

Page 187: He wrote, "It is more important to have beauty in one's equa-
tions than to have them fit experiments..." Cole, p. 225.

1 1 : F A S T E R T H A N L I G H T

Page 203: As physicist Matt Visser of Washington University says....

Cavelos, p. 137.

Page 203: Sir Martin Rees, Royal Astronomer of Great Britain, even
says... Kaku, Parallel Worlds, p. 307.

Page 204: "I thought there should be a way of using these concepts..."

Cavelos, p. 151.

Page 204: "In back, they wouldn't see anything-just black-because the
light of the stars.. ."Cavelos, p. 154.

Page 207: "We would need a series of generators of exotic matter..."

Cavelos, p. 154.

Page 210: "Pass through this magic ring and-presto!.. ."Raku, Parallel Worlds,?. 121.

Page 211: He says, "You need about minus one Jupiter mass to do the
job. .." Cavelos, p. 145.

Page 211: "But it will also turn out that the technology for making worm-
holes. . ."Hawking, p. 146.

1 2 : T I M E T R A V E L

Page 216: In the novel Janus Equation, writer G. Spruill explored one...

Nahin, p. 322.

Page 217: "As for the present, if it were always present and never
moved.. ."Pickover, p. 10.

Page 222: "Because we physicists have realized that the nature of time..."

Nahin, p. ix.

Page 223: As physicist Richard Gott has said, "I don't think there's any
question.. ."Pickover, p. 130.

Page 224: Gott says, "A collapsing loop of string large enough..." Raku, Parallel Worlds, p. 142.

Page 225: "If he marries in the past can he be tried for bigamy.. ."Nahin, p. 248.

1 3 : P A R A L L E L U N I V E R S E S

Page 232: Henderson writes, "Like a Black Hole,..." Raku, Hyperspace, p. 22.

Page 233: "At first glance, I like your idea enormously..." Pais, p. 330.

314 N O T E S

Page 235: Enrico Fermi, horrified at the proliferation of subatomic parti-
cles . . . Kaku, Hyperspace, p. 118.

Page 239: Max Tegmark of MIT believes that in fifty years... Max

Tegmark, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006, p. 37.

Page 242: Schrodinger railed against this interpretation of his theory...

Cole, p. 222.

Page 242: "So I hope you can accept nature as She is-absurd" Greene,
p. 111.

Page 244: Another viewpoint on the paradox is the "many worlds"

idea... Yet another attractive feature of the "many worlds" interpretation is that no further assumptions other than the original wave equation are required. In this picture we never have to collapse wave functions or make ob-
servations. The wave function simply divides all by itself, automatically,
without any intervention or assumptions from the outside. In this sense, the

"many worlds" theory is simpler conceptually than all the other theories,
which require outside observers, measurements, collapses of waves, and so
forth. It is true that we are burdened with infinite numbers of universes, but
the wave function keeps track of them, without any further assumptions
from the outside.

One way to understand why our physical universe seems so stable and
secure is to invoke decoherence, that is, that we have decohered from all
these other parallel universes. But decoherence does not eliminate these
other parallel universes. Decoherence only explains why our universe,
among an infinite set of universes, seems so stable. Decoherence is based on
the idea that universes can split into many universes, but that our universe,
via interactions from the environment, becomes quite separated from these
other universes.

Page 244: Nobel laureate Frank Wilczek says, "We are haunted..Kaku,

Parallel Worlds, p. 169.

1 4 : P E R P E T U A L M O T I O N M A C H I N E S

Page 257: "It was Santa Claus and Aladdin's lamp of the whole world,"

Asimov, p. 12.

Page 265: In theory, a perpetual motion machine of the second type...

Some people have objected, declaring that the human brain, representing
perhaps the most complex object ever created by mother nature in the solar
system, violates the Second Law. The human brain, consisting of over 100
billion neurons, is unrivaled in complexity by anything out to 24 trillion
miles of the Earth, to the nearest star. But how can this vast reduction in en-
tropy be compatible with the Second Law, they ask? Evolution itself seems to
violate the Second Law. The answer to this is that the decrease in entropy
created by the rise of higher organisms, including humans, came at the ex-
pense of raising the total entropy elsewhere. The decrease in entropy created
by evolution is more than balanced out by the increase in entropy in the sur-
rounding environment, that is, the entropy of sunlight hitting the Earth. The

N O T E S 315
creation of the human brain via evolution does lower entropy, but this is
more than compensated for by the chaos that we create (e.g., pollution, waste
heat, global warming, etc.).

Page 269: One of the proponents of this idea. .. Tesla, however, was also
a tragic figure, probably cheated out of the royalties of many of his patents
and inventions that paved the way for the coming of radio, TV, and the
telecommunications revolution. (We physicists, however, have guaranteed
that the name of Tesla will not be forgotten. We have named the unit of mag-
netism after him. One tesla equals 10,000 gauss, or roughly twenty thousand
times the magnetic field of the Earth.)

Today he is largely forgotten, except that his more eccentric claims have
become the stuff of conspiracy buffs and urban legend. Tesla believed that he
could communicate with life on Mars, solve Einstein's unfinished unified
field theory, split the Earth in half like an apple, and develop a death ray that
could destroy ten thousand airplanes from a distance of 250 miles. (The FBI
took his claim of a death ray so seriously that it seized much of his notes and
laboratory equipment after his death, some of which are still kept in secret
storage even today.)

Tesla was at the height of his fame in 1931 when he made the front page
of Time magazine. He regularly dazzled the public by unleashing huge bolts
of lightning, containing millions of volts of electrical energy, to gasping au-
diences. Tesla's undoing, however, was that he was notoriously sloppy with
his finances and his legal affairs. Pitted against the battery of lawyers repre-
senting the emerging electrical giants of today, Tesla lost control over his
most important patents. He also began to show signs of what is today called

OCD (obsessive-compulsive disorder), being obsessed with the number

"three." He later became paranoid, living in destitution in the New Yorker

Hotel, fearing being poisoned by his enemies, and was always one step
ahead of his creditors. He died in total poverty at the age of eighty-six in

1943.

E P I L O G U E : T H E F U T U R E O F T H E I M P O S S I B L E

Page 286: Astronomer John Barrow notes, "Historians still debate..."

Barrow, Impossibility, p. 47.

Page 286: Mathematician David Hilbert, in rejecting Comte's claims...

Barrow, Impossibility, p. 209.

Page 286: "Two hundred years ago, you could ask anybody,. . ."Pickover,
p. 192.

Page 287: "All the great questions about the nature of the Universe-from
its beginning to its end-turn out to be unanswerable'."Barrow, Impossibility, p. 250.

Page 287: "But gravitational waves from [the] inflation area are relics of the
universe.. ."Rocky Rolb, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006, p. 44.

Page 290: "These efforts will reveal intimate details of the Big Bang sin-
gularity. . ."Hawking, p. 136.

3 1 6 N O T E S

Page 291: "Do the laws of physics permit highly advanced civiliza-
tions . .Barrow, Impossibility, p. 145.

Page 294: "In 2056, I think you'll be able to buy a T-shirt..." Max

Tegmark, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006, p. 37.

Page 296: Today the leading (and only) candidate for a theory... The
reason for this is that when we take Einstein's theory of gravity and add
quantum corrections, these corrections instead of being small are infinite.

Over the years physicists have devised a number of tricks to eliminate these
infinite terms, but they all fail for a quantum theory of gravity. But in string
theory these corrections vanish exactly for several reasons. First, string the-
ory has a symmetry, called supersymmetry, which cancels many of these di-
vergent terms. Also string theory has a cutoff, the length of string, which
helps to control these infinities.

The origin of these infinities actually goes back to classical theory. New-
ton's inverse-square law says that the force between two particles is infinite
if the distance of separation goes to zero. This infinity, which is apparent
even in Newton's theory, carries over to the quantum theory. But string the-
ory has a cutoff, the length of the string, or the Planck length, which allows
us to control these divergences.

Page 299: "We would then be able to observe them in the sky..." Alexan-
der Vilenkin, New Scientist Magazine, November 18, 2006, p. 51.

Page 300: Astrophysicist John Barrow summarizes this logic this way...

Barrow, Impossibility, p. 219.

Adams, Fred, and Greg Laughlin. The Five Ages of the Universe: Inside
the Physics of Eternity New York: Free Press, 1999.

Asimov, Isaac. The Gods Themselves. New York: Bantam Books, 1990.

Asimov, Isaac, and Jason A. Shulman, eds. Isaac Asimov's Book of Sci-
ence and Nature Quotations. New York: Weidenfeld and Nicholson, 1988.

Barrow, John. Between Inner Space and Outer Space. Oxford, England:

Oxford University Press, 1999.

. Impossibility: The Limits of Science and the Science of Limits. Ox-
ford, England: Oxford University Press, 1998.

. Theories of Everything. Oxford, England: Oxford University Press,

1991.

Calaprice, Alice, ed. The Expanded Quotable Einstein. Princeton, NJ:

Princeton University Press, 2000.

Cavelos, Jeanne. The Science of Star Wars: An Astrophysicist's Indepen-
dent Examination of Space Travel, Aliens, Planets, and Robots as Portrayed
in the Star Wars Films and Books. New York: St Martin's Press, 2000.

Clark, Ronald. Einstein: The Life and Times. New York: World Publish-
ing, 1971.

Cole, R. C Sympathetic Vibrations: Reflections on Physics as a Way of

Life. New York: Bantam Books, 1985.

Crease, R., and C. C. Mann. Second Creation. New York: Macmillan,

1986.

Croswell, Ren. The Universe at Midnight. New York: Free Press, 2001.

Davies, Paul. How to Build a Time Machine. New York: Penguin Books,

2001.

Dyson, Freeman. Disturbing the Universe. New York: Harper and Row,

1979.

Ferris, Timothy. The Whole Shebang: A State-of-the-Universe(s) Report.

New York: Simon and Schuster, 1997.

Folsing, Albrecht. Albert Einstein. New York: Penguin Books, 1997.

Gilster, Paul. Centauri Dreams: Imagining and Planning Interstellar Ex-
ploration. New York: Springer Science, 2004.

318 B I B L I O G R A P H Y

Gott, J. Richard. Time Travel in Einstein's Universe. Boston: Houghton

Mifflin Co., 2001.

Greene, Brian. The Elegant Universe: Superstrings, Hidden Dimensions,
and the Quest for the Ultimate Theory. New York: W. W. Norton, 1999.

Hawking, Stephen W., Kip S. Thorne, Igor Novikov, Timothy Ferris, and

Alan Lightman. The Future of Spacetime. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002.

Horgan, John. The End of Science. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley,

1996.

Kaku, Michio. Einstein's Cosmos. New York: Adas Books, 2004.

. Hyperspace. New York: Anchor Books, 1994.

. Parallel Worlds: A Journey Through Creation, Higher Dimensions,
and the Future of the Cosmos. New York: Doubleday, 2005.

. Visions: How Science Will Revolutionize the 21st Century. New York:

Anchor Books, 1997.

Lemonick, Michael. The Echo of the Big Bang. Princeton, NJ: Princeton

University Press, 2005.

Mallove, Eugene, and Gregory Matloff. The Starflight Handbook: A Pio-
neer's Guide to Interstellar Travel. New York: Wiley and Sons, 1989.

Nahin, Paul J. Time Machines. New York: Springer Verlag, 1999.

Pais, A. Subtle Is the Lord. New York: Oxford University Press, 1982.

Pickover, Clifford A. Time: A Traveler's Guide. New York: Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1998.

Randi, James. An Encyclopedia of Claims, Frauds, and Hoaxes of the Oc-
cult and Supernatural. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1995.

Rees, Martin. Before the Beginning: Our Universe and Others. Reading,

Mass.: Perseus Books, 1997.

Sagan, Carl. The Cosmic Connection: An Extraterrestrial Perspective.

New York: Anchor Press, 1973.

Thorne, Kip S. Black Holes and Time Warps: Einstein's Outrageous

Legacy. New York: W. W. Norton, 1994.

Ward, Peter D., and Donald Brownlee. Rare Earth: Why Complex Life Is

Uncommon in the Universe. New York: Springer Science, 2000.

Weinberg, Steve. Dreams of a Final Theory: The Search for Fundamental

Laws of Nature. New York: Pantheon Books, 1992.

Wells, H. G. The Time Machine: An Invention. London: McFarland and

Co., 1996.

Adams, Douglas, 59-60
space travel and, 162-64

Air Force, U.S., 148, 176

Atomic Energy Commission (AEC),

Alcubierre drive, 204-5, 207-8, 211

161

Allen, Woody, 197,312/1
atomic theory, 19-20, 29, 37, 57-58,

Allen Telescope Array, 132

264-65, 286, 298

Amazing Randi, The, 90-91, 310/*

Augustine, Saint, 217

Ames, Aldrich, 78

Angels and Demons (Brown), 179
animals, 71-74, 126, 140

Back to the Future, 11-12, 218, 226
anthropic principle, 241, 253

Barnard's Star, 164
antigravity, 293

Baron-Cohen, Simon, 189
antimatter, xi, 48, 77, 178-94, 205-6,

Barrow, John, 286-87, 300

213, 268

Beam Power Challenge, 168

Dirac and, 186-88, 190
beam weapons, 47-50
economics of, 181, 183-84
in history, 35-36, 305rc-6rc
in moving backward in time, 278-81,
lasers as, 34-36, 38-39, 41-43, 45, 47,

283

50, 52, 306n
naturally occurring, 183-86, 193

Bentley paradox, 292
production of, 180-84, 186, 193

Bhaskara, 260
rockets propelled by, xvii, 165, 178,

Bickerton, A. W., 154

182-86, 193-94
big bang, 35, 50, 65, 213, 220-21, 223,

Archimedes, 35

236, 279

Aristotle, 231
antimatter and, 184-85, 192

Army, U.S., 92-93
and future of the impossible, 286-91,
artificial intelligence (AI), 102, 104-18

293, 298-99, 302
bottom-up approach to, 116-18
how it started, 250-51
history of, 104-9, 117
monopoles and, 151-52
top-down approach to, 110-16, 118
parallel universes and, 245-46
see also robots, robotics
period before, xviii, 287-91, 298

Artificial Intelligence (film), 104, 123
and speed of light, 198, 202

Artsutanov, Yuri, 167
tachyons and, 281-83

Asimov, Isaac, 71, 103, 179, 257-58, 268

Big Bang Observer (BBO), 290, 298
asteroids, 134, 155, 157, 170

Big Crunch, 240, 246
atomic bombs, xiii, xv, 8, 34, 45, 49-50,

Big Freeze, 240, 249, 270, 291

210, 251

Big Splat, 240, 290-91
antimatter and, 179-80
biofeedback, 94-96
biological arms race, 140-41
charge parity time-reversed (CPT-

Birbaumer, Niels, 95
reversed) universes, 193
black holes, xiii, xviii, 156, 232, 235-36,
charge parity (CP) violation, 184, 192

249-50
charge-reversed (C-reversed)

and future of the impossible, 288,
universes, 190-93

290, 297-99
chemical lasers, 38, 40
gamma ray bursters and, 51-52

Chinese room test, 108

Hawking on, 220-21

Christmas Carol, A (Dickens), 218
and speed of light, 208-12

Christopher, Milbourne, 74
wormholes and, 209-11, 223

Christus Hypercubius (Dali), 232

Blue Book, Project, 148
civilizations, 284, 312/1

Bohr, Niels, xvi, 37, 53, 57, 245, 296
extraterrestrial life and, 145-47

Boltzmann, Ludwig, 264-65, 268, 298
parallel universes and, 249, 251, 253

Bose Einstein condensates (BECs),
and speed of light, 213-15

65-66
time travel and, 224, 275

Bradley, Aston, 64-65
types of, 145-46
brain, brains, 68, 141,231

Clarke, Arthur C, 3, 124, 126
entropy and, 314/1-15/1
space travel and, 167, 170-71
machine interfaces with, 95-97

Clever Hans, 71-72, 74
psychokinesis and, 94-98, 101
closed time-like curves, 222
robots and, 104, 110-12, 116-17,

Cocconi, Giuseppe, 130-31

120-21,310/1-12/1

COG, 116
scans of, 76-84, 86-87, 94-96, 101,
coin toss experiments, 92

309w
cold war, 74-75, 140
telepathy and, 72, 74-87, 309/1
communication systems, 141, 146

BrainGate, 95-97
computers, 6-7, 81, 150, 242, 276

Brenner, Sydney, 121
extraterrestrial life and, 132, 134

Brooks, Rodney, 111, 116
psychokinesis and, 94-98, 100-101

Brown, Dan, 179
quantum, 66-69, 123, 204

Brownlee, Donald, 136
robots and, 103, 106-8, 110-17, 120,

Bruno, Giordano, 127

122-24, 310/1

Bryan, William Jennings, 284

Comte, Auguste, 285-86

Buckyballs, 30-31

Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur's

Bussard, Robert W, 160

Court, ,4 (Twain), 218
continental drift, xi-xii

Copenhagen School, 243, 245-46

Cabra test, 48-49

Copernicus, Nicolaus, 127

Capek, Rarel, 105

Corot satellite, 138-39
carbon, 124
cosmic consciousness, 243-44

Buckyballs and, 30-31
cosmic rays, 172, 180, 185, 299
extraterrestrial life and, 128-29
cosmic strings, 223-24
nanotubes and, 10, 15, 167-68
cosmological constant, 291-94

Carrie (King), 89-90

Cosmos 1 space sail, 158

Casimir, Hendrik, 206-7

Cours de Philosophic (Comte), 285-86

Catala, Claude, 138

Cox, John, 263
cause and effect, law of, 276, 279-83
crystals, 20, 26-27

C. elegans, 117
lasers and, 38, 40-41

Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), 67,

Cummings, E. E., 229

75-76, 78, 150

CYC, 113-14
centrifugal force, 166, 173
ceramics, 13-14, 21

CERN, 179, 181,201

Daedalus, Project, 164
charge parity-reversed (CP-reversed)

Dali, Salvador, 232
universes, 192-93

Damasio, Antonio, 120

I N D E X 321
dark energy, 270-71, 291
relativity theory of, 19, 187, 199-205,
dark matter, 205-6, 240, 299

208, 219-21, 227, 232-33, 235-36,

Darwin probe, 139

292

Davy, Humphrey, 4-5
and speed of light, 194, 198-200, 288

Death Stars:

and theory of everything, x, xvii, 236,
gamma ray bursters and, 35, 52

238, 295,315/1
lasers and, 34-35, 39, 43, 45, 47, 50
on time, 200-203, 207, 219, 222
physics of, 49-50
time travel and, 222-23, 227
decision making, 119-21

Einstein lenses, 205-6
decoherence, 244-45, 248, 314/1

Einstein-Rosen Bridge, 209-10

Deep Blue, 112
electricity, 26-27, 30, 36, 129, 132, 171,

Defense Advanced Research Projects

181,259-60,269,315/1

Agency (DARPA), 21, 115
brain and, 76, 84
deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), 25, 99,
force fields and, 4-9, 11-12, 18

123-25, 191, 286
fusion and, 44-46
extraterrestrial life and, 129, 135-36,
lasers and, 38-41

142, 150
robots and, 103, 123-24
parallel universes and, 252-53
space travel and, 161-62, 165, 176-78
teleportation and, 62, 66
electroencephalograms (EEGs):

Deutsch, David, 68
psychokinesis and, 94, 96, 101
diamagnets, 14
telephathy and, 76, 78, 84, 86

Dickens, Charles, 218
electromagnetism (EM), 21, 51, 76, 85,
dinosaurs, xi-xii, 134, 156, 220

163, 171, 173
parallel universes and, 244, 248
force fields and, 5-7

Dirac, Paul, 186-90, 245, 277

Maxwell and, 7, 18-19

Disintegration Machine, The (Doyle), 55
psychokinesis and, 93, 97-98

Donoghue, John, 95-97
electron waves, 56-61

Doomsday, 273-75, 279
eleven dimensions, 238-39, 299

Doyle, Sir Arthur Conan, 54-55, 306/z-,
emotional robots, 118-21, 123

309/1
energy, 37, 257-65, 267-71, 280-82,

Drake, Frank, 129-31, 133-36

306/1-7/z

Duchamps, Marcel, 232
conservation of, xiv, 264-65, 267-68,

Dwyer, Larry, 224-25

271
dye lasers, 40-41
for Death Stars, 43, 45, 47

Dyson, Freeman, 163, 170, 241
and future of the impossible, 291,
and future of the impossible, 284,

293, 299

295, 300
history viewed through, 259-60
from hydrogen bombs, 41, 47-49
perpetual motion machines and,

Eddington, Arthur, 209-10, 266, 295

257-58, 260-63, 265

Edison, Thomas, 4, 258, 269

Planck, 212-15, 249

Edwards, Michael, 91
tachyons and, 280-81

Einstein, Albert, ix-xi, xv, 6, 43, 160,
from the vacuum, 269-71, 291, 293

198-205, 265, 280-81
see also electricity; negative energy
antimatter and, 190-91

Enigma machine, 107

BECs and, 65-66
entropy, 263, 265-66, 314rc-15/i
black holes and, xiii, 209-11

EPR experiment, 60-62, 202

EPR experiment and, 60-62, 202

European Space Agency, 139, 157, 289
and future of the impossible, 287,
event horizon, 209-12, 227

292-93, 295, 298, 302, 316/1

Everett, Hugh, 244-45
parallel universes and, 233-36, 238,
everything, theory of, xvii-xviii, 121,

241, 248

227
quantum theory and, 37, 56, 58,
and Einstein, x, xvii, 236, 238, 295,

60-62, 242-43

315/1

3 2 2

I N D E X
and future of the impossible, 286,
fusion, 43-47

294-96, 299-303
inertia] confinement for, 43-46
and incompleteness theorem,

ITER and, 45-47, 160

300-301
magnetic confinement for, 45-47
excimer lasers, 40
space travel and, 152, 159-61, 165-66,
extrasensory perception (ESP), 73, 75,

178

89, 92-93
future, xii, 26-29, 153-56, 193-94,
extrasolar planets:

283-303
extraterrestrial life and, 127, 129-30,
advanced waves from, 276-81, 283

133-34, 136-40, 147, 152-53

Death Stars and, 50, 52
space travel and, 152, 164
end of Earth in, 154-56
extraterrestrial life, xvii, 81, 124,
force fields and, 9, 11-12, 15

126-47, 150-53, 302, 307n
of the impossible, 284-303, 316rc
antimatter and, 191-93
invisibility and, 26, 29, 33
fortuitous accidents and, 135-36
of metamaterials, 27-29

Goldilocks zone and, 133-34, 136-38
psychokinesis and, 94-98, 101-2
in history, 126-27
robots and, 112-13, 118, 120, 123-25
listening to, 130-33, 140, 152-53
space travel and, 168, 177-78, 291
moons and, 126, 133-36
teleportation and, 66, 69, 307rc
parallel universes and, 244, 248
time travel and, 217-19, 225, 291
physical appearance of, 140-42, 144
wormholes and, 211, 291
and physics of advanced civilizations,
see also precognition

145-47
scale law and, 142-44
scientific search for, 128-33, 136-40,

Galileo, 245, 288

152-53

Gamgee, John, 262
and search for earth-like planets,
gamma rays, 19, 278-79

136-40
antimatter and, xi, 184, 188

UFOs and, 147, 150-52
bursters and, 35, 50-52
eyesight, 140-42
gas, gases, 43, 129, 149, 182, 209, 240,

257, 264
lasers and, 38-40

FAB (Gershenfeld), 100
space travel and, 157, 161, 171

Fahri, Edward, 251-52
see also plasma, plasmas
false vacuum theory, 282-83

Gates, Bill, 114-15

Faraday, Michael, 4-6, 18-19, 57, 171

Gauss, Karl, 231-32

Feynman, Richard, 29, 297

Geller, Uri, 90-91
and advanced waves from future,

Gershenfeld, Neil, 100-101

277-80

Gilchrist, Brian, 177-78
antimatter and, 191-92, 278

Goddard, Robert, xiv
quantum theory and, 241-42, 280

Godel, Kurt, 223, 247
fifth dimension, 233-34, 236
incompleteness theorem of, 106, 109,
fission, 46, 158, 161-62, 164-65

300-302

Flash Gordon, ix-x, 17, 186

Gods Themselves, The (Asimov),

Fly, The, 55

257-58, 268

Forbidden Planet, 89

Goldfinger, 36
force Fields, ix, 3-15

Goldilocks zone, 240-41

Faraday and, 4-6, 18-19, 57
extraterrestrial life and, 133-34,
four forces and, 6-8, 15

136-38
magnetic levitation and, 11-15

Gott, Richard, 223-24
plasma windows and, 8-10, 15
gravity, gravitational fields, 43, 46, 93,
for shields, 3-4, 6-11, 15

144, 151, 190, 204-5, 208-11, 227,
four dimensions, fourth dimension, 33,

281

231-33, 239, 299
black holes and, 208-10, 220-21

I N D E X 323
extraterrestrial life and, 133-35

/, Robot, 103
force fields and, 6-7, 11
immortality, 125, 145, 51\n-12n
parallel universes and, 233, 235-40,
impossible, impossibility:

247
categories of, xvi-xvii
space travel and, 166, 170, 173, 176
future of, 284-303, 316/1
string theory and, 290, 316/1

Kaku's fascination with, x-xi, xviii
gravity waves, 287-92, 302-3
list of, 285-86

Greeks, 17, 35, 104, 106, 236, 272, 305n
relativeness of, xi-xiii
parallel universes and, 231-32
studying of, xiv-xvi
and theory of everything, 294-95,
incompleteness theorem, 106, 109,

300

300-302

Guth, Alan, 244, 246, 250-52

Independence Day, 126, 147
inertial confinement, 43-46
inflationary universe theory, 282

Haldane, J. B. S., 257
and future of the impossible, 289-90,

Harry Potter, 16-17, 20-21, 23, 28

293
hat tricks, 71, 308
parallel universes and, 247, 250-52

Hawking, Stephen, 95, 186, 188, 235

International Linear Collider (ILC),
incompleteness theorem and,

213

300-301

International Space Station, 156,
parallel universes and, 246-47

165-66, 172
and theory of everything, 294,

International Thermonuclear

299-301

Experimental Reactor (ITER),
time travel and, xv-xvi, 216, 220-22,

45-47, 160

227
inverse square law, 237, 299, 316/J

Haynes, John, 81
invisibility, ix, xvii, 16-33

Heinlein, Robert, 166-67, 233
atomic theory and, 19-20

Heisenberg, Werner, 37
in history, 17-18, 305rc
and theory of everything, 295-96
holograms and, 31-33
uncertainty principle of, 30, 55-56,

Maxwell and, 19-20

58, 109, 122-23, 206, 245, 506n-7n
metamaterials and, 21-29

Henderson, Linda Dalrymple, 232
nanotechnology and, 23-24, 26-31

Herschcovitch, Ady, 9
parallel universes and, 239-40

Higgs bosons, 235, 283
with plasmonics, 26-27

Hilbert, David, 268, 286

Invisible Man, The (Wells), 16, 18, 33,

Hindus, Hinduism, 35, 44, 230, 244,

232, 239
ion engines, 157-58, 164-65, 177

Hitchhiker's Guide to the Galaxy, The

"Is the End in Sight for Theoretical

(Adams), 59-60

Physics?" (Hawking), 299-300

Hofstadter, Douglas, 112
holograms, 31-33

Honey, I Shrunk the Kids, 144

Jackson, Gerald, 185-86

Howe, Steven, 183

Janus Equation (Spruill), 216

Hubble, Edwin, x, 293

"Jaunt, The" (King), 307 n

Hubble Space Telescope, xiii, 139, 206,

Jones, David, 80

298

Jupiter, Jupiter-sized planets, 211, 274
hydrogen bombs, 47-50, 179, 184
extraterrestrial life and, 133-34,
energy emitted by, 41, 47-49

137-38
fusion and, 44-45

Just, Marcel A., 81
how they work, 49-50
nuclear-fired X-ray lasers and, 47-48
space travel and, 163-64

Kaluza, Theodor, 233-34, 236
hyperspace, xvii, 230-41

Kardashev, Nikolai, 145-46
string theory and, 234-38, 240

Kasparov, Garry, 112

324

I N D E X

Rawakami, Naoki, 31
invisibility and, 16, 19-20, 22-29,

Relley, James Patrick, 307/r

31-32

Relly, John Ernst Worrell, 261-62
lasers and, 10, 27, 32, 34-35, 38-41,

Kelvin, Lord, xiii-xiv, 34

46, 72-73, 82, 126, 132, 281, 306/1

Repler, Johannes, 126, 158

Maxwell on, 19, 36, 57, 93, 105,

Kepler satellite, 138-39

199-200, 233-34, 276-77, 302

Rerr, Roy, 210-11
in moving backward in time, 276-77

Ring, Stephen, 89-90, 307/1
parallel universes and, 233-34

Rolb, Rocky, 287
photoelectric effect and, 37, 56
speed of, ix, 19, 22, 42, 61-62, 159-61,

163-65, 169-70, 172, 175-77, 194,

Lady Wonder, 74

197-205, 219, 224, 281, 286, 288,

Langleben, Daniel, 79

303, 306/1

Large Hadron Collider (LHC), 201,
tachyons and, 280-82

212-13, 237, 283, 298-99
teleportation and, 63-65

Laser Interferometer Gravitational
traveling faster than, 194, 197-98,

Wave Observatory (LIGO), 288,

201-15, 218-19, 224, 280-82, 303

290
light sabers, 34-35, 39, 42, 52

Laser Interferometer Space Antenna

Limited Test Ban Treaty, 162-63

(LISA), 289-90, 298

Linde, Andrei, 250, 252
lasers, 34-50, 64, 66-67, 82, 197, 212,

Lion, the Witch and the Wardrobe, The

249, 281, 289

(Lewis), 229
as beam weapons, 34-36, 38-39,

Looking Glass universes, 190-91

41-43, 45,47, 50, 52, 306/1

Lord of the Rings, The (Tolkien), 16-17

Death Stars and, 34-35, 39, 43, 45,

47, 50
extraterrestrial life and, 126, 132

Macbeth (Shakespeare), 273
force fields and, 3, 7, 9-11, 15
magnetic confinement, 45-47
fusion and, 43-46
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI),
how they work, 38-39

101
invisibility and, 27, 32
functional (fMRI), 77, 79-82
nuclear-fired X-ray, 47-50
handheld, 82-83
particle accelerators and, 214-15
lie detectors and, 77, 79-80
psychokinesis and, 100-101
telepathy and, 77-84, 86-87
space travel and, 152, 159, 165, 168,
magnetism, magnetic fields, xi, 67, 135,

172, 178

260
telepathy and, 72-73
antimatter and, 180-82
types of, 39-41
brain scans and, 77, 82-83

Lawson's criterion, 44
force fields and, 4-9, 11-15

Lee, T. D., 191
fusion and, 45-47

Lenat, Douglas, 113-14
space travel and, 158, 172-73, 176

Leonardo da Vinci, 104-5, 261

UFOs and, 151-52
levitation:

"Man Without a Body, The" (Mitchell),
magnets and, 11-15

54
psychokinesis and, 88, 93, 97-98
many worlds theory, 226-27

Levy, Walter, 74
parallel universes and, 244-46, 314/2

Lewis, C. S., 229

Mars, x, 36, 200, 274, 315/1
lie detectors, 77-80
antimatter and, 182, 186
light, 267, 308/?

extraterrestrial life and, 127-28, 135
beam weapons and, 34-36, 42
robot rovers on, 109, 116
bending of, 22-23, 25-28, 205-6, 208
space travel and, 157-58, 172-73
extraterrestrial life and, 134, 136,
masers, 38

139

Maxwell, James Clerk, 18-20, 76, 264
future and, 194, 286, 288-89, 302-3
on EM, 7, 18-19

I N D E X 325
invisibility and, 19-20

Nazis, 36, 107, 244, 305/1-6/*
on light, 19, 36, 57, 93, 105, 199-200,
negative energy, 205-8, 215, 226

233-34, 276-77, 302
wormholes and, 211, 224
parallel universes and, 233-34
negative matter, 205-6, 211, 281
precognition and, 276-77
neural network, neural networks, 81

Meissner effect, 14, 97
brain as, 83-84, 87, 116

Men in Black, 144
robots and, 116-17, 124
metamaterials, 21-29
neutrinos, neutrino radiation, 235, 287,
meteors, xii, 149, 155, 169, 172-73, 186,

298, 302

205, 275, 286
neutron stars, 170, 249, 288, 290

Metropolis, 105

Newton, Isaac, xiii, 18-19, 35-38, 76,

Michell, John, 297-98

105, 134-35, 140, 150, 218, 270,

Michelson, Albert A., 285

288, 307/1
microwaves, microwave radiation, 19,
antimatter and, 190-91, 193

38, 168, 287
and conservation of energy, 264-65
extra terrestrial life and, 130-31

Dirac and, 186, 188-89
invisibility and, 21-24

Einstein and, 19, 198-200

Miller, Stanley, 129
and future of the impossible, 292,

Miller, William, 274-75

299,316/z
mind, see brain, brains
on light, 199-200

Minority Report, 12, 309/?

parallel universes and, 237, 299

Minsky, Marvin, 117-18, 121, 125, 311/z
precognition and, 276, 283

"Missing One's Coach," 217-18
quantum theory and, 30, 36-38,

Mitchell, Edward Page, 54

56-57,241-42

Mitchell, Tom, 81
teleportation and, 56, 59
monopoles, 151-52, 252

Nordley, Gerald, 176
moon, moons, 154, 199, 207

Nostradamus, 272-73
extraterrestrial life and, 126, 133-36

Nova laser, 44
space travel and, 152, 156-57, 159,

NSTAR ion thruster, 157

171-72, 176-77
nuclear electric rockets, 161-62, 165,

Moore's law, 24, 122-23, 125

178

Moravec, Hans, 118-19, 124, 312/1
nuclear-fired X-ray lasers, 47-50

Morrison, Philip, 130-31
nuclear pulsed rockets, 152, 163-65
multiverse, 225, 230, 238-41, 245, 247,

Nude Descending a Staircase

249, 252-53

(Duchamps), 232

Myhrvold, Nathan, 21

Number of the Beast, The (Heinlein),

233

Nagle, Mathew, 95-96
nanotechnology, 69, 243

"On Distance" (Ptolemy), 231
beam weapons and, 41-42

"On Heaven" (Aristotle), 231
carbon and, 10, 15, 167-68

Onnes, Heike, 11-12
invisibility and, 23-24, 26-31

Oppenheimer, J. Robert, 48, 210, 235
robots and, 98-102
optical camouflage, 31-32
space travel and, 152, 161-62, 175-78

Ord-Hume, Arthur, 261

National Aeronautics and Space

Orion spacecraft, 156, 163-64

Administration (NASA), 116,

Ozma, Project, 131

176-78, 289
antimatter and, 183, 185
extraterrestrial life and, 131, 139
parallel universes, ix, xii, 210, 229-53,
negative matter and, 205-6

314/1
space travel and, 156-57, 161-62, 164,
hyperspace and, xvii, 230-41

167-68, 171, 177-78
multiverse and, 225, 230, 238-41, 245,

National Ignition Facility (NIF), 44-45

247, 249, 252-53

3 2 6

I N D E X
perpetual motion machines and,
particle accelerators and, 214-15

257-58, 268
space travel and, 157-58, 165, 173
quantum theory and, 230, 235-39,
plasmonics, 26-27

241-48

Plato, 17, 305 n
string theory and, 234-40, 299

Pluto, 163, 166, 185, 200
time travel and, 225-26
positron-emission tomography (PET),
types of, 230-49

77
paramagnets, 14
precognition, xvi-xviii, 272-84

Paris in the Twentieth Century (Verne),
and advanced waves from future,
xii-xiii

276-81, 283
parity-reversed (P-reversed) universes,
on Doomsday, 273-75

190-93
possibility of, 275-76
particle accelerators, 201, 283, 298-99,

Prometheus, Project, 162

303
psychokinesis, ix, xvii, 88-102
antimatter and, 180-83
brain and, 94-98, 101
parallel universes and, 235-37
real world and, 90-91
ripping space and, 212-15
robots and, 95, 98-102
pattern recognition 110-13, 115, 117
science and, 91-93

Pauli, Wolfgang, 295-96, 298

Ptolemy, 231

Payload for Antimatter-Matter

Pythagoreans, 294-95

Exploration and Light-Nuclei

Astrophysics (PAMELA), 184-85

Penfield, Wilder, 85
quantum chromodynamics (QCD),

Penrose, Roger, 104, 108-9, 310/i-ll/i

296-97

Perez, Gil, 306/*
quantum theory, xii, 30, 76-77, 141,
perpetual motion machines, xiv,

144, 178, 186-87, 193, 206, 214,

257-71,284,314/i

293-97, 305/1
entropy and, 265-66
and advanced waves from the future,
in history, 260-63

279-80, 283
as hoaxes, 261-64, 266-67
computers and, 66-69, 123, 204

Persistence of Memory (Dali), 232
and future of the impossible, 285-86,
personal fabricators, 100-101

290, 293-94, 296-97,316/1

Pfurtscheller, Gert, 84
parallel universes and, 230, 235-39,

Phoenix, Project, 132

241-48
photochromatics, 10-11, 15
probability in, 58-60, 241-43, 245
photoelectric effect, 37, 56
relativity and, 221, 235-36
photolithography, 24, 28
revolution of, 36-38, 56-58, 77, 285
photonic crystals, 26-27
robots and, 105, 109, 123, 310/i-ll/i
photons, 37-39, 56, 63, 190, 227

Schrodinger's cat problem and,
lasers and, 38-39, 66

242-44
physics, physicists:

tachyons and, 280, 282
of advanced civilizations, 145-47
teleportation and, xvi, 56-69
completeness of, 299-303
time travel and, 222, 225, 227
of Death Stars, 49-50

Kaku's background in, x-xi
playground of, 220-24
radio, radio signals, radio waves, xvii,

Pickover, Clifford, 141

76-77, 269, 288

Planck, Max, 37, 88
antimatter and, 191, 193

Planck energy, 212-15, 249
extraterrestrial life and, 130-33
planets, 134-36
lasers and, 38, 40
see also extrasolar planets
psychokinesis and, 94, 100
plasma, plasmas, 42
space travel and, 158, 177
force fields and, 8-10, 15
telepathy and, 76, 85
fusion and, 45-46
rail guns, 170-72, 176

I N D E X 327
ramjet fusion, 152, 159-61, 165-66
specific impulses and engine
ray guns, 34, 36, 39
efficiencies of, 164-65
lasers and, 41-42, 52, 306/1
see also space travel, spaceships

Rees, Sir Martin, 197, 203-4, 221, 241

Romalis, Michael, 82-83
relativistic equation, 187-88

Rover, Project, 161
relativity, theory of, 19, 105, 187-88,

R.U.R. (Capek), 105

199-205,219-21

Russell, Bertrand, 155
general, xii, 202-5, 208, 220-21, 227,

232-33, 235-36, 247, 292
loopholes in, 201-4

Sagan, Carl, x, xvii, 130, 136, 155, 160
and parallel universes, 233, 235-36,

Sakharov, Andrei, 184-85

239, 247

Savukov, Igor, 82-83
and quantum theory, 221, 235-36
scale law, 142-44
special, 188, 199-203, 219
scanning probe microscopes (SPMs),
religion, 126-27, 140-41, 147, 292

101
parallel universes and, 230, 241,
scanning tunneling microscopes,

243-44, 250

29-30, 101, 243
precognition and, 272-75

Schmeidler, Gertrude, 91-92
teleportation and, 53-54

Schrodinger, Erwin, 242, 295
remote viewing, 74-76
teleportation and, 56-60
replicators, 98-100
wave equation of, 37, 56-59, 187, 246

Republic, The (Plato), 17

Schrodinger's cat problem, 242-44

Requicha, Aristides, 101

Schwarzschild, Karl, 208-10

Rhine, Joseph Banks, 73-74, 309 n
science fiction, ix-xiii, xv-xvii, 41-43,

Ridgway, Gary, 78

53-56

Riemann, Georg Bernhard, 232
antimatter and, 179, 182-83, 186, 190
robots, robotics, 98-125, 225-26,
beam weapons and, 34, 36, 38, 41-42

310/1-12/1

Death Stars and, 34-35, 43, 45, 49-50
consciousness of, 121-22
extraterrestrial life and, 126-27,
danger of, 103-4, 122-25

141-42, 144-45, 147
emotional, 118-21, 123
force fields and, 3, 6-15
merging humans with, 124-25,
invisibility and, 16-18, 20-21, 23, 28,

311/1-12/1

32-33, 232, 239
nanotechnology and, 98-102
parallel universes and, 229-30,
psychokinesis and, 95, 98-102

232-33, 239, 252, 257-58, 268
space travel and, 109, 116, 152, 168,
psychokinesis and, 88-90, 93-94, 98

172, 177
rolDots and, 103-5, 109, 118, 123,
see also artificial intelligence

225-26
rockets, rocketry, ix-x, xii, xiv-xvii,
space travel and, 166-67, 170-71,

219

174-75
with Alcubierre drive, 204-5, 207-8,
and speed of light, 197-98, 203-5, 207

211
tachyons and, 280-81
antimatter and, xvii, 165, 178, 182-86,
telepathy and, 70-71, 81-83, 86-87,

193-94

309/1
beam weapons and, 48-49
teleportation and, xvi, 54-56, 59-60,
chemical propulsion of, 156-57, 162,

63-64, 66, 69, 306/1-7/1

164-65, 171, 182
time travel and, 216, 218-19, 222,
force fields and, 3, 8-9

225-26
with ion engines, 157-58, 164-65, 177

UFOs and, 151-52
nuclear electric, 161-62, 165, 178

Search for Extraterrestrial Intelligence
nuclear pulsed, 152, 163-65

(SETI), 130-33, 140, 152-53
with plasma engines, 157-58, 165

Searle, John, 104, 108
with ramjet fusion engines, 152,
semiconductors, semiconductor

159-61, 165-66
industry, 40, 101, 188

3 2 8

I N D E X
invisibility and, 24-28

Spruill, G., 216
robots and, 122-25, 312/z

Standard Model, 235, 237, 283
space travel and, 176-77
and future of the impossible, 294,

September 11,2001,273

299, 302

Shakespeare, William, 72, 88-89, 273

Stanford Linear Accelerator, 213-15

SHAKEY, 110

Star Gate, 74-76

Shaw, Steve, 91

Star Trek, 53, 82, 118, 145, 182, 204,

Shiva laser, 44

229, 280

Slan (van Vogt), 70
beam weapons and, 34, 38
slingshot effect, 169-70
force fields and, 3, 8-9
smart dust, 176
invisibility and, 16, 23

Smart 1 probe, 157, 165
psychokinesis and, 89-90, 94, 98

Smith, Gerald, 182-83
space travel and, 170, 175
solar sails, 152, 158-59, 165-66, 172,
teleportation and, xvi, 55-56, 69

176, 178, 185
time travel and, 218-19
solid-state lasers, 40

Star Wars, 12, 32, 42-43, 145

Somniurn (Kepler), 126, 158

Death Stars and, 34-35, 43, 45, 49

Soukoulis, Costas, 25
psychokinesis and, 90, 93
space elevators, 165-69
and speed of light, 197, 204

Space Shuttles, 184-85

Star Wars missile shield, 48-49,162,171
space travel and, 156,162, 164-67,173
stealth technology, 20
space-time, 287-88
string theory, xii, 6
foam and, 214, 246-47
and future of the impossible, 290,
parallel universes and, 233, 236, 239,

294, 296-99, 316/1

246-47, 250-51
parallel universes and, 234-40, 299
particle accelerators and, 213-14
testability of, 297-99
ripping of, 202-3, 206, 208-15, 249,
and theory of everything, 294, 296

282
strong nuclear force, 7-8, 93
and speed of light, 200, 203
superconductors, 36, 45-46
stretching of, 202-3, 207-8, 215, 288
force fields and, 11-15
time travel and, 222, 224, 227
psychokinesis and, 97, 102
wormholes and, 211-12, 224
supeiienses, 25
space travel, spaceships, ix, xii, 109,

Superman, 218, 229-30

116, 154-78
suspended animation, 173-75
dangers of, 172-73
symmetries, 184, 267-68
extraterrestrial life and, 124, 126, 141,

Szilard, Leo, xv

145-47, 150-52
future and, 168, 177-78, 291
nanotechnology and, 152, 161-62,
tachyons, 280-83

175-78

Taylor, Ted, 163-64
rail guns and, 170-72, 176

Tegmark, Max, 239, 294
slingshot effect and, 169-70
telepathy, 70-87, 308/*-10/i
solar sails and, 152, 158-59, 165-66,
brain and, 72, 74-87, 309/z

172, 176, 178, 185
ethical questions raised by, 80,
space elevators and, 165-69

309/M0/*
and speed of light, 159-61, 163-65,
lie detectors and, 77-80

169-70, 172, 175-77, 194, 200-205,
as magician's trick, 71, 308/z

207-8,211,219
psychical research and, 73-74,
suspended animation and, 173-75

308rc-9rc

UFOs and, 150-52

Star Gate and, 74-76
wormholes and, xvii, 211-12, 291
thought projection and, 84-85
see also rockets, rocketry
teleportation, ix, xii, xvi-xvii, 53-69
sparticles, 237, 298
without entanglement, 64-66
specific impulses, 164-65

EPR experiment and, 60-62

I N D E X 329
quantum theory and, xvi, 56-69
collisions of, 233, 240, 248, 291
science fiction and, 54-56, 59-60,
contact between, 248-49

63-64, 66, 69, 506n-7n
end of, 249, 291-94

Teller, Edward, 48
evolution of, 252-53

Tempest, The (Shakespeare), 89
and future of the impossible, 286-87,
ten dimensions, 236, 238, 297

289-94, 302

Terminator, The, 104, 225-26
spinning of, 223, 247

Terrestrial Planet Finder, 138-39
see also parallel universes

Tesla, Nikola, 269-70, 3l5rc

Urey, Harold, 129

Tether Challenge, 168-69
thermodynamics, laws of, 263-68,

270-71
van Vogt, A. E., 70
and conservation of energy, xiv,
variable specific impulse

264-65, 267-68, 271
magnetoplasma rocket (VASIMR),
and entropy, 263, 265-66, 3Un-15n

158, 165
and perpetual motion machines, 258,

Vela satellite, 50-51

263-66, 314/7

Venus, 148, 185-86, 200, 274
and symmetries, 267-68

Verne, Jules, x, xii-xiii, xvi, 171

Think Like a Dinosaur (Relley), 307/1

Vilenkin, Alexander, 299

Thorne, Rip, 211, 222, 237, 290-91

Visser, Matthew, 203, 211
thought projection, 84-85
von Neumann probes, 177
three dimensions, 32, 86, 142
time, 193, 207-9, 217-19, 246, 281, 291

Einstein on, 200-203, 207, 219, 222

Wakefield tabletop accelerators, 214-15
movement of waves backward in,

Ward, Peter, 136

276-81, 283

War of the Worlds (Wells), 36, 127
parallel universes and, 232-33, 236
water, 14, 187
ripping space and, 212-14
extraterrestrial life and, 128-29,
see also space-time

133-34, 142

Time Machine, The (Wells), 218-19
invisibility and, 19-20, 22
time-reversed (T-reversed) universes,
weak nuclear force, 7-8, 93

193

Weinberg, Steve, 244, 297, 303
time travel, ix, xii, xv-xviii, 216-28, 275,

Wells, H. G., xv, 36, 89, 127

277, 281
invisibility and, 16-18, 33, 232, 239
changing the past and, 217-18
parallel universes and, 232-33, 239
future and, 217-19, 225, 291
time travel and, 216, 218-19

Hawking and, xv-xvi, 216,220-22,227

Wheeler, John, 70, 245, 277, 279, 286
paradoxes of, 224-27

When Worlds Collide, 170
as physicists' playground, 220-24

Wigner, Eugene, 243-44

Tsiolkovsky, Konstantin E., 154, 166

Wilczek, Frank, 244

Turing, Alan, 106-8, 123

WMAP satellite, 240, 249, 251, 270, 291

Turing machines, 83-84, 106, 177

Wonderful Visit, The (Wells), 232-33

Twain, Mark, 16, 179,218

World Set Free, The (Wells), xv

2001, 109, 147, 152

World War II, xiv, 36, 107, 244, 272
wormholes, xvii, 249, 268, 291
black holes and, 209-11, 223
uncertainty principle, 30, 55-56, 58,
problems facing, 211-12

109, 122-23, 206, 245, 306n-7n
and speed of light, 203-4, 206,
unidentified flying objects (UFOs),

208-11,214-15, 224

147-52
time travel and, 222-28
universal translators, 81-82
transversable, 211, 224
universe, universes, 248-53
antimatter and, 186, 190-93
baby, 214, 246, 250-53

Yang, C. N., 191

Document Outline

- Cover

- Other books by Michio Kaku

- Physics of the Impossible: A Scientific Exploration into the World of Phasers, Force Fields, Teleportation, and Time Travel

- Publishing

- Dedication

- Table of Contents

- Preface

- Acknowledgements

- Part 1: Class 1 Impossibilities

- Chapter 1: Force Fields
- Chapter 2: Invisibility
- Chapter 3: Phasers & Death Stars
- Chapter 4: Teleportation
- Chapter 5: Telepathy
- Chapter 6: Psychokinesis
- Chapter 7: Robots
- Chapter 8: Extraterrestrials & UFOs
- Chapter 9: Starships
- Chapter 10: Antimatter & Anti-Universes

- Part 2: Class 2 Impossibilities

- Chapter 11: Faster Than Light
- Chapter 12: Time Travel
- Chapter 13: Parallel Universes

- Part 3: Class 3 Impossibilities

- Chapter 14: Perpetual Motion Machines

- Chapter 15: Precognition

- Epilogue
- Notes
- Bibliography
- Index

Table of Contents

- Cover

- Other books by Michio Kaku

- Physics of the Impossible: A Scientific Exploration into the World of Phasers, Force Fields, Telepor

- Publishing
- Dedication
- Table of Contents
- Preface
- Acknowledgements
- Part 1: Class 1 Impossibilities
- Chapter 1: Force Fields
- Chapter 2: Invisibility
- Chapter 3: Phasers & Death Stars
- Chapter 4: Teleportation
- Chapter 5: Telepathy
- Chapter 6: Psychokinesis
- Chapter 7: Robots
- Chapter 8: Extraterrestrials & UFOs
- Chapter 9: Starships
- Chapter 10: Antimatter & Anti-Universes
- Part 2: Class 2 Impossibilities
- Chapter 11: Faster Than Light
- Chapter 12: Time Travel
- Chapter 13: Parallel Universes
- Part 3: Class 3 Impossibilities
- Chapter 14: Perpetual Motion Machines
- Chapter 15: Precognition
- Epilogue
- Notes
- Bibliography
- Index